Owner's Manual

Polo

Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual:
Polo
Stand: 30.11.2022
Englisch: 04.2024
Polo

Artikel-Nr.: 25A.5L1.POL.20
 Owner's Manual
Polo

Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual:
Polo
Stand: 30.11.2022
Englisch: 04.2024
Polo

Artikel-Nr.: 25A.5L1.POL.20
 Thank you for choosing Volkswagen
By purchasing this Volkswagen, you have become the owner of a vehicle fitted with the most up-to-date
technology and a multitude of convenience functions for your use and enjoyment.
Before using your vehicle for the first time, carefully read and observe the information in this Owner's Man-
ual to become familiar with your vehicle and all of its functions, in addition to learning about the potential
dangers to yourself and others and how to avoid them.
If you have any further questions about your vehicle, or if you think that the manual set has not covered
everything, please contact your local Volkswagen Dealership. Volkswagen Dealerships are always happy to
deal with your questions, suggestions or issues.
We hope you have a great driving experience in your new vehicle. Happy motoring.
Volkswagen do Brasil 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Thank you for choosing Volkswagen 1

Table of Contents
About this Owner's Manual 4 Lights
Description of symbols 5 – Turn signals 79
– Driving lights 79
– Interior lighting 85
Owner's Manual Visibility
– Window wipers and washers 86
Overview of the vehicle
– Mirrors 88
– Front view 6
– Sliding headliner 92
– Side view 7
– Rear view 8 Heating and air conditioning
– Driver door 9 – Heating, ventilating, cooling 92
– Driver's side 10
– Centre console 11 Driving
– Front passenger side 12 – Driving guidelines 97
– Symbols in the roof headliner 12 – Starting and stopping the engine 104
– Start-Stop System 108
Driver's information – Manual gearbox 110
– Warning lamps and indicator lamps 13 – Automatic gearbox 111
– Instrument cluster 14 – Uphill assist system 115
– Dash panel insert operation 27 – Steering assistance 116
– Radio controls and display 28 – Driving mode selection 117
Safety Driver assist systems
– Overall guidelines 31 – Cruise control system (GRA) 118
– Adjusting the seat position 32
– Seat belts 34 Parking and manoeuvring
– Airbag system 42 – Parking 120
– Transporting children in the vehicle 49 – Handbrake 121
– In an emergency 58 – Parking systems safety instructions 122
– Park distance control (Park Pilot) 122
Open and close – Rear view camera system 125
– Vehicle key 60 – Brake support systems 127
– Keyless locking and starting system
“Keyless Access” 62 Practical equipment
– Central locking button and doors 63 – Stowage compartment 130
– Anti-theft alarm system 68 – Cup holder 134
– Interior monitoring system 68 – Ashtray and cigarette lighter 135
– Boot lid 69 – Socket 136
– Windows 71 Radios
Steering wheel – Before using the unit for the first time 137
– Adjusting the steering wheel position 73 – Other applicable documents 137
– Convenience overview 137
Seats and head restraints – Safety recommendations 138
– Front seat 74 – Instructions for use 139
– Rear seats 75 – Power management 140
– Head restraints 77 – Anti-theft coding 140
– Seat functions 78 – Display 140

2 Table of Contents
 – Warm starting system (E-FLEX) 226
Composition Touch (R 340G)
– Vehicle battery 226
– Device overview 141
– Basic command information 142 Wheels and tyres
– Connectivity 144 – Tyre monitoring system 231
– Unit operation 147 – Important information on wheels and
– Media mode 150 tyres 233
– Wired or wireless connections 154 – Hub caps 243
– Phone 157 – Changing a wheel 244
– Settings 165
Maintenance
VW Play – Service 249
– Welcome to VW Play 167 – Vehicle conservation 252
– Device overview 167 – Accessories, modifications, repairs and
– Quick access screens 168 part replacement 260
– Radio 168
Consumer information
– Media 169
– Volkswagen warranty 265
– Connect 170
– Additional service offers 265
– App store 171
– Information stickers and plates 266
– Apple CarPlay™ 172
– Aerial and radio feed 267
– Android Auto™ 173
– Installing the radio 267
– Settings 174
– Headphones 267
Transporting – Declarations of conformity 267
– Stowing items of luggage 178
Technical data
– Luggage compartment 178
– Guidelines on the technical data 269
– Roof carrier 182
– Information on fuel consumption 269
– Towing a trailer 184
– Vehicle identification data 270
Fuel – Information on the air conditioner 271
– Fuel handling safety guidelines 189 – Dimensions 272
– Fuelling and fuel types 189 – Capacities 273
– Engine control unit and exhaust gas – Petrol engines 274
emission control system 192 – TOTALFLEX engines 277
– Fuel quality 194
If and when Abbreviations 280
– Vehicle toolkit 194
– Window wiper blades 196 Index 282
– Exterior lighting 197
– Fuses 204
– Jump starting 209
– Tow starting and towing 212
Checking and refuelling
– In the engine compartment 213
– Service fluids and consumables 216
– Washer fluid 217
– Engine oil 218
25A.5L1.POL.20

– Engine coolant 222

– Brake fluid 224

Table of Contents 3
About this Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual is valid for all available models
and versions of this vehicle. The Owner's Manual de-
scribes all of the equipment and models, without
identifying as special equipment or model variations.
Thus, there may be pieces of equipment described
which are not included in your vehicle or which are
only available to specific markets. The equipment
contained in your vehicle is detailed in the product's
sale documentation. Contact your local Volkswagen
Dealership for further information.
All data in this Owner's Manual correspond to the in-
formation available at the time of going to print.
Due to continuous technical improvement of the ve-
hicle, actual vehicle features and equipment may
differ from the indications provided in this manual.
No discrepancy in data, illustrations or descriptions
shall form the basis for any legal claim.
Please ensure that the complete manual set is al-
ways in the vehicle when lending or selling the vehi-
cle.
– An alphabetical index is included at the end of
this manual.
– A list of abbreviations detailing technical terms
and acronyms can be found at the end of the
manual.
– Directions and positions such as left, right, front
and rear are normally relative to the vehicle's di-
rection of travel, unless otherwise indicated.
– Illustrations assist with orientation and should be
regarded as schematic representations.
– Short definitions highlighted before some of the
sections in this manual, summarize the functions
and use of a system or piece of equipment. Fur-
ther information on the systems and equipment,
apart from their features, commands and system
limitations, is found in the respective sections.
– Any technical changes made to the vehicle after
publication of this booklet are provided in a Sup-
plement that is included with the manual set.

Standard booklets in the manual set:

– Owner's Manual
– Service Registry Booklet (for markets without dig-
ital service plan) (may not be available for some
countries)

Additional booklets in the manual set

(optional):
– Supplement 

4 About this Owner's Manual

 Description of symbols
Refers to an excerpt within a chapter that
 contains important information and safety
notes . Such reference must always be
observed.
Indicates that the section is continued on
 the next page.

 Indicates the end of a section.

Indicates situations in which the vehicle

 must be stopped as quickly as possible.
® The symbol indicates a registered trade-
mark. However, the absence of this symbol
does not constitute a waiver of the rights
concerning any term.
→ Symbols of this type reference warnings
→ within the same section or page, indicating
potential risks of accidents and injuries, as
→
well as how they can be avoided.
→ Cross reference to information about possi-
ble damage to your vehicle within the same
section or on a given page.

DANGER
Texts with this symbol indicate extremely danger-
ous situations, which may lead to fatal or severe
injuries if you do not observe the warning.

WARNING
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situa-
tions which will lead to fatal or severe injuries if
you do not observe the warning.

CAUTION
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situa-
tions, which may lead to light or severe injuries if
you do not observe the warning.

NOTICE
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situa-
tions, which may lead to vehicle damages if you do
not observe the warning.

Texts with this symbol are environment pres-

ervation recommendations.
Texts with this symbol contain additional in-
formation. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Description of symbols 5
Overview of the vehicle

Front view

Fig. 2 Front view of the vehicle.

Key for → Fig. 2:

1 Windscreen
– Windscreen wipers............................................................................................................................................ 86
– Rain and light sensor in the region of the interior mirror................................................................ 87
2 Headlights................................................................................................................................................................... 79, 197
3 Front Park Distance Control sensors............................................................................................................... 122
4 Behind the VW logo: radar sensor of assist systems
5 Bonnet release lever.............................................................................................................................................. 215

Bumper cover
Depending on the vehicle version, there may be a
bumper cover that must not be removed. The
cover does not have any purpose in Brazil. 

6 Owner's Manual
 Side view

Fig. 3 Side view of the vehicle.

Key for→ Fig. 3:

1 Roof aerial.................................................................................................................................................................. 265
2 Tank flap...................................................................................................................................................................... 191
3 Exterior door handles............................................................................................................................................ 63
4 Exterior mirrors........................................................................................................................................................ 88
5 Jacking points........................................................................................................................................................... 247 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Overview of the vehicle 7

Rear view

Fig. 4 Rear view of the vehicle.

Key for→ Fig. 4:

1 High-mounted brake light
2 Rear window
– Rear window heating switch......................................................................................................................... 92
– Rear window wiper............................................................................................................................................ 86
3 Tail lights..................................................................................................................................................................... 79, 197
4 Rear number plate lights...................................................................................................................................... 197
5 Rear Park Distance Control sensors................................................................................................................ 122
6 Rearview camera system..................................................................................................................................... 125 

8 Owner's Manual
 Driver door

Fig. 5 Overview of the controls in the driver door.

Key for→ Fig. 5:

1 Region for:
– Setting rotary control for electric exterior mirrors.............................................................................. 88
– Buttons for operating electric windows................................................................................................... 71
2 Interior door handle............................................................................................................................................... 63
3 Central locking button for locking and unlocking the vehicle............................................................. 63
4 Central locking indicator lamp........................................................................................................................... 64
5 Storage compartment........................................................................................................................................... 130 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Overview of the vehicle 9

Driver's side

Fig. 6 Overview of the driver side.

Key for→ Fig. 6:

1 Light switch .............................................................................................................................................................. 79
2 Air vents....................................................................................................................................................................... 92
3 turn signal and main beam lever...................................................................................................................... 79
4 Instrument cluster.................................................................................................................................................. 15
– with warning and indicator lamps.............................................................................................................. 13
5 Lever for window wipers and washers.......................................................................................................... 86
– with buttons to operate the ,  menus.................................................................................. 27
6 Multifunction steering wheel controls:
– Tiptronic paddles................................................................................................................................................ 112
– Audio  
– Cooperate the driver assistance systems , , , ,    or   ................................ 118
– Volume controls  , 
– Operate menu selection
  , , ,  (depending on vehicle version without function)........................................... 28
– Voice command activation  (no function)
– Access the phone menu or answer a phone call  (depending on the vehicle and radio
version, this key has no function or phone calls can only be answered via the radio)
7 Horn (works only when the ignition is switched on)
8 Ignition lock............................................................................................................................................................... 104
9 Pedals........................................................................................................................................................................... 97
10 Driver front airbag installation location........................................................................................................ 46 

10 Owner's Manual
 11 Steering column adjustment lever................................................................................................................... 73
12 Fuse box access cover........................................................................................................................................... 204
13 Bonnet release lever.............................................................................................................................................. 215
14 Headlight range control switch......................................................................................................................... 84 

Centre console

Fig. 7 Overview of the upper section of the centre Fig. 8 Overview of the lower section of the centre
console. console.

Key for→ Fig. 7:

1 Radio system............................................................................................................................................................. 137
2 Front passenger front airbag deactivated indicator lamp  ........................................................ 43
3 Hazard warning lights button ....................................................................................................................... 58
4 Air vents....................................................................................................................................................................... 92
– According to the version of the vehicle, there may exist air vents for the rear seat pas-
sengers.
5 Climatronic or air conditioning operating controls.................................................................................. 92

Key for→ Fig. 8:

1 Lever for:
– Manual gearbox................................................................................................................................................... 110
– Automatic gearbox............................................................................................................................................ 111
2 Card holder................................................................................................................................................................. 130
3 12-volt socket........................................................................................................................................................... 136
4 Stowage compartment with drink holder on the centre console...................................................... 134
25A.5L1.POL.20

5 Handbrake lever....................................................................................................................................................... 121

6 Engine starter button (Press & Drive)............................................................................................................. 104 

Overview of the vehicle 11

7 Depending on the vehicle’s version, button for:
– Start-Stop system.............................................................................................................................................. 108
– driving mode selection.................................................................................................................................... 117
– park distance control  ................................................................................................................................. 122
– boot lid opening .......................................................................................................................................... 69
8 Storage compartment
– with QI wireless charging function............................................................................................................. 131 

Front passenger side

Fig. 9 Overview of the front passenger side.

Key for→ Fig. 9:

1 Location of front passenger front airbag in the dashboard.................................................................. 42
2 Air vents....................................................................................................................................................................... 92
3 Key-operated switch to turn off the front passenger front airbag (if equipped)........................ 47
4 Opening lever for the stowage compartment............................................................................................ 130 

Symbols in the roof headliner

Symbol Definition


, Interior and reading lights switch buttons → page 79.

, ,  

12 Owner's Manual
 Driver's information Symbol Meaning →
Fault in the alternator.
 → page 226
Warning lamps and indicator Central warning lamp. Observe the
lamps  additional information displayed
on the instrument cluster.
Warning and indicator lamps indicate a number Lit: ESC damaged or switched off
of warnings → , faults → or other specific by the system.
functions. Some warning and indicator lamps → page 127
light up when the ignition is switched on and  Flashing: ESC or TCS enabled and
should go out once the engine is running or the running.
vehicle is in motion. → page 127
Depending on the version, additional text mes- Traction control (TCS) manually
sages could appear in the display on the instru-
ment cluster to provide further information or to
 disabled.
→ page 127
ask you to perform certain tasks → page 14. ABS faulty or not functioning.
Depending on the vehicle equipment level, sym-  → page 127
bols may be displayed in the instrument cluster Driving illumination partially or to-
instead of warning lamps.
 tally out of order.
→ page 197
Sound signals can also be heard when certain
warning or indicator lamps light up. Fault in pollutant emission control

Symbol Meaning →
 system.
→ page 192
Central warning lamp. Observe the Cold start system heating (TOTAL-
 additional information displayed
on the instrument cluster.
 FLEX engine).
→ page 226
 Stop driving! Fault in electronic engine output
 Parking brake engaged.
→ page 121
 control.
→ page 192
 Stop driving! Reduced electromechanical steer-


Brake fluid level too low or faulty
brake system.
 ing.
→ page 116
→ page 224 Tyre pressure to low or damaged
 Stop driving!
Coolant temperature too high or
 tyre pressure control system.
→ page 231
 engine coolant level too low. Fuel tank almost empty.
→ page 222  → page 18
 Stop driving! On: Engine oil level very low.
 Engine oil pressure too low.
→ page 218
→ page 218
 Flashing: engine oil system dam-
aged.
Flashing:  Stop driving! Steering
damaged. → page 218
→ page 116 Fault in front belt tensioner system
 On: electromechanical steering not  or airbag.
working. → page 42
→ page 116 Manual gearbox: excessive clutch
Driver or front passenger seat belt  temperature or damaged clutch.
25A.5L1.POL.20

→ page 110
 not fastened.
→ page 34


Driver's information 13
Symbol Meaning → Symbol Meaning →
Automatic gearbox: damage in the Cruise control system (GRA) dam-
automatic gearbox.
→ page 111
 aged.
→ page 118
Left or right turn signals. Instructions regarding vehicle wal-
→ page 79  let information.
Hazard warning lights switched on.
 → page 58 WARNING
Emergency brake activation lights. Failure to observe the warning lamps could
→ page 58 lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic,
On: Step on the brake pedal! (start and to accidents and serious injuries.
the engine). ● Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
→ page 111 sages that appear.
 Flashing: the interlock button of ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and
the selector lever is not engaged. when safe to do so.
→ page 114 ● Stop the vehicle at a safe distance away from
Cruise control system (GRA) on. moving traffic and ensure that no part of the
 → page 118 exhaust system can come into contact with
Main beam is switched on or the any inflammable material underneath the
vehicle, e.g. dry grass, fuel or oil, etc.
 headlight flasher is being operated.
→ page 79 ● Broken-down vehicles lacking due signalling
Manual gearbox: the clutch does increase the risk of accidents both for you
not transmit the total torque of the and for other road users. Always switch on
 engine. the hazard warning lights and set up the
→ page 110 warning triangle to warn other road users.
Start-Stop system enabled. ● Before opening the engine compartment
 → page 108 cover, switch off the engine and allow it to
Start-Stop system not available. cool down sufficiently.
 → page 108 ● The engine compartment of any motor vehi-
Eco driving mode. cle is a dangerous area and may cause severe
 → page 117 injuries → page 213, Safety guidelines for
work in the engine compartment.
Normal driving mode.
 → page 117
NOTICE
Sport driving mode.
 → page 117
Failure to observe the illuminated indicator
lamps could lead to vehicle damages. 
Individual driving mode.
 → page 117
Service reminder or service about
 to become due.
→ page 26 Instrument cluster
Charge status of the connected
mobile phone battery.
 Introduction
 Only when activated by the facto-
ry-fitted mobile phone interface
→ page 137. According to it's version, the vehicle may be
Outside temperature below +4° C. equipped with a analogue or digital instrument
 → page 20 cluster (Active Info Display) version 1 or version
Cruise control system on. 2. 
 → page 118

14 Owner's Manual
 After starting the engine with the vehicle's bat- ● Never operate the instrument cluster's but-
tery completely flat, or with a replacement bat- tons while the vehicle is in motion.
tery in the vehicle, the system's configuration
● To prevent the risk of accidents and injuries
(time, date, comfort and programming configura-
proceed with all the settings of the indica-
tions) may have been deleted or become corrup-
tors of the instrument cluster's display and
ted. Check and adjust the settings after the vehi-
those of the radio system's display only
cle battery has been sufficiently recharged.
when the vehicle is stopped. 
WARNING
Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is
distracted.

Analogue instrument cluster

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 15.

Fig. 10 Analogue instrument cluster.

Some of the controls and functions depicted are 4 Reset button or to display the (trip) recorder.
specific to certain models/versions or are option- – Press the  button for about 2 seconds
al. to reset the trip recorder.
5 Speedometer (speed indicator).
Explanations to the instruments → Fig. 10:
1 Rev. counter (running engine speed in revo- NOTICE
lutions x 1.000 per minute) → page 18.
Some segments may remain lit after switching
2 Clock setting knob1)  → page 25.
on the ignition, with no effect on its operation. 
3 Display indicators → page 20.
– Fuel level display → page 18.
25A.5L1.POL.20

1) According to the vehicle's version, the clock can also be set through the configurations menu of the radio display.

Driver's information 15
Digital instrument cluster (Active Info Display) - version 1
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 15.

Fig. 11 Active Info Display (version 1) on the dash panel.

Information profiles
The Active Info Display is a digital instru- Depending on the vehicle version, the radio may
ment cluster with a high resolution colour not be available.
TFT display. Through the selection of dif-
According to the radio version and theselected
ferent information profiles other round
information profile, additional information is
classic instruments can be displayed, such
shown at the centre of the round instruments
as rev counter or speedometer. → Fig. 11 3 of the Active Info Display.
Variant 1 - different topic-specific information
According to the vehicle version, the digital in- profiles can be selected by way of the radio but-
strument cluster and the trip data display func- ton  , on the function selection pad  , select
tions may not be available. Active Info Display . The following information pro-
files can be selected:
Explanations to the instruments → Fig. 11:
– Classic: without additional displays.
1 Engine temperature indication 
– Consumption & Fuel range: digital display of
→ page 19.
average consumption and graphic display of
2 Rev. counter (running engine speed in revo- the current fuel consumption in the centre of
lutions x 1.000 per minute) → page 18. the rev counter. Digital fuel range display in
3 Information profile indicator. The displayed the centre of the speedometer.
content varies according to the selected in- – Efficiency: digital display of average consump-
formation profile. tion and graphic display of the current fuel
4 Display indicators → page 20. consumption in the centre of the rev counter.
5 Speedometer (speed indicator). – Driver assist system: graphic representation of
6 Fuel gauge → page 18. different driver assist systems or digital travel
time display in the centre of the rev counter.
7 Digital speed display.
Arrow navigation or compass display in the
8 Currently engaged gear or selector lever po- centre of the speedometer. 
sition → page 111.

16 Owner's Manual
 Digital instrument cluster (Active Info Display) - version 2
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 15.

Fig. 12 Active Info Display (version 2) on the dash panel.

– Summary: after completing the readiness

The Active Info Display is a digital instru- check: displays information on vehicle status
ment cluster with a high resolution colour in areas 1 , such as current mileage.
TFT display. Additional content may be – Digital view: digital speedometer with infor-
displayed by selecting different profiles mation profiles.
and indicators. – Speed: classic speedometer representation as
a round gauge.
Depending on the vehicle version and country, – Rev. counter: classic rev. counter representa-
the digital instrument cluster and the trip data tion as a round gauge.
display functions may not be available.
Information profiles
Explanations to the instruments → Fig. 12: The information profiles 1 can be configured or
1 Information profile indicator. hidden separately from each other. Multiple data
can be displayed on driving, navigation warnings
2 Time and temperature.
or information regarding audio playback or the
3 Main display area. phone interface.
4 Currently engaged gear or selector lever po-
Selecting driving profiles:
sition.
– In the multifunction steering wheel, press 
5 Driver assistance enabled..
or  to select the right or left information
6 Range. profile area.
– Use the arrow buttons  or  to select the
Main indicator desired information profile.
Depending on the vehicle version, the informa-
– Press  to confirm the selection.
tion available in the cluster may not be available.
Selecting driving profiles in the round gauge:
The main display → Fig. 12 3 can be switched by
pressing View on the multifunction steering – To select a driving profile in the main display
wheel. The representation in the display area can 3 with view adjusted to round gauge, pro-
show the following views: ceed as follows:
– Use the arrow buttons  or  to select the
25A.5L1.POL.20

desired information profile.

– Press  to confirm the selection. 

Driver's information 17
 Depending on the vehicle and radio version,
to make a phone call and if the first position
in the calls list is not accessible, use the arrow
buttons  or  to navigate and the button 
to make the call. 

Tachometer (Rev counter)

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 15.

The tachometer may differ depending on the ve-

hicle version or may not be available.
The start of the red zone on the rev counter indi-
cates the maximum engine speed of a run and
warm engine for each selected gear. Change to
the next higher gear, position the selector lever
to D/S or relieve the accelerator pedal before the
needle reaches the red zone → .

NOTICE
● While the engine is cool, avoid high rotations,
total acceleration and increased engine load.
● To avoid engine damages, the rev. counter
needle must not remain in the red area of the
scale for more than a short period of time.

Switching to higher gears in advance helps

save fuel and reduce operating noises. 
Fig. 14 In the digital instrument cluster: fuel gauge.

The fuel gauge may vary depending on the vehi-

Fuel gauge cle model → Fig. 13 or → Fig. 14.

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter  Fuel tank almost empty
on page 15. The yellow indicator lamp must light up. The re-
serve fuel (red mark) will be consumed → .
– Fill the tank as soon as possible → .
When switching the ignition on, certain warning
and indicator lamps flash to check functions.
Such lamps go out after a few seconds.

WARNING
Fig. 13 In the analogue instrument cluster: fuel
Driving the vehicle when the fuel level is too
gauge. low could lead to your vehicle breaking down in
traffic, accidents and serious injuries.
● When the fuel level is too low, the fuel sup-
ply to the engine could be irregular, especial-
ly when driving up or down hills and inclines. 

18 Owner's Manual
 ● The steering, all driver assist systems and
brake assist systems will not function if the
engine stops due to a lack of fuel or irregular
fuel supply.
● Always fill the tank when it is still 1/4 full.
This reduces the risk of running out of fuel
and breaking down.

NOTICE
Do not run the tank completely empty. Irregular
filling periods can cause backfiring and allow un- Fig. 16 Engine coolant temperature indicator in the
burnt fuel to enter the exhaust system. This digital instrument cluster (version 2): A cold zone;
could damage the catalytic converter! B normal zone; C warning zone.

The small arrow next to the fuel pump sym- The engine coolant temperature gauge may dif-
bol → Fig. 13 or → Fig. 14 in the display in- fer depending on the vehicle version or may not
strument indicates the side of the vehicle on be available.
which the tank flap is located. 
A Cold zone. The engine has not yet reached its
operating temperature. Avoid engine over-
loading and high rotation while the engine is
Engine coolant temperature cooled.
indicator B Normal zone.
C Warning zone. Coolant temperature too
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter high.
on page 15.
 and  Engine coolant
The red centre warning lamp is on. In addition a
text message is displayed on the instrument
cluster display.
The engine coolant level is not correct or the
coolant system is faulty.

 Engine coolant
For vehicles with an analogue combined instru-
ment panel, the control light flashes red.
The engine coolant level is not correct or the
coolant system is faulty.

Fig. 15 Engine coolant temperature indicator in the  and  Engine coolant

digital instrument cluster (version 1): A cold zone; The red centre warning lamp is on. In addition a
B normal zone; C warning zone. text message is displayed on the instrument
cluster display.
The engine coolant level is not correct or the
coolant system is faulty. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Driver's information 19
Stop driving! – Vehicles with analogue instrument cluster:
– Stop the vehicle, turn the engine off and let it briefly press the  button on the instru-
cool down. ment cluster → page 15 to reset the trip re-
corder to 0.
– Check coolant level, if the level is low, refill
with engine coolant → page 223. – Vehicles with a digital instrument cluster: use
the arrows on the multifunction steering
– If the warning lamp remains lit despite the
wheel  or  , go to Trip data menu, select the
coolant level being correct, then there is a
trip indicator and briefly press the  button on
fault in the system. Contact a Volkswagen
the multifunction steering wheel.
Dealership. 
Exterior temperature indicator
Whenever the exterior temperature is below
Display indicators - analogue and +4°C, a “snowflake symbol”  appears on the ex-
digital (version 1) terior temperature indicator (ice on the road).
This symbol remains lit until the outside temper-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter ature rises above +6 °C → .
on page 15. If the vehicle is parked or moving at a very low
speed, the indicated temperature may be slightly
On the dash panel insert display several different higher than the actual exterior temperature, due
pieces of information may be displayed according to the heat generated by the engine.
to the version of the vehicle:
The measurement range is -40°C to +50°C.
– Doors, bonnet and boot lid open
Selector lever positions (automatic gearbox)
– Warning and information displays → page 23
The gear selected is displayed on the side of the
– Distance displays
selector lever and on the display in the instru-
– Time ment cluster. With the selector lever in D/S posi-
– Exterior temperature tion as well as with Tiptronic, the respective se-
– Selector lever positions (automatic gearbox) lected gear may be indicated, if the case, on the
→ page 111 instrument cluster → page 111.
– Gear recommendation → page 98 Gear-change indicator
– Driving data indicator (multifunction display) Depending on the vehicle version, a gear selec-
and menus for several settings → page 27 tion recommendation may be indicated on the
– Service interval display → page 26 instrument cluster display to optimize fuel sav-
– Start-Stop system status indicator → page 108 ings → page 98.
– Engine code Radio
Doors, bonnet and boot lid open In some versions, certain radio functions are indi-
cated on the instrument cluster display only
After unlocking the vehicle and during driving, while the vehicle is running.
the open doors as well as an open bonnet or an
open boot lid are indicated on the display of the Engine code
instrument cluster as well as announced by
sound alarms. The screen may vary according to Vehicles with analogue instrument cluster.
the version of the fitted instrument cluster. – Turn the ignition on without starting the en-
gine.
Distance displays – Press and hold the  button on the instru-
The odometer records the total distance travelled ment cluster pressed for about fifteen seconds
by the car. for the engine identification letters to be dis-
The trip recorder (trip) shows the distance travel- played. 
led since the trip recorder was last reset. The last
digit stands for 100 m.

20 Owner's Manual
 Vehicles with digital instrument cluster. – Engine oil temperature
– Turn the ignition on without starting the en- – Phone guidance
gine.
Doors, bonnet and boot lid open
– On the instrument cluster Trip data menu, select
the Fuel range display. After unlocking the vehicle and during driving,
the open doors as well as an open bonnet or an
– Hold the OK button on the multifunction
open boot lid are indicated on the display of the
steering wheel pressed for about five seconds,
instrument cluster as well as announced by
upon release, the Services menu will be dis-
sound alarms. The screen may vary according to
played → page 25.
the version of the fitted instrument cluster.
– Go to the Engine code menu item.
Automatic gearbox selector lever positions
WARNING The gear selected is displayed on the side of the
There may be ice layers on roads and bridges selector lever and on the display in the instru-
even if the exterior temperature is above freez- ment cluster. The gearshift pattern is shown
ing temperature. when pressing the brakes or the selector lever on
● There may be ice layers on roads even if the the instrument cluster → page 111.
exterior temperature is above +4°C and the
Exterior temperature indicator
“snowflake symbol” is not indicated on the
display. Whenever the exterior temperature is below
+4°C, a “snowflake symbol”  appears on the ex-
● Never consider only the exterior temperature
terior temperature indicator (ice on the road).
indicator!  This symbol remains lit until the outside temper-
ature rises above +6 °C → .
If the vehicle is parked or moving at a very low
Display indicators - digital (version speed, the indicated temperature may be slightly
2) higher than the actual exterior temperature, due
to the heat generated by the engine.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter The measurement range is -45 °C to +76 °C.
on page 15.
Gear-change indicator
On the dash panel insert display several different Depending on the vehicle version, a gear selec-
pieces of information may be displayed according tion recommendation may be indicated on the
to the version of the vehicle: instrument cluster display to optimize fuel sav-
– Doors, bonnet and boot lid open ings → page 98.
– Warning and information displays → page 23 Fuel saving driving status 
– digital While driving, the instrument cluster display
– Date and Time shows the vehicle's fuel saving driving status .
– Radio displays
Engine code
– Exterior temperature
– Open the Service → page 25 menu.
– Selector lever positions (automatic gearbox)
→ page 111
– Go to the Engine code menu item.

– Gear recommendation → page 98 Radiator fan return display

– Service interval display → page 26 This display is shown after completing the driv-
– Low-power driving status ing readiness check and if the radiator fan is in
– Engine code return. 

– Driver assist system display

25A.5L1.POL.20

– Cooling fan return display

– Driving data indicator (multifunction display)
and menus for several settings → page 27

Driver's information 21
Subsequent radiator fan operation time may be Memory “As of fuelling up”
conditioned by: Display and storage of the collected driving and
– Active brake cooling after downhill driving. consumption data. The memory is deleted after
– Engine heat dissipation after high load (e.g. fuelling up and the vehicle starts moving.
towing a trailer).
“Long-term” Memory
WARNING The memory collects the driving data for up to 19
hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 mi-
There may be ice layers on roads and bridges nutes of travel time or 1999.9 km or 9999.9 km
even if the exterior temperature is above freez- of driven distance. When one of these maximum
ing temperature. marks1) is surpassed, the memory is deleted.
● There may be ice layers on roads even if the
exterior temperature is above +4°C and the Manually deleting the travel data memory
“snowflake symbol” is not indicated on the – Select the memory that you wish to delete.
display.
– Press and hold  in the window wiper lev-
● Never consider only the exterior temperature er or  in the multifunction steering wheel
indicator!  for approximately two seconds.

Selecting indicators
According to the vehicle and radio version, the
Travel data display (multifunction possible trip data indicators to be displayed on
display) the instrument cluster can be set in the radio
system by way of the  button OR through the
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter settings button  . Simply touch the function
on page 15. button Car → page 28.

The travel data indicator (multifunction display) Indicator “Fuel range”

displays the several different driving and con- The estimated distance in km that may be travel-
sumption data and is equipped with 3 memories. led with the amount of fuel in the tank, under the
current driving style.
Switching between displays
– Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: “Average consumption” Indicator
press the  switch on the windscreen wiper The average consumption in km/l is shown after
lever → page 27. a distance of 300 meters, after switching on the
– Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: ignition. The display will show dashes up to this
press the  or  button → page 28. point. Displayed values are updated every 5 sec-
onds.
Toggle between the memories
With the ignition turned on and the memory dis- “Consumption” Indicator
played, press the  button on the wiper lev- The current fuel consumption is displayed in km/l
er or the  button on the multifunction steering when the vehicle is motion with running engine.
wheel. The current value is calculated in 30 meter inter-
vals and updated approximately every second.
Memory “As of travel start”
Display and storage of the driving and consump- “Oil temperature” Indicator
tion data collected from turning the ignition on The engine oil temperature display may not be
to turning it off. When driving is interrupted for available on the instrument cluster display ac-
over 2 hours, the memory is automatically de- cording to the vehicle version.
leted after resuming driving. Current engine oil temperature as digital indica-
tor. 

1) According to the instrument cluster version.

22 Owner's Manual
 “Warning at --- km/h” Indicator (→ page 13), and, if required, also by acoustic
For analogue instrument cluster: alarms. The display of the icons and texts may
vary according to the fitted instrument cluster.
If the set speed (within the range of 30 km/h (18
mph) and 150 km/h (93 mph)) is exceeded, Existing functional faults can also be accessed
acoustic and visual warnings will be given. manually. To do so, access the Vehicle status menu
→ page 27.
Digital speed indicator
Current vehicle speed displayed digitally. Priority 1 warning message
The red central warning lamp blinks or is on -
“Average speed” Indicator partly in association with warning buzzers or ad-
The average speed will be shown after a distance ditional symbols.  Stop driving! Dangerous sit-
of 300 meters travelled since the ignition was uation. Check the damaged function and elimi-
switched on. The display will show dashes up to nate its cause. Seek assistance from a
this point. Displayed values are updated every 5 Volkswagen Dealership, if necessary.
seconds.
Priority 2 warning message
“Distance covered” Indicator The yellow central warning lamp blinks or is on -
Distance travelled in km since the ignition was partly in association with warning buzzers or ad-
switched on. ditional symbols. Faulty functions or lack of fluids
may damage or interrupt vehicle operation.
“Travel time” Indicator Check the faulty function as soon as possible.
Travel time in hours (h) and minutes (min) Seek assistance from a Volkswagen Dealership, if
elapsed since the ignition was switched on. necessary.

Saving a speed alarm speed  Guidance on information in the owner's

manual
For analogue instrument cluster:
Further guidance on the current warning mes-
– Warning at --- km/h indicator selection. sage can be found in the owner´s manual.
– Press the  button on the wiper lever or
the  button on the multifunction steering Information text.
wheel to save the current speed and to acti- Information about various procedures within the
vate the warning. vehicle.
– Set the desired speed within 5 seconds using
According to the version some adjustments
the  button on the wiper lever or the 
and displays may be made/seen on the ra-
or  buttons on the multifunction steering
dio system.
wheel. Press the  or  button again or
wait a few seconds. The speed is saved and the When there are several warnings, the icons
warning activated. will be displayed in sequence a few seconds
– To deactivate, press the  or the  but- each. The symbols will appear until the faults are
ton again. The saved speed is deleted.  rectified. 

Warning and information texts

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 15.

The system runs a check on certain components

and functions in the vehicle when the ignition is
25A.5L1.POL.20

switched on or while the vehicle is in motion.

Function faults are indicated by red and yellow
warning symbols with warning and information
text messages on the instrument cluster display

Driver's information 23
Driver alert system (interval Turning on and off
Depending on the vehicle and radio version, the
recommendation)
Driver Alert System can be activated or deactiva-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter ted through the radio system with the button 
on page 15. OR by through the settings button  . Simply
touch the function button Car → page 28.

Operating limitations
The alertness detection system has system limi-
tations. The following conditions may cause the
alertness detection system to operate only in a
limited way or not to operate altogether:
– Speeds below 60 km/h.
– Speeds above 200 km/h.
Fig. 17 On the instrument cluster display: driver
alert system icon. – Curvy stretches.
– Roads in poor condition.
The driver alert system warns the driver – Unfavourable climate conditions.
when his driving attitude indicates tired- – When the driver is too inattentive.
ness. Under the following conditions the driver alert
system gets reset:
Depending on the vehicle version, the driver alert – Ignition is turned off.
system indicator may not be available.
– Driver's safety belt is loose and the driver door
Function and operation is open.
The driver alert system warns the driver when his – The vehicle is standing still for over 15 mi-
driving attitude indicates tiredness. nutes.

The driver alert system senses the driving behav- When driving over a longer period at low speed
iour at the beginning of a trip and from this de- (less than 60 km/h), the assessment is automati-
rives possible weariness indications. This is con- cally reset by the system. When driving faster
stantly compared to the actual driving behaviour. later on, the driving behaviour is recalculated.
Should the system detect signs of fatigue of the
driver, it sounds a “gong” alarm and displays a WARNING
visual warning with an icon → Fig. 17 on the dis- The intelligent alertness detection technology
play of the instrument cluster together with a is not able to overcome physical limitations and
supplementary text message. The text message operates only within the limitations of the sys-
on the instrument cluster display is displayed for tem. The higher level of convenience provided
about 5 seconds and, if necessary, is repeated by the alertness detection system should not
once. The last message is saved by the system. encourage the driver to take risks. When driv-
The message on the instrument cluster display ing over longer distances take regular and long
can be turned off by pressing the  button enough breaks.
on the wipers lever or the  button on the mul- ● The driver is ultimately always responsible
tifunction steering wheel → page 27. The mes- for his driving capacity.
sage on the instrument cluster display may be ● Never drive a vehicle when tired.
accessed again through the multifunction indica-
● The system does not recognize a low level of
tor → page 23.
alertness under all circumstances. Observe
Operating conditions the information provided in section “Opera-
tional limitations” → page 24. 
Driving behaviour is only assessed at speeds be-
tween 60km/h and approximately 200km/h.

24 Owner's Manual
 ● In some situations the system may incorrect- – Briefly press  to set the minutes. Num-
ly interpret an intentional driving manoeuvre bers are displayed in ascending order. Keep the
for lack of alertness from the driver and an  button pressed to run fast forward.

indication for weariness. – Press the  button again to conclude the
● No critical alarm is sounded for the so called clock setting.
“microsleep (napping at the steering wheel)”
episodes! Time setting by way of the digital instrument
cluster (Active Info Display)
● Pay attention to the indications on the in-
strument cluster display and follow the cor- – On the menu Trip data, select the Range display.
responding instructions. – Keep the OK button on the multifunction
steering wheel pressed for about five seconds,
The alertness detection system was solely upon release, the services menu will be dis-
developed for driving on highways and well played on the digital instrument cluster display
paved roads. → page 25.

In case of malfunction, seek assistance from – Select the Time menu.

a Volkswagen Dealership.  – Set the time with the arrow buttons  or  . 

Time Services Menu

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 15. on page 15.

Time setting by way of the radio system Depending on the vehicle version, settings may
Depends on the radio and vehicle version. be configured using the Service menu of the digi-
tal instrument cluster (Active Info Display).
– Press the radio  button.
– Touch the function button  to open the Vehi- Open the Service menu in the digital
cle Settings menu. instrument cluster (version 1)
– Select the menu item Date and time to set the On the Journey data menu of the instrument clus-
time → page 28. ter select the Range indicator and keep the OK
– OR button on the multifunction steering wheel
pressed for about five seconds, upon release the
– Press the settings button.
Service menu is displayed. Browse through the
– Touch the Car function button to open the menu using the multifunction steering wheel
menu. buttons.
– Select the menu item Date and time to set the
time → page 28. Open the Service menu in the digital
instrument cluster (version 2)
Time setting by way of the analogue Access the Travel type/trip information profile. On
instrument cluster the Travel type/trip, press and hold  or  on the
– Switch on the ignition. multifunction steering wheel in the same direc-
– To adjust the clock, press the  button on tion for 6 seconds. Browse through the menu us-
the instrument cluster → page 15 to select the ing the arrow buttons  and  .
hour indicator.
Reset the service interval display
– Briefly press button  to set the hour. Select the Service menu and follow the instruc-
Numbers are displayed in ascending order. tions on the digital instrument cluster display. 
Keep the  button pressed to run fast for-
ward.
25A.5L1.POL.20

– Briefly press the  button to select the mi-

nutes indicator.

Driver's information 25
Reset the oil change service The service interval indicators show on the in-
Select the Reset oil service menu and follow the in- strument cluster display → Fig. 18 or on the radio
structions on the digital instrument cluster dis- system display.
play. There being different instrument cluster and ra-
dio system versions available, display indications
Reset the inspection service may vary.
Select the Reset inspection menu and follow the in-
structions on the digital instrument cluster dis- Service warning
play. When a service is becoming due, a service warn-
ing is displayed when turning the ignition on.
Reset the trip recorder
The mileage or specified interval time correspond
To reset the trip recorder, select the Reset trip
to the mileage or interval until the next service.
menu and follow the instructions on the digital
instrument cluster display. Service reminder
Engine code When a service is about to become due a warn-
ing is sounded and, for a brief instant, the
Select the Engine code menu. The engine code is
wrench icon  may be displayed on the instru-
displayed on the digital instrument cluster dis-
ment cluster display along with other exhibits
play.
→ Fig. 18.
Set the time
Access the service deadline
Select the Time menu and set the correct time
With the ignition turned on and the vehicle sta-
with the arrow buttons  or  .
tionary, it is possible to access the current service
Copyrights deadline.
Select the Copyright menu to access copyright in- Service deadline access via the radio system, de-
formation.  pends on the vehicle and radio versions.
– Press the radio  button.
– Touch the function button  to open the Vehi-
Service interval display cle Settings menu.
– Select the Service item on the menu to display
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter the service information.
on page 15. – OR
– Press the settings button.

– Touch the Car function button to open the

menu.
– Select the Service settings item on the menu to
view service information.
Vehicles with analogue instrument cluster.
– Press and hold the  button on the instru-
ment cluster pressed until the word Service ap-
pears on the display.
– Release the button and wait for approximately
two seconds or press the  button. The
current service interval is displayed.

Fig. 18 On the instrument cluster display: indica- Vehicles with Digital instrument cluster (Active
tion example of a service event soon to become due Info Display).
(schematic representation). – The interval can be consulted via the Services
menu → page 25. 

26 Owner's Manual
 Resetting the service interval display Dash panel insert menus
If the service was not performed by a
Volkswagen Dealership, the instrument cluster  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
display can be reset as follows: on page 27.
Vehicles with analogue instrument cluster.
The scope of the menus and information indica-
– Switch off the ignition.
tors depends on the electronic components ship-
– On the instrument cluster, press and hold the ped with the vehicle and vehicle version scope.
 button.
Some menu options can only be called up when
– Turn the ignition on again. the vehicle is stationary.
– Release the  button.
Travel data → page 22
– Confirm the request to restart the service on
Audio → page 137
the instruments panel with the  button.
Phone → page 137
Vehicles with Digital instrument cluster (Active
Info Display). Vehicle status → page 27 
– The service interval display can only be reset
via the Service menu → page 25.
Do not reset the display between service inter-
Operation by way of the windshield
vals. This may result in incorrect displays. wiper lever
The service message disappears after a few  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
seconds with the engine running or after on page 27.
pressing the  or  button on the instru-
ment cluster, or the OK button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel. 

Dash panel insert operation

 Introduction

Some menu options can only be called up when Fig. 19 Vehicles without multifunction steering
the vehicle is stationary. wheel: press button 1 on the windows wiper lever
to confirm the menu items and the rocker switch 2
In vehicles equipped with multifunction steering to switch among the menus.
wheels, the window wiper lever buttons are ab-
sent. In these cases, the multifunction display is While a priority 1 warning message is displayed,
operated exclusively through the multifunction it is not possible to call up any menu. All warning
steering wheel buttons. messages automatically disappear after a few
seconds. In addition, certain warning messages
WARNING can be confirmed and hidden with the 
button.
Drivers distracted while driving could lead to
accidents and injuries. Menu or information screen selection
● Never access the instrument cluster menus – Switch on the ignition.
while the vehicle is in motion. 
– If a message or the vehicle pictogram is
shown, press the → Fig. 19 1 button, if nec-
25A.5L1.POL.20

essary, press several times. 

Driver's information 27
– To display the menus → page 27 or to return to seconds. In addition, some warning messages
the menu selection from a menu or from an in- can be confirmed and hidden using the OK but-
formation display, just keep the selector ton on the multifunction steering wheel.
→ Fig. 19 2 pressed.
Menu or information screen selection
– Press the selector up or down to scroll through
the menu. – Switch on the ignition.
– To access the menu or the displayed informa- – When a message or the vehicle pictogram is
tion, press the → Fig. 19 1 button and wait a displayed, press the OK → Fig. 20 button, case
few seconds for the menu or the information required press several times.
display to open automatically. – To display and navigate the menu press the 
or  → Fig. 20 button.
Changing the menu settings
– To access the menu or the information display
– In the menu, press the → Fig. 19 2 selector screen, press the OK → Fig. 20 button or wait
up or downward until the desired menu item is a few seconds for the menu or the information
selected. screen to open on its own.
– Press the → Fig. 19 1 button to confirm the
selected change. A “tick-off sign” indicates Changing the menu settings
that the function or system is enabled. – On the displayed menu use the arrow buttons
 or  → Fig. 20 to select the desired item.
Returning to the main menu
– Press OK → Fig. 20 to confirm the selected
To exit the menu, select the Return item on the change. A “tick-off sign” indicates that the
menu.  function or system is enabled.

Returning to the main menu

Operation by way of the Press the  button or select Return menu item.
multifunction steering wheel For vehicles without a radio, the controls
for the multifunction steering wheel are de-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter activated. If an original Volkswagen radio is sub-
on page 27. sequently installed at a Volkswagen Dealership, it
is possible to activate the controls on the multi-
function steering wheel. 

Radio controls and display

 Introduction

The radio concentrates important vehicle

systems in a central control unit, such as
the configurations menu or the radio
Fig. 20 Right hand side of the multifunction steer-
ing wheel: menu operation and instrument cluster function. 
information exhibit buttons.

Depending on the version and model of your ve-

hicle, the multifunction steering wheel may vary.
While a priority 1 warning message is displayed,
it is not possible to call up any menu. All warning
messages automatically disappear after a few

28 Owner's Manual
 Basic command information WARNING
The text below contains relevant information for
Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is
the configuration of the Vehicle settings menu. The
distracted. Operation of the radio system may
basic radio system control information as well as
distract from the surrounding traffic happen-
the safety and warning displays to be followed
ings.
are described → page 137.
● Always drive carefully and responsibly.
System settings and vehicle information
display - radio variant 1 After starting the engine with the vehicle's
12 V battery completely flat, or with a re-
Depends on the radio and vehicle version.
placement battery in the vehicle, the system's
After pressing the radio system  button, the configuration (time, date, convenience and pro-
information can be displayed or settings can be gramming configurations) may have been de-
adjusted touching the respective touch pad func- leted or become corrupted. Check and adjust the
tion. For example, by touching the selection settings after the 12 V vehicle battery has been
function button  on the Vehicle status menu, it is sufficiently recharged. 
possible to check on the actual status of systems
or system failures to be shown.
– Vehicle settings → page 29. Menu Vehicle settings
– Active media.
– Trip data.  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 29.
– Vehicle status.
– Convenience item.
– Radio station selection. In the Infotainment system vehicle set-
tings, you can switch individual functions
System settings and vehicle information and systems on and off as well as carry
display - radio variant 2 out settings.
Depends on the radio and vehicle version.
It is possible to display information or adjust set- Accessing the Vehicle settings menu
tings on the radio display by pressing the button – Switch on the ignition.
 and by touching the respective function sur-
faces: – Case required turn the radio system on.
– Press  .
– Vehicle settings → page 29.
– Touch the function button  to open the Vehi-
– Active media. cle Settings menu.
– Convenience item. – Touch the respective function buttons on the
– Radio station selection. Vehicle settings menu to access other menus or
Depending on the vehicle version, some informa- to configure the menu items. OR
tion and settings can be performed on the main – Touch the Car function button to open the
radio screen, dragging to the left and selecting menu.
the respective function: – Touch the respective function buttons on the
– Trip data. Car menu to access other menus or to config-
ure the menu items.
– Vehicle status.
– Operating mode → page 117. When the selection box on the function button is
ticked off , the corresponding function is ena-
– Active Info Display → page 16. bled.
– Power monitor - Sport function → page 30
The changes to the settings menus are automati-
25A.5L1.POL.20

cally assumed immediately after having been

made. 

Driver's information 29
Touching the  function button returns you to – Gear indicator: shows the currently engaged
the previous menu.  gear or the selector lever position.
– Digital speed indicator: shows the vehicle’s
current driving speed (in km/h).
Power monitor - Sport function – Throttle: the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
shows the throttle position. The horizontal bar
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter moves to the right as the accelerator pedal is
on page 29. pressed.
– Engine coolant temperature indicator: this in-
dicator is equivalent to the temperature gauge
on the instrument cluster. If the engine is sub-
mitted to excessive stress or high exterior
temperatures, the horizontal bar moves to the
right. This is of no relevance as long as the
control indicator light  does not light up or
blink on the instrument cluster.
– Fuel level indicator: this indicator is equivalent
to the fuel gauge on the instrument cluster. As
the vehicle consumes fuel, the horizontal bar
moves to the left. This is of no relevance as
Fig. 21 On radio display: vehicle data monitor.
long as the control indicator light  does not
light up on the instrument cluster.
The power monitor is a display for sports
driving. The digital instruments indicate in WARNING
real time the relative values for the pres- Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is
sure in bar, the speed, the temperature distracted. Operating the radio unit may dis-
and the position of the accelerator pedal, tract drivers from the surrounding traffic.
which are determined by means of the ● Always drive carefully and responsibly.
vehicle's sensors. This provides a dynamic
driving overview to the driver. NOTICE
After cold engine starting, avoid high engine
Depending on the vehicle and radio version, the revs, overloading and excessive acceleration.
power monitor may not be available.
Due to the principle of determining the
Open vehicle data monitor power available in the vehicle, values dis-
played do not guarantee physical accuracy. 
– On the main radio screen, swipe left once and
select Sports Mode .
– The vehicle data monitor opens on the display
→ Fig. 21.

The following instruments can be displayed:

– Turbo (load pressure indicator): the load pres-
sure indicator shows the charge circuit pres-
sure between the turbocharger and the engine
(in “bar”). The farther right the needle, the
higher the engine power.
– Tachometer: the tachometer indicates the
number of engine revolutions per minute
(RPM). In order to calculate the number of rev-
olutions around an axis, the frequency unit
RPM is multiplied by 1000 (revolutions x 1,000
per minute of the engine running).

30 Owner's Manual
 Safety  The floor mat in the footwell on the driver
side must be securely fastened to ensure the
pedal area is unobstructed. The driver side
mat might be attached to the floor pin
Overall guidelines → Fig. 22.
 Assume a correct sitting position before and
while driving. This also applies to all passen-
gers → page 32.
 Fasten your seat belt correctly before setting
off and keep it properly fastened throughout
the journey. This also applies to all passen-
gers → page 34.
 Each vehicle occupant must sit in a seat of
their own and must have their own seat belt.
 Never drive if your driving ability is impaired,
e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs, among
other substances capable of influencing your
perception and reaction.
Fig. 22 Driver side mat attached to the floor pin.  Do not allow yourself to be distracted from
the traffic (e.g. by passengers, telephone
Preparations for travel and driving safety calls, browsing through display menus.)
Observe the following information both before  Always adjust speed and driving pattern ac-
and during every journey to ensure your own cording to visibility, climate, road, and traffic
safety, and the safety of all passengers and other conditions, under respective speed limits.
road users→ :
 Observe traffic regulations and speed limits.
 Check that all lights and turn signals are  When travelling long distances, stop and
working properly.
take a break regularly – at least every two
 Check the tyre pressure (→ page 236) and hours.
fuel level (→ page 14).
 Carry animals in the vehicle using restraint
 Ensure that you have a good, clear view systems based on their weight and size.
through all of the windows.
Driving abroad
 The supply of air to the engine may not be
suppressed and the engine should not be Some countries adopt special safety regulations
covered with covers or insulating materials and relevant prescriptions for exhaust gases
→ in Safety guidelines for work in the en- which may differ from the structural condition of
gine compartment on page 214. the vehicle. Volkswagen recommends that you
 Secure any objects and luggage in the stow- learn about any legal requirement and the fol-
age compartments, the luggage compart- lowing issues concerning your destination before
ment or on the roof → page 178. travelling abroad:
 Ensure that you are able to operate the ped-  Does the vehicle need any technical modifi-
als freely at all times. cations for driving abroad, e.g. masking or
switching the headlights over?
 Secure any children travelling in the vehicle
in a restraint system suitable for their weight  Are the necessary tools, diagnostic equip-
and size → page 49. ment and spare parts available for service
and repair work?
 Adjust the front seats, headrests and mirrors
properly in accordance with the size of the  Is there a Volkswagen Dealership in the des-
occupants → page 32. tination country?
 Is there unleaded petrol with the correct oc-
25A.5L1.POL.20

 Wear proper shoes that provide good grip for

your feet when using the pedals. tane number and free of metallic additives
(such as manganese) in the destination coun-
try? 

Safety 31
Driving abroad (Continued)
WARNING
 Are the correct engine oil (→ page 218) and Always observe current traffic regulations and
other service fluids that comply with speed limits, and think ahead when driving.
Volkswagen specifications available in the Correct interpretation of a driving situation can
destination country? make the difference between reaching your
 Are special tyres required for travelling in the destination safely and having an accident with
destination country? severe injuries.
Checks when fuelling
NOTICE
Never carry out any work on the engine or in the
Volkswagen may not be held liable for damages
engine compartment if you are not familiar with
caused to the vehicle due to low-quality fuel, in-
the necessary procedures and the general safety
sufficient/incorrect maintenance, and use of
requirements, as well as without available re-
non-genuine parts.
sources, fluids and tools→ page 213! The work
should be carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership Regular servicing of your vehicle not only
or qualified workshop. Please ensure that the fol- maintains its value, but also ensures that
lowing points are checked regularly, preferably your vehicle remains roadworthy and in perfect
every time you fill the tank: working order. Servicing work should therefore
 Windscreen washer fluid level → page 217 always be carried out in accordance with the
 Engine oil level → page 218 Volkswagen maintenance guidelines. Under sever
operating conditions it may be necessary to carry
 Engine coolant level → page 222 out some maintenance jobs prior the next sched-
 Brake fluid level → page 224 uled service. Additional information on adverse
 Tyre pressure → page 236 conditions is available on → page 249, which pri-
 Vehicle lighting necessary for traffic safety: or reading is essential. Contact a Volkswagen
Dealership for more information. 
– Turn signals
– Side light, dipped beam and main beam
headlights
– Tail light lamps
– Brake light
Adjusting the seat position
– Number plate light

Information about changing bulbs → page 197.  Introduction

DANGER Number of seats

Follow the important safety instructions rela- The vehicle has a total of 5 seats: 2 front seats
ted to the front passenger's front airbag and 3 rear seats. Each seat is equipped with safe-
→ page 51, Installation and child seat usage in ty belts.
the vehicle.
WARNING
WARNING
Assuming an incorrect sitting position in the
Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, vehicle can increase the risk of severe or fatal
medication and/or narcotics can cause serious injuries during a sudden driving or braking ma-
accidents and fatal injuries. noeuvre, in the event of a collision or accident,
● Alcohol, drugs, medication and/or narcotics or if the airbags are triggered.
can severely impair perception, reaction ● All vehicle occupants must assume a correct
times and driving safety. This could cause sitting position before setting off and main-
you to lose control of the vehicle. tain this position throughout the trip. This al-
so applies to the use of seat belts. 

32 Owner's Manual
 ● The number of vehicle occupants must never – Never put your feet on the dash panel.
exceed the number of seats with seat belts – Never place your feet on the seat cushion or
in the vehicle. seat backrest.
● Always secure children in the vehicle with an – Never travel in a footwell.
authorised restraint system suitable for their – Never travel on a seat without wearing the
height and weight → page 49, Transporting seat belt.
children in the vehicle, → page 42, Airbag
system. – Never travel in the internal luggage compart-
ment.
● Always keep your feet in the footwell while
the vehicle is in motion. Never place your WARNING
feet on the seat or on the dash panel and
never hold your feet out the window. The Any incorrect sitting position in the vehicle in-
airbag and seat belt can otherwise not pro- creases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the
vide optimal protection and can actually in- event of an accident or sudden driving or brak-
crease the risk of injury during an accident. ing manoeuvre.

● All vehicle occupants must maintain a cor-
rect sitting position and wear their seat belt
properly while the vehicle is in motion.
Dangers of an incorrect sitting ● Sitting in an incorrect position, not fastening
position the seat belt, or leaving too short a distance
to the airbag exposes the occupants to the
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter risk of sustaining critical or fatal injuries, es-
on page 32. pecially if the airbags are triggered and strike
an occupant who has assumed an incorrect
If the seat belts are not worn or are worn incor- sitting position. 
rectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increa-
ses. Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
tion if the seat belt routing is correct. An incor-
rect sitting position considerably impairs the lev- Correct sitting position
el of protection provided by the seat belts. This
could lead to severe or even fatal injuries. The  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially aug- on page 32.
mented when a triggered airbag hits an occupant
who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
The driver is responsible for all vehicle passen-
gers, especially if they are children.
The following list contains examples of sitting
positions that could be dangerous for all occu-
pants.

Whenever the vehicle is in motion:

– Never stand in the vehicle.
– Never stand on the seats.
– Never kneel over the seats. Fig. 23 Correct distance between the driver and the
steering wheel, correct seatbelt position and correct
– Never tilt the backrest too far to the rear. headrest adjustment.
– Never lean against the dash panel.
– Never lie on the rear seat. The following points describe the correct sitting
positions for the driver and passengers.
– Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
Persons who due to their physical build are un-
25A.5L1.POL.20

– Never sit sideways.

able to sit correctly in the vehicle should contact
– Never lean out of a window. a Volkswagen Dealership to learn about possible
– Never put your feet out of a window. special installations. The seat belts and airbags 

Safety 33
can only provide a maximum level of protection if Points for rear vehicle passengers:
a correct sitting position is assumed. Volkswagen – Adjust the head rest so its top edge is at the
recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for same height as the top of the head → Fig. 23 –
this purpose. but not below eye level. Position the back of
Volkswagen recommends the following sitting your head as close to the head restraint as
positions on the seats for the occupants own possible.
safety and to reduce the level of injury in the – In case of short stature individuals, push the
event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an acci- head restraint all the way down, even if the
dent: head is then located underneath the top edge
of the head rest.
Points for the driver:
– For taller people, push the head rest up as far
– Move the backrest into an upright position so as possible.
that your back rests fully against it.
– Always keep your feet in the footwell while
– Adjust the seat so that the distance between the vehicle is in motion.
the steering wheel and the driver's chest is at
– Adjust and fasten seat belts properly
least of 25 cm → Fig. 23 A and so the driver
→ page 34. 
can firmly hold the steering wheel by its outer
rim with both hands and with slightly flexed
arms.
– The steering wheel must always point towards
the breastbone and not towards the face. Seat belts
– Adjust the driver's seat lengthwise so that the
pedals may be reached with slightly flexed legs
and so that the distance between the knees
 Introduction
and the dashboard is at least 10 cm → Fig. 23
B. Check the condition of all seat belts regularly. In
– Adjust the height so that you can reach the case of damages to belts, connections, automatic
highest point of the steering wheel. belt retractor, or seat belt latches, the respective
– Always leave both feet in the footwell to main- seat belt must be immediately replaced by a
tain control of the vehicle at all times. Volkswagen Dealership → . One must use cor-
rect spare parts that are compatible with the ve-
– Fasten seat belts properly → page 34.
hicle, equipment level and model year.
Points for the front passenger: Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen
Dealership for this purpose.
– Move the backrest into an upright position so
that your back rests fully against it.
WARNING
– Push the front passenger seat as far back as
Incorrectly fastened or unfastened seat belts
possible so that the airbag can provide maxi-
increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Seat
mum protection if it is triggered.
belts will only offer the optimum level of pro-
– Always keep your feet in the footwell while tection when they are fastened and used prop-
the vehicle is in motion. erly.
– Fasten seat belts properly → page 34. ● Seat belts are the most effective means of
reducing the risk of severe and fatal injuries
in case of accidents. For the protection of
the driver and of all vehicle occupants, seat
belts must always be fastened properly when
the vehicle is in motion.
● Before every trip, each vehicle occupant
must assume a correct sitting position, cor-
rectly fasten the seat belt belonging to their 

34 Owner's Manual
 seat and keep it fastened properly through- ● Never attempt to repair, modify or remove
out the trip. This applies to all passengers in the seat belts yourself. All repairs to seat
any traffic condition. belts, belt retractors and buckles must be
● While the vehicle is in motion, secure all chil- carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership. 
dren travelling in the vehicle in a restraint
system suitable for their age, as well as
properly secured seat belts → page 49,
Transporting children in the vehicle.
Warning lamp
● Only start driving when all passengers have  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
correctly fastened their seat belts. on page 34.
● Only ever insert the latch plate into the
buckle of the associated seat, and always en-
sure that it engages properly. Using a buckle
that does not belong to the seat that you are
occupying reduces the level of protection
and can lead to severe injuries.
● Never let any foreign bodies or liquids enter
the seat belt buckle slot. This could prevent
belt buckles from working properly.
● Never unfasten the seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
● Never allow more than one person to share Fig. 24 Instrument cluster display warning lamp.
the same seat belt.
● Never allow children or babies to be trans-
ported on someone's lap, or while being
held.
● Never drive wearing loose, bulky clothing
(such as an overcoat over a jacket). This
could prevent the seat belts from fitting and
functioning properly.
Fig. 25 Seat belt status indicator for rear seats in
WARNING the instrument cluster display.
Damaged seat belts are extremely dangerous
An acoustic warning sounds for a few seconds if
and can cause severe or fatal injuries.
the seat belts are not fastened prior to reaching a
● Never damage the belt by trapping it in the speed of approximately 25 km/h or whenever the
door or in the seat mechanism. seat belts are unfastened while driving. In addi-
● If the belt bands fabric or any other part of tion, the warning lamp flashes  → Fig. 24.
the seat belt becomes damaged, the seat The warning light  only turns off, with the igni-
belt may tear during an accident or sudden tion switched on, after the driver and front pas-
braking manoeuvre. senger have fastened their respective seat belts.
● Damaged seat belts must be replaced imme-
diately with new seat belts at a Volkswagen Rear seat belt status indicator
Dealership. Seat belts used during an acci- After switching the ignition on, the seat belt sta-
dent and subjected to stress or belt tension- tus indicator → Fig. 25 shows in the instrument
er activation must be replaced by a cluster display whether rear seat passengers
Volkswagen Dealership. Replacement may be have fastened their seat belts.
necessary even if there is no apparent dam-
The symbol indicates that the passenger in
age. The belt anchorage should also be 
25A.5L1.POL.20

this seat has fastened the seat belt.

checked.
The symbol indicates that the passenger in
 this seat has not fastened the seat belt. 

Safety 35
The seat belt status indication is shown for ap- The physical principles involved in a frontal colli-
proximately 60 seconds whenever a seat belt is sion are relatively simple. As soon as the vehicle
fastened or removed in the rear seats. The indi- is in motion → Fig. 26, both the moving vehicle
cation can be hidden by pressing    on the and its passengers gain movement energy. Such
instrument cluster display. energy is known as “kinetic energy”.
If a rear seat belt is removed while driving, the The higher the vehicle speed and the heavier the
seat belt status indicator flashes for up to 60 weight of the vehicle, the greater the amount of
seconds. A sound warning is also activated when energy that will have to be released in the event
driving at speeds higher than 25 km/h. of an accident.
However, the most significant factor is the vehi-
WARNING cle speed. For example, when the speed doubles
Incorrectly fastened or unfastened seat belts from 25 km/h to approximately 50 km/h (15 mph
increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Seat to approximately 30 mph), the kinetic energy in-
belts will only offer the optimum level of pro- creases fourfold!
tection when they are used properly.  The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on the
vehicle speed and weight of the vehicle and pas-
sengers The higher the speed and the heavier the
Frontal collisions and the laws of weight, the greater the amount of energy that
will be released in the event of an accident.
physics
Passengers not wearing seat belts are, therefore,
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter not “connected” to the vehicle. In the event of a
on page 34. frontal collision they will continue to move for-
ward at the same speed at which the vehicle was
travelling before impact, until something stops
them. Because the passengers in our example are
not restrained by seat belts, the entire amount of
kinetic energy will only be released at the point
of impact against the wall → Fig. 27.
At a speed of approximately 50 km/h (30 mph),
the forces acting on the body during an accident
can easily exceed one tonne (1,000 kg). These
forces are even greater at higher speeds.
This example applies not only to frontal colli-
Fig. 26 Unbelted occupants in a vehicle heading for sions, but to all kinds of accidents and collisions. 
a brick wall.

Fig. 27 Unbelted occupants in a vehicle striking a

brick wall

36 Owner's Manual
 What happens to passengers who with an airbag system, all vehicle occupants, in-
cluding the driver, must fasten their seat belt and
have not fastened their seat belts wear it correctly while the vehicle is in motion.
This reduces the risk of severe or fatal injuries in
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter the event of an accident - regardless of whether
on page 34. an airbag is available.
An airbag can only be triggered once. To achieve
best possible protection, seat belts must always
be worn properly. This also ensures that protec-
tion is provided in accidents in which the airbag
is not triggered. Any vehicle occupant not wear-
ing a seat belt can be thrown out of the vehicle
and sustain even more severe or even fatal inju-
ries as a result.
It is also essential for rear passengers to wear
seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be
thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear
passengers who are not wearing seat belts en-
danger not only themselves and the driver, but
also other people in the vehicle → Fig. 29. 
Fig. 28 An unbelted driver is thrown forward.

Seat belts protect

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 34.

Fig. 29 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown for-

ward violently, hitting the belted driver.

Many people believe that they can brace their

weight with their hands in a minor collision. This
is not true.
Even at low speeds, the forces acting on the Fig. 30 Driver restrained by a properly positioned
body in a collision are so great that occupants seat belt during a sudden braking manoeuvre.
cannot brace themselves with their arms and
hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers Correctly fastened seat belts can make a major
are thrown forward and will make unchecked difference. When fastened properly, seat belts
contact with parts of the vehicle interior, e.g. the hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting
steering wheel, dash panel, or windscreen positions and considerably reduce the kinetic en-
→ Fig. 28. ergy in the event of an accident. Seat belts also
help to prevent uncontrolled movements that
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat
25A.5L1.POL.20

could lead to severe injuries. Additionally, wear-

belts. When triggered, airbags only provide addi-
ing seat belts properly reduces the risk of being
tional protection. Airbags are not triggered in all
thrown from the vehicle → Fig. 30. 
kinds of accidents. Even if the vehicle is equipped

Safety 37
Passengers wearing seat belts correctly benefit  Never remove, modify or repair the seat belt
greatly from the ability of the belts to reduce the or any part of the belt fixture system.
kinetic energy generated. The front crumple  Always fasten the seat belt correctly before
zones and other passive safety features (such as driving and wear it properly while the vehicle
the airbag system) are also designed to mitigate is in motion.
kinetic energy. The amount of energy generated
will thus decrease, thereby reducing the risk of Twisted seat belt
injury.
If it is difficult to remove the seat belt from the
The illustrated examples describe frontal colli- belt guide, the seat belt may have become twis-
sions. Properly worn seat belts also substantially ted if it was returned too quickly into the side
reduce the risk of injury in all other types of acci- trim: In this case:
dents. This is why seat belts must be fastened
before every trip - even if your only planning on – Take hold of the latch plate then slowly and
going “around the block”. Ensure that all passen- carefully pull out the seat belt.
gers also wear their seat belts properly. – Untwist the seat belt and guide it back slowly
by hand.
Accident statistics have shown properly worn
seat belts to be an effective means of substan- Fasten the seat belt even if you are unable to un-
tially reducing the risk of injury and improving do the twist. However, the twist should not be in
the chances of survival in severe accidents. Fur- an area of the seat belt that comes into direct
thermore, properly worn seat belts ensure proper contact with the body! The twist should be cor-
airbag operation in case of accidents. This is why rected immediately by a Volkswagen Dealership.
wearing a seat belt is a legal requirement in most
countries. WARNING
Although the vehicle is equipped with airbags, Using seat belts incorrectly increases the risk of
seat belts must be used at all times. For example, severe or fatal injuries.
the front airbags will only be triggered in certain ● Regularly check to see if the seat belt and its
types of frontal collision. Front airbags will not related parts are in perfect working condi-
be triggered during minor frontal collisions, mi- tions.
nor side collisions, rear collisions, rolls or acci- ● Keep the seat belts clean.
dents in which the airbag trigger threshold in the
control unit is not exceeded. ● Do not allow the belt bands to become jam-
med, damaged or to rub on any sharp edges.
Therefore, always wear your seat belt and ensure
● Always keep the latch plate and slot in the
that your passengers have fastened their seat
buckle free from foreign bodies and liquids. 
belts properly before driving. 

Using seat belts

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 34.

Checklist
Using seat belts→ :
 Check the condition of all seat belts regular-
ly.
 Keep the seat belts clean.
 Never let any foreign bodies and liquids get
on to the seat belt, the latch plate or into the
slot for the seat belt buckle.
 Do not trap or damage the seat belt and
latch plate (e.g. when closing the door).

38 Owner's Manual
 Fastening and unfastening seat Unfastening the seat belts
Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is sta-
belts
tionary → .
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter – Press the red button in the buckle → Fig. 32.
on page 34. The latch plate is released and springs out.
– Guide the belt back so that it rolls up easily,
without twisting the seat belt and without
damaging the trim.

WARNING
Incorrect seat belt routing can cause severe or
fatal injuries in the event of an accident.
● The seat belts only offer best protection
when the backrests are in the proper posi-
tion and the seat belts have been fastened
properly according to the occupant's height.
Fig. 31 Inserting the seat belt latch plate into the
● Unfastening seat belts while the vehicle is in
buckle.
motion can lead to severe or fatal injuries in
the event of an accident or sudden braking
manoeuvre. 

Seat belt routing

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 34.

Fig. 32 Removing the seat belt latch plate into the

buckle.

If worn properly, seat belts hold the vehicle occu-

pants in the correct sitting position during an ac-
cident or braking manoeuvre, giving occupants
maximum protection → .

Fastening the seat belts

Fasten seat belts before driving.
Fig. 33 Correct seat belt routing and head rest ad-
– Always properly adjust the front seats and justment. 
head rests (if equipped) → page 32.
– Lock the rear seat backrest in it's proper posi-
tion → .
– Gently pull the seat belt through the latch
plate, across the chest and the pelvic area. Do
not twist the seat belt → .
– Insert the latch plate securely into the buckle
of the respective seat → Fig. 31.
25A.5L1.POL.20

– Pull test the seat belt to ensure that the latch

plate is securely locked in the buckle.

Safety 39
 WARNING
Incorrect seat belt routing can cause severe in-
juries in the event of an accident or a sudden
braking / driving manoeuvre.
● The seat belts only offer best protection
when the backrests are in the proper posi-
tion and the seat belts have been fastened
properly.
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on
the centre of the shoulder and never under
the arm or across the neck.
● The seat belt must lie flat and firmly over the
Fig. 34 Correct seat belt routing during pregnancy. chest.
● The lower seat belt strap must always lie
Seat belts only provide an optimum level of pro- across the pelvis, never across the stomach.
tection during an accident and reduce the risk of The seat belt must lie flat and firmly over the
severe or fatal injuries when they are routed cor- pelvis. Slightly loosen the seat belt if neces-
rectly. Correct seat belt bands routing also holds sary.
the vehicle occupants in position so that an in-
● For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat
flating airbag can offer the maximum level of
belt must be as low as possible over the pel-
protection. Therefore always fasten your seat
vis around the “bulge” of the belly.
belt and ensure that the seat belt routing is cor-
rect. ● Do not twist the belt bands while securing
the seat belt.
An incorrect sitting position can cause severe or
● Never hold the seat belt away from the body
fatal injuries → page 32, Adjusting the seat posi-
by hand.
tion.
● The belt bands should not lie over hard or
Correct seat belt routing fragile objects, such as glasses, pens or keys.
– The shoulder part of the seat belt must always ● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or
lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across similar items to alter the seat belt routing.
the neck, over or under the arm, or behind the
back. If a person's physical build prevents them
from routing the seat belt properly, contact
– The lower seat belt strap must always lie
a Volkswagen Dealership to find out about any
across the pelvis, never across the stomach.
special modifications so that the seat belts and
– The seat belt must always lie flat and firm airbags can provide the optimum level of protec-
against the body. Slightly stretch the seat belt tion. 
if necessary → Fig. 33.
For pregnant women, the seat belt must be posi-
tioned over the chest and as low as possible over
the pelvis, so that no pressure is exerted on the
lower body – this applies to all pregnancy stages
→ Fig. 34.

Correct seat belt routing according to height

The seat belt routing can be adjusted as follows:
– Belt height adjuster for the front seats
→ page 41.
– Front seat with height adjustment → page 74.

40 Owner's Manual
 Belt height adjuster Automatic belt retractor, belt
tensioner and belt roll-back
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 34.
function
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 34.

Seat belts are part of the vehicle's safety system

→ page 45 and are made up of the following im-
portant functions:

Automatic belt retractor

The safety belts are fitted with an automatic re-
triever roller, this device keeps the safety belt ad-
justed to the passenger's body. Full freedom of
movement in the passenger's upper body area is
made possible when the seat belt is pulled slowly
or when the vehicle is travelling at normal
Fig. 35 Next to the front seats: seat belt height ad- speeds. However, the automatic belt retractor
juster. locks the seat belt if the belt is pulled out quickly,
during sudden braking, when driving uphill or
Depending on the vehicle's version, seat belt downhill or around bends, and during accelera-
height adjustment may not be available. tion.
The seat belt height adjusters for the front seats
Seat belt tensioners
can be used to adjust the seat belt position on
the shoulder area according to the body size, so Front seat belts are equipped with belt tension-
it can be fastened properly: ers and roll-back function. Rear seat belts are not
equipped with these features.
– Press and hold the shoulder belt guide as indi-
cated by the arrows → Fig. 35. Belt tensioners are activated by sensors during
severe frontal and rear collisions, tightening the
– Push the shoulder belt guide up or down so seat belts against the direction in which they are
that the seat belt lies over the middle of the pulled. Safety belt clearances are eliminated
shoulder → page 39, Seat belt routing. when the belt tensioner is activated, reducing
– Let go of the shoulder belt guide. the forward movement of passengers towards
– Pull sharply on the seat belt to check whether the impact direction. Belt tensioners works to-
the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely. gether with the airbag system. Belt tensioners
are not activated in minor front collisions, rolls or
WARNING accidents in which the threshold in the control
unit is not exceeded.
Never adjust the seat belt height when the ve-
hicle is in motion.  A fine dust may be generated upon activation.
This is perfectly normal and does not represent
fire risk.

Seat belt roll-back function

The front seat belts are equipped with roll-back
function.
The seat belt roll-back function minimizes seat
belt force acting over the body in case of acci-
dents. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Safety 41
 All safety requirements must be observed Airbag system
when the vehicle or components of the sys-
tem are scrapped. Volkswagen Dealerships are
familiar with such requirements.   Introduction

The vehicle is equipped with one front airbag for

Service and disposal of belt the driver and one for the passenger. Front air-
tensioners bags can provide the driver and front passenger
with additional chest and head protection if the
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter seat, seat belts, head rests and, in the case of the
on page 34. driver, steering wheel are adjusted and used cor-
rectly. Airbags are meant to provide additional
Seat belts may become damaged during any protection. Airbags are not a substitute for seat
work on the belt tensioners or while removing or belts. Seat belts must always be worn, even
refitting any vehicle parts in conjunction with any when the vehicle is equipped with front airbags.
other repair work. Such damages will not always
be noticeable. The consequence may be that the WARNING
belt tensioners could function incorrectly, or not
Never rely solely on the airbag system for your
function at all, in the event of an accident.
protection.
Regulations must be observed to ensure that the ● Even if an airbag is triggered, it only offers
effectiveness of the belt tensioner is not reduced additional protection.
and that removed parts do not cause any injuries
or environmental pollution. Volkswagen Dealer- ● The airbag system only enhances protection
ships are familiar with such requirements. if the seat belt is properly used, in order to
mitigate injuries → page 34, Seat belts.
WARNING ● Before every trip, each vehicle occupant
must assume a correct sitting position, cor-
The risk of severe or fatal injuries may be in-
rectly fasten the seat belt belonging to their
creased if the seat belts, automatic belt retrac-
seat and keep it fastened properly through-
tors and belt tensioners are not used correctly,
out the trip.
or if they are repaired by a non-professional. In
this case, the belt tensioners may not be trig-
gered when they should, or they may be trig- WARNING
gered unexpectedly. The risk of injury increases if there are any
● Only Volkswagen → page 260, Accessories, items located between the occupant and the
modifications, repairs and part replacement deployment area of the airbag when it is trig-
may carry out repairs, adjustments or remov- gered. This will impinge on the deployment
al and refitting of parts in the belt tensioner zone of the airbag or the items will be flung
system or seat belts. against the body.
● Belt tensioners and automatic belt retractors ● Never hold any objects in your hand or on
cannot be repaired. They must be replaced. your lap while the vehicle is in motion.
● Belt tensioners can only be activated once. ● Never transport any objects on the front pas-
Once the belt tensioners are activated, they senger seat. Objects could enter the deploy-
must be replaced. ment zone of the airbag during sudden brak-
ing or driving manoeuvres and then be flung
Airbag modules and belt tensioners may dangerously through the vehicle interior if
contain toxic substances. This product can- the airbag is activated.
not be disposed / discarded along with common ● People, animals or objects must never be in-
trash. For your own safety and comfort, between the vehicle's front seat occupants,
Volkswagen recommends replacing belt tension- the rear side seat occupants and the airbag
ers and airbag modules only at Volkswagen Deal- expansion areas. Ensure this is also followed
erships.  by children and passengers. 

42 Owner's Manual
 WARNING Front passenger front airbag
The airbag system only supports a single airbag system type
triggering event. If the airbags are triggered,
the airbag system must be replaced.  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
● Airbags that have been triggered, and any af- on page 42.
fected system parts, must immediately be
replaced with new parts that are approved Front passenger airbag system with front
by Volkswagen for the vehicle. airbag deactivation
● Airbag system repairs and part replacements The front passenger airbag is manually deactiva-
must only be carried out by Volkswagen ted through a switch activated by the vehicle key
→ page 47.
Dealerships. Volkswagen Dealerships have
the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, Signs of the airbag system with front passenger
repair information and qualified personnel airbag deactivation:
for this purpose. – Front passenger front airbag in the dash panel.
● Never use recycled airbag components or – Indicator lamp  on the Instrument cluster
components that have been taken from end- display.
of-life vehicles in your vehicle.
– Indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG   in
● Never alter any components of the airbag the upper part of the centre console.
system.
– Indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG   in
the upper part of the centre console.
WARNING
– Key-activated switch next to the dash panel on
A fine dust (non-toxic) may be generated upon the front passenger side (visible only with
activation. This is perfectly normal and does open door). 
not represent fire risk.
● The fine dust can cause irritation to the skin
and eye membranes and cause breathing dif-
ficulties, particularly for people suffering Indicator lamp
from asthma or people who have or had oth-
er respiratory problems. To help reduce  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
breathing difficulties, get out of the vehicle on page 42.
or open the windows or doors for more fresh
air.
● If you come into contact with the dust, wash
your hands and face with a mild soap and
water before eating.
● Do not let the dust get into your eyes or into
open wounds.
● If dust has entered your eyes, rinse them
with water.

WARNING
Fig. 36 In the upper part of the centre console:
Cleaning products case the airbag module sur- front passenger front airbag indicator lamp off  or
faces to become porous and brittle. In case of on . 
activation, such parts could break and cause se-
vere injuries.
● Never apply any chemical or cleaning prod-
ucts to the airbag module surfaces. Use only
25A.5L1.POL.20

damp cloths to clean these areas. 

Safety 43
 The yellow indicator lamp on the instru- – Contact a Volkswagen Dealership.
 ment cluster display lights up briefly after – Belt tensioners and the airbag system must be
switching on the ignition to test for proper checked.
operation, and goes off after a few sec-
onds.   Front passenger front airbag
Front passenger front airbag disabled. disabled
  The yellow indicator lamp on the cen- The yellow indicator lamp is permanently on for
tre console is permanently on → Fig. 36 . the deactivated front passenger front airbag.
Front passenger front airbag.enabled.
  The yellow indicator lamp on the cen-
The front passenger front airbag is deactivated.
tre console turns off automatically around – Check whether the front passenger front air-
60 seconds after turning the ignition on or bag needs to stay deactivated, for instance,
after enabling the front passenger front while using a child seat on the front passenger
airbag with the key-activated switch seat.
→ Fig. 36 .

If, with disabled front passenger front airbag, the

  Front passenger front airbag enabled
The yellow indicator lamp for the front passenger
PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp in the
front airbag turns on for approximately 60 sec-
upper part of the centre console is not perma-
onds after turning the ignition on or after acti-
nently lit or if it lights up together with the 
vating the front passenger front airbag with the
indicator lamp on the instrument cluster, the air-
key-activated switch.
bag system may be malfunctioning → .
The front passenger front airbag is on.
DANGER – Check whether the front passenger front air-
When the airbag system indicator lamp is lit, bag should remain on. 
there are damages in the airbag system and it
may not trigger correctly, may not trigger at all
or may trigger unexpectedly. This can cause se-
vere or fatal injuries. Description and function of the
● The airbag system must be checked by a airbags
Volkswagen Dealership as soon as possible.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
● Never fit a child seat on the front passenger
on page 42.
seat while the airbag system is activated!
The passenger front airbag may be triggered
The airbag protects the vehicle's occupants in an
in an accident, despite damages.  accident, cushioning the occupant's movements
in case of frontal collisions.
When an airbag is triggered, it is inflated by a gas
Troubleshooting generator. This causes the airbag covers to break,
and the airbags inflate forcefully to cover their
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter deployment zones within milliseconds. After
on page 42. holding vehicle occupants in place, who must al-
ways wear their respective seat belts, inflated
 Airbags system or belt tensioner airbags release a gas through openings located
away from the vehicle occupants. This can re-
damaged
The yellow indicator lamp is permanently on. A duce the risk of severe and fatal injuries. A trig-
message will also be shown on the instrument gered airbag will not always prevent other inju-
cluster display. ries such as swelling, bruising and grazing. Heat
by friction can also be generated during an airbag
A malfunction was identified in at least one air- triggering event.
bag or belt tensioner.
Airbags provide no protection for the arms or
lower body parts. 

44 Owner's Manual
 The most important factors regarding airbag trig- – Airbag indicator lamp .
gering are the type of accident, the vehicle im- – PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp on
pact area, the angle, the intensity of the impact, the upper part of the centre console.
the vehicle structure, and the obstacle to which
– PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp on
the vehicle collided. Therefore, airbags are not
the upper part of the centre console.
triggered in all collisions.
– Belt tensioners for the driver and front passen-
The airbag system's triggering depends on the ger.
intensity of the impact registered by an electron-
ic control unit. If the accident's characteristics do – Belt height adjuster for the front seats.
not fall under the parameters configured in the – If necessary, child seat anchoring points on the
control unit, the airbags are not triggered. Vehi- rear side seats.
cle damages and cost repairs are used as indica- – If necessary, anchoring point for the upper
tors that they airbag system should have been child seat fastening belt.
triggered. Important factors in the triggering of – Sensors and control units.
the airbag include the nature (hard or soft) of the
object that the vehicle hits, the angle and inten- Situations in which the front and side airbags
sity of impact, and the vehicle impact area. are not triggered:
Airbags are merely used as additional safety fea- – If the ignition is switched off during a collision.
tures for the seat belts in some accidents in – If the impact intensity measured in control
which the impact intensity is sufficient to trigger units is too small during frontal collisions.
the airbags. Airbags can only be triggered once
– During minor side collisions.
and only in certain situations. The seat belts are
always there to provide protection in situations – During rear collisions.
in which the airbags are not triggered or have al- – If the vehicle rolls over.
ready been triggered. For example, if the vehicle – If the impact intensity measured by the control
collides with a further vehicle following the initial unit is insufficient to trigger the airbags.
collision, or is hit by another vehicle.
The airbag system is part of the vehicle's overall In case of airbag triggering - Crash detection
passive safety concept. The airbag system can function
only work effectively when the occupants are Whenever airbags are deployed during an acci-
wearing their seat belts correctly and have as- dent, the crash detection functions is activated
sumed a proper sitting position  → page 32. and the following actions may occur:

Components of the vehicle safety concept – Vehicle doors unlocking (valid for vehicles
equipped with central locking system)
The following vehicle safety equipment makes up
→ page 63.
the vehicle's safety concept to reduce the risk of
severe and fatal injuries. Depending on the vehi- – Fuel supply cut off → page 189.
cle version, some of the equipment may not be – Activation of inner vehicle lights → page 85.
fitted in your vehicle or may not be available at – Activation of warning lamps → page 58.
all in some countries.
Warning lamps may be switched off via the dash
– Front airbags for driver and front passenger. panel switch. 
– Driver and front passenger's airbags.
– Height-adjustable head restraints optimised
for rear impact.
– Seats.
– Optimised seat belts for all seats.
– Adjustable steering column.
– Brakes / parking brakes.
25A.5L1.POL.20

– Belt tension limiter for the driver and front

passenger.
– Seat belt warning lamp .

Safety 45
Front airbags The areas highlighted in red → Fig. 37 and
→ Fig. 38 are covered by the front airbags when
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter triggered (deployment zone). For this reason, you
on page 42. must never leave or attach any items in these
areas → .
The airbag covers fold out from the steering
wheel → Fig. 37 or from the dashboard → Fig. 38
when the driver and passenger front airbags are
triggered. The airbag covers remain connected to
the steering wheel or the dashboard.

DANGER
Once triggered, the airbag inflates at high
speed.
● Always leave the deployment zones of the
front airbags clear.
● Never attach any items, such as drink or tele-
phone holders, GPS, etc., to the covers of the
Fig. 37 Location and deployment zone of the driver airbags or anywhere in the airbag deploy-
front airbag. ment zone.
● Front seat occupants must never carry any
people, pets or objects in the deployment
zone between themselves and the airbags.
● Do not attach objects, such as GPS devices,
to the windscreen above the front passeng-
er's front airbag.
● Do not attach, line, modify, or place any ma-
terials over the centre steering wheel surface
(horn activation) and the front passenger air-
bag module surface, on the dash panel.

WARNING
The front airbags are triggered in front of the
Fig. 38 Installation location and expansion zone of steering wheel → Fig. 37 and dash panel
the passenger front airbag. → Fig. 38.
● When driving, always hold the steering
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front air-
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
bag system gives the front occupants additional
ring: 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.
protection for the head and chest in the event of
a severe frontal collision. Farthest distance from ● Adjust the driver seat in such a way that
the front airbag is recommended; at least 25 cm there is at least 25 cm between your breast-
→ page 32. This allows the front airbags to in- bone and the hub of the steering wheel. If
flate fully when triggered, thus providing maxi- your physical build makes it impossible to
mum protection. fulfil this requirement, you must contact a
Volkswagen Dealership in order to imple-
The driver's front airbag is placed in the steering ment any necessary modifications.
wheel→ Fig. 37 and the front airbag for the front
● Adjust the passenger seat so that the dis-
passenger is placed in the dash panel → Fig. 38.
tance between the passenger and the dash-
Airbag locations are identified by the text “AIR-
board is as wide as possible. 
BAG”.

46 Owner's Manual
 Airbag system parts must never be reused – Close the front passenger door.
in case of vehicle or component scrapping. – While the ignition is switched on, check that
All applicable environment disposal standards the PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp
must be followed, in addition to other safety in the upper part of the centre console is not
standards in effect. Volkswagen Dealerships are lit → page 43.
familiar with such requirements. 
Disabling the front passenger front airbag
– Switch off the ignition.
Switching the passenger front – Open the front passenger door.
airbag on and off manually with the – Unfold the vehicle key bit → page 60.
key activated switch – Using the key bit, turn the key-activated
switch → Fig. 39 → to  .
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter – Remove the vehicle key from the key activated
on page 42. switch and fold the key bit inward.
– Close the front passenger door.
– The PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp
in the upper part of the centre console is per-
manently lit while the ignition is on → page 43.

Disabled front passenger front airbag

indicator
A disabled front passenger front airbag is indica-
ted exclusively by the PASSENGER AIR BAG  
indicator lamp permanently lit in the upper part
of the centre console (  permanently-lit yel-
Fig. 39 On the dash panel on the front passenger low light) → page 43.
side: key activated switch to enable or disable the
When the PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator
front passenger front airbag.
lamp in the upper part of the centre console is
Depending on the vehicle version, the front pas- not permanently lit or if it is lit together with the
senger airbag on/off switch may not be availa-  indicator lamp on the instrument cluster, no
ble. child restraint system must be assembled on the
front passenger seat for safety reasons. The front
When securing a rear-facing child seat in the passenger front airbag could be triggered in an
front passenger seat, the front passenger front accident.
airbag must be switched off!
WARNING
Enabling the front passenger front airbag
– Switch off the ignition. The front passenger front airbag may only be
deactivated in special cases.
– Open the front passenger door.
● Switch the front passenger front airbag on
– Unfold the vehicle key bit → page 60. and off only while the ignition is switched off
– Using the key bit, turn the key-activated to prevent damages to the airbag system.
switch → Fig. 39 → to  . ● The driver is responsible for the correct posi-
– Remove the vehicle key from the key activated tioning of the switch activated by the key.
switch and fold the key bit inward. ● Disable the front passenger front airbag only
– The PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp when, under special circumstances, there is a
in the upper part of the centre console lights child seat mounted on the passenger seat.
up and turns off after about 60 seconds ● Enable the front passenger front airbag
→ page 43. again as soon as the child seat is no longer
25A.5L1.POL.20

being used on the front passenger seat. 

Safety 47
 NOTICE The side airbags are placed in the driver and front
passenger seat’s backrest outer padding
An insufficiently inserted key blade may get → Fig. 41. Airbag installation locations are identi-
damaged when turning the key in the key activa- fied with the inscription “AIRBAG”.
ted switch.
The red highlighted areas → Fig. 40 and → Fig. 41
NOTICE are covered by the side airbags when triggered
(deployment zones). For this reason, you must
Do not leave the vehicle key inserted into the key never leave or attach any items in these areas
activated switch as this may cause damage to → .
the door lining, to the dash panel, to the key acti-
vated switch and to the vehicle key when closing In the case of a side collision, the side airbags on
the front passenger door. the collision side are triggered and thereby re-

duce the risk of injuries to the body parts turned
towards the impact side of the vehicle's occu-
pants.
Side airbags
WARNING
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter Once triggered, the airbag inflates at very high
on page 42. speed in a fraction of seconds.
● Always leave the deployment zones of the
side airbags clear.
● People, animals or objects must never be in-
between the vehicle's front seat occupants,
the rear side seat occupants and the airbag
expansion areas. Ensure this is also followed
by children and passengers.
● Hang only light clothes on the vehicle's
clothing hook. Do not leave any heavy or cut-
ting objects in the pockets.
● Do not install accessories on the doors.
● Apply only seat or protective covers express-
ly released for use in the vehicle. Otherwise
Fig. 40 On the left side of the vehicle: side airbag the side airbag may not insufflate when trig-
deployment zone. gered.

WARNING
Inadequate handling of the front seats may
prevent the side airbags from operating cor-
rectly and cause serious injuries.
● Never remove the vehicle front seats or alter
parts thereof.
● When excessively high forces are applied to
the side supports of the seats backrest, the
side airbags may not operate correctly, may
not operate at all or be accidentally trig-
gered.
● Damages to the original seat covers or to the
seams in the area of the side airbag modules
Fig. 41 Front seat side: installation location and de-
ployment zone of the side airbags. must be checked immediately by a
Volkswagen dealership. 

48 Owner's Manual
 Transporting children in the ● Ensure that the seat belt routing is correct
for each use condition. If the seat belt must
vehicle be passed over the child's body, ensure that
the seat belt passes through the child's
shoulder and never through the child's neck.
 Introduction ● Never allow children or babies to be trans-
ported on someone's lap, or while being
Child seats reduce the risk of injury in an acci- held.
dent. Always transport children in child seats, ac- ● Only ever fasten one child into each child
cording to applicable laws! seat.
Note: ● Read and observe the child seat's manufac-
– Child seats are grouped according to the turer instructions, especially regarding prop-
child's size, age and weight. er seat belt attachment.
– Installing child seats in the vehicle can be exe- ● Replace child seats that withstand any force
cuted with different retaining systems. during an accident as they could have sus-
tained damage that may not be visible.
For safety reasons child seats must preferably be
mounted on the backseats → page 51, Installa- WARNING
tion and child seat usage in the vehicle.
An unsecured, unoccupied child seat could be
Before transporting babies and children in child flung through the vehicle interior in the event
seats on the front passenger seat, it is imperative of a sudden braking manoeuvre or accident.
to read all airbag system information and learn This could cause injuries.
about potential injuries airbag deployment can ● Always secure child seats safely, even if they
cause children in the 0 and 0+ group. are not being used, or have it safely stowed
This information is very important for the safety in the luggage compartment when driving. 
of the driver and all passengers, especially babies
and small children.
Volkswagen recommends using child seats from Child seat types
the Volkswagen Original Accessories Program.
These child seats were developed and approved  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
for use in Volkswagen vehicles. on page 49.

WARNING
Children who are not strapped in or who are
not strapped in properly could sustain severe or
fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion.
● Never leave a child seat facing backwards on
the front passenger seat without disabling
the airbag for risk of possible injuries from
the triggered airbag.
● Volkswagen recommends to always trans-
port children of age under 12 years or less
than 1.50 m high on the rear seat.
● Always secure children in the vehicle with an
authorised restraint system suitable to their
height and weight. Fig. 42 Figures A , B and C illustrate the main
● Always fasten children’s seat belts or child securing points for the child restraint system for
children only wearing the seat belt. 
seats, or secure all chairs transported to the
25A.5L1.POL.20

ISOFIX system and ensure the proper sitting

position.

Safety 49
 Fastening variants → Fig. 43:
D ISOFIX or i-Size retaining eyebolts and top
fastening belt, type “Top Tether”
E Universal LATCH and “Top Tether” type se-
curing belt.
F Automatic three-point seat belt and “Top
Tether”.

The systems show the securing of the child re-

straining system with a Top Tether securing belt
and the bottom mounting points on the seat.

Group classification for child seats according

Fig. 43 On the rear seat: figures D e E illustrate to ECE-R 44
the securing principle of the child retention system
Child's
to the bottom retention eyes and the top tether. Weight class Age
Figure C illustrates how to fasten the child re- weight
straint system with the vehicle seat belt and the top up to approximate-
Group 0 up to 10 kg
tether. ly 9 months
up to approximate-
Always secure child seats properly, safely and in Group 0+ up to 13 kg
ly 18 months
accordance with the installation instructions
from the child seat manufacturer. approximately 8
Group 1 9 kg to 18 kg months to 31/2
The mounted child seat must be secured by the years
vehicle's seat belts or the ISOFIX and Top Tether
15 kg to 25 approximately 3 to
system and must not allow any longitudinal or Group 2
kg 7 years
transversal movement.
22 kg to 36 approximately 6 to
Group 3
Country-specific standards for transporting kg 12 years
children in vehicles
In addition to age range, other aspects must be
Child seats must conform to the ECE-R 441) considered for child seat adjustment purposes,
standard (Europe). Additional information can be such as weight, height, and physical build of the
obtained from your Volkswagen Dealership and child, since the child's biotype may not corre-
online at www.volkswagen.com. spond to the majority of the population within
the same age range. In case of doubts, please
Country-specific securing systems
contact a Volkswagen Dealership.
Child seat types → Fig. 42: Child seats that have been tested and approved
A Portable crib or baby convenience seat under the ECE R 44 standard bear the test mark
B Child seat firmly on the seat: a capital E in a circle, below
the test number.
C Lifting seat
Child seats by approval categories
The systems are made up of attachments for
child restraint systems for children wearing the Child seats can have the approval category “uni-
seat belt in the rear seat. versal”, “semi-universal”, “vehicle-specific” (all
according to ECE-R 44) or “i-Size” (according to
ECE-R 129). 

1) ECE Regulation: Economic Commission for Europe-Regelung

50 Owner's Manual
 Legislation and legal requirements take prece-
(Universal:) “universal” approved child seats are
dence over the descriptions in this Owner's Man-
approved for installation in all vehicles. A
ual.
template list is not required. With universal
approval for ISOFIX, the child seat must be Guidelines on the installation of a child seat
additionally secured using a top tether strap
(Top Tether). On the installation of a child seat, observe the
following general guidelines. They are valid for all
(Semiuniversal:) a “semi-universal” approval re- child seat securing systems.
quires, in addition to the normal require-
ments for universal approval, safety devices – Read and follow the child seat manufacturer
to secure the child seat that require addition- instructions → .
al testing. Child seats with “semi-universal” – Preferably mount the child seat on the rear
approval have a list of models in which the bench seat behind the front passenger seat so
vehicle must be contained. that child may exit the vehicle on the sidewalk
(Específica do veículo:) a vehicle-specific appro- side.
val requires, for each vehicle model, a dy- – Disable the front passenger front airbag when
namic test of the child seat in the vehicle, mounting a child seat facing backwards on the
carried out separately. Child seats with “vehi- front passenger seat.
cle specific” approval also have a list of mod- – When mounting the child seat on the front
els. passenger seat, position the front passenger
(i-Size:) child seats with “i-Size” approval must seat fully back → page 32.
meet the requirements laid down in the ECE- – Always leave sufficient clear space around the
R 129 standard with regard to installation child seat. Adjust the seat in front of the child
and safety. Consult the child seat manufac- seat, if necessary. Observe and follow without
turer to find out which child seats are ap- fail the correct driver seat or front passenger
proved for that vehicle according to i-Size.  seat position → page 32.
– The child seat backrest must fully rest against
the vehicle seat backrest. Adjust the backrest
Installation and child seat usage in position to have the child seat fully resting
against it. Should the installed child seat touch
the vehicle the head restraint of the vehicle seat, prevent-
ing it from correctly resting on the vehicle's
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
backrest, push the head restraint way up or re-
on page 49.
move and store it safely in the vehicle
→ page 77.
The laws of physics, which come into force on a
vehicle during a collision or any other kind of ac- Airbag sticker
cident, also apply to children → page 34. In con-
In the vehicle there will exist stickers with impor-
trast to adults and teenagers, however, children's
tant information on the front passenger front air-
muscles and bones are not yet fully developed.
bag. The content depends on the country and
Children have a higher risk for children of sus-
may vary. Check the sticker attached to the driver
taining severe injuries in case of an accident.
and/or front passenger sun visor.
Children must be transported using child re-
Prior installing a child seat backwards it is imper-
straint systems that are specifically suited to
ative to observe the warnings → .
their size, weight and physical build, as children's
bodies are not yet fully developed. Hazards of transporting children on the front
passenger seat
Country specific specifications
Not all countries allow you to transport children
In relation to the use of child seats and their se-
on the front passenger seat.
curing possibilities, there are divergent prescrip-
25A.5L1.POL.20

tions and legal determinations in force in the dif- Exceptions provided to transport children in the
ferent countries. Not all countries allow you to front seat → . 
transport children on the front passenger seat.

Safety 51
– When the vehicle only has front seats. ● Disabling the front passenger front airbag . If
– When the number of children below the age of the front passenger front airbag cannot be
10 exceeds the rear seat capacity. In this case, disabled it is not permitted to use child seats
children with greatest stature may be trans- turned backwards.
ported in the front seat, using the vehicle's ● Use only child seats approved by the child
seat belt or the appropriate securing system seat manufacturer for use on the front pas-
according to the child's age. senger seat with front and side airbag.
The triggering of the front passenger front airbag
while using a backwards installed child seat may WARNING
result in severe or fatal injuries → . Risk of injury with incorrectly installed child
A backwards installed child seat on the front pas- seats.
senger seat is to be used only when the front ● Observe and follow the child seat manufac-
passenger front airbag is disabled. A disabled turer's installation instructions and warnings.
font passenger front airbag is indicated by a PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG   warning light permanent- WARNING
ly lit on the centre console. Disabling the front Risk of injury when using a child seat turned
passenger front airbag → page 47. frontward on the front passenger seat.
Do not disable the front passenger front airbag ● Position the front passenger seat as far back
when using a forward turned child seat. When as possible to ensure the child seat remains
installing a child seat, adjust it to be as far as as far away as possible from the front pas-
possible from the front passenger front airbag. senger front airbag.
The triggering of the front passenger front airbag
● Place the seat backrest in a vertical position
may cause severe injuries → .
that allows the child seat to fit in place.
Not all child seats have been approved for use on ● The seat belt height adjustment must be ad-
the front passenger seat. The child seat must justed to the most adequate position for the
have been specially approved by the manufactur- height of the child or the child seat.
er for its use on the front passenger seat of vehi-
cles with front and side airbags. Volkswagen ● Use only child seats approved by the child
Dealerships keep an up-to-date list of approved seat manufacturer for use on the front pas-
child seats. senger seat with front and side airbag.

Hazards related with side airbags WARNING

When triggered, the side airbag may hit the In the event of an accident, the rear seat is the
child's head and severely injure the child → . safest place for children with properly fastened
seat belts.
DANGER ● A suitable child seat, correctly fitted and
Never use child seats facing backwards in the used on one of the rear seats, will provide
front passenger seat while the front passenger the maximum level of protection for children
airbag is activated. The child may be killed upon up to 12 years old in most accident scenar-
front airbag deployment, since the child seat is ios.
impacted with great strength and projected
against the backrest. WARNING
To prevent injuries from a triggered curtain or
DANGER side airbag:
Using child seats backwards on the front pas- ● Ensure that the child is not in the airbag's
senger seat increases the risk of severe or fatal deployment zone → page 42, Airbag system.
injuries to the child in case of an accident.
● Do not place objects in the side airbag's de-
ployment zone. 

52 Owner's Manual
 Attaching the child seat using the lower anchor points (ISOFIX, i-Size or
LATCH)
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter The 2 retaining rings for each child seat equipped
on page 49. with ISOFIX system or i-Size can be accessed
through the openings on the rear seat lining
→ Fig. 44.

ISOFIX installation overview

Depending on the size category A to G of the
ECE-R 161) European standard, the possibilities
of installing child seats to the ISOFIX retaining
system on the respective vehicle seats are listed
in the following table.

Fig. 44 On the vehicle seat: identification of lower

retaining rings for child seats.

Group (weight class) of child seats with ISOFIX

Group 0: up to 10 kg
Group 0: up
Group 0+: up to Group 1: 9 kg to 18 kg
to 10 kg
13 kg
Rear-facing Rear-facing
Rear-facing
(opposite to (opposite to Front-facing
Installation direction (opposite to the driv-
the driving di- the driving di- (driving direction)
ing direction)
rection) rection)
Size class F G C D E C D A B B1
Installation on the front
Seat without retaining rings; ISOFIX/LATCH fastening not available
passenger seat:
Installation in rear seats IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU

IL-SU: suitable seat to install child seats with Child seats with rigid attachment (ISOFIX or i-
ISOFIX, with “semi-universal” approval; refer to Size)
the list of vehicles of the child seat manufacturer. Guides can be used to install fixed-slot child
IUF: suitable seat to install child seats with ISO- seats, if provided along with the respective child
FIX, with “universal” approval and Top Tether seat. Guides assembled before the seat's cou-
seat belt support. pling to the ISOFIX retaining rings facilitate the
installation process and preserve the seat lining.
Installing child seats with ISOFIX or i-Size Guides are locked in both of the vehicle's ISOFIX
The installation location of the lower anchor retaining rings → .
points is marked with an ISOFIX symbol or an i- – Observe and follow the instructions
Size symbol. → page 51, Installation and child seat usage in
the vehicle.
Identification of ISOFIX anchorage
points for child seats on rear seats. – Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-
Identification of i-Size anchorage points tions when installing or removing child seats
→ . 
for child seats on rear seats.
25A.5L1.POL.20

1) ECE Economic Commission for Europe-Regelung

Safety 53
– If necessary, fold down the protective cover of WARNING
the ISOFIX or i-Size anchor points.
The lower child seat retaining rings must not be
– Fit the child seat onto the retaining rings
used as cargo strapping rings. Only secure ap-
→ Fig. 44 in the direction of the arrow. The
propriate child seats in the lower retaining
child seat must be safely and audibly (clicking
rings.
sound) secured in place.
● Only the fastening belts provided with the
– Push the head restraint fully upwards or re-
respective child seat must be used to secure
move it altogether to prevent interference
child seats with adjustable tethers (LATCH).
with the child seat → page 77.
Adapted or improvised belts must never be
– Perform a traction test in both sides of the used to secure child seats.
child seat to ensure both locks are secured.
NOTICE
Child seat with adjustable tethers (LATCH)
● In order to prevent permanent upholstery
– Observe and follow the instructions
damages, the fixed-slot fitting guides (ISOFIX)
→ page 51, Installation and child seat usage in
must be removed from the retaining rings
the vehicle.
whenever the child seat is not installed to the
– Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc- vehicle's retaining rings.
tions when installing or removing child seats
● In order to avoid damages to fabrics, uphols-
→ .
tery or guides, the fixed-slot fitting guides
– When fastening belts are provided along with (ISOFIX) must always be removed from the re-
the child seat, place the child seat on the seat taining rings before folding the rear seat for-
surface and hook the fastening belt hooks to ward. 
the retaining rings → Fig. 44.
– Push the head restraint fully upwards or re-
move it altogether to prevent interference
with the child seat → page 77.
– Evenly stretch the fastening belts in the re-
spective adjustment device. The child seat
must be properly supported on the vehicle
seat.
– Perform a traction test in both sides of the
child seat to ensure both locks are secured.

54 Owner's Manual
 Securing child seats with Top – Observe and follow the instructions
→ page 51, Installation and child seat usage in
Tether the vehicle.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter – Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-
on page 49. tions when installing or removing child seats
→ .
– If possible, fully push up or remove the head-
rest to avoid interference with the child seat
→ page 77.
– Secure the child seat to the lower ISOFIX re-
taining rings → page 53. The child seat must be
safely and audibly (clicking sound) secured in
place.
– For vehicles with the removable headrest:
Push the head restraint fully upwards or re-
move it altogether to prevent interference
with the child seat → page 77.
– For the Top Tether single-belt child seat with
integrated headrest: guide the Top Tether belt
Fig. 45 retention eyes for the top tether on the over the integrated headrest→ Fig. 46 A .
back side of the rear seat. – For V-shaped Top Tether seat belt child seat
with integrated headrest: guide the Top Tether
belt sideways on the integrated headrest to-
wards the rear → Fig. 46 B .
– Stretch the tether until the child seat is sup-
ported on the upper part of the seat backrest.
– Install the luggage compartment cover
→ page 179.

Reinstall the headrest after installing the child

seat → page 77.

WARNING
Child seat with lower retaining rings and top
tethers must be assembled as per the manufac-
turers' instructions. Otherwise, users may be
subject to severe injuries.
● Always secure only one top child seat strap
to one retaining ring in the luggage compart-
Fig. 46 On the rear seat backrest:  position of the ment.
seat belt laces in the case of non-adjustable head ● Always use appropriate retaining rings for
restraints with Top Tether individual belt,  position the respective straps.
of the seat belt laces in the case of non-adjustable
head restraints with V-shaped Top Tether belt. ● Never secure straps to strapping eyelets.
● Only the belt provided along with the re-
Besides being secured to the ISOFIX anchoring spective child seat (if available) must be used
points, ISOFIX child seats with universal approval in the Top Tether. Adapted or improvised
must also be secured with a top tether. tethers cannot be used. 
Secure the top tether only to the appropriate re-
25A.5L1.POL.20

tention eyes. The appropriate eyes for the top

tether are identified by a symbol, and, if the case,
by the inscription “TOP TETHER”.

Safety 55
Securing child seats using the seat belt
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 49.

Universal child seats may be secured with the

seat belt of seats indicated on the table with u.
When such seats cannot be secured, an X is indi-
cated.

Front passenger seat

Child seat as-
Front passen- Front passen- Rear side seats rear central
Weight class sembly direc-
ger airbag ena- ger airbag disa- seat
tion
bled bled
Secured oppo-
Group 0
site to the driv- X u u u
: up to 10 kg
ing direction
Secured oppo-
Group 0+
site to the driv- X u u u
: up to 13 kg
ing direction
Secured oppo-
site to the driv- X u u u
Group 1 ing direction
: 9 to 18 kg Secured in the
driving direc- u X u u
tion
Secured in the
Group 2
driving direc- u X u X
15 to 25 kg
tion
Secured in the
Group 3
driving direc- u X u X
22 to 36 kg
tion

Securing child seats using the seat belt – Push the head restraint fully upwards or re-
– Observe and follow the instructions move it altogether to prevent interference
→ page 51, Installation and child seat usage in with the child seat → page 77.
the vehicle. – Ensure that the seat belt is not twisted.
– Read and follow the instructions provided by – Insert the seat belt latch plate into the respec-
the child seat manufacturer. tive buckle until a "clicking" sound is heard.
– If the child seat is assembled on the front pas- – The seat belt must lie firmly and adequately
senger seat, push the front passenger seat as over the child seat or the child.
far back as possible and adjust the backrest to – Conduct seat belt traction test – ensure that
an upright position to comfortably fit the child the lower belt strap is locked and can no lon-
seat. ger be pulled out.
– The seat belt height adjustment must be ad-
justed to the most adequate position for the Removing child seats
height of the child or the child seat. Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is sta-
– Place the child seat over the seat and pass the tionary → . 
seat belt as per the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.

56 Owner's Manual
 – Press the red button in the buckle. The latch WARNING
plate is released and springs out.
Unfastening seat belts while the vehicle is in
– Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up
motion can lead to severe or fatal injuries in the
easily, without twisting the seat belt and with-
event of an accident or sudden braking or driv-
out damaging the trim.
ing manoeuvres.
– Remove the child seat from the vehicle ac-
● Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is
cording to the instructions given by the child
stationary . 
seat manufacturer.

Childproof lock The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from
being opened from the inside (e.g. so that chil-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter dren cannot open the doors accidentally while
on page 49. the vehicle is in motion).
When the childproof lock is activated the door
can only be opened from the outside.

Enabling or disabling the childproof lock

– Unlock the vehicle and open the respective
rear door.
– Fold the vehicle key blade out → page 60.
– Insert the key blade into the childproof lock
groove to enable or disable the lock → Fig. 47.

WARNING
When the childproof lock is enabled, the door
Fig. 47 Childproof lock:  rear left door,  rear cannot be opened from the inside.
right door. ● Never leave unattended children or people
with special needs in the vehicle with the
doors locked. This may mean that these peo-
ple lock themselves in the vehicle in case of
emergencies. Locked individuals can be ex-
posed to extremely high or low temperatures
or lack of breathable air.
● Depending on the time of year, locked vehi-
cles can be subjected to extremely high or
low temperatures. This can cause serious in-
juries and illness or fatalities, particularly for
small children. 

Fig. 48 On the rear door (right-hand side): child-

proof lock.

Key for→ Fig. 47:

1 Childproof lock disabled.
2 Childproof lock enabled.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Safety 57
In an emergency When the hazard warning lights are switched on,
all turn signals flash at the same time. The turn
signals   and an indicator light at the switch
Making you and your vehicle safe  flash at the same time. The hazard warning
lights also work when the ignition is switched
off.
Lit indicator lights could indicate a change in di-
rection or lane while towing or by activating the
turn signal lever. The indicator lights are tempo-
rarily interrupted.

Examples in which hazard warning lights

must be switched on:
– When traffic ahead suddenly starts moving
more slowly or you reach the tail end of a traf-
fic jam. This will warn vehicles behind you.
Fig. 49 On the upper portion of the centre console:
warning lamp switch. – When there is an emergency.
– When the vehicle breaks down.
Observe any legislation concerning the safety of – When being towed.
a broken down vehicle. For example, many coun-
tries stipulate that you have to switch on the Always follow local regulations for the use of the
hazard warning lights → page 59. hazard warning lights.
Checklist If the hazard warning lights are not working, use
an alternative method of drawing attention to
To ensure your own safety and the safety of your
the broken down vehicle (according to applicable
passengers, observe the following points in the
legal provisions).
order given→ :
1. Stop the vehicle at a safe distance away from Emergency brake lights - ESS (Emergency
moving traffic and on a suitable surface Stop Signal)
→ . For vehicles with ESS function and anti-lock
2. Switch on the hazard warning lights with the brake system (ABS), during sudden and continu-
 → Fig. 49 button. ous braking at speeds greater than 80 km/h, the
3. Apply the handbrake → page 120. brake light lamp may flash to warn cars coming
in from behind.
4. Vehicles with manual gearbox: move the gear
shift lever into the neutral position If the braking manoeuvre is further extended,
→ page 110. maintaining the same deceleration rate, the
5. Vehicles with automatic gearbox: position warning lights are automatically activated and
the selector lever to P → page 111. flash when the vehicle reaches a speed lower
than approximately 10 km/h. Upon resuming ve-
6. Stop the engine and remove the key from the hicle movement, warning lights are automatically
ignition lock → page 104. deactivated.
7. Ensure that all occupants exit the vehicle
Warning lamps may also be switched off via the
away from moving traffic and proceed to a
 dash panel → Fig. 49 switch.
safe position, e.g. behind the guardrail.
8. Take all vehicle keys with you when you WARNING
leave the vehicle.
Broken-down vehicles lacking due signalling in-
9. Place the warning triangle in position to crease the risk of accidents both for you and for
draw the attention of other road users to other road users.
your vehicle.
● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe
10. Allow the engine to cool down and, if neces- location. 
sary, seek expert assistance.

58 Owner's Manual
 ● ark the vehicle at a safe distance from mov- Emergency equipment
ing traffic in order to lock all doors securely
in an emergency.
● Switch on the hazard warning lights and set
up the warning triangle to warn other road
users.
● Never leave unattended children or people
with special needs in the vehicle with the
doors locked. This may mean that they are
locked in the vehicle in an emergency. Per-
sons locked in the vehicle may be exposed to
extremely high or low temperatures.

WARNING
Ignoring any of the points on this important
safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju- Fig. 50 On the rear lid: warning triangle holder.
ries.
Warning triangle
● Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre- The warning triangle may not be available for
cautions. some export markets.
With open boot lid, rotate the holder cover by
WARNING 90° counter-clockwise → Fig. 50 (arrow), fold the
The components of the exhaust system be- holder downward and remove the warning trian-
come very hot. This can cause fires and serious gle.
injuries. After use, fit the warning triangle back into the
● Never park the vehicle so that parts of the holder and close it.
exhaust system can come into contact with
inflammable material underneath the vehi- Fire extinguisher
cle, e.g. dry grass, fuel, etc. The fire extinguisher may not be available for
some export markets.
The vehicle battery will discharge if the haz-
According to the vehicle version, the fire extin-
ard warning lights are left on over a long
guisher support may be situated in the footwell
period of time – even if the ignition is switched
under the front passenger seat.
off.
The fire extinguisher must correspond to the le-
Whenever airbags are activated in acci- gal requirements, be always ready for use, and be
dents, warning lights may be automatically regularly inspected (see the inspection seal on
activated → page 45.  the fire extinguisher).

WARNING
Loose objects may be projected inside the vehi-
cle in the event of a sudden driving or braking
manoeuvre, as well as during accidents, and
may cause severe injuries.
● Secure the warning triangle in the respective
straps.

The warning triangle must comply with ap-

plicable legal provisions in each country. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Safety 59
Open and close – Unlock: press  . Keep pressed for conven-
ience opening. OR: insert the vehicle key into
the driver door lock cylinder and turn counter-
Vehicle key clockwise.
– Lock: press  . Press and hold for comfort clo-
Vehicle key functions sure.OR: with the stem of the vehicle key, in-
sert it into the driver's door lock cylinder and
turn in clockwise.
– Unlock the boot lid: press the button 
→ page 69. OR: insert the vehicle key into the
driver door lock cylinder and turn counter-
clockwise. The rear lid is unlocked.
– Lock: all lights flash once to confirm.
– Unlock: all lights flash twice to confirm.
Note: according to the central locking function
setting on the radio system → page 28, all doors
Fig. 51 Vehicle key with remote control. and the boot lid will only be unlocked after the
 button is pressed for the second time.

It is possible to enable/disable the sound signal

(horn) of the alarm activation/deactivation con-
firmation. Depending on the vehicle version, the
radio version, and whether it has (or not) an
alarm system:
– On the radio (variant 1), through the button
 .

– On the Vehicle configuration menu, enable or disa-

ble the sound confirmation → page 28.
– OR
– On the radio (variant 2), through the settings
button  .
Fig. 52 Mechanical key. – Touch the Car function button.
– On the Open and close menu, enable or disable
Key for→ Fig. 51: the sound confirmation → page 28.
1 Central locking button: unlock the vehicle. For the remaining vehicles go to a Volkswagen
2 Unlock the rear lid separately. dealership to enable/disable the audible confir-
3 Central locking button: lock the vehicle. mation.
4 Folding and unfolding the key blade. WARNING
5 Indicator lamp: flashes after pressing the
Improper or unsupervised use of the vehicle
button.
keys can cause severe accidents or injuries.
Locking or unlocking the vehicle from the ● Always take all vehicle keys with you every
outside time you leave the vehicle. Children or unau-
thorised persons could lock the doors and
If it is necessary to unlock or lock the vehicle
boot lid, start the engine, switch on the igni-
from the outside using the vehicle key with re-
tion and thus operate electrical equipment,
mote control through the door lock cylinder, re-
such as the electric windows.
move the cover cap → page 66.
● Never leave unattended children or people
with special needs in the vehicle. They could
become trapped in the vehicle in an 

60 Owner's Manual
 emergency and may not be able to get – Position the new battery and push it in the op-
themselves to safety. Depending on the time posite direction to the arrow 2 into the bat-
of year, for example, locked vehicles can be tery compartment → .
subjected to very high or very low tempera- – Press the cover in the opposite direction of the
tures. This can cause serious injuries and ill- arrow 1 onto the vehicle key housing until it
ness or fatalities, especially for small chil- engages.
dren.
● Never remove the vehicle key from the igni- DANGER
tion lock when the vehicle is in motion. Should 20 mm diameter batteries or other lithi-
um batteries be swallowed, severe or even fatal
NOTICE injuries may result within a short period of
Every vehicle key contains electronic compo- time.
nents. Protect the key from damage, moisture ● Always keep the vehicle key, key ring with
and excessive vibration. batteries, spare batteries, round cells and
other batteries out of the reach of children.
Press the buttons on the key only when the
● Seek medical assistance immediately if you
corresponding function is actually needed.
suspect someone has swallowed a battery.
Unnecessary activation of the button can cause
an unintentional unlocking or triggering of the
vehicle alarm (if the vehicle is equipped with the NOTICE
alarm system). This also applies when it is be- ● The vehicle key may be damaged if the battery
lieved to be beyond the effective range.  is improperly changed.
● Unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle
key. Discharged batteries should only be re-
placed with new batteries of the same voltage
Replacing the battery rating, size and specification.
● Ensure that the battery is fitted the right way
round.

The batteries contain toxic substances. This

product cannot be disposed / discarded
along with common trash. There are specific le-
gal requirements regarding the disposal / dis-
carding of used batteries. For your safety and
convenience, Volkswagen recommends replacing
the battery only at a Volkswagen Dealership. 

Fig. 53 Vehicle key: replacing the battery.

Synchronize the vehicle key
Key for→ Fig. 53:
1 Remove the cover. When it is impossible to unlock or lock the vehi-
2 Remove the battery. cle with the vehicle key, synchronize the vehicle
key or replace the battery → page 61.
Volkswagen recommends having the battery
– Fold the vehicle key blade out.
changed by a Volkswagen Dealership.
– Remove the protective driver side door handle
– Fold the vehicle key blade out. cover → page 66.
– Remove the cover 1 in the direction of the – Press the vehicle key button  . Meanwhile,
arrow → . remain next to the vehicle. 
– Remove the battery from the battery compart-
25A.5L1.POL.20

ment using an appropriate tool 2 .

Open and close 61

– Use the key bit to open the vehicle within one Unlocking or locking the vehicle
minute. The synchronization process will be
completed. with Keyless Access
– Reinstall the protective driver side door handle
cover. 

Troubleshooting
Vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
The remote control vehicle key may be tempora-
rily disabled due to obstacles, bad weather con-
ditions, weak battery, or excessive transmitters
operating in the same frequency range near the
vehicle (e.g. mobile phones or transmitters).
OR: if the buttons in the vehicle key or one of the
central locking buttons are pressed repeatedly Fig. 54 Keyless Access: proximity areas.
within a short period of time, the central locking
system will switch off briefly to prevent over-
loading. The vehicle will then be unlocked. Lock
the vehicle if necessary.

The indicator lamp does not flash

When the indicator lamp of the vehicle key does
not flash, this may indicate that the battery or
the key itself must be replaced → page 61.

Spare key
To acquire a key for the vehicle, the vehicle iden- Fig. 55 On the door handle: button to unlock or
tification number is required. lock.
Several vehicle keys may be valid for a vehicle.
A Button on the outside of the door handle.
New vehicle keys can be obtained at a
Volkswagen Dealership.  Unlocking the vehicle

1 Press the button → Fig. 55 A on the outside

of the door handle.
Keyless locking and starting Locking the vehicle
system “Keyless Access”
1 Park the vehicle and switch off the ignition.
2 Press the button → Fig. 55 A on the outside
 Introduction of the door handle.

Unlocking is indicated by a double flash of all the

Depending on the vehicle version, the Keyless Ac- turn signals, locking is indicated by a single flash.
cess locking and starting system may not be
available. Disable the Keyless Access temporarily
So that unauthorized third parties do not unlock
The Keyless Access locking and starting system
and start the vehicle improperly, it is possible to
enables that the vehicle be unlocked and locked
temporarily deactivate the Keyless Access un-
without the active use of the key. For such, a val-
locking function: 
id vehicle key must be located near the vehicle. 

62 Owner's Manual
 – Lock the vehicle with the  button on the ve- Troubleshooting
hicle key.
– Within 5 seconds, press the button on the out- Keyless Access does not work
side of the door handle → Fig. 55 A . So, don't Volkswagen recommends looking for a Dealer-
grab the door handle. The Keyless Access lock- ship Volkswagen or a specialized company.
ing and starting system is temporarily disa-
bled. If on the display of the instrument cluster
– The Keyless Access is temporarily disabled. the message Keyless defective is displayed,
Keyless Access operation failures may occur.
– To confirm the system is disabled, wait at least Contact a Volkswagen Dealership.
10 seconds and pull the door handle. The door
must not open. If no valid vehicle key is inside the vehicles
interior, or if same is not recognized, a cor-
The vehicle can only be unlocked with the vehicle
responding message will be displayed on the in-
key the next time it is unlocked. After the next
strument cluster display. This may be the case
unlocking the Keyless Access is again enabled.
when the vehicle key suffers interference from
Configure Keyless Access another radio signal or when covered by another
object, for example, an accessory for mobile de-
Depending on the radio version, Keyless Access
vices or an aluminium suitcase. 
can be configured in the menu Car from the radio.
Keyless Access can be configured in two ways:
– Single door: by pressing the button once, only
the respective door is unlocked. When pressed Central locking button and
again, all doors are locked.
– All doors: By pressing the button once, all
doors
doors are unlocked. When pressed again, all
doors are locked.
 Introduction
NOTICE
For vehicles with the Keyless Access function, The doors and boot lid can be manually locked
when the central locking is already activated and and partially unlocked, for example, when the ve-
the vehicle key is accidentally left inside the lug- hicle key or central locking system fails.
gage compartment, upon closing the boot lid, it The central locking locks all the doors and the
locks and automatically unlocks again. boot lid. The vehicle cannot be locked with the
With a low or flat vehicle or key battery, the driver door open.
vehicle may possibly not be unlocked or The vehicle can only be locked when the ignition
locked by means of the Keyless Access. The vehi- is turned off or when the driver leaves the vehicle
cle may be manually unlocked or locked with the engine turned off.
→ page 67.
A symbolic representation → page 13 on the in-
To make it possible to control a successful strument cluster display indicates that one or
locking of the vehicle, disable the unlocking more doors are not closed.  Stop driving! Open
function for a few seconds. the respective vehicle door and close it again.

A vehicle with automatic gearbox can only These symbols are also visible when the ignition
be locked when the selector lever is in the P is switched off. The indicator turns off a few mi-
position.  nutes after the vehicle is locked with the doors
closed.

WARNING
Door that are not closed properly can open
25A.5L1.POL.20

suddenly while the vehicle is in motion and

may cause severe injuries. 

Open and close 63

● In this case, stop the vehicle immediately ● Never leave unattended children or people
and close the door. with special needs in the vehicle. All doors
● Ensure that the door is closed properly and can be locked from the inside using the cen-
that the lock has engaged. tral locking button. This may mean that peo-
ple lock themselves in the vehicle. Persons
● Doors must only be opened or closed after
locked in the vehicle may be exposed to ex-
ensuring there is nothing or no one is in its
tremely high or low temperatures.
path.
● Depending on the time of year, locked vehi-
WARNING cles can be subjected to extremely high or
low temperatures. This can cause serious in-
Doors that are being held open by the door juries and illness or fatalities, particularly for
check may close in strong winds or if the vehi- small children.
cle is on a slope, which may result in injuries.
● Never leave anyone inside a locked vehicle.
● Always keep a good grip on the handle when They could become trapped in the vehicle in
opening and closing doors. an emergency and may not be able to get
themselves to safety.
WARNING ● Open and close doors and the boot lid only
The path of the doors is a dangerous area and when there is no one near its opening/clos-
may cause injuries. ing range.
● Doors should only be opened or closed when
you are sure that nobody is in their path. NOTICE
When carrying out an emergency opening or
WARNING closing procedure, remove and install parts care-
An emergency closing or opening of the doors fully in order to avoid damage to the vehicle. 
without sufficient care may result in severe in-
juries.
● When the vehicle is locked from the outside, Driver door indicator lamp
it is not possible to open the doors and the
electric windows from the inside.  Please refer to and at the start of the
● Never leave unattended children, animals or chapter on page 63.
people with special needs in the vehicle.
They could become trapped in the vehicle in The central locking indicator lamp is located in
an emergency and may not be able to get the driver door → page 9.
themselves to safety.
The vehicle locks: the red LED flashes for about
● Depending on the time of year, for example, two seconds in short intervals, then more slowly.
locked vehicles can be subjected to very high The indicator lamp does not flash, when the vehi-
or very low temperatures. This can cause se- cle was locked with the locking button of the
rious injuries and illness or fatalities, espe- central locking system in the driver door
cially for small children. → page 65. 

WARNING
Improper use of the central locking system
could cause serious injuries.
Automatic locking and unlocking
● The central locking system locks all doors.  Please refer to and at the start of the
Locking the vehicle from the inside may pre- chapter on page 63.
vent the doors from being opened uninten-
tionally and unauthorised persons from en- The central locking system enables you to lock
tering the vehicle. However, locked doors and unlock all doors, the boot lid and the tank
can delay assistance to passengers inside the flap. 
vehicle in the event of an accident or emer-
gency.

64 Owner's Manual
 Depending on the vehicle and radio version, cen-
Key for→ Fig. 56:
tral locking settings can be set in the radio sys-
tem with the button  OR with the settings  Unlocks the vehicle.
button  and touch the function surface Car  Lock the vehicle.
→ page 28.
The central locking button works either with the
Automatic locking (Auto Lock) ignition on or off, only when all doors are closed.
The vehicle locks automatically upon reaching a If the vehicle is locked from outside with the re-
speed of approximately 20 km/h. When the vehi- mote control vehicle key or through the driver
cle is locked, the indicator lamp  on the central door with the mechanical key, the central locking
locking button will shine in yellow. button will not work.

Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock) If the vehicle was locked from the inside with the
central locking button, then:
When one of the following condition occurs, all
the doors and the boot lid are automatically un- – The indicator lamp  on the button lights up in
locked: yellow when all the doors and the boot lid are
closed.
– The vehicle is stopped and the vehicle key has
been removed (only for vehicles without Key- – The anti-theft alarm system is not activated (if
less Access). the vehicle is equipped with the alarm system).
– OR: the vehicle is stationary and the  button The doors can be opened from the inside by pull-
was pressed. ing the door handle. The indicator lamp  on the
– OR: the door handle was activated to open the button turns off. The doors that were not
door. opened, as well as the boot lid, remain locked
and may not be opened from the outside. 
– OR: the airbags were triggered in an accident
→ page 45.

The automatic unlocking enables the access of

rescuers to the interior of the vehicle.
A vehicle with automatic gearbox can only be
locked when the selector lever is in the P posi-
tion. 

Central locking button

 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 63.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Fig. 56 On the driver door: central locking button.

Open and close 65

Closing or opening the driver door
in case of emergency
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 63.

Fig. 58 Driver's door handle: remove cover.

All doors are usually locked when manually lock-

ing the door. Only the driver door is manually un-
locked. Observe the anti-theft alarm instructions
→ page 63.

Fig. 57 Driver's door handle: lock cylinder. – Unfold the vehicle key bit → page 60.
– Insert the key blade from underneath into the
cover opening → Fig. 57 (arrow).
– Keep the index finger underneath the key
blade.
– Lift the cover cap with the vehicle key in the
direction indicated by the arrow → Fig. 58.
– Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder and
lock/unlock the vehicle.
– Pull the door handle and put the cover cap
back on again.

Particularities of manual unlocking

– The anti-theft alarm remains enabled in the
unlocked vehicle. However no alarm is trig-
gered → page 64.
– The alarm is triggered immediately after open-
ing the driver's door. 

66 Owner's Manual
 – Upon turning on the ignition, the electronic By unlocking the vehicle or by opening the re-
immobiliser recognizes a valid vehicle key and spective door from the inside, the manually
disables the anti-theft alarm. locked door is again unlocked.
– After unlocking an emergency start must be The doors can be unlocked and opened
performed → page 107. from inside by pulling the door release han-
The anti-theft alarm is activated after man- dle. 
ually locking the vehicle with the key blade
→ page 64. 
Troubleshooting

Locking the front passenger door  Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 63.
and rear doors in case of
emergency Indicator lamp of the driver door permanently
on
 Please refer to and at the start of the
The LED light on the driver door flashes at short
chapter on page 63.
intervals and thereafter remains lit for about 30
seconds, flashing again thereafter.
The locking system is malfunctioning.
– Contact a Volkswagen Dealership.
The doors and boot lid can be manually unlocked
or locked when the vehicle remote control key or
central locking system → page 66 e → page 71
fails.

Turn signals do not flash

When the turn signals do not flash to confirm the
locking of the vehicle:
– At least one of the doors or the boot lit is not
shut.
Fig. 59 On the doors, front right and rear: emergen-
cy locking of the vehicle with the metallic stem of – OR: in the convenience closing function not all
the key. the door windows are closed.

The front passenger door and the rear doors can Vehicle automatically locked
be manually locked. The anti-theft alarm system When one of the following conditions is applied,
will not be activated. the vehicle locks itself automatically after about
30 seconds.
– Open the door.
– Remove the rubber seal from the front of the – The vehicle was unlocked but not opened.
door. – The ignition was not turned on.
– Insert the metal shaft of the wrench into the – The boot lid was not opened.
slot → Fig. 59 and press.
– Fix the rubber seal again. Procedure when locking with a second vehicle
key
– Close the door completely.
Keyless Access: the vehicle key that is inside the
– Check if the door is locked. vehicle is blocked against engine starting as soon
– Repeat this process in other doors, if necessa- as the vehicle is locked from the outside by a
ry. second vehicle key. Press the  button on the
25A.5L1.POL.20

vehicle key left inside the vehicle to enable it to

start the engine → page 104. 

Open and close 67

Locking the vehicle after airbag deployment – One of the windows is removed, broken or
The entire vehicle is unlocked when the airbags opened.
are triggered during an accident. Depending on – Movement inside the vehicle, for vehicles with
the level of damage, the vehicle may be locked as interior movement monitoring system
follows after an accident: → page 68.
– Switch off the ignition. Switching off the alarm
– Open and close one of the doors once. – Unlocking the vehicle with the  unlocking
– Remove the key from the vehicle and close button of the vehicle key.
→ page 60. – OR: turning the ignition on with a valid vehicle
– OR: press the central locking  button in the key. A brief alarm may occur for about a sec-
driver door → page 65. ond.
With a low or flat vehicle or key battery, the – On vehicles with Keyless Access, the alarm can
vehicle may possibly not be unlocked or also be disabled by touching the door handle
locked by means of the Keyless Access. The vehi- → page 62.
cle may be manually unlocked or locked The alarm goes off once again if, after the
→ page 66. previous trigger, a new attempt to break in-
If no valid vehicle key is inside the vehicles to the same vehicle area or another protected
interior, or if same is not recognized, a cor- area occurs.
responding message will be displayed on the in- The anti-theft alarm system is not activated
strument cluster display. This may be the case by locking the vehicle from inside with the
when the vehicle key suffers interference from central locking button  .
another radio signal or when covered by another
object, for example, an accessory for mobile de- When the driver door is mechanically un-
vices or an aluminium suitcase.  locked with the key, only the driver door is
unlocked, not the entire vehicle. The central lock-
ing button is only enabled after the ignition is
switched on, after which all doors can be electri-
Anti-theft alarm system cally unlocked.

According to the vehicle version, the anti-theft The anti-theft alarm will not function cor-
alarm system may not be available. rectly if the vehicle battery is weak or dis-
charged. 
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically en-
gaged when locking the vehicle with the vehicle
key or by touching the door sensor, for vehicles
with Keyless Access. Interior monitoring system
The anti-theft alarm emits audible warning sig-
nals for about 25 seconds (per event) and visual
warning signals for up to 5 minutes when the fol-
lowing non authorized actions are executed to
the locked vehicle:

When does the system trigger an alarm?

– A door is opened.
– The engine compartment cover is opened.
– The boot lid is opened.
– Turning the ignition on with a non-valid vehi-
cle key.

Fig. 60 On the roof console: vehicle interior moni-

toring sensors (arrows). 

68 Owner's Manual
 When movement is detected in the interior of a Boot lid
locked vehicle with enabled anti-theft alarm, the
alarm is triggered and goes off → Fig. 60.

Switching on the interior monitoring system

 Introduction
Lock the vehicle using the remote control or me-
chanical vehicle key. When the anti-theft alarm is The boot lid is locked and unlocked together with
switched on, the interior monitoring system is al- the doors.
so activated.
WARNING
Temporarily disabling the vehicle interior
monitoring system Incorrect and unsupervised unlocking, opening
or closing of the boot lid can cause accidents
– Switch on the ignition. and severe injuries.
– Disable the vehicle interior monitoring system ● The boot lid must only be opened or closed
in the radio system button  OR selection after ensuring there is nothing or no one is in
button  , touch the function surface Car on its path.
the Open and close menu→ page 28, depending
on the vehicle and radio versions. ● Under no circumstances is the rear lid to be
closed with the hand on the rear window.
– Close all doors and the boot lid. The rear window may splitter and cause inju-
– Lock the vehicle with the vehicle key. ries.
The vehicle interior monitoring system is disa- ● After closing the boot lid, check to make sure
bled until the next vehicle locking. that it is closed and locked correctly so that
it does not open while the vehicle is in mo-
Under the following situations it is advisable to
tion. The closed boot lid must be flush with
disable the vehicle interior monitoring:
the body panels.
– When the vehicle needs to be carried. ● Always keep the boot lid closed while the ve-
– When the vehicle is transported. hicle is in motion so that no toxic exhaust
– When the vehicle needs to be towed with sus- fumes enter the vehicle's interior.
pended axle. ● Never open the boot lid when there is a load
– When the vehicle needs to be put in an auto- secured to it such as bikes. An open boot lid
matic vehicle washing system. may lower due to additional weight. If nec-
essary, support the boot lid or remove the
Risk of false alarm additional load.
The vehicle interior monitoring only works with ● Close and lock the boot lid and all vehicle
the vehicle completely shut. Legal provisions doors when the vehicle is not in use. Ensure
must be followed. An alarm failure may occur un- that no one remains in the vehicle.
der the following situations: ● Never leave children playing unattended in or
– If a window is fully or partly open. around the vehicle, especially when the boot
lid is open. Children could climb into the lug-
– When easily moving items such as loose gage compartment and shut the boot lid,
sheets of paper or mirror decoration items trapping themselves inside. Depending on
(e.g. air-fresheners) are left in the vehicle. the time of year, locked vehicles can be sub-
– If a mobile telephone that is left in the vehicle jected to extremely high or low tempera-
vibrates. tures. This can cause serious injuries and ill-
ness or fatalities, particularly for small chil-
A permanent disabling of the vehicle interi-
dren. 
or monitoring is not possible.
When upon enabling the anti-theft alarm
the doors or the boot lid are still open, only
25A.5L1.POL.20

the anti-theft alarm will be enabled. Only after

the closing of the doors and of the boot lid the
vehicle interior monitoring is also enabled. 

Open and close 69

● Never leave unattended children or people Closing the boot lid
with special needs in the vehicle. All doors – Pull the boot lid by its handle recess in the in-
can be locked from the inside using the cen- terior lining downward so it engages the lock
tral locking button. This may mean that peo- → .
ple lock themselves in the vehicle. Persons
When the doors are locked the boot lid is also
locked in the vehicle may be exposed to
locked.
extremely high or low temperatures.
An icon on the instrument cluster display
NOTICE → page 13 indicates when the boot lid is not
properly shut.
Before opening the boot lid, check whether there
is sufficient space to open and close the boot lid The boot lid is automatically locked when the ve-
(e.g. when parked in garages). hicle is moving.

NOTICE WARNING
Never use the rear window wiper or the rear Incorrect and unsupervised unlocking or open-
spoiler to secure loads or to hold on to. This may ing of the boot lid can cause accidents and se-
result in damages and may rip off the wiper or vere injuries.
spoiler.  ● With a luggage holder attached over the
boot lid, an unlocked boot lid is not always
recognized. An unlocked boot lid might sud-
denly open while driving.
Opening and closing the boot lid
WARNING
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 69. Incorrect and unsupervised locking of the boot
lid can cause accidents and severe injuries.
● When closing the rear lid, watch your hands
keeping them out of reach of the closing
sweep of the rear lid.

If the boot lid is not opened within a few

minutes after its unlocking it will be auto-
matically locked again. 

Fig. 61 On the centre console: boot lid release tab.

If, for instance a bicycle is installed on the boot

lid luggage holder the boot lid cannot be opened
→ . Always remove items attached to the lug-
gage holder before opening the boot lit and sup-
port the open boot lid.

Opening the boot lid

– To unlock the boot lid press the vehicle key 
button.
– OR: in the centre console, press and hold 
→ Fig. 61 for a few seconds.
– OR: depending on the vehicle and radio ver-
sions, on the radio display touch the button 
for a few seconds.

70 Owner's Manual
 Emergency boot lid unlocking Electric opening or closing the windows
The buttons are located on the doors → page 9.
 Please refer to and at the start of the Opening the window: press the button.
chapter on page 69.  Closing the window: pull the button.
Press to disable the rear door electric win-
 dows operating buttons.
The windows can still be operated using the door
buttons for a brief period after the ignition has
been switched off, provided the driver or front
passenger door is not opened.
Depending on the vehicle version and equipment
items, the convenience opening/closing and au-
tomatic closing features may not be available,
vary in functions, or only be partially available.

One-touch opening and closing

Fig. 62 In the luggage compartment: unlock the The one-touch opening and closing function
boot lid. makes it possible to fully open and close the win-
dows with a single touch. With this function it is
– Fold the rear seat backrest forwards
not required to hold the Individual button press-
→ page 75.
ed while fully opening or closing the window.
– Remove luggage items in order to reach the
boot lid from the vehicle interior. One-touch closing: pull the respective window
button upwards to its second stage.
– Unfold the vehicle key bit → page 60.
One-touch opening: press the respective window
– Insert the key blade into the opening in the
button downward to its second stage.
boot lid → Fig. 62 and move the release lever
in the direction indicated by the arrow.  Interrupting the one-touch action: press or pull
the respective window operating button once
again.

Troubleshooting Convenience opening and closing

Depending on the vehicle version and equipment
 Please refer to and at the start of the items, the convenience opening/closing and au-
chapter on page 69. tomatic closing features may not be available,
vary in functions, or only be partially available.
The boot lid cannot be opened or closed
Depending on the vehicle version, windows can
Check if something is blocking the boot lid. It
be opened and closed from the outside using the
must be possible to move the boot lid by hand.
vehicle key with the ignition off:
This may require additional force. 
– Press and hold unlock button  or lock button
 on the vehicle key. All electric windows are
opened or closed.
Windows – Closing in vehicles with Keyless Access locking
and starting system: press the door handle
button → Fig. 55 for the lock.
Open or close windows – To stop the functions, release the unlock but-
ton or the lock button on the vehicle key OR
Manually opening or closing the windows release the key.
In vehicles without electric windows, activate the
25A.5L1.POL.20

For this a valid vehicle key must be in the area of

handle located in the internal door lining to open approach. Once all windows are shut the turn in-
or close windows. dicator lamps will flash once, in confirmation. 

Open and close 71

Depending on the vehicle and radio version, dif- Closing the window without the roll-back
ferent settings can be configured for operating function
the windows on the radio system, with the but- – Try to close the window again within a few
ton  OR with the settings button  and seconds by holding the button. The roll-back
touch the function surface Car → page 28. function will be deactivated for a small sec-
tion of the path of the closing window.
WARNING – If the closing procedure takes longer than a
Improper or careless use of the electric win- few seconds, the roll-back function enabled
dows may cause severe injuries. again. The window stops in case of difficulty to
● Electric windows must only be opened or move on and opens again automatically.
closed when you are sure that nobody and – Please refer to a Volkswagen Dealership or
nothing is in their operating area. qualified workshop if the window still cannot
● Never leave children or people who require be closed.
special assistance unsupervised in the vehi-
cle when the vehicle is locked. WARNING
● Always take all vehicle keys with you every Closing the electric windows without the roll-
time you leave the vehicle. After switching back function can lead to severe injuries.
the ignition off and while the driver or front ● Always pay attention when closing electric
passenger door is not opened, the windows windows.
can still be operated for a brief period using
● Ensure that nobody obstructs the path of the
the door buttons.
electric windows, especially if the roll-back
● When transporting children on the rear function is not active.
seats, always disable the rear electric win-
● The roll-back function does not prevent fin-
dows using the safety button so they cannot
gers or other body parts from being pressed
be operated.
against the window frame, resulting in inju-
ries.
NOTICE
Rain water can enter the vehicle interior and The roll-back function is also activated if
damage the vehicle. the windows are closed using the remote
control or mechanical vehicle keys for conven-
The one-touch and roll-back functions will ience closing → page 71. 
not work if there is a fault in the electric
windows. Visit a Volkswagen Dealership or quali-
fied workshop. 
Troubleshooting
Restoring the one-touch opening and closing
Roll-back function for the electric function
windows When the battery is disconnected or low with the
windows not completely shut or, after some roll
The roll-back function for the electric windows back operations, the One touch function will be
can reduce the risk of injuries when the windows disabled and needs to be reenabled:
are closing.
– Switch on the ignition.
When the one-touch closing operation of a win- – Shut all windows and doors.
dow encounters a difficulty of movement be-
cause it is stiff or obstructed, the window will – Pull the respective window button upwards
automatically open again → . and keep it there for a few seconds.
– Release the button, then pull it up again and
– Check to see why the window has not closed. hold it in this position (till when, please?). The
– Try to close the window again. One -touch function is up and running again
– After a few repeated activations of the roll- for use. 
back function, the automatic window closing
feature may be disabled.

72 Owner's Manual
 It is possible to reenable the One-touch function
for the windows individually or for several of
Steering wheel
them simultaneously. 
Adjusting the steering wheel
position

Fig. 63 Below and to the left of the steering wheel

next to the steering column trim: steering wheel po-
sition adjustment lever.

Fig. 64 On the steering wheel: 9 o'clock and 3

o'clock positions.

According to the version of the vehicle, the ad-

justable steering column may not be available.
Adjust the steering wheel position before driving
and only while the vehicle is stationary → .
– Push the lever down, holding it by the handle
→ Fig. 63 1 .
– Adjust the proper distance between the driver
and the steering wheel → page 33 using the
driver seat controls → page 75. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Steering wheel 73
– Adjust the steering wheel position in order to
be able to hold it by its outer rim in 9 o’clock
Seats and head restraints
and 3 o’clock positions → Fig. 64 with both
hands and slightly flexed arms.
Front seat
– Firmly hold the lever by the handle and push it
upwards until the steering wheel is locked in  Introduction
place → .

WARNING Front seat adjustment options are detailed be-

● Always firmly push the lever 1 upwards by low. Always ensure the seat is secured in position
the handle after adjusting, to secure the → page 32.
steering wheel in place.
WARNING
● Never adjust the steering wheel when the
vehicle is in motion. If you require adjusting Always adjust the seat and head restraints be-
the steering wheel while driving, safely park fore driving.
the vehicle before adjusting the steering ● Push the front passenger seat as far back as
wheel. possible.
● Failure to follow these precautions may ● Adjust the driver seat in such a way that
compromise the driver’s ability to turn the there is at least 25 cm between your breast-
steering wheel while driving. bone and the hub of the steering wheel. Ad-
● To maximize airbag efficiency in case of an just the driver seat longitudinally in order for
accident, the steering wheel must be posi- pedals to be fully pressed with slightly bent
tioned facing the chest area (and not the legs, and ensuring a minimum distance be-
face). tween the driver's knees and the dash panel
of 10 cm. If your physical build makes it im-
● While driving, always keep both hands on the
possible to fulfil this requirement, contact a
rim of the steering wheel, at the at the 9
Volkswagen Dealership in order to imple-
o'clock and 3 o'clock positions → Fig. 64, to
ment any necessary modifications.
reduce the risk of injury in case the driver
front airbag is deployed. ● Never travel with the backrest tilted far back.
The further back the backrest is tilted, the
● Never hold the steering wheel in the 12
greater the risk of injury caused by incorrect
o’clock position or other positions in which
seat belt routing or an incorrect sitting posi-
the arms are located over the airbag, since
tion.
this may result in arm and hand injuries in
case the airbag is deployed. ● Never travel with the backrest tilted for-
wards. When an airbag is triggered it could
● Failure to observe the above instructions
force the seat backrest backwards and injure
have a direct negative influence on the driv-
vehicle occupants on the back seats.
ers protection in case of a frontal collision of
the vehicle. ● Adopt and maintain the greatest possible

distance to the steering wheel and dash pan-
el.
● You should always sit upright with your back
against the seat backrest with the front seats
properly adjusted. Do not position any body
part too close where the airbags are fitted.
● The risk of serious injury is increased for pas-
sengers on the rear seat if they are not sit-
ting upright because the seat belts are incor-
rectly positioned. 

74 Owner's Manual
 WARNING Adjusting the seat position

Incorrect seat adjustment may cause accidents Key for→ Fig. 65:
and severe injuries. 1 Action the lever and adjust the backrest rake
● The seats may only be adjusted when the ve- to the desired position. Release the lever to
hicle is stationary, since the seat could oth- secure the seat backrest in place.
erwise change position unexpectedly while 2 Only the driver seat, move the lever several
the vehicle is in motion, leading to a loss of times up or down to adjust the seat height.
vehicle control. Additionally, an incorrect
3 Pull the lever to move the front seat front or
seating position is adopted while adjusting
backward. The front seat must be locked in
the seat.
place after releasing the lever. 
● Adjust the height, inclination and longitudi-
nal direction of the driver's seat only when
no one is in the seat adjustment area.
● The area for adjustment of the front seats
may not be restricted by any items. 
Rear seats

 Introduction
Manual front seat adjustment
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter The adjustment options for the rear seat are de-
on page 74. scribed below. Ensure that the seat position is
properly adjusted → page 32.

Rear seat bench

The rear seat bench has clamping sleeves that
secure the seat in place. The clamping sleeves
may be damaged if the seat is disassembled, in
which case they must be replaced.
Volkswagen does not recommend disassembling
the seat bench or replacing the clamping sleeves
without assistance. Contact a Volkswagen Deal-
ership for more information.

WARNING
Improperly secured rear seat benches may
cause severe injuries.
● Ensure the seat belt is not caught or dam-
aged in the rear seat bench.
● No passengers of any age must be transpor-
Fig. 65 On the front seat: controls. ted in the rear seat bench if it is not secured
in place.
All the possible controls are described below. Ac-
cording to the seat version the quantity of con- WARNING
trols may vary. An incorrect rear seat adjustment may cause
accidents and severe injuries.
● Adjust the rear seat only with the vehicle at
standstill, as to the contrary, the rear seat
25A.5L1.POL.20

may move unexpectedly while driving. Addi-

tionally, an incorrect seating position is
adopted while adjusting the seat. 

Seats and head restraints 75

● Adjust the rear seat only when there is no Folding the rear seat backrest backwards
one in the adjustment area of the rear seat. – Fold the rear seat backrest backwards and
firmly press it until it clicks securely in place
NOTICE → .
With the rear seat folded objects may enter the – The rear seat backrest must always be securely
space between the seat and the luggage com- engaged in order to ensure proper protection
partment floor. Prior pushing the rear seat back- of the rear seat belts.
wards, remove possible objects from the inter- – The red marker → Fig. 66 2 must no longer be
mediary space.  visible.

WARNING
Folding the rear seat backrest ● When folding the rear seat backrest for-
wards, always ensure that there is no one in
forward or backwards the rear seat backrest area.
 Please refer to and at the start of the ● Never fold the rear seat backrest forwards or
chapter on page 75. backwards while the vehicle is in motion.
● Ensure that the seat belt is not trapped or
damaged when folding back the rear seat
backrest.
● Always keep hands, fingers, feet or other
body parts away from the seat area when
folding the rear seat backrest forwards and
backwards.
● The rear seat backrest must always be se-
curely engaged in order to ensure proper
protection of the rear seat belts. This applies
especially to the centre seat of the rear seat.
If a seat is occupied and the respective rear
seat backrest has not clicked securely into
place, the seat occupant and rear seat back-
Fig. 66 On the rear seat backrest: unlocking button. rest may move forward in the event of a sud-
den braking or driving manoeuvre or during
Depending on the vehicle, the rear seat backrest accidents.
is split. Each rear seat backrest section can be ● The red marking 2 indicates that the back-
folded forward individually to increase the lug- rest section is not docked. Always check
gage compartment. whether the red marking is visible while the
rear seat back rest is in upright position.
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
● If the rear seat backrest is tilted forward or is
– Push the head rest all the way down not securely locked in place, people or chil-
→ page 77. dren of any age cannot be transported in
– Pull the release button → Fig. 66 1 forward such seat.
and simultaneously fold the rear seat backrest
forward. NOTICE
– The respective section of the rear seat back- Folding the rear seat backrest back and forth in
rest will be released when the red marker an uncontrolled or careless fashion may result in
→ Fig. 66 2 pops up. damages to the vehicle and other objects.
● Before folding the rear seat backrest forward,
adjust the front seats in order to ensure that
the rear seat upholstery or head restraint do
not come into contact with the front seats. 

76 Owner's Manual
 ● Always prior folding the rear seat backrest for- WARNING
ward, ensure that there are no objects in the
Driving without head restraints or with incor-
rear seat backrest area.
rectly adjusted head restraints increases the
risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of an
NOTICE accident or sudden driving or braking manoeu-
● On the centre rear seatbelt there is a latch vre.
plate height adjuster. When folding the rear ● If a seat is occupied, the head restraint for
seat backrest, the latch plate height adjuster that seat must be fitted and adjusted proper-
and the latch plate may eventually slip under- ly.
neath the seat. Should this happen, slide them ● Each vehicle occupant must adjust the head
back to a ready for use position. restraint to suit their body size, to help re-
● Keep the height adjuster always in a position duce the risk of neck injuries in case of acci-
favouring the handling of the latch plate and dents. At the same time, the top edge of the
such that prevents it from making noise while head restraint must be level with the top of
driving.  the head, but no lower than eye level. Posi-
tion the back of your head as close to the
head restraint as possible.
● Never adjust the head restraint when the ve-
Head restraints hicle is in motion.

NOTICE
 Introduction When removing or fitting head restraints, make
sure that they do not hit the roof or front seat
backrest. Otherwise, the roof and other vehicle
Depending on the vehicle version, the rear seat parts could otherwise be damaged. 
headrests are integrated to the seat backrests
and are not adjustable.
The headrest adjustment and extension possibili-
ties are described below. Ensure correct posture Adjusting, uninstalling and
is adjusted → page 32. installing the headrest
All seats are equipped with head rests. The cen-
tre rear head restraint is designed solely for use
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 77.
with the centre rear seat. For this reason do not
install the head restraint in other positions.

Correct head rest setting

Adjust the head rest so that its top edge is at the
same height as the top of the head – but not
lower than eye level. Position the back of your
head as close to the head restraint as possible.

Head restraint setting for shorter people

Push the head restraint all the way down, even if
the head is then located underneath the top edge
of the head rest. There may be a small gap be-
tween the head rest and backrest in the lowest
position.
Fig. 67 Rear seat head restraints: adjust.
Head restraint setting for taller people
25A.5L1.POL.20

Push the head restraint up as far as possible. Depending on the vehicle version, the seat headr-
ests may vary from model to model. 

Seats and head restraints 77

Adjusting the head rest height Front centre arm rest
– Move the headrest up or down in the direction To raise, pull the centre armrest gradually up-
of the arrow with the button → Fig. 67 1 held ward in the direction indicated by the arrow
down → in Introduction on page 77. → Fig. 68.
– The head restraint must click securely into po- To lower, pull the centre armrest downward.
sition.
WARNING
Removing the rear head rest
The front centre armrest may restrict the driv-
– If needed, adjust the seat backrest so that the
er's liberty of arm movement and lead to se-
head restraint may be removed.
vere accidents and injuries.
– Push the head rest all the way up → in In-
● Always keep the centre armrest stowage
troduction on page 77.
area closed while driving.
– Press and hold → Fig. 67 1 to remove the
● Never ever transport a person or a child of
head rest.
any age on the centre armrest. Needless to
Fitting the rear head rest say that it is forbidden to do so. 
– Release the rear seat backrest and fold it a bit
forward → page 75.
– Position the head rest correctly over the head
rest guides and then insert into the guides of
the corresponding seat backrest.
– Press and hold → Fig. 67 1 to push the head
rest downwards.
– Push back the rear seat backrest and allow to
engage securely.
– Adjust the head rest so that a correct sitting
position can be assumed → page 77. 

Seat functions

Centre arm rest

Fig. 68 Front centre arm rest.

78 Owner's Manual
 Lights WARNING
Misuse or lack of use of turn signals, as well as
Turn signals forgetting to switch them on when appropri-
ate, may confuse other road users. This could
lead to accidents and severe injuries.
Turn signals on /off ● Changing lanes, overtaking and conversion
manoeuvres must always be indicated ap-
propriately by using the turn signals.
● Turn off turn signals after changing lanes or
completing overtaking and conversion ma-
noeuvres.

The hazard warning lights also work when

the ignition is switched off → page 58, In an
emergency.
If one turn signal fails on the vehicle or on
the trailer, the indicator lamp will start
Fig. 69 On the left on the steering column: turn sig- flashing approximately twice as fast. 
nal and main beam lever.

– Switch on the ignition.

– Move the turn signal and main beam lever
from the centre position to the following posi- Driving lights
tion:

A Right turn signal . Lights, switching on and off

B Left turn signal .

– Place the turn signal and main beam lever into

its basic position to switch the turn indicators
off.
If the sound signal does not sound with the turn
indicator turned on, visit your Volkswagen deal-
ership or specialized workshop to have the vehi-
cle checked.

Intermittent convenience signals

To enable the convenience turn signal, move the Fig. 70 Next to the steering wheel: light switch
turn signal and main beam lever up or down just (one variant).
to the point of resistance and release it. The turn
signals flash three times. Observe any country-specific regulations when
using vehicle lighting.
To interrupt the convenience turn signal before
time out, move the lever immediately in the con- Depending on the vehicle version, the  func-
trary direction until the point of resistance and tion may not be available.
release it.
Turning the lights on
Depending on the vehicle and radio version, con-
– Switch on the ignition.
venience turn signals can be enabled or disabled
in the radio system with the button  OR with – Turn the light switch to the corresponding po-
the settings button  and and touch the func- sition: 
25A.5L1.POL.20

tion surface Car → page 28.

Lights 79
 Automatic activation of the driving lights: ● The rear lights are not connected to the day-
the driving lights are automatically turned time running lights. A vehicle without rear
on and off according to the brightness and lights on may not be seen by other drivers in
weather condition → , → page 80. darkness, during rainstorms or other poor
 Side lights switched on. The icon on the visibility conditions.
light switch shines in green colour.
 Dipped beam headlights switched off. WARNING
The automatic driving light control () only
Turning the lights off
switches the dipped beam on or off in case of
– Switch off the ignition. lighting variations.
– Turn the light switch to the corresponding po- ● Turn the dipped beam on manually in case of
sition: special weather conditions, such as fog. 
 The lights are off.
 The “Leaving home” function (orientation
lighting) may be on → page 80. Functions of the lights
 Side lights switched on. The icon on the
light switch shines in green colour. Side light
 Dipped beam off - while the vehicle key is When the light switch is turned to position ,
inserted in the ignition or, on vehicles with both headlights with the side lights, parts of the
Keyless Access the driver door is closed, tail lights, the registration plate light, the button
the side lights stay on. lights on the centre console and on the instru-
ment cluster turn on.
Daytime Running Light - DRL (Daytime
Running Light) Automatic driving light control 
The daytime running lights, according to the ve- Depending on the vehicle version, the automatic
hicle configuration, may increase the visibility of driving light control () may not be available.
your vehicle in urban traffic during daytime.
The automatic driving light control is simply an
The daytime running light turns on every time ancillary system, which may not sufficiently rec-
the ignition is turned on, when the light switch is ognize all driving conditions.
switched to ,  or  (with brightness detec-
tion). While the automatic driving light control is acti-
vated, low beams and lamps are automatically
The daytime running lights cannot be manually switched if the twilight sensor detects low light-
switched on or off. ing on the exterior environment, such as when
crossing a tunnel during the day, or during night
WARNING time. Whenever the vehicle is in an environment
Severe injuries and accidents may occur if the with intense solar lighting, with the light switch
road is not adequately illuminated and if the in position , low beams and lamps will be au-
vehicle or pedestrians are not visible. tomatically switched off by the electric central
● Assist lighting systems are merely ancillary. system. And the daytime running lights will turn
The driver is responsible for controlling prop- on.
er vehicle lighting. The twilight sensor is located next to the rain
● Always switch dipped beam headlights on sensor → page 87.
with low light, fog or poor visibility.
Acoustic warnings if lights are not switched
off
WARNING
When the vehicle key is removed from the igni-
The side lights are not powerful enough to illu- tion and the driver door is opened, acoustic
minate the street and make your vehicle seen warnings will be emitted under the following cir-
by other road users. cumstances:
● Always switch dipped beam headlights on
with low light, fog or poor visibility. – light switch in position  or . 

80 Owner's Manual
 With the “Coming Home” function turned on,
Move the turn signal and high beam lever from
when the driver door is opened, no acoustic
the central position to the following position
alarm is sounded to indicate that the lights are
(variant 2) → Fig. 72:
still on. 
A  Main beam turned on.
B Operate the headlight flasher or turn the
main beam off.
Main beam on/off
With the main beams on or when flashing the
headlights the blue indicator lamp lights up  on
the dash panel insert.

WARNING
Setting headlights too high, and the incorrect
use of the main beam, could distract and dazzle
other road users. This could lead to accidents
and severe injuries.
● Always ensure that the headlights are adjus-
ted correctly.
Fig. 71 Left on the steering column: turn signal and ● Never use the main beam or the headlight
high beam lever (variant 1). flasher if other road users could be dazzled. 

Automatic high beam function

Depending on the vehicle version, the automatic
high beam function may not be available.
The automatic high beam function automatically
prevents glare when vehicles coming in the op-
posite direction or driving ahead are identified. In
addition, the automatic high beam function rec-
Fig. 72 Left on the steering column: turn signal and ognizes generally illuminated areas and deacti-
high beam lever (variant 2). vates the high beam when passing through vil-
lages, for example.
Depending on the vehicle version, the turn signal Within the limits of the system, the high beam
and high beam lever may change. switches on and off automatically, depending on
– Turn ignition and dipped beam on. ambient and traffic conditions, as well as driving
speed.
Move the turn signal and high beam lever from
the central position to the following position Switching on the automatic high beam
(variant 1)→ Fig. 71: function 
A Main beam turned on. 1 Switch on the ignition.
B Turn on the headlight flasher. The headlight 2 Turn on automatic light control .
flasher remains lit for as long as the lever is 3 By tapping, move the turn signal and high
pulled. The high beam is deactivated when beam lever forward from the base position.
changing the lever position A to the centre
position. With the automatic high beam function on, the
control light comes on  on the instrument clus-
25A.5L1.POL.20

ter display. If the automatic high beam function

is active, the blue control light  of the high
beam lights up in the combined instrument pan-
el. 

Lights 81
Turn off the automatic high beam function ● Always check the driving light yourself and
Turn off the automatic high beam function . adjust it to light, visibility and traffic condi-
tions.
Or: if the automatic high beam function is
switched on and active, pull back the turn signal ● The dynamic main beam adjustment system
and high beam lever. may not correctly identify all driving condi-
tions and only operate in certain situations
Or: if the automatic high beam function is with restrictions.
switched on and active, touch the turn signal and
high beam lever forwards. The manual high beam ● If the camera's viewing area is dirty, covered
is now on. To switch off the manual high beam, if or damaged, the operation of the high beam
applicable, pull the turn signal and high beam adjustment may be affected. This also ap-
lever backwards. plies to changes to the vehicle's lighting sys-
tem, for example due to the installation of an
Or: turn off the ignition. additional headlight.
System limitations
NOTICE
The main beam must be manually turned off in
the following conditions, since it is not turned off In order not to influence the operating capacity
by the dynamic main beam adjustment: of the system, the following points must be ob-
served:
– In poorly lit areas with high reflection. ● Clean the camera's viewing area regularly and
– In poor road lighting conditions, such as pe- keep it clean.
destrian and cyclist lighting. ● Do not cover the camera's viewing area.
– In hairpin curves with semi-covered two-way ● Regularly check the windshield in the camera's
road, steep uphill or downhill areas. view area for damage. 
– With incoming vehicles in the opposite direc-
tion in roads with centre guards, whenever the
driver’s field of vision can clearly be obstructed
by the centre guard (e.g. truck driver). Dynamic main beam adjustment
– In fog, snow or heavy rainfall.
Depending on the vehicle version, dynamic main
– In dust and sand storms. beam adjustment may not be available.
– In case of windscreen damages in the camera
The dynamic adjustment of the high beams illu-
line-of-sight area.
minates the track and its boundaries as much as
– If the camera’s line of sight is blurry, dirty or possible. At the same time, glare from the vehicle
covered by stickers, ice and snow. ahead or traffic in the opposite direction is avoi-
– If the camera automatically turns off due to ded. With a camera, the system recognizes other
high ambient temperature or long periods of road users who have their own lighting, as well
direct sunlight. If the camera is available again, as their distance from the vehicle itself, and spe-
the high beam adjustment will also be availa- cifically turns off areas in the light distribution.
ble again. When glare from another road user can no longer
– In case of malfunctioning cameras or power be avoided, the main beam is switched off com-
shortage. pletely. In addition, the dynamic main beam con-
trol generally recognizes illuminated regions and
WARNING deactivates the main beam when driving, for ex-
ample through villages.
The increased level of comfort provided by high
beam adjustment cannot replace the driver's Within the limits of the system, the high beam
attention. Improperly connecting the high switches on and off automatically, depending on
beams can cause accidents and serious injuries, ambient and traffic conditions, as well as driving
as the high beams can be distracting and dazzle speed.
other road users. Dynamic main beam control can be activated and
deactivated in the vehicle settings in the Info-
tainment system. 

82 Owner's Manual
 Turn on dynamic main beam adjustment – If the camera automatically turns off due to
high ambient temperature or long periods of
1 Switch on the ignition. direct sunlight. If the camera is available again,
2 Turn on automatic light control . the high beam adjustment will also be availa-
3 By tapping, move the turn signal and high ble again.
beam lever forward from the base position. – In case of malfunctioning cameras or power
shortage.
If the high beams are switched on, the control
light comes on  on the instrument cluster dis- WARNING
play. If the high beam adjustment is active, the
blue control light  of the high beam lights up in The increased level of comfort provided by high
the combined instrument panel. beam adjustment cannot replace the driver's
attention. Improperly connecting the high
Turn off dynamic main beam adjustment beams can cause accidents and serious injuries,
Turn off automatic light control . as the high beams can be distracting and dazzle
other road users.
Or: if the high beam adjustment is on and active,
● Always check the driving light yourself and
pull back the turn signal and high beam lever.
adjust it to light, visibility and traffic condi-
Or: if the high beam adjustment is on and active, tions.
touch the turn signal and high beam lever for- ● The dynamic main beam adjustment system
wards. may not correctly identify all driving condi-
The manual high beam is now on. To switch off tions and only operate in certain situations
the manual high beam, if applicable, pull the turn with restrictions.
signal and high beam lever backwards. ● If the camera's viewing area is dirty, covered
Or: turn off the ignition. or damaged, the operation of the high beam
adjustment may be affected. This also ap-
System limitations plies to changes to the vehicle's lighting sys-
The main beam must be manually turned off in tem, for example due to the installation of an
the following conditions, since it is not turned off additional headlight.
by the dynamic main beam adjustment:
NOTICE
– In poorly lit areas with high reflection.
In order not to influence the operating capacity
– In poor road lighting conditions, such as pe- of the system, the following points must be ob-
destrian and cyclist lighting. served:
– In hairpin curves with semi-covered two-way ● Clean the camera's viewing area regularly and
road, steep uphill or downhill areas. keep it clean.
– With incoming vehicles in the opposite direc- ● Do not cover the camera's viewing area.
tion in roads with centre guards, whenever the
driver’s field of vision can clearly be obstructed ● Regularly check the windshield in the camera's
by the centre guard (e.g. truck driver). view area for damage. 
– In fog, snow or heavy rainfall.
– In dust and sand storms.
– In case of windscreen damages in the camera “Coming Home” and
line-of-sight area. “Leaving Home” functions
– If the camera’s line of sight is blurry, dirty or (orientation lighting)
covered by stickers, ice and snow.
With the orientation lighting, the area next to the
vehicle is illuminated when leaving (“Coming
Home”) and when arriving at the vehicle (“Leav-
25A.5L1.POL.20

ing Home”). For vehicles with light and rain sen-

sors, the “Leaving Home” function is automati-
cally controlled. 

Lights 83
By activating the “Coming Home” or “Leaving Head light range control
Home” function, the dipped beam headlight and
side lights are lit up as orientation lighting.
Depending on the vehicle and radio versions, the
switch-off delay, enabling and disabling the
function, may be configured in the radio system
through the button  in the Vehicle settings menu
and enabling or disabling the function OR by
touching the selection button  , by touching
the function surface Car on the Light settings
→ page 28 menu:

Turning the “Coming Home” function on

– Switch off the ignition. Fig. 73 Next to the steering wheel: control of the
headlight range 1 .
– Action the headlight flasher for about one sec-
ond.
The “Coming Home” lighting is turned on upon
opening of the driver door. The switch off delay
time starts with the closing of the last vehicle
door or of the boot lid.

Turning the “Coming Home” function off:

– Automatically after the set lighting delay time
has run out.
– OR: automatically when after about 30 sec-
onds after having been turned on, a door or
the boot lid of the vehicle remains open.
– OR: rotate the light switch to position .
Fig. 74 In the engine compartment: headlight range
– OR: turning the ignition on.
adjustment switch.
Turning the “Leaving Home” function on:
Depending on the vehicle version, headlight
– Unlock the vehicle when the light switch is range adjustment may not be available or may
positioned to  and the rain and light sensor vary.
detects darkness.
With the headlight range control, the low beam
Turning the “Leaving Home” function off light can be adjusted based on vehicle occupa-
– Automatically after the set lighting delay time tion and luggage compartment load conditions.
has run out. Thereby the driver has the best possible visibility
conditions without dazzling the opposite drivers.
– OR: locking the vehicle.
– OR: rotate the light switch to position . Headlight range adjustment with a switch
– OR: turning the ignition on.  next to the steering wheel:
The headlight range can be adjusted with the
→ Fig. 73 switch.

Occupied front seats and empty luggage

 compartment.
All seats occupied and empty luggage
 compartment.
All seats occupied and loaded luggage
 compartment.
Only the driver seat occupied and fully loa-
 ded luggage compartment. 

84 Owner's Manual
 Headlight range adjustment with switch in Driving lighting
engine compartment: Driving lights completely or partially out.
The headlight range can be adjusted with the  Check the vehicle lights and replace the re-
→ Fig. 74 switch. Turn the switch in the direction spective bulb when burned out
of (arrow): → page 197. When all bulbs are in good or-
der, call on a specialized workshop. 
Occupied front seats and empty luggage
 compartment.
All seats occupied and empty luggage
 compartment.
All seats occupied and loaded luggage Interior lighting
 compartment. OR
Only the driver seat occupied and fully loa-
ded luggage compartment.
Instruments and switches lighting
Depending on the vehicle and radio version,
WARNING switch and instrument lighting brightness can be
Heavy objects in the vehicle may affect head- adjusted in the radio system with the button 
light visibility and distract other road users. OR with the settings button  and by touching
This could lead to accidents and severe injuries. the function surface Car → page 28.
● Always adjust the light beam to current vehi- The adjusted brightness is automatically adjusted
cle occupation and luggage compartment according to the ambient brightness in the vehi-
load conditions, in order to avoid dazzling cle.
other road users. 
When the light switch is turned to , a sensor
automatically switches the dipped beams, as well
as the instrument and switch lighting on and off
Masking or switching over according to the ambient brightness.
headlights With the light switched off and the ignition
on, the instruments lighting (needles and
When driving in countries with opposite driving dials) is turned on. With the decrease of the am-
directions, the asymmetric dipped beam head- bient brightness the lighting of the dials is auto-
lights may dazzle oncoming traffic. Therefore, matically reduced and, if necessary, turned off
the headlights must be masked or switched over completely. This function should remind the driv-
when driving in such countries. er to turn on the dipped beams, for example,
If applicable, mask certain areas of the headlight when driving through tunnels. 
with thin layers or switch over the position in a
specialized company. Additional information can
be obtained from your Volkswagen Dealership or
qualified workshop.
Interior and reading lights
The use of thin layers over the headlights is Depending on the vehicle version, some interior
only allowed for short periods of time. Seek lighting functions may not be available.
out a Volkswagen Dealership for a permanent Press the respective button:
switch over. 
Turning the front interior lighting on and
 off.
Turn on the automatic lighting of the inte-
Troubleshooting  rior lights when unlocking the vehicle,
opening a door or removing the vehicle key
Turn signals from the ignition cylinder. 
  Left or right turn signals. The indicator
25A.5L1.POL.20

lamp flashes twice as fast from normal

when one of the vehicle's turn lights has
burned out. Check vehicle lighting.

Lights 85
 or  Switch off the automatic lighting of the
interior lights when unlocking the vehi-
Visibility
cle, opening a door or removing the vehicle
key from the ignition cylinder.
Window wipers and washers
Switches the respective reading light
  /
on or off. Window wiper lever
Glove and luggage compartment lights
According to the vehicle version, the glove com-
partment light and the luggage compartment
light may not be available.
Upon opening and closing the glove compart-
ment or the boot lid, a light automatically turns
on or off.
The interior and reading lights are switched
off after locking the vehicle or a few mi-
nutes after the key is removed from the ignition.
This prevents the battery from discharging.
When airbags are triggered during an acci-
dent, interior lights may be automatically Fig. 75 To the right of the steering column: control
activated → page 45, In case of airbag triggering the windscreen wipers/washers.
- Crash detection function. 

Fig. 76 To the right of the steering column: control

the rear window wiper/washer.

Wipers only work with the ignition turned on,

while washers also work when the ignition is off.

move the windscreen wipers lever to the desired

position→ :
A  Windscreen / rear window wipers switch-
ed off.
B  Interval wipe of the windscreen wipers or
operation of the rain and brightness sensor.
The windscreen wiper interval wipe operates
according to the vehicle's speed. The faster
the vehicle, the more frequent will be the
wiping of the wipers.
C  Slow wipe.
D  Fast wipe.
E x touch wipe – brief cleaning. 

86 Owner's Manual
 F  The windscreen washer system is active NOTICE
while the lever is pulled.
Do not switch the windscreen wipers on when
1  Adjust the rain sensor sensitivity, if equip-
the window is dry. Dry wiping can damage the
ped.
window glass.
G  Rear window wiper system on. The rear
window wiper performs a swipe at approxi- NOTICE
mately every 6 seconds.
In icy conditions, always check if the windscreen
H  The rear window washer system is active
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before
while the lever is pressed. using the windscreen wipers! 

WARNING
At low winter temperatures, the water of the
windscreen washer system without sufficient Function of the window wipers
antifreeze can freeze on the windscreen and
limit front visibility. Automatic rear window wiper operation
The rear window wiper turns on automatically
● At winter temperatures, only use windscreen
when the windscreen wipers are on and reverse
washing water with sufficient antifreeze.
gear is engaged. Depending on the vehicle and
● Never use the windscreen washer system at radio version, automatic reverse gear engage-
winter temperatures before the windscreen ment can be enabled or disabled on the radio
has been heated with the ventilation system. system with the button  OR with the settings
The antifreeze mixture may otherwise freeze button  and by touching the function surface
on the windscreen and restrict vision. Car → page 28. 

WARNING
Worn or dirty window wiper blades reduce visi-
bility and increase the risk of accidents and se-
Rain and brightness sensor
vere injuries.
● Windscreen wiper blades should therefore
always be changed when they are damaged
or worn.

NOTICE
If the ignition is switched off while the wind-
screen wipers are switched on, the windscreen
wipers will resume operation from the same po-
sition after the ignition is switched back on;
however, in this condition (ignition switched off
Fig. 77 To the right of the steering column: window
while windscreen wipers were switched on), the
wipers lever.
windscreen wipers return to the default position.
Ice, snow, and other obstacles on the window Depending on the vehicle version, the rain and
can damage the windscreen wipers and the brightness sensor may not be available.
windscreen wiper motor.
The activated rain and brightness sensor auto-
● Remove snow and ice from the windscreen
matically controls the window wiper intervals ac-
wipers before driving.
cording to rain intensity. 
● Carefully release the frozen window wipers
from the window. Volkswagen recommends
using an antifreeze spray for such activity.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Visibility 87
Enabling and disabling the rain and brightness – Salt streaks: during winter time, salt streaks
sensor on the window may cause extremely long wip-
Press the lever into the required position ing patterns until the window is nearly dry.
→ Fig. 77: – Dirt: dry dust, wax, glass lining (lotus effect),
– Position A - rain sensor disabled. and detergent residues (car wash) may reduce
the rain sensor's sensitivity, eventually reduc-
– Position B - rain sensor enabled, automatic ing its speed or effectiveness. Regularly clean
wiping if necessary. the rain sensor's sensitive surface → page 255
Depending on the vehicle and radio version, au- and regularly check the window wiper blades
tomatic wipers can be enabled or disabled on the for damages.
radio system with the button  OR with the – Crack in the windscreen: the impact of a rock
settings button  and by touching the function will activate a wiping cycle when the rain sen-
surface Car → page 28. sor is enabled. After that, the sensor detects
When the automatic wiping is disabled in the ra- the reduced sensitivity surface and adjusts. Ac-
dio system, the interval time is adjusted at fixed cording to the rock's impact area, rain sensor
levels. activation behaviour may be affected.
– Stickers and labels: the sensor region must not
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity be externally or internally covered; otherwise,
Depending on the vehicle version, the rain sensor the automatic lighting functions and rain sen-
sensitivity setting may not be available. sor will not operate properly.
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted A glass-cleaning product, such as alcohol, is rec-
manually with the switch on the wiper lever ommended to remove wax and polishing resi-
→ Fig. 77 1 → . dues from the windows.
– Turn the switch to the right – high sensitivity. Wipers will attempt to remove any obsta-
– Turn the switch to the left – low sensitivity. cles on the windscreen. If the obstacle con-
tinues to block the windscreen wipers movement
WARNING the wipers will stop. Remove the obstacle and re-
activate the wipers. 
The rain and brightness sensor may not suffi-
ciently detect rain and fail to activate the win-
dow wipers.
● If necessary, manually activate window wip-
ers whenever the rain affects visibility.  Mirrors

 Introduction
Troubleshooting
Altered behaviour of the rain and brightness In order to ensure safety, the driver must proper-
sensor activation ly adjust exterior and interior mirrors before driv-
ing → .
The possible causes for damages and misinter-
pretations in the sensitivity surface area of the Drivers are able to notice traffic movements be-
rain sensor are among others the following: hind them and adjust driving behaviours accord-
ingly using the exterior and interior mirrors.
– Damaged windscreen wiper blades: a water
There are some areas to the side and behind the
film or wiping stripes due to damaged wiper
vehicle that cannot be seen through the exterior
blades may extend the activation period, re-
and interior mirrors. Such areas are called blind
duce wiping intervals, or result in quick contin-
spots. There may be other vehicles, pedestrians
uous wiping.
and objects in blind spots. 
– Insects: the presence of insects may activate
automatic wiping.

88 Owner's Manual
 WARNING ● In case of contact of the electrolytic fluid
with footwear or clothes wash them imme-
Adjusting exterior and interior mirrors while
diately with plenty water for at least 15 mi-
driving may distract the driver. This could lead
nutes. Carefully clean the affected clothing
to accidents and severe injuries.
items prior using them again.
● Only adjust exterior and interior mirrors
● In case of ingestion of the electrolytic fluid,
while the vehicle is stationary.
immediately wash the mouth with plenty
● When parking, changing lanes and during water for at least 15 minutes. Do not induce
overtaking or conversion manoeuvres, al- vomiting unless directed to do so by medical
ways observe the vehicle's surroundings, personnel. Immediately seek medical assis-
since other vehicles or objects may be loca- tance.
ted in blind spots.
● Always ensure that the mirrors are properly NOTICE
adjusted and that rear visibility is not limited The electrolytic fluid contained in automatic anti-
by misting or other objects. dazzle mirrors may leak due to a broken mirror
glass. This fluid damages plastic surfaces. Re-
WARNING move the fluid as quickly as possible, for exam-
Inaccurate assessment of the distance of vehi- ple, with a damp sponge. 
cles coming from behind may cause severe ac-
cidents and injuries.
● The domed surfaces of exterior mirrors (con-
vex) increase visibility and make objects ap-
Interior mirror
pear smaller and more distant.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
● Using the left and right-hand exterior mirrors chapter on page 89.
to assess the distance of vehicles coming
from behind when changing lanes is inaccu-
rate and may cause severe accidents and in-
juries.
● Whenever possible, use the internal mirror to
ascertain the distance of vehicles coming
from behind or the distance to other objects.
● Ensure that rear visibility is always unob-
structed.

WARNING
The interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle
function contains an electrolytic fluid which
may leak, should the mirror glass be broken.
● The leaked electrolytic fluid may irritate the
skin, eyes and breathing organs, especially of
people suffering from asthma or similar dis-
eases. Ensure the immediate entry of suffi-
cient fresh air and leave the vehicle or, if this Fig. 78 On the windscreen: automatic anti-dazzle
is not possible, open all windows and doors. interior mirror. 
● In case of contact of the electrolytic fluid
with the eyes or skin, wash immediately with
plenty water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Visibility 89
 ● A malfunctioning automatic anti-dazzle may
prevent the use of the interior mirror to cor-
rectly determine the distance to the vehicle
following behind or the distance to other ob-
jects.
● Never hang objects on the automatic anti-
dazzle interior mirror, such objects may im-
pair the proper operation and cause the au-
tomatic anti-dazzle to malfunction.

Visibility is hindered by using interior mir-

Fig. 79 On the windscreen: manual anti-dazzle in-
rors in the night position. 
terior mirror.

The driver must adjust the interior mirror so that

he/she can see clearly through the rear window. Exterior mirrors
Rear visibility may be hindered or eliminated by
objects placed over the luggage compartment  Please refer to and at the start of the
cover, for example. chapter on page 89.

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror

With the ignition switched on, the sensors meas-
ure the incidence of light from behind → Fig. 78
1 and from the front 2 .
Depending on the measured values, the interior
mirror is automatically anti-dazzled.
When the light incidence detected by the sensors
is compromised or interrupted, the interior mir-
ror with automatic anti-dazzle function may mal-
function. Similarly external navigation devices on
the windscreen or near the automatic anti-dazzle
interior mirror may negatively affect the sensors
→ .
Fig. 80 On the front doors: setting button for the
In some situations the automatic anti-dazzle is
mechanical exterior mirrors.
disabled, for instance, when reverse gear is en-
gaged.

Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror

– Day position: the lower mirror edge lever
points towards the windscreen.
– Night position: pull the lever → Fig. 79 (grey
arrow), to avoid glare from the headlights of
vehicles travelling behind.

WARNING
The display light from a mobile phone or porta-
ble navigation device may compromise the
proper operation of the automatic anti-dazzle
interior mirror, potentially leading to severe ac- Fig. 81 On the driver door: rotary adjusting knob for
cidents and injuries. the electric exterior mirrors. 

90 Owner's Manual
 Exterior mirrors Accessing the right-hand exterior mirror adjust-
– Operate the adjustment knob on the trims of ments for reverse gear (tilt down)
the front doors → Fig. 80. – Rotate the rotary knob for the exterior mirror
Electric exterior mirrors to .
– Switch on the ignition. – With the ignition turned on, engage the re-
verse gear. The exterior mirror takes up the
– Rotate the rotary knob in the driver door until
saved position.
reaching the desired icon → Fig. 81.
– Move the rotating knob forward, backward, to The saved reverse gear position of the right exte-
the right or to the left, as indicated by the ar- rior mirror will be abandoned when driving for-
rows, to adjust the exterior mirror. ward again at a speed greater than about 15
km/h or when the rotary switch is moved from
Electrically folding exterior mirrors inwards position  to another position.
 (not available in some versions) → .
Adjusting the left exterior mirror. Exterior mirrors can be manually folded (rotated)
 inwards and outwards. The use position is de-
Adjusting the right exterior mirror. fined by a clear locking position in both sides (left
 and right).
Neutral position. The exterior mirrors can-
 not be adjusted and all functions are disa- WARNING
bled. Exterior mirrors should only be adjusted when
the vehicle is stationary, in order to prevent the
Enabling the exterior mirror functions driver from being distracted.
Depending on the vehicle and radio version, the
following exterior mirror functions must be set WARNING
one time in the radio system with the button  Careless folding of exterior mirrors may cause
OR with the settings button  and by touching injuries.
the function surface Car → page 28.
● Make sure there are no obstacles in the oper-
– Enable on the displayed menu the respective ating area when folding exterior mirrors in or
function of the exterior mirror. out.
Folding exterior mirrors inward when parking ● Handle with care in order to prevent fingers
If the vehicle is locked or unlocked from the out- from getting stuck between the exterior mir-
side, the exterior mirrors will automatically fold ror and the mirror frame, while the mirror is
in or out. For this the rotary knob must be in po- moving.
sition ,  or .
NOTICE
When the rotary button of the electrically adjust-
able exterior mirror is in the  position, the exte- Always fold in exterior mirrors in automatic
rior mirrors stay folded inward. washing systems.
● Do not fold electric exterior mirrors in or out,
Saving the right-hand exterior mirror since this could damage the electrical system.
adjustments for reverse gear (tilt down)
– Select a valid vehicle key to which the setting In case of failure, electric exterior mirrors
is to be attributed. may be manually adjusted by pressing the
edge of the mirror surface. 
– Unlock the vehicle with this vehicle key.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Selecting reverse gear.
– Adjust the right exterior mirror in order to al-
low proper visibility of kerb edge, for example.
25A.5L1.POL.20

– The set exterior mirror position is automatical-

ly saved and attributed to the vehicle key.

Visibility 91
Sliding headliner Heating and air
conditioning
Sun visor
Heating, ventilating, cooling

 Introduction

The following equipment may be installed in

the vehicle:
The ventilation and heating system heats and
ventilates the vehicle interior. The ventilation and
heating system does not cool.
The air-conditioner or Climatronic cool and de-
Fig. 82 Sun visor.
humidify the air. They work best when all win-
Depending on the vehicle version, the sun visor dows are closed. In case of accumulated heat in
may contain different combinations, containing the vehicle interior, ventilation may speed the
or not: lighting, mirror cover and vanity mirror. cooling process.

Various positions for the driver and front Indication of active functions
passenger sun visors: The lighted LEDs on controls and buttons indi-
– Folding the sun visor down to the windscreen. cate that a function is active.
– Carefully remove the sun visor from the sup- WARNING
port, holding the support base, and swivel to-
wards the door → Fig. 82 A . Poor visibility through all windows increases
the risk of collisions and accidents, which can
Vanity mirrors lead to severe injuries.
A vanity mirror is located behind a cover on the ● Always ensure that all windows are free of
folded down sun visor. When opening the cover ice, snow and mist in order to have good visi-
→ Fig. 82 B a lamp lights up 1 . bility.
The lamp will go out when the vanity mirror cov- ● Maximum heat output, which is needed to
er is pushed back or the sun visor is folded back defrost the windows as quickly as possible, is
up. only available when the engine has reached
its operating temperature. Do not start your
WARNING journey until you have good visibility.
Sun visors folded downwards may reduce the ● Always ensure that the heating and fresh air
field of vision and decrease safety. system or air conditioning and rear window
heating system are used properly in order to
● Sun visors and sunblind should always be re-
guarantee proper exterior visibility.
placed in their holder if they are not being
used. ● Never use the air recirculation mode for ex-
tended periods. If the cooling system is
NOTICE switched off, the windows can mist up very
quickly in air recirculation mode and reduce
Handle sun visors and vanity mirror covers care- visibility considerably.
fully in order to avoid damages.  ● Always switch off the air recirculation mode
if it is not required. 

92 Owner's Manual
 WARNING NOTICE
Stale air can cause tiredness and lack of con- ● Switch off the air conditioning system if you
centration in the driver, which in turn can cause suspect that it has been damaged. This can
collisions, accidents and severe injuries. help to prevent further damage. The air condi-
● Never leave the blower off for extended peri- tioning system must be checked by a
ods and never use the recirculation mode for Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop.
extended periods, since this prevent fresh air ● Repairs to the air conditioning system require
from entering the vehicle. specific knowledge and tools. Volkswagen rec-
ommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for
NOTICE this purpose. 
Do not place food, medicines or other tempera-
ture sensitive object in front of the vents. Food,
medicines or other heat or cold sensitive objects
may be damaged or rendered unusable by the air
outflow.

Air conditioning controls

 Please refer to and at the start of the chapter on page 92.

Fig. 83 Air conditioning controls.

25A.5L1.POL.20

Fig. 84 Climatronic controls. 

Heating and air conditioning 93

Some functions and buttons are version  – Air recirculation mode
dependent and depend o the type of system fit- In air recirculation mode, no fresh air enters the
ted. interior of the vehicle → page 96.
Turning off – Air Conditioner: press the  button→ Fig. 83
6.
– Air conditioner: rotate the blower regulator to
level  → Fig. 83 5 . – Climatronic: Touch the function button 
→ Fig. 84 5 .
– Climatronic: slide your finger to the left under
the function surface → Fig. 84 7 , then press Air distribution
the leftmost  button.
– Air-conditioning: rotate the right regulator
 –Automatic mode → Fig. 83 4 to the desired position.
When touching the function button  – Climatronic: touch the function button
→ Fig. 84 10 it is possible to switch on the Clima- → Fig. 84 6 on the desired position, the se-
tronic automatic mode. lected distribution will be indicated on the dis-
play 3 .
The automatic mode ensures constant tempera-
tures in the vehicle interior. The air temperature,
the air volume and its distribution is automatical-  – Air distribution to the upper body part with
ly regulated. Automatic operation turns off when the chest vents in the dash panel.
ventilation is changed manually → Fig. 84 7 or
by changing the air distribution across the func-  – Distribution of air to the footwell.
tion button → Fig. 84 6 .
 Climatronic – Air distribution to the upper
 – Cooling mode body part and the footwell.
– Air Conditioner: press the button  → Fig. 83
2 to turn the cooling operation on and off.  – Air distribution to the windscreen and the
– Climatronic: touch the function button footwell area.
 → Fig. 84 4 to turn on and off the cooling
functioning.  Air conditioning – Air distribution to the
windscreen.
In cooling mode the air is dehumidified.

 /  – Temperature  Climatronic – Air distribution to the wind-

screen.
– Air-conditioning: rotate the left rotary regula-
tor → Fig. 83 1 .  |  – Defrost function
– Climatronic: slide your finger under the func- The defrosting function eliminates the frost from
tion button → Fig. 84 9 . the windscreen.
On the Climatronic display → Fig. 84 3 the set – Air conditioning: rotate the right rotary regula-
temperature is displayed. tor to  → Fig. 83 4 .
 – Blower – Climatronic: Touch the function button 
→ Fig. 84 1 .
– Air-conditioning: rotate the blower regulator
→ Fig. 83 5 . Air-conditioning: under the defrosting function
– Climatronic: slide your finger under the func- the air circulation mode is disabled and the air
tion button → Fig. 84 7 . conditioner compressor is turned on to remove
the humidity from the air. With the defrost func-
tion enabled, the air circulation mode cannot be
turned on and the air conditioner compressor
cannot be turned off.
Climatronic: under the defrost function, the air is
dehumidified and the blower is set to a high lev-
el. 

94 Owner's Manual
  – Rear window defrost function Air conditioning menu in VW Play
To turn the rear window heating on and off with For vehicles with VW Play, press MENU → Fig. 84
the engine running. 8 to open the air conditioning menu on the ra-
dio.
– Air Conditioner: press the button  → Fig. 83
3. The air conditioning menu on the VW Play display
– Climatronic: touch the function button  is only available in Climatronic.
→ Fig. 84 2 . In the air conditioning menu you will find, for ex-
The rear window defroster is turned of automati- ample, the temperature adjustment → page 94
cally after about 10 minutes. and air distribution functions → page 94.
The top part of the screen shows the current air
Recommended air conditioner settings conditioning settings, for example, the automatic
– Switch the air recirculation mode off. mode air conditioning profile.
– Adjust the blower to level  or . The bottom part of the screen shows function
– Put the temperature adjuster in the middle po- areas for frequently used air conditioning func-
sition. tions.
– Open and align all the vents of the dashboard. Air conditioning operating states
– Set the air distribution controller to the de- The air conditioning operating states are dis-
sired position. played in colour:
– Press the  button on the panel to switch
 Cool down.
the cooling system on.
 Warm.
Climatronic recommended settings
– Touch the function button  . NOTICE
– Set the temperature to +22 °C. To prevent damages to the rear window defrost-
er, no sticker should be stuck on the inside on the
– Open and align the dash panel vents. filaments.
Fast cooling inside the vehicle After the window is cleared, the function
In order to obtain fast cooling inside the vehicle, must be switched off. Lower current con-
follow the instructions below: sumption also decreases fuel consumption.
– Turn the temperature regulator or touch the If the air conditioner and air recirculation
function button fully to the left. mode are turned off manually, the system
– Set the air distribution to the position . will not automatically turn them on next time the
– Turn regulator or touch fan function button to blower is switched off and on again. The system
maximum level. The air conditioner and air re- will only start working automatically again after
circulation mode are automatically turned on. the temperature switch is removed from the full
left position and placed back into this position. 
– Case the air conditioner does not turn on,
press the  key or touch the function button
to switch the cooling system on.
– If the vehicle is exposed to the sun for exten-
ded periods, open the front door windows par-
tially or completely for a brief amount of time
(1 to 3 minutes), in order to remove the hot air
mass inside the vehicle.
– Close the windows and, if necessary, press the
 key or touch the function button to turn
the air recirculation mode on.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Heating and air conditioning 95

Air recirculation mode Troubleshooting
 Please refer to and at the start of the  Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 92. chapter on page 92.

The air recirculation mode prevents outside air The following hints and operational instructions
from entering the vehicle. help with the correct use of the system.
– Press the  key or touch the function button The cooling system for the vehicle interior only
on the dash panel to turn the air recirculation works when the engine is running and the blower
mode on or off. is switched on.
The air conditioning system operates most effec-
When is the air recirculation mode turned off?
tively with the windows closed. However, if the
The air recirculation is turned off under the fol- vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun
lowing situations → : for some time, the air inside can be cooled more
– When the Climatronic  function button is quickly by opening the windows for a short time.
turned on.
Why does the cooling system turn off
– When the air conditioner air distribution regu- automatically or cannot be turned on?
lator or surface button is positioned to posi-
– The engine is not running.
tion .
– The blower is switched off.
WARNING – The air conditioning system fuse has blown.
Stale air can cause tiredness and lack of con- – Room temperature is below approximately +3
centration in the driver, which in turn can cause ℃.
collisions, accidents and severe injuries. – The air conditioner compressor has been tem-
● Never leave the blower off for extended peri- porarily deactivated because the engine cool-
ods and never use the recirculation mode for ant temperature is too high.
extended periods, since this prevent fresh air – There is a fault on the vehicle. The air condi-
from entering the vehicle. tioning system must be checked by a
● With the cooling system switched off, the Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop.
windows can mist up very quickly in air recir-
culation mode, reducing visibility considera- Settings for optimal road visibility
bly. – Keep the air entrance of the windscreen free
● Always shut down the air recirculation mode of ice or leaves to increase the heating or cool-
when no longer necessary. ing power and prevent the frosting of the win-
dows → page 249.
NOTICE – Keep the air slot of the rear area of the lug-
Do not smoke with the air recirculation mode gage compartment free so that the air may
turned on. The smoke drawn into the cooling flow freely from the front to the back through
system can leave a residue on the evaporator and the vehicle.
the dust and pollen filter, producing a permanent – When the engine coolant has reached its op-
unpleasant odour. erational temperature, the highest heating
power will have been reached and the fastest
At very high outside temperatures, it is rec- window defrosting.
ommended to select the recirculation mode
for a short time, to cool down the interior of the Dust and pollen filter
vehicle faster.  The dust and pollen filter with activated charcoal
reduces the level of particles in the outside air
entering the vehicle.
The pollen and dust filter needs to be regularly
replaced to keep the air conditioner's efficiency
unimpaired. Case the vehicle is frequently used in 

96 Owner's Manual
 heavily polluted environments, the filter should
be replaced between servicing events
Driving
→ page 249.
Driving guidelines
Water vapour underneath the vehicle
If the outside humidity and temperature are high, Pedals
condensed water may drip off the cooling sys-
tem's evaporator and form a pool of water un-
derneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not
indicate a leak!
The air conditioning supercharger con-
sumes engine power during cooling, thus
contributing to increased fuel consumption. To
reduce cooling time to a minimum, observe the
following instructions:
● If a vehicle stationary under the sun is too hot,
open the doors and windows for a few sec-
onds in order to let the hot air out. Fig. 85 In the footwell: pedals in vehicles with
● Ensure that external hot air does not enter the manual transmission.
vehicle, for example, through an open window,
while the air conditioning is switched on.
● If it is possible to reach the desired tempera-
ture without switching the air conditioning on,
only use the ventilation system.
When arriving at destination (about 2 mi-
nutes before), turn the air conditioner off
leaving only the ventilation operating. This helps
reducing the humidity in the evaporator, reduc-
ing the appearance of unpleasant odours in the
interior of the vehicle.
Fig. 86 In the footwell: pedals in vehicles with au-
The air conditioning compressor may mo- tomatic gearbox.
mentarily shut down in some situations,
such as stepping on the brakes, accelerating or Key for → Fig. 85 and → Fig. 86:
manoeuvring.  1 Gas pedal
2 Brake pedal
3 Clutch pedal, in vehicles with a manual gear-
box.

The operation and freedom of movement of all

pedals must never be impaired by objects or floor
mats.
Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area free
and can be securely fastened in the footwell.

WARNING
Items in the driver footwell can hinder pedal
operation. This can lead to loss of control of the
25A.5L1.POL.20

vehicle and increase the risk of serious injury.

● Ensure that all pedals can always be operat-
ed without any hindrance. 

Driving 97
● Always safely secure foot mats. allow safely following the gearshift indicator
● Additional foot mats or other floor coverings (e.g. when overtaking or driving with fully-
should never be placed over the fitted foot loaded vehicles).
mat.
Enhanced gear selection decreases fuel
● Ensure that no objects can enter the driver consumption.
footwell while the vehicle is in motion.
Warning texts may vary according to the in-
NOTICE strument cluster version.
Ensure that you are able to operate the pedals In vehicles with manual gearbox the gear-
freely at all times. For example, the braking dis- change indicator display turns off when the
tance to fully stop the vehicle will be longer if a clutch pedal is actuated or, in vehicles with auto-
braking circuit is faulty. The brake pedal will have matic gearbox, when leaving the Tiptronic gate. 
to be depressed further and harder than normal. 

Economical driving style

Gear change recommendation

Fig. 87 On the instrument cluster: gear change in-

dicator.

Key for→ Fig. 87:

A Current engaged gear. Fig. 88 Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km at
B Recommended gear shift. two distinct ambient temperatures.

Depending on the vehicle version, a gear shift

recommendation may be indicated on the instru- Driving correctly it is possible to reduce
ment cluster display to optimize fuel savings. fuel consumption, harming the environ-
In vehicles with automatic gearbox the selector ment and engine, brake and tyre wear.
lever must be in the Tiptronic position Below are some tips on minimizing the
→ page 112. environmental impact and save.
When the ideal gear is already selected, no gear
shift is recommended. The currently engaged Fuel consumption, environmental impact and
gear is displayed. wear on the engine, brakes and tyres depend
largely on 3 factors:
CAUTION
– Personal driving style.
The gear-change indicator is merely a support-
– Conditions of use (such as weather and road
ing system and must not distract the driver
surface characteristics).
from traffic.
– Technical conditions.
● The gearshift indicator merely assists the
driver in increasing fuel savings. The driver is By adopting an economical driving style and an-
exclusively responsible for assessing whether ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
current vehicle, road, and traffic conditions easily reduce fuel consumption by 10 to 15%. 

98 Owner's Manual
 A car uses most fuel when accelerating. If you When driving on a motorway, it is much more ef-
think ahead when driving, you will need to brake fective to drive at a constant moderate speed
less and thus accelerate less. Wherever possible, than to drive with constant acceleration and
let the car roll slowly to a stop, for instance when braking. As a rule, driving with a constant style
you can see that the next traffic lights are red. will get you to your destination just as quickly.

Changing gear earlier Using additional equipment in moderation

Basically: the highest gear is always the most It is always important to be comfortable in your
economical gear. As a rule of thumb, the follow- vehicle, but it is also important to consider the
ing applies to most vehicles: at a speed of 30 environment.
km/h (19 mph) drive in 3rd gear, at 40 km/h (25 Some equipment will increase fuel consumption
mph) in 4th gear and at 50 km/h (31 mph) in 5th when switched on (examples):
gear.
– Air conditioning cooling system: if the air con-
If traffic and driving scenarios are suitable, “skip-
ditioning system is set to a very high or low
ping” gears when changing up a gear will also
temperature it will require a lot of energy,
save fuel.
which is generated by the engine. Therefore
Do not drive gears to their upper limit. Use 1st the temperature setting in the vehicle should
gear only for pulling away then quickly change up not vary too much from the outside tempera-
to 2nd gear. ture. It may be a good idea to air the vehicle
Vehicles with gearshift indicator help reduce fuel before setting off and then to travel a short
consumption by recommending ideal gears for distance with the windows open. The air con-
each specific situation. ditioning system should then be switched on
once the windows have been closed.
Rolling to a stop – Keep the windows closed when driving at high
Taking your foot off the accelerator will interrupt speeds. Open windows increase fuel consump-
the supply of fuel to the engine and decrease fuel tion.
consumption. – Switch off the rear window defrost function
Therefore, in situations such as approaching a when the window is clear.
red traffic light, let the vehicle roll without apply-
Other factors which increase fuel
ing the accelerator. Only press on the clutch ped-
consumption (examples):
al to disengage if the vehicle becomes too slow
or if the stopping distance is longer. The engine – Fault in engine management system.
will then run at idling speed. – Driving in hilly regions.
Switch off the engine in situations in which the – Driving with a trailer.
vehicle might be stationary for a long time, e.g.
at a level crossing. Avoid short journeys
Directly after a cold start, the engine has a very
Thinking ahead when driving, and driving with high fuel consumption. The engine reaches its
the “flow” of traffic working temperature after a few kilometres,
Frequently applying the brake and accelerator when fuel consumption will return to a normal
will increase fuel consumption. By thinking ahead level.
when driving and by maintaining a sufficient dis- The engine and catalytic converter need to reach
tance to the vehicle in front, simply keeping your their proper working temperature in order to
foot off the accelerator will stop the speed from minimise fuel consumption and pollutant emis-
fluctuating. This means that active braking and sions. The outside temperature also has a deci-
accelerating is not always necessary. sive influence.
Driving smoothly and evenly The → Fig. 88 shows the variation in fuel con-
Smoothness is even more important than speed. sumption for the same journey at 20 °C and -10
25A.5L1.POL.20

The more evenly you drive, the lower your fuel °C.
consumption will be. Therefore, avoid making too many short journeys
and car share whenever possible. 

Driving 99
Under the same conditions, the vehicle will use Information on the brakes
more fuel in the winter than in the summer.
Not only is it illegal in some countries to “warm New brake pads cannot generate the full braking
up” cold engines, it is also technically unnecessa- effect during the first 300 km and must first be
ry and a waste of fuel. “run in” → . However, you can compensate for
the slightly reduced braking force by applying
Adjust tyre pressure more pressure to the brake pedal. During the
The correct tyre pressure reduces rolling resist- run-in period, the braking distance is longer
ance and therefore also fuel consumption. when the brakes are depressed fully or during
emergency braking than with brakes that have
When purchasing new tyres, always make sure
been fully run in. In the run-in period, the brakes
that the tyres have optimum rolling resistance.
should not be depressed fully and situations
Using low friction engine oil should be avoided that create a heavy load on
the brakes. For example, when driving too close
Fully synthetic low-viscosity engine oils, known
to other vehicles.
as low-friction engine oils, reduce fuel consump-
tion. Low viscosity engine oils decrease frictional The rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a
resistance in the engine and spread better and great extent on use conditions and driving style.
more quickly, especially for cold starts. They are When frequently driving in city traffic and short
especially effective in vehicles which make a lot distances or in sporty manner, the brake pad
of short journeys. thicknesses needs to be periodically checked by a
Volkswagen dealership or a specialized work-
Always make sure that the engine oil level is cor-
shop.
rect and that you keep to the service intervals (oil
change intervals). When driving with wet brakes, for example after
driving through water, after heavy rainfall or af-
When purchasing engine oil, always make sure it
ter washing the vehicle, the braking effect may
complies with engine oil standards and has been
be delayed as the brake discs will be wet, or pos-
approved by Volkswagen.
sibly iced up (during the winter). Brakes must be
Avoid unnecessary loads “dried” as soon as possible by carefully braking at
higher speed. Ensure that no following vehicle
The lighter the vehicle, the more economical and and no other road user is put at risk as a result of
environmentally-friendly it is. An extra weight of this action → .
100 kg increases fuel consumption, for example,
by up to 0.3 l/100km. A layer of salt that accumulates on the discs and
pads will delay the braking effect and increase
Remove all unnecessary items and loads from the the braking distance. If the brakes on the vehicle
vehicle. have not been applied for a long time on roads
that have been gritted with salt, the layer of salt
Remove any unnecessary special equipment
must be reduced through careful braking → .
and accessories
The more aerodynamic a vehicle, the lower its Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt in the brake
fuel consumption. Special equipment and acces- pads are facilitated through long periods of inac-
sories, such as roof carriers or bicycle carriers, tivity, low mileage and low load levels. If there
make the vehicle less aerodynamic. has been little or no use of the brake pads, or if
there is corrosion, Volkswagen recommends that
You should therefore remove any special equip- the brake discs and brake pads be cleaned by
ment and luggage carriers that are not being carefully braking several times at higher speed,
used, especially if you are going to be driving at always in compliance with speed limits and cur-
high speeds. rent driving conditions (e.g. wet or dry roads,
night or day driving). Ensure that no following
WARNING vehicle and no other road user is put at risk as a
Adapt your speed and distance from the vehi- result of this action → . 
cles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions. 

100 Owner's Manual

 Brake servo WARNING
The brake servo will only function when the en-
Driving without the brake servo can considera-
gine is running and reinforces the pressure ap-
bly increase the braking distance and thus
plied by the driver on the brake pedal.
cause accidents and serious injuries.
If the brake servo is not functioning or the vehi- ● Never allow the vehicle to roll if the engine is
cle is being towed, the brake pedal will have to switched off.
be depressed more forcefully, since the braking
distance will be increased due to the lack of as- ● If the brake servo is not functioning or the
sistance for the brake system → . vehicle is being towed, the brake pedal will
have to be depressed more forcefully, since
WARNING the braking distance will be increased due to
the lack of assistance for the brake system.
New brake pads will not have the optimal brak-
ing effect when first fitted. NOTICE
● New brake pads cannot generate the full
● Never let the brakes “rub” by applying light
braking effect during the first 300 km and
pressure to the brake when it is not necessary
must first be “run in”. A reduced braking ef-
to brake. Continual pressure on the brake ped-
fect can be increased by applying more pres-
al will overheat the brakes. This can considera-
sure to the brake pedal.
bly reduce the brake effect, increase the brak-
● You must drive particularly carefully when ing distance and, in certain circumstances,
driving with new brake pads in order to re- cause the brake system to fail completely.
duce the risk of accidents, severe injuries and
● Before driving down a long, steep gradient, re-
loss of vehicle control.
duce speed and change to a lower gear or
● Never drive too close to other vehicles when move the selector lever to a lower gear. This
running in new brake pads, and never create will make use of the engine braking effect and
a driving situation that will place a heavy relieve the load on the brakes. The brake sys-
load on the brakes. tem could otherwise overheat and fail. Only
use the brakes to slow down or stop the vehi-
WARNING cle.
Overheated brakes reduce the braking effect
If the front brake pads are tested, the rear
and considerably increase the braking distance.
brake pads should be tested at the same
● When driving downhill the brakes are placed time. visual check of the thickness of all brake
under particular strain and become hot very pads should be carried out regularly by checking
quickly. the brake pads through the openings in the
● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers wheels or from the underside of the vehicle. If
could restrict the airflow to the brakes and necessary, remove the wheels to carry out a
cause them to overheat. comprehensive check. Volkswagen recommends
using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. 
WARNING
Wet brakes or brakes coated with ice or road
salt react more slowly and require longer brak- Driving a loaded vehicle
ing distances.
● Carefully apply the brakes to test them. For good vehicle handling when driving a loaded
● Always dry brakes and clean off any coating vehicle, please observe the following:
of ice and salt with a few cautious applica- – Stow all items of luggage securely → page 178.
tions of the brake when visibility, weather,
– Accelerate carefully and gently.
road and traffic conditions permit.
– Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres.
– Brake earlier than in normal driving.
25A.5L1.POL.20

– If applicable, observe the information concern-

ing driving with towing mode → page 184. 

Driving 101
 WARNING WARNING
Moving loads can severely impair the vehicle's Poisonous exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
stability and driving safety, which can cause ac- interior when the boot lid is open. This could
cidents and severe injuries. result in loss of consciousness, carbon monox-
● Secure objects properly to prevent them ide poisoning, serious injury and accidents.
from sliding. ● Always drive with the boot lid closed in order
● Use suitable straps when securing heavy ob- to prevent toxic gases from entering the ve-
jects. hicle.
● Secure the rear seat backrest in an upright ● If exceptional circumstances require you to
position.  drive with an open boot lid, you must do the
following to reduce the quantity of toxic ex-
haust fumes that could enter the vehicle:
– Close all windows.
Driving with the rear lid open – In vehicles with air conditioning, switch
off the air recirculation mode.
Driving with the boot lid open is particularly dan-
– Open all vents in the dash panel.
gerous. Ensure that the open boot lid and any
objects are secured properly, and adopt appropri- – Switch the blowers to the highest setting.
ate measures to reduce the quantity of toxic ex-
haust fumes entering the vehicle. NOTICE
The vehicle level changes when the boot lid is
WARNING open. 
Driving with an unlocked or open boot lid can
cause serious injuries.
● Volkswagen recommends not driving with an Driving through water on roads
open boot lid. However, if such scenario is
absolutely indispensable, observe the follow- Avoid driving through water on roads. Driving un-
ing instructions: der such conditions hinders the driveability, and
– Always stow all objects in the luggage may cause severe damages to the vehicle, com-
compartment securely. Loose objects can promising the safety of the driver and other pas-
fall out of the luggage compartment and sengers. If absolutely necessary to cross the floo-
injure other road users. ded area, observe the following in order to pre-
– Always drive carefully and defensively. vent damages to the vehicle, driver, and passen-
– Avoid any abrupt or sudden driving and gers:
braking manoeuvres as this can cause the – Check the water depth before driving through
open boot lid to move unpredictably. water on roads. The water level must be no
– Any objects protruding from the luggage higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body
compartment must be marked to ensure (underneath the doors) → .
that they are visible to other road users. – Do not drive faster than walking speed.
Legal provisions must be followed.
– Never stop the vehicle, reverse or switch off
– In case of objects protruding from the lug-
the engine while in water.
gage compartment, the boot lid must nev-
er be used to “hold” or “fasten” objects. – Oncoming vehicles create waves that can in-
– Remove the load mounted over the boot crease the water level for your vehicle to such
lid whenever it is necessary to drive with an extent that it is not safe to drive through
the boot lid open. the water.
– When crossing flooded areas, vehicles with
Start-Stop system disable the system manually
→ page 108. 

102 Owner's Manual

 WARNING If the engine is run in gently, the life of the
engine will be increased and its oil con-
After driving through water, mud and dirt roads sumption reduced. 
the brakes may be hindered due to the humidi-
ty or freezing of brake pads or disks, increasing
the braking distance.
● “Dry the brakes and eliminate ice” through Using the vehicle in other countries
careful braking manoeuvres. Proceed with- and continents
out putting other drivers at risk or failing to
abide by legal requirements. The vehicle is produced specifically for a certain
● Avoid sudden braking manoeuvres after country and complies with this country's regis-
crossing through water in roads. tration regulations valid at the time of vehicle
production.
NOTICE If the vehicle is going to be sold in another coun-
● When driving through water in roads, some try or used in another country for an extended
vehicle components such as the engine, trans- period, the legal requirements applicable in that
mission, chassis or electrical system, may be country must be observed.
severely damaged. In some cases, certain equipment will have to be
● Never drive through salt water, since salt can fitted or removed and functions deactivated. The
cause corrosion. Rinse all components that scope and type of service available may also be
have been exposed to salt water immediately affected. This is particularly important if the ve-
with fresh water.  hicle is driven in another climate region for a long
period of time.
Because different frequency bands are used in
different countries, the radio unit may not work
Running-in in other countries.
A new engine needs to be run in during the first
NOTICE
1,500 kilometres. All the moving parts must be
able to adjust themselves to each other. During ● Volkswagen may not be held liable for dam-
the first hours of operation the engine has to ages caused to the vehicle due to low-quality
cope with a higher internal friction than later on. fuel, inadequate servicing work, and use of
non-genuine parts.
Up to 1,000 kilometres, the following applies:
● Volkswagen may not be held liable in case the
– Do not fully depress the accelerator. vehicle does not comply or only partially com-
– Do not drive the vehicle at more than 2/3 of plies with legal requirements from other coun-
the top engine speed. tries and continents. 
– Do not drive with a trailer attached.
Between 1,000 and 1,500 kilometres
– Gradually increase the speed and engine rpm, Troubleshooting
limited to the respective driving location.
Brake system malfunction
The style of driving during the first 1,500 kilome-
tres will also affect the engine quality. Even after A brake circuit may have failed if you have to re-
the engine has been run-in, and especially with a duce speed and the vehicle does not brake as
cold engine, drive the vehicle at moderate rpm's normal (sudden increase in braking distance).
in order to reduce engine wear and to increase its This will be indicated by the warning lamp  and
useful life span. in some cases a text message. Go to a
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop as
Do not drive at engine speeds which are too low. soon as possible. Drive at low speed when doing
Always shift down gear if the engine is not run- this and anticipate much longer braking distan-
25A.5L1.POL.20

ning “smoothly”. ces and an increase in the pressure required on

the pedal. 

Driving 103
Starting and stopping the ● Always take all vehicle keys with you when
you leave the vehicle. The engine can be
engine started and electrical equipment such as the
window controls can be operated, which may
lead to severe injuries.
Ignition cylinder
● Never leave unattended children or people
with special needs in the vehicle. They could
become trapped in the vehicle in an emer-
gency and may not be able to get themselves
to safety. Depending on the time of year, for
example, locked vehicles can be subjected to
very high or very low temperatures. This can
cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities,
especially for small children.
● Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
tion cylinder while the vehicle is in motion.

NOTICE
With the ignition turned on and engine off, the
battery of the vehicle may discharge and render a
new start up of the engine impossible.
● Always turn off the ignition prior leaving the
vehicle.
Fig. 89 Next to the steering wheel, to the right: ve- In vehicles with automatic gearbox, if it is
hicle key positions on the ignition cylinder. not possible to remove the vehicle key from
the ignition lock with the vehicle stopped, move
Positions of the key in the vehicle → Fig. 89 the selector lever to position P. If necessary,
0 Ignition switched off. The vehicle key may be press and release the selector lever interlock but-
removed. ton. 
1 Ignition switched on.
2 Step on the brake pedal – (vehicles with au-
tomatic gearbox), or on the clutch pedal (ve- Starter button
hicles with manual gearbox) and turn the en-
gine on. When the engine catches on, release
the ignition key. Upon release, the vehicle
key returns to position → Fig. 89 1 .

Ignition-on indicator
According to the version of the vehicle, the igni-
tion-on indicator may not be available.
When the driver door is opened with the ignition
on, the warning IGNITION ON  may appear on the
instrument cluster display in addition to an
acoustic warning. Fig. 90 On the lower part of the centre console: en-
gine start button.
The acoustic warning is to remind the driver to
turn the ignition off prior leaving the vehicle.
The (Press & Drive) starter button replaces
WARNING the ignition lock. 
Improper vehicle key use may cause severe in-
juries.

104 Owner's Manual

 According to the vehicle version, the start button Longer stopped periods with the ignition
may not be available. turned on may discharge the 12V vehicle
battery to the point when it is no longer possible
The vehicle's engine is started with the (Press &
to start the engine.
Drive) start button.
The vehicle can only be started when there is a If, for example, the vehicle key battery is
valid vehicle key inside the vehicle. flat or very weak, the engine may not start
with the start button. In this case use the emer-
Switching the ignition on or off gency start function → page 107. 
Press the start button once, without hitting the
brake or clutch pedal → .

Automatic ignition turn off Start the engine

When the driver moves away from the vehicle According to the vehicle version, the warm start
with the vehicle key and ignition on, the ignition system may not be available. In which case the
will automatically turn off after some time. indicator lamp of the heated start system  will
Should the dipped beam be turned on during this not light up.
time, the side lights stay on for about 30 mi-
nutes. The side light can be turned off by locking – Vehicles with ignition lock: rotate the vehicle
the vehicle → page 63 or manually → page 79. key to → Fig. 89 1 . Ignition switched on. The
warm starting system's indicator lamp  will
After the vehicle has detected that the driver is
then light up on the instrument cluster. Wait
absent with the automatic engine turn off ena-
until the indicator lamp  is disabled, indicat-
bled, the ignition is automatically turned off after
ing the end of the fuel warming process (this
a given span of time.
action may be required when starting cold en-
gines).
WARNING
– Vehicles with engine start button: press the
Unsupervised vehicle movements may cause start button once. Ignition switched on. The
severe injuries. warm starting system's indicator lamp  will
● To turn the ignition on, do not hit the brake then light up on the instrument cluster. Wait
or clutch pedal as this will immediately start until the indicator lamp  is disabled, indicat-
the engine. ing the end of the fuel warming process (this
action may be required when starting cold en-
WARNING gines).
Improper or unsupervised use of the vehicle – Press and firmly hold the brake pedal pressed.
keys can cause severe accidents or injuries. – Vehicles with manual gearbox: step on the
● When leaving the vehicle, turn off your en- clutch pedal and hold it firmly pressed until
gine and always carry all the vehicle keys the engine is running. Position the gear selec-
when leaving the vehicle. Whenever you lock tor lever into the neutral position.
your doors, make sure there are no people – Vehicles with automatic gearbox: position the
inside. Unauthorized people or children can selector lever to position P or N.
lock the vehicle, start the engine or turn the
– Vehicles with ignition lock: turn the vehicle key
ignition on and thereby operate the electric
in the ignition lock to position → Fig. 89 2 –
equipment such as, for example, the electric
do not accelerate. When the engine catches,
windows.
release the ignition key.
When leaving the vehicle, always turn the – Vehicles with engine start button: press the
ignition off manually or, should it be the start button → page 104 – do not accelerate.
case, observe the instructions on the instrument To start the engine there must be a valid vehi-
cluster display. cle key in the vehicle's interior. When the en-
gine catches on, release the start button.
25A.5L1.POL.20

– If the engine does not start, stop the proce-

dure and repeat it after approximately one mi-
nute. 

Driving 105
– Vehicles with start button: if necessary, exe- Stopping the engine
cute the emergency start → page 107.
– Release the handbrake if you wish to pull away – The vehicle must be completely stationary
→ page 121. → .
– Vehicles with ignition lock: rotate the vehicle
WARNING key in the ignition lock to → Fig. 89 0 .
The risk of serious injury can be reduced with – Vehicles with start button: press the start but-
the engine running or when starting the en- ton briefly → Fig. 90. If the engine won't stop,
gine. execute the emergency shut down
● Never start or run the engine in unventilated → page 108.
or closed spaces. The exhaust fumes contain – Observe the instructions on the instrument
carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour- cluster → page 13.
less poisonous gas. Carbon monoxide can
cause loss of consciousness and death. WARNING
● Never leave the engine running if you leave Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is
the vehicle unattended. The vehicle could in motion. This can lead to loss of control of the
move suddenly or something unexpected vehicle and cause severe accidents and injuries.
may happen that may cause damage and se-
rious injuries. ● The airbags and belt tensioners will not work
if the ignition is switched off.
● Never use a start booster. A start booster can
explode and cause the engine to suddenly ● The brake servo will not work when the en-
run at high revs. gine is switched off. When the engine is
switched off, greater force is required on the
brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
WARNING
● When the vehicle key is removed from the
Never leave the vehicle while the engine is run-
ignition lock, the steering lock may engage
ning. The vehicle may move unexpectedly and
and it will no longer be possible to manoeu-
cause severe accidents and injuries, especially
vre the vehicle.
with the selected gear or respective gear posi-
tion.
WARNING
NOTICE The components of the exhaust system be-
come very hot. This can cause fires and serious
● The starter engine or engine may be damaged
injuries.
when attempting to start the engine while
driving or when the engine is started immedi- ● Never park the vehicle so that parts of the
ately after being switched off. exhaust system can come into contact with
inflammable material underneath the vehi-
● While the engine is cool, avoid high rotations,
cle, e.g. leaves, dry grass, spilt fuel, etc.
total acceleration and increased engine load.
● Never apply underseal or anti-corrosion
● Do not push or jump start the engine. Unburnt
coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
fuel may damage the catalytic converter.
verter, diesel particulate filter or the heat
Do not leave the engine running when the shields on the exhaust system.
vehicle is stationary. Immediately resume
driving when there is good visibility in the win- NOTICE
dows; be careful not to force the engine while If the vehicle has been driven at high load for a
cold. This allows the engine to reach its opera- long period, the engine could overheat when it is
tion temperature faster and reduces emissions. switched off. In order to avoid damage to the en-
gine, allow the engine to run in neutral for ap-
When starting the engine, major electrical
proximately 2 minutes before switching it off. 
consumers are switched off temporarily.
When starting from cold, the engine may be
a little noisy for a short period of time. This
is quite normal, and no cause for concern. 

106 Owner's Manual

 Vehicles with automatic gearbox, if it is not Troubleshooting
possible to remove the key from the igni-
tion lock with the vehicle stopped, move the se-
lector lever to position P. If necessary, press and
release the selector lever interlock button.
After the engine is switched off, the radia-
tor fan in the engine compartment may run
on for some minutes, even if the ignition is
switched off or the vehicle key has been re-
moved. The radiator fan will switch itself off au-
tomatically. 

Electronic immobilizer
The immobilizer helps prevent the engine from Fig. 91 To the right of the steering column: emer-
being started and driven with an unauthorised gency start function of vehicles with Keyless Access
vehicle key. locking and start system.

There is a chip in the key. It automatically deacti- Instrument cluster indicator and warning
vates the immobilizer when the vehicle key is in- lamps
serted into the ignition cylinder.
The indicator and warning lamps are on:
The electronic immobilizer is automatically acti- Engine management system fault (Elec-
vated when the vehicle key is removed from the  tronic Power Control). The engine must im-
ignition lock → page 63. For vehicles with Keyless mediately be checked at a Volkswagen
Access, the vehicle key must be outside the vehi- Dealership.
cle → page 63.
Faulty emissions in the exhaust system
For this reason it is only possible to start the en-  (OBD). Reduce your speed. Carefully drive
gine with a correspondently coded genuine to the nearest Volkswagen Dealership. The
Volkswagen vehicle key. Coded vehicle keys can engine must be checked.
be obtained at a Volkswagen Dealership.
→ page 60 Unauthorized vehicle key
When an unauthorized vehicle key is inserted in
Proper vehicle operation is only guaranteed
the ignition lock it can be removed as follows:
with genuine Volkswagen keys. 
– Vehicles with manual gearbox: remove the key
from the ignition lock.
– Vehicles with automatic gearbox: press and re-
lease the interlock button on the selector lev-
er. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition
lock.

Emergency start function

When no valid vehicle key inside the vehicle is
detected, execute the emergency start function.
A corresponding indicator will come up on the in-
strument cluster display. This can be the case
when, for example, the vehicle key battery is
weak or discharged. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Driving 107
– Press and hold the brake pedal. Indicator lamps
– Hold the vehicle key after pressing the start When the  indicator lamp is on, it indicates that
button directly to the right of the steering col- the Start-Stop system is on and the automatic
umn → Fig. 91. engine stop is active.
– The ignition is automatically turned on, and, if When the  indicator lamp is on, the Start-Stop
the case, the engine is started. system is not available or the engine was auto-
matically started by the Start-Stop system
Emergency shut down → page 108.
When the engine does not stop when the start
The Start-Stop system’s status is shown on the
button is briefly pressed, the emergency shut
instrument cluster display.
down needs to be executed:
– Press the start button twice within a few sec- Deactivate and activate the Start-Stop
onds or keep it pressed once for a long time. system automatically
– The engine automatically shuts down → in – To stop the vehicle, step on the brake pedal
Starter button on page 105. and keep it pressed. Shortly before the vehicle
stops or upon stopping, the engine shuts
Immobiliser malfunction down.
When an invalid vehicle key is used or when the – To start the engine up again, remove foot from
system is damaged, a corresponding indication the brake pedal or step on the accelerator.
pops up on the instrument cluster display. The
engine will not be able to be switched on. Use a Important conditions for the automatic
valid vehicle key or visit a Volkswagen dealership.  engine shutdown to work
– The driver must fasten the seat belt.
– The driver’s door must be closed.
– The bonnet must be closed.
Start-Stop System – A minimum engine temperature must be
reached.
– Vehicles with Climatronic: the vehicle interior
Start-Stop system
temperature is within the set temperature
Depending on the vehicle or the radio version, range and the humidity is not too high.
the Start-Stop system may not be available. – The air conditioning defrost function must be
off.
The Start-Stop system automatically turns off
the engine after stopping the vehicle and during – The 12-V vehicle battery must have enough
the vehicle stopping stages. If necessary, the en- charge.
gine automatically starts up again. – The 12-V vehicle battery’s temperature must
not be too high or too low.
Turn on the Start-Stop system – The vehicle is not on a steep up- or downhill
The function is automatically enabled whenever incline.
the ignition is switched on. The instrument clus-
– Vehicle with automatic gearbox: the steering
ter display shows information regarding the cur-
wheel is not intensely turned.
rent status.
– The reverse gear must not be engaged.
Other information regarding the Start-Stop mode
can be accessed on the radio display. On the If the automatic engine shutdown conditions are
main radio screen, swipe left once and select only reached during a stop, the engine will shut
Vehicle status . down subsequently, for example, upon turning
off the defrost function.
When crossing through flooded areas, always
manually turn the Start-Stop system off. Conditions for a new automatic start
The engine can start automatically under the fol-
lowing conditions: 

108 Owner's Manual

 – If the vehicle interior gets too hot or too cold. ● The airbags and belt tensioners will not work
– When the vehicle starts moving. if the ignition is switched off.
– When the 12 V battery charge is low. ● The brake servo will not work when the en-
– When the steering wheel is moved. gine is switched off. A stronger action on the
brake pedal is required to stop the vehicle.
Drive on function ● Steering assistance is maintained when the
When a valid vehicle key is not detected inside vehicle's engine is turned off by Start-Stop.
the vehicle after turning the engine off, it is pos- ● When working in the engine compartment
sible to start he engine again within five seconds. the Start-Stop system must be disabled.
A corresponding message will be displayed on
the instrument cluster. NOTICE
After this short period of time it is no longer pos- If the Start-Stop system is used for an extended
sible to start the engine without a valid vehicle period of time at excessively high exterior tem-
key inside the vehicle. peratures, the 12-V battery may be damaged.

Manually enable and disable the Start-Stop In some cases, the engine has to be man-
system ually restarted. Follow the message shown
– Press  on the centre console OR on the radio on the instrument cluster display.
display to manually disable the system. If the
For vehicles with selectable driving profile,
Start-Stop is disabled, the indicator light ap-
when the Eco profile is selected the Start-
pears on the button.
Stop system is automatically enabled.
– Press  on the centre console OR on the radio
display again to manually enable the system. When crossing through flooded areas, al-
ways manually turn the Start-Stop system
Whenever the  button is pressed, the instru- off. 
ment cluster display will indicate the Start-Stop
system status.
If the engine was shut down by the Start-Stop
system, it will start up again as soon as the sys- Troubleshooting
tem is disabled by pressing the  button.
The engine does no longer start automatically
When crossing through flooded areas, always If the engine no longer starts automatically, the
manually turn the Start-Stop system off. alert Fault: vehicle power system. Go to a workshop. May
be displayed on the instrument cluster display.
WARNING
– Manually start the engine → page 105.
Improper or unsupervised use of the vehicle
keys can cause severe accidents or injuries. – Manually turn off the Start-Stop system.
● When leaving the vehicle, turn off your en- – Immediately seek assistance from a
gine and always carry all the vehicle keys Volkswagen Dealership or a qualified work-
when leaving the vehicle. Whenever you lock shop. 
your doors, make sure there are no people
inside. Unauthorized people or children can
lock the vehicle, start the engine or turn the
ignition on and thereby operate the electric
equipment such as, for example, the electric
windows.

WARNING
Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is
25A.5L1.POL.20

in motion. This can lead to the loss of control of

the vehicle, to severe accidents and injuries.

Driving 109
Manual gearbox high when doing so → . The clutch, gearbox
and engine may be damaged if one or more gears
are skipped when shifting down a gear at high
Manual gearbox: engaging the gear speeds or high engine revs, even if the clutch is
not released in the process → .

WARNING
When the engine is running, the vehicle will
start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and
the clutch released.
● Never switch off the engine while the vehicle
is in motion.
● Never select reverse gear while the vehicle is
in motion.

WARNING
Shifting gears incorrectly to a lower gear can
lead to a loss of control of the vehicle, which
Fig. 92 Gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual can cause accidents and serious injuries.
gearbox.

Depending on the vehicle version, the design of NOTICE

the gearshift lever may vary. The clutch, gearbox and engine may be severely
damaged if the gear stick of the manual gearbox
Engaging a forward gear is shifted to a gear which is too low when travel-
Each gear position is illustrated on the gear lever ling at high speeds or at high revs. This also ap-
→ Fig. 92. plies if the clutch remains depressed and the
gears do not engage. 
– Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal.
– Position the gear selection lever into the neu-
tral position → .
– Gently release the clutch pedal to start mov- Trouble shooting
ing.
According to vehicle version, some indicator
Volkswagen recommends stepping fully on the
lamps may not be available.
clutch pedal to start the engine.
The clutch does not support the full engine
Selecting reverse gear
 torque. If it is the case, take foot off the
clutch pedal.
– Reverse gear should only be selected when the
The clutch may get very hot, for example,
vehicle is stationary.  from frequent pulling away, “slow driv-
– Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal → . ing”or heavy stop-and-go traffic. Its over-
– Move the gear lever to the neutral position and heating is indicated by the warning lamp
push down. and, if it is the case, by additional warning
– Push the gear lever fully to the left and then to lamps, as well as by a text message dis-
the front in the reverse gear position → Fig. 92 played on the instrument cluster display.
R. Moreover an acoustic alarm may also be
– Gently release the clutch pedal to start mov- sounded → .
ing. The clutch is defective. Proceed carefully!
 Go to a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
Shifting down gears workshop. Otherwise, severe damages may
You should always select the next immediate occur to the clutch. 
gear when shifting down a gear whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion. Engine revs should not be too

110 Owner's Manual

 NOTICE  – Reverse gear
Reverse gear engaged. Engage only while the ve-
Please note the following points in order to avoid
hicle is stationary.
damage and premature wear:
● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when
driving. The pressure from your hand is passed
 – Neutral
The gearbox is in the neutral position. No force is
onto the selector forks in the transmission. transmitted to the wheels and the braking effect
● Ensure that the vehicle has come to a full stop of the motor is not available.
before engaging reverse gear.
● Always fully depress the clutch pedal when  – Permanent forward driving position
changing gear. Position : normal style program
● Do not hold the vehicle by “riding” the clutch All forward gears are shifted up and down auto-
on a hill with the engine running.  matically. The timing of the gear shift is deter-
mined by the engine load, your individual driving
style and the speed of the vehicle.
Position : sport style driving program
Automatic gearbox The gear levels are increased later and reduced
earlier than when in D position to make the best
use of the power reserves of the engine. The tim-
Automatic gearbox: engaging gears ing of the gear shift is determined by the engine
load, your individual driving style and the speed
of the vehicle.
Move the selector lever backwards  → Fig. 93 to
switch between position D and S.
In this, the selector lever will always elastically
return to the D/S position. This also works for the
Tiptronic gate → page 112.

Selector lever lock

In position P or N, the selector lever lock pre-
vents an accidental selector move that would in-
voluntarily put the vehicle in motion.
To release the selector lever lock with the igni-
Fig. 93 Automatic gearbox selector lever with inter- tion on, push the brake pedal down and keep it
lock button (arrow). pressed. At the same time, press the selector lev-
er lock button into the direction indicated by the
According to the vehicle version, the automatic arrow → Fig. 93.
gearbox may not be available.
For fast gear change passing through the N posi-
The engaged gear or gearbox driving programme tion, for example, from R to D/S, the selector lev-
is indicated on the instrument cluster when the er is not locked. Thereby it is possible to “rock” a
ignition is on. vehicle back and forth out of a bog. The selector
lever lock engages when, with the brake pedal
 – Parking lock released, the lever lingers in the N position for
The traction wheels are mechanically blocked. over about a second and at a speed of less than
Engage only while the vehicle is stationary. To about 5 km/h.
move the selector lever from its position with the
ignition turned on, actuate the brake pedal and WARNING
press the interlock button on the selector lever. Engaging an incorrect selector lever position
25A.5L1.POL.20

may lead to the loss of control of the vehicle,

accidents and severe injuries. 

Driving 111
● Never depress the gas pedal when selecting Shifting gears with the Tiptronic
a gear.
● When the engine is running and the selector
is in a drive position, the vehicle will start
moving as soon as the brake pedal is re-
leased.
● Never move the selector lever to reverse or
to P while driving.

WARNING
Unsupervised vehicle movements may cause
severe injuries.
● The driver must never leave the driver seat if
the engine is running and a gear has been se-
lected. If you have to leave the vehicle while
the engine is running, always firmly apply Fig. 94 Selector lever in Tiptronic position.
the handbrake and move the selector lever
to position P.
● With the engine running and the selector
lever engaging position D/S or R, it is neces-
sary to step on the brake to keep the vehicle
stationary. Even when the engine is idling,
the vehicle will “creep forward/backward” as
the power transmission is not fully interrup-
ted.
● Never move the selector lever into P with the
vehicle in motion.
● Never leave the vehicle with the selector lev-
er in position N. The vehicle will roll downhill
regardless of whether or not the engine is
Fig. 95 Steering wheel with Tiptronic gear shift
running. paddles.

NOTICE
When, with the vehicle stationary, the handbrake With the automatic gearbox, the gears
is not engaged and the brake pedal is released can be manually stepped up or down with
with the selector lever in position P, the vehicle the Tiptronic.
can still roll a few centimetres back and forth.

If while driving, the N position is accidental- Operating the Tiptronic with the selector lever
ly selected, let go off the accelerator. Await – In position D/S, move the lever to the right up
the engine idle rotation in neutral position before to the Tiptronic gate.
selecting a different gear.  – Move the selector lever forward + or back-
ward – to increase or decrease the speed
→ Fig. 94. 

112 Owner's Manual

 Operating the Tiptronic with the shift paddles Kick-down
– Pull the right steering wheel paddle lever The kick-down function allows maximum accel-
→ Fig. 95 to step up the gears. eration with the selector lever in position D/S or
– Pull the left steering wheel paddle lever to in the Tiptronic position.
step down the gears. Upon fully stepping down on the accelerator, the
– Pull the right shift paddle towards the steering automatic gearbox engages a lower gear This will
wheel for about one second to disable the Tip- make use of the full vehicle acceleration → .
tronic. With the kick-down, the automatic increase to
The Tiptronic is automatically disabled when the the next gear occurs only when the maximum
shift paddles are not used for a while or the se- prescribed engine rpm is reached.
lector lever is not in the Tiptronic gate. In vehicles with driving mode selection, if the Eco
→ page 117 driving mode is selected and the ac-
NOTICE celerator is pressed beyond the pressure point,
● When accelerating, the gearbox automatically until the floor, the engine power is automatically
shifts up to the next gear shortly before the regulated to ensure maximum vehicle accelera-
maximum permitted engine speed is reached. tion.
● When shifting down a gear manually, the gear-
box will not change gear until the engine can WARNING
no longer be overrevved.  A rapid acceleration can cause loss of traction
and skidding, particularly on slippery roads.
This can lead to loss of control of the vehicle,
severe accidents and injuries.
Driving with automatic gearbox ● Always adjust your driving style in accord-
ance with the flow of traffic.
Forward gears are shifted up and down automat-
ically. ● The Kick-Down function or fast acceleration
must only be used visibility, weather, road
Driving downhill and traffic conditions permitting and other
The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear you road users are not compromised due to the
will need. Lower gears increase the braking ef- vehicle acceleration and driving style.
fect of the engine. Never allow the vehicle to roll
down mountains or hills in the neutral position N. WARNING
– Reduce your speed. Never “ride” the brake pedal. Do not overuse
the brake pedal. Constant braking will cause
– Press the selector lever from position D/S to the brakes to overheat. This can considerably
the right in the direction of the Tiptronic gate reduce the brake effect, increase the braking
→ page 112. distance and, in certain circumstances, cause
– Gently push the selector lever to the rear to the brake system to fail completely.
change down gear.
– OR: reduce the gear speed with the shift pad- NOTICE
dles on the steering wheel → page 113. ● If you stop the vehicle on an incline, do not at-
tempt to stop it from rolling back by depress-
Stopping and proceeding uphill
ing the accelerator when a gear has been se-
The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear you lected. This may overheat and damage the au-
will need. tomatic gearbox.
When stopping on an uphill slope with engaged ● Never allow the vehicle to roll with the selec-
gear, the vehicle must always be prevented from tor lever in position N , particularly when the
moving by stepping on the brake pedal or engag- ignition is switched off. The automatic gearbox
ing the handbrake. Release the brake or hand- is not lubricated and can be damaged. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

brake only upon pulling away → .

Driving 113
 NOTICE Selector lever troubleshooting
On rare occasions the selector lever lock
● Never let the brakes “slip” by applying light
pressure to the brake when it is not really nec-
 may not engage on vehicles with automat-
ic gearbox. The drive is then deenergized
essary to brake. This will increase wearing.
to prevent an unsupervised pull away. The
● Before driving down a long, steep downhill indicator light flashes and, in addition, an
gradient, reduce the speed and change to a informative text is displayed. To engage
lower gear. This will make use of the braking the selector lever lock, proceed as follows:
effect of the electric drive and relieve the load
on the brakes. The brake system could other- – press the brake pedal and release the pedal
wise overheat and fail. Only use the brakes again.
when necessary to slow down or stop the ve-
hicle. Emergency unlocking the selector lever

Should the vehicle need to be towed during a
failure of power supply, for example, a flat 12 V
vehicle battery, an emergency unlocking of the
Troubleshooting selector lock lever will have to be performed.
Seek expert assistance for this.
The emergency unlock is located underneath the
selector lever frame cover.

Removing the selector lever cover

– Apply the handbrake.
– Switch off the ignition.
– Carefully pull the cover with the electric cables
connected upward in the area of the selector
lever trim.
– Double the cover up over the selector lever
→ .

Emergency unlock the selector lever lock

Fig. 96 Remove the selector lever cover and man-
ually emergency unlock the selector lever lock. – With the help of a screwdriver carefully press
the release lever in the direction indicated by
Warning and indicator lamps on the the arrow and keep it in that position
instrument cluster → Fig. 96.

The indicator lamps light up. – Press the interlock button on the selector lever
and move the lever to the N position.
  Stop driving! Gearbox damaged. Let – After emergency unlocking, reinstall and care-
the gearbox cool down with the selector fully press the cover on the centre console,
lever in position P. If the warning does not paying attention to the correct position of the
turn off, do not drive on and seek special- electric cables.
ized technical assistance. Otherwise the
gearbox may suffer severe damage. Emergency program
Brake pedal not pressed, for example, dur- The system is damaged when all selector lever
 ing an attempt to select another gear posi- position indicators are highlighted by a light
tion with the selector lever. Step on the background on the instrument cluster display.
brake pedal to select a gear. The automatic gearbox operates under an emer-
gency programme. Under the emergency pro-
The indicator lamps flash.
gram the vehicle can still run, however at re-
The interlock button of the selector lever is duced speed and not in all gears.
 not pressed. The pull away is impeded. En-
gage the lock of the selector lever lock With automatic gearbox, in some cases it will no
→ page 111. longer be possible to drive in reverse gear. 

114 Owner's Manual

 In all cases, the automatic gearbox must immedi- ● To prevent damage to the gearbox, drive-on
ately be checked by a Volkswagen Dealership. only when the acoustic alarm is no longer
sounded. While the transmission is overhea-
Automatic gearbox overheating ted, starting the vehicle or driving at walking
The automatic gearbox may get very hot, speeds must be avoided.
 for example, from frequent pulling away,


“slow driving”or heavy stop-and-go traffic.

Its overheating is indicated by the warning
lamp and, if it is the case, by a text mes- Uphill assist system
sage on the instrument cluster display. An
acoustic alarm may also be sounded. Stop The uphill assist system (HHC - Hill Hold Control)
the vehicle and wait until the transmission assists the driver with pulling away uphill, by
cools down → . holding the vehicle.

The vehicle does not move backward nor The uphill assist system is automatically
forward despite the engaged gear level enabled under the following circumstances
If the vehicle does not move in the desired direc- Vehicles with manual gearbox
tion, the gear position may not be properly en-
gaged. Next, step on the brake pedal and select The following conditions must be simultaneously
the desired gear once again. met:
If the vehicle still does not move to the desired 1 Keep the vehicle stopped with the brake
location, the system is faulty. Seek specialized pedal on an uphill gradient of about 5%.
technical support and inspect the system. 2 The engine runs “in a regular way”.
3 Step fully on the clutch pedal and engage the
WARNING gear shift lever in the 1st gear to drive uphill
Never take the selector lever out of the P posi- forward, or in the R position to drive uphill in
tion while the handbrake is not engaged. Oth- reverse gear.
erwise, on slopes, the vehicle may roll away un-
expectedly and thereby cause severe accidents To pull away, take foot off the brake pedal and at
and injuries. same time release the clutch pedal (engage) and
accelerate as needed. Upon releasing the brake
pedal, the vehicle is held in place for approxi-
NOTICE
mately 2 seconds. The brake is slowly released
When the vehicle is driven for a longer period upon starting. If starting does not occur within
with the engine turned off and the selector lever two seconds, the brake is released and the vehi-
in position N, or at a higher speed, the automatic cle will move backwards.
gearbox will be damaged, for example, when be-
Vehicles with automatic gearbox
ing towed.
The following conditions must be simultaneously
NOTICE met:
● As soon as the transmission overheating is 1 Keep the vehicle stopped with the brake
shown for the first time, the vehicle must be pedal on an uphill gradient of about 5%.
safely parked or driven at speeds above 20
km/h.
2 The engine runs “in a regular way”.
● When the text message and the acoustic
3 With the selector lever in position D/S to
warning are repeated every 10 seconds, the drive forward up hill or in position R to drive
vehicle must be stopped safely immediately in reverse up hill.
and the engine shut off. Wait until the trans- To pull away, take foot off the brake pedal and
mission cools down. accelerate as needed. The brake is slowly re-
leased upon starting. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Driving 115
The uphill assist system is immediately control unit associated with an electric motor,
disabled: sensors and a gear box replaces the hoses, pump,
– If any of the aforementioned conditions are no reservoir and fluid of a hydraulic system.
longer available → page 115, The uphill assist The electromechanical power steering assist is
system is automatically enabled under the fol- automatically adjusted based on the driving
lowing circumstances. speed, the torque and the angles applied by the
– When the driver door is opened. conductor on the wheel to turn the vehicle. The
– In case of irregular running of the engine or electromechanical assist only works when the
deficiencies in the engine. engine is running.
– When the engine is turned off or "dies". When the electromechanical assist is reduced or
malfunctioning, a lot higher strength than usual
Adverse conditions: will be required to manoeuvre the vehicle. But
The electronic stability program (ESC) may not never will the driver loose control over the steer-
identify very steep slopes (over 30%). This cir- ing wheel of the vehicle.
cumstance may affect the regular operation of For vehicles with selectable driving profile the
the electronic stability program (ESC) and conse- behaviour of the electromechanical steering as-
quently the hill assist system (HHC - Hill Hold sistance can be influenced through the selected
Control), emergency braking assistant (Front As- driving profile.
sist) and parking sensor.
To restore the aforementioned systems, it is suf- WARNING
ficient that the vehicle is turned off and on again ● The electromechanical power steering assist
and that the driver starts the car and drives it at a only works when the engine is running. In
speed greater than 25 km/h for a few seconds. case of engine malfunction while the vehicle
is moving, the electromechanical assist
CAUTION works for some time longer in order to safely
● When the vehicle does not pull away imme- park the vehicle.
diately after the brake pedal is released, it ● Never allow the vehicle to roll if the engine is
may eventually roll backwards. In this case switched off.
immediately hit the brake pedal or pull the ● Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
handbrake. tion cylinder while the vehicle is in motion. 
● If the engine quits, step immediately on the
brake pedal or pull the handbrake.
● When on an uphill slope with intense traffic,
to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward Troubleshooting
when pulling away, step on the brake for
Warning and indicator lamps on the
some minutes.  instrument cluster

When switching the ignition on, certain warning

and indicator lamps light up briefly to check their
functions and turn off after a few seconds. If the
Steering assistance lights turn on again:

Information on steering
  Stop driving! Electromechanical steer-
ing assist out of action. Contact a
Volkswagen Dealership immediately.
Electromechanically assisted steering consumes
Electromechanical steering assist with
less power from the vehicle in comparison to hy-
draulically assisted steering wheels, as it is acti-
 limited operation. Contact a Volkswagen
Dealership as soon as possible. 
vated only when the steering wheel is turned,
while with the hydraulically assisted steering, the
hydraulic system is always being run, even with
the vehicle moving straight ahead. With the elec-
tromechanically assisted steering a computerized

116 Owner's Manual

 Driving mode selection Select the “Individual” driving mode
– Touch the  Individual driving mode on the ra-
dio display.
 Introduction – Touch Customize to open the menu.
– In the menu, configure Transmission, Engine sound,
Steering and Air conditioning, as desired.
The driver can adjust several features of – To reset to default settings, touch RESET .
the vehicle systems to the current driving
conditions, the desired driving conven- WARNING
ience, and a fuel saving driving style using Adjusting driving modes while driving may dis-
the driving profiles. Among the vehicle’s tract drivers and cause accidents.
systems that can be adjusted are the run- ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. 
ning gear, engine control, and air condi-
tioning.

Characteristics of driving modes

Depending on the vehicle version, different driv-
ing modes are available for selection. The influ- Eco: places the vehicle in low consumption
ence of vehicle systems in individual driving  mode and promotes economical driving. In
modes depends on the vehicle version.  the Eco driving mode, the gear position is
switched automatically to free wheel func-
tion.
Select driving mode Normal: the driving mode represents basic
 settings of vehicle systems and offers a
Depending on the vehicle version, the driving moderate combination, for example, for
profile selection may not be available or may day-to-day use.
vary. Sport: provides a sporting feeling to the
 driving experience and can change the en-
The profile can be selected with the ignition on
gine sound. In the Sport driving mode, in
and the vehicle stopped or while driving → .
vehicles with automatic gearbox, the se-
If a driving mode is selected while driving, the lector lever position is automatically
vehicle's systems immediately switch to the new switched to position S.
mode, except the engine. Individual: vehicle systems can be custom-
– When traffic permits, quickly remove foot  ized. 
from accelerator pedal to allow the selected
driving mode to be applied to the engine as
well.
Default behaviours of driving
Select the driving mode on the radio display modes and vehicle systems
1 Switch on the ignition. With the ignition off, the Normal driving mode
2 On the main radio screen, swipe left once represents basic settings of the vehicle systems.
and select Driving mode .
3 Select the desired driving profile on the radio Behaviour of driving modes when switching
display. the ignition off and on again
When switching the ignition off and on again, the
Show information in the driving mode. last driving mode selected remains active. 
– It is possible to access information about the
driving profiles, except the driving profile
25A.5L1.POL.20

 Individual .

– To show more information on the selected

driving mode, touch INFO on the radio display.

Driving 117
Troubleshooting Driver assist systems
Vehicle systems or driving mode do not Cruise control system (GRA)
behave as expected
Observe the default behaviours of vehicle sys-
tems or driving modes → page 117.   Introduction

The speed regulator system (GRA) assists

the driver keeping constant a set speed.

Depending on the vehicle version, the cruise con-

trol (GRA) may not be available.

Speed range
The GRA is available for forward driving from 20
km/h onwards.

Display indicators
If the GRA is switched off, the instrument cluster
display will show the stored speed and the GRA
status:
GRA on.

Displayed small or grey: GRA not regulat-
 ing.
Displayed large or white: GRA on, active
 regulation.
If no speed is stored, the instrument cluster dis-
play will show .

Changing gear
As soon as the clutch pedal is stepped on, the
cruise control is interrupted and automatically
taken up again after the gear change.

Driving downhill
When driving downhill the set speed may be ex-
ceeded due to the slope gradient.
To maintain speed, lower the gear or press the
brake pedal. The GRA is disabled when the brake
pedal is pressed.

How do I control the GRA?

The GRA is controlled through the multifunction
steering wheel→ page 119. 

118 Owner's Manual

 WARNING Switch on
– Press  .
When it is not possible to drive safely over a
sufficient distance and at a constant speed, the No speed is saved and no control is yet active.
cruise control system may cause severe
accidents and injuries. Starting the cruise controlling
● Never use the cruise control system (GRA) in – While driving, press  .
intense traffic, over short distances, steep, The current speed is saved and controlled. In ad-
sinuous, and slippery circuits, such as ice, dition the green indicator lamp lights up .
snow, humidity, or gravel and also not on
flooded roads. Set speed
● Never use the GRA in free terrain or unpaved The saved speed may be adjusted while the GRA
roads. is controlling:
● Adjust the speed and safety distance to vehi-  + 1 km/h
cles ahead based on weather, road, and traf-  - 1 km/h
fic conditions.
 + 10 km/h
● In order to prevent unexpected speed adjust-  - 10 km/h
ments, always switch off the GRA after us-
ing. To alter the set speed continuously, keep the 
● It is dangerous to resume stored speeds if button or the  button pressed. The system ad-
the speed is too high for current road, traffic, justs the current speed accelerating or slowing
or weather conditions. down the vehicle accordingly. The vehicle does
not actively brake.
● On downhill slopes, the GRA may not keep
the vehicle speed constant. The vehicle's Interrupting the control
weight increases speed by itself. Reduce the
– Briefly press the  button or the  button.
gear or apply the brakes.  Or step on the brake as an alternative.
The speed will remain stored.

Operating the GRA by way of Resume operation

multifunction steering wheel – Press the  button.

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter The current speed is resumed and adjusted.
on page 119.
Switch off
– Press the  button for a moment.
The GRA is turned off and the saved speed de-
leted.
The  button does not have any function
for GRA. 

Troubleshooting
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 119.

Fig. 97 Left side of the multifunction steering  Damaged GRA

25A.5L1.POL.20

wheel: GRA operating buttons. – Volkswagen recommends seeking out a

Volkswagen Dealership 

Driver assist systems 119

The cruise control is automatically
interrupted.
Parking and manoeuvring
Several causes are possible:
– The driver has hit the brake. Parking
– The vehicle exceeded the set speed over a lon-
ger time period. Stopping the vehicle
Always park the vehicle in the indicated se-
– System malfunction. Disable the GRA and have
quence.
it checked at a Volkswagen Dealership. 
Park the vehicle always on a level and stable sur-
face → .
– Stopping the vehicle. With a manual gearbox,
press the clutch pedal fully down.
– Depress and hold the brake pedal until the en-
gine has stopped.
– With an automatic gearbox, move the selector
lever to position P.
– Lift the handbrake lever up → page 121.
– Switch off the engine. The  indicator lamp
on the instrument cluster should be lit up in
red.
– Remove the key from the ignition.
– In vehicles with manual gearbox, select 1st
gear for flat ground and uphill inclines, or re-
verse gear for downhill inclines, and then re-
lease the clutch.
– Let go off the brake pedal.
– Ensure that all occupants, particularly children,
have left the vehicle.
– Take all vehicle keys with you when you leave
the vehicle.
– Lock the vehicle.

Parking on uphill and downhill slopes

Before switching off the engine, turn the steering
wheel so that the front wheels will roll against
the kerb if the parked vehicle starts to move.
– When facing downhill, turn the wheels so that
they face the kerb.
– When facing uphill, turn the wheels so that
they face the centre of the road.

WARNING
The components of the exhaust system be-
come very hot. This can cause fires and serious
injuries.
● Never park the vehicle so that parts of the
exhaust system can come into contact with
inflammable material underneath the vehi-
cle, e.g. leaves, dry grass, spilt fuel, etc. 

120 Owner's Manual

 WARNING Handbrake
Leaving and parking the vehicle incorrectly may
cause the vehicle to move. This could lead to
accidents and severe injuries. Engaging the handbrake
● Ensure that the handbrake is correctly en-
gaged.
● Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
tion cylinder while the vehicle is in motion.
● Always take all vehicle keys with you when
you leave the vehicle. The engine can be
started and electrical equipment such as the
window controls can be operated, which may
lead to severe injuries.
● Never leave unattended children or people
with special needs in the vehicle. They could Fig. 98 Between front seats: handbrake lever.
become trapped in the vehicle in an emer-
gency and may not be able to get themselves Always pull the handbrake lever when leaving or
to safety. Depending on the time of year, for parking the vehicle.
example, locked vehicles can be subjected to
very high or very low temperatures. This can Applying the handbrake
cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, – Press the interlock button and pull the hand-
especially to small children. brake lever upwards → Fig. 98 (arrow).

NOTICE The handbrake is engaged when the  indicator

lamp, with switched on ignition, lights up on the
● Only release the brake pedal after pulling the instrument cluster.
handbrake, in order to prevent sudden vehicle
movement after parking. Releasing the handbrake
● Drive carefully in parking lots with long kerbs – Pull the handbrake lever slightly upwards and
or fixed posts. Objects higher than the ground press the interlock button → Fig. 98 (arrow).
level may damage the bumper and other vehi- – Guide the handbrake lever down while press-
cle parts when parking. On order to avoid any ing down the interlock button.
damage, stop the vehicle before the wheels
touch the bollards or kerbs. WARNING
● Carefully drive through entrances and slumps Incorrect use of the handbrake can cause se-
in terrains, ramps, kerbs, and other objects. vere accidents and injuries.
Lowered vehicle parts, such as the bumper,
spoiler and chassis, engine or exhaust parts ● The handbrake should never be used to brake
may be damaged in these situations. the vehicle, except in emergencies. The brak-
ing distance is considerably longer as only
Please adhere to relevant legislation when the rear wheels are braked. Always use the
stopping and parking your vehicle.  foot brakes.
● Never drive with the handbrake lever slightly
pulled. This could overheat the brake and
compromise the braking system. In addition,
this causes premature wearing of rear brake
pads.
● Never drive the vehicle with the handbrake
lightly applied. The vehicle can move even
25A.5L1.POL.20

while the handbrake is applied. 

Parking and manoeuvring 121

 NOTICE ● Unsupervised vehicle movements may cause
severe injuries.
Only release the brake pedal after pulling the
handbrake, in order to prevent sudden vehicle ● Always keep in mind the parking direction
movement after parking.  and the relevant areas around the vehicle.
● Do not let your attention be deviated from
the surrounding traffic by the images dis-
played on the instrument cluster display or
Parking systems safety on the radio system.
instructions ● Always keep your attention on the surround-
ings of the vehicle as small children, animals
The following are parking systems: and objects are not always detected by the
parking systems.
– Park Distance Control → page 122.
● The parking systems have blind spots in
– Rearview camera system → page 125
which obstacles and people cannot be detec-
Which of the listed systems is installed will de- ted.
pend on the version of the vehicle. ● External acoustic sources and certain object
surfaces and clothing may influence the sen-
Limits of parking systems sor signals. Under certain circumstances
Objects such as thin poles and bars, fences, trees, people and objects may not be detected or
very low or high obstacles as well as open or mistakenly detected.
opening boot lids may not be detected by the
● Due to the display's resolution and in condi-
sensors or cameras.
tions of insufficient lighting, certain objects,
In some cases dirt or ice covering the sensors or such as thin posts or fences, may not be dis-
cameras may be taken for an obstacle. played at all or only partially so.
● The signals and indications of the parking
Limits of the reverse camera
systems demand a reaction time witch at a
The rear view camera only shows two-dimen- too fast approximation may not be sufficient
sional images on the display. Due to the absence to emit a warning.
of image depth, protruding objects or recesses in
the road may be difficult to identify or not be Volkswagen recommends practicing the use
identifiable at all. of the parking distance control in a low-
traffic area or a parking lot to get properly ac-
The orientation lines are superimposed on the
quainted with the system's quirks. 
image regardless of the surroundings of the vehi-
cle, there is no automatic identification of ob-
jects. The driver is responsible for the assess-
ment of whether the vehicle fits or not into the
parking space. Park distance control (Park
WARNING Pilot)
The intelligent technology shipped with the
parking systems cannot go beyond the limits  Introduction
imposed by physics and will only operate within
the limitations of the system. The increased
convenience provided by the parking assist sys-
tems must not let you ignore a risk situation. The park distance control system assists
The parking assist systems cannot replace the the driver with parking and manoeuvring.
driver's full attention.
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit According to the vehicle version, the park dis-
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tance control system may not be available. 
tions.

122 Owner's Manual

 By way of sensors in the front and rear bumper Automatic enabling (version dependent)
the parking assist determines the distance of an The Park Distance Control is also enabled when
obstacle from the vehicle → page 6. The system the vehicle is driven at a speed of less than 15
indicates on the radio system through acoustic km/h against an obstacle in the front area. Auto-
signals when there is an obstacle in the sensors' matic activation can be enabled on the radio sys-
detection range. tem.
System limitations The automatic activation only works when the
approximate speed of 15 km/h is not reached is
Objects such as towing bars, thin poles and bars,
fences, trees, very low or high obstacles as well not reached for the first time. A new automatic
activation is possible when the Park Distance
as open or opening boot lids may not be detec-
Control is disabled and enabled again by means
ted by the sensors.
of the  button on the centre console OR on
In some cases dirt or ice covering the sensors the radio display.
may be taken for an obstacle. 
Further, the automatic activation can also be en-
abled again by switching the ignition off and on
again.
Enabling and disabling
Manoeuvre braking
When the vehicle is equipped with the manoeu-
vre braking function, the manoeuvre braking will
activate an emergency braking as soon as an ob-
stacle is detected while driving in reverse gear.
The purpose of the manoeuvre braking is to re-
duce the possibility of a collision. For such, the
speed must not exceed 10 km/h; The manoeuvre
braking function is enabled or disabled when
park assist is on or off. The manoeuvre braking is
inactive for 5 meter after a braking in the same
direction and, after a gear change or gear posi-
Fig. 99 On the centre console or on the radio dis- tion change, the manoeuvre braking is again
play: button for turning the parking aid on and off. ready to brake. The Park Distance Control limita-
tions apply.
Depending on the vehicle or radio version, the
button to enable and disable park distance con- The manoeuvre braking is not active when the
trol may not be available. Park Distance Control was automatically activa-
ted.
Enabling the park distance control
Touch the  function button to enable or disa-
– Selecting reverse gear. ble the manoeuvre braking. 
– OR: on the centre console press the  button
OR on the radio display touch the  button.
The park distance control is automatically ena-
bled when the vehicle moves in reverse gear.
According to the vehicle version, the park dis-
tance control system may also be enabled auto-
matically.

Disabling the Park Distance Control

– On the centre console press the  button OR
on the radio display touch the  button.
25A.5L1.POL.20

– OR: accelerate the vehicle forward at a speed

higher than approximately 0 to -15 km/h.

Parking and manoeuvring 123

Representation on the display first time or depending on the vehicle version, by
means of a text message with an audible alert
and by the flashing of the control light on the 
button. When the sensors are dirty or covered,
the corresponding group of sensors is displayed
on the Park Distance Control display exhibition.
Furthermore a cleaning indication is displayed
(version dependent).
– Clean the sensors or remove stickers or acces-
sories from the sensors and from the rear view
camera system → page 255.
– Check for damages.
Fig. 100 Indication on the radio system: full screen
The system behaves different from expected
mode. The detected areas depend on the vehicle
version. Several causes are possible:
– The sensors are dirty → page 255. Apart from
Depending on the model and version of the vehi-
dirt and snow, the visibility of the sensor may
cle or the radio, the parking aid and the visual in-
also be compromised by cleaning products
dication of an obstacle may not be available.
residues or linings.
On the radio system the detected areas are rep- – The system's prerequisites must be satisfied
resented by various segments → Fig. 100. The → page 123.
more the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the
– The sensors are covered with water.
more the segment will also approach the illustra-
ted vehicle. Simultaneously acoustic alarms are – The vehicle is damaged in the area of the sen-
sounded. sors, for example by parking bumps.
– The sensors' viewing areas are obstructed by
 Nearby obstacle. A continuous acoustic
accessories such as bike support systems.
sound is sounded. Stop driving!
 Obstacle in the way of the vehicle's course. – Modifications to the paint in the vicinity of the
An intermittent acoustic sound is sounded. sensors or constructive modifications have
The shorter the distance, the shorter the been made, for example, to the front or chas-
intervals between acoustic alarms. sis of the vehicle.
 Obstacle out of the vehicle's course. – Noise sources, such as rough asphalt or cob-
Muting the acoustic warnings. blestone pavements interfere with the ultra-
 sound signal.

 Enabling and disabling the manoeuvre

braking (depends on the version).
Possible solutions
– Turn the system off temporarily.
 Switching to the rear view camera system
(version dependent). – Check whether one of the mentioned possible
/ System with malfunction in the surveyed causes matches the problem.
area (version dependent).  – After eliminating the source of the malfunc-
tion, the system can again be turned on.
– Should the system still behave in an unexpec-
ted fashion, have the system checked at a
Troubleshooting
Volkswagen dealership. 
Sensor without visibility, malfunction
warning, the system turns off
In case of damage to a sensor, the detection
range of the sensor is permanently turned off.
In case of malfunction of the parking aid, a con-
tinuous acoustic warning is emitted for approxi-
mately 3 seconds when it is turned on for the

124 Owner's Manual

 Rear view camera system Settings
With the rear view camera system enabled, set-
tings may be configured by means of the func-
 Introduction tion touch pads. Some settings depend on the
version.
Function touch pad surfaces and rear view cam-
The rear view camera on the rear of the era system icons:
vehicle facilitates the driver's rear view
and assists with the parking manoeuvre. x Exit current display.
 Adjust
colour.
the display: brightness, contrast,

According to the version of the vehicle, the rear

view camera system may not be available.  →Switch to Park Distance Control
page 122.
The rear view camera displays the area behind
the vehicle on the radio system display screen.  Displays
tor,
the Park Distance Control indica-

According to the mode, orientation lines support

the rear view.  Hides the Park Distance Control indicator,
WARNING  Turning the Park Distance Control sound
on and off.
The use of the cameras to asses the distance to
obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) is imprecise Orientation lines
and may cause serious accidents and injuries. Red line: safe distance backwards
● The camera lenses amplify and distort the Green side-lines: vehicle extensions. 
field of vision making the displayed objects
seem altered or imprecise. 
Assumptions

Enabling and disabling  Please refer to at the start of the chapter

on page 125.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 125. To recognize a parking lot, the following assump-
tions must be satisfied:
Enabling the rear view camera system
– Not exceed 15 km/h.
– Selecting reverse gear.
– Parking space width: vehicle length + 0.2 m.
– OR: on the centre console press the  button
OR on the radio display touch the  button. For the display of a faultless image the following
prerequisites must be satisfied:
Disabling the rear view camera system
– Closed boot lid.
Drive forward at least 15 km/h. 
– The surroundings correspond to a flat surface.
– The vehicle is not loaded in the back. 

Representation on the display

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 125.

The image of the rear view camera system is dis-

25A.5L1.POL.20

played on the radio system.

The functions and representations depend on the
version and may differ.

Parking and manoeuvring 125

Parking Troubleshooting
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 125. on page 125.

No camera image, malfunction warning, the

system turns off
– Clean the camera lens or remove the stickers
or accessories from the camera → page 255.
– Check for damages.

The system behaves different from expected

Several causes are possible:
– The camera is dirty → page 255. Apart from
dirt and snow, the camera view may also be
compromised by cleaning products residues or
coatings.
– The system's prerequisites must be satisfied
→ page 125.
– The camera lens is covered by water.
– The vehicle is damaged in the area of the cam-
Fig. 101 Exhibition on the radio system display: era, for example by parking bumping.
parking with the rear view camera system. – The camera's viewing areas are obstructed by
accessories such as bike support systems.
Key for→ Fig. 101: – Modifications to the paint in the vicinity of the
 Select parking spot. camera or constructive modifications have
 Parking in the selected parking spot. been made, for example, to the front or chas-
 Line up vehicle to parking spot. sis of the vehicle.
1 Lane.
2 Parking space. Solution for all cases
3 Side limits of the parking space. – Turn the system off temporarily.
4 Rear limit of the parking space. – Check whether one of the mentioned possible
causes matches the problem.
Entering the parking space – After eliminating the source of the malfunc-
– Position the vehicle in front of the parking tion, the system can again be turned on.
spot → Fig. 101 2 . – Should the system still behave in an unexpec-
– Selecting reverse gear. ted fashion, have the system checked at a
– Drive slowly in reverse and manoeuvre so that Volkswagen dealership. 
the green side guides lead in between the de-
limiting lines of the selected parking space
2 .
– Align the vehicle in the selected parking spot
so that the green side guidelines are superim-
posed on the lateral limitation lines 3 .
– Stop the vehicle when the red line hits the rear
limit 4 . 

126 Owner's Manual

 Brake support systems – Strongly press and hold the brake pedal. Do
not take your foot off the brake pedal or re-
duce the force on the brake pedal!
Information to the brake support – Do not “pump” the brake pedal or reduce the
systems pressure on the brake pedal!
– Steer the vehicle while the brake pedal is fully
depressed.
The vehicle is equipped with a brake support sys-
tem: – The ABS will switch off when the brake pedal
– ESC system: the ESC, EDS, TCS, BAS, ABS and is released or if the pressure on the brake ped-
EBV brake support systems only function when al is reduced.
the engine is running. They make a considera- If the ABS is taking corrective action, you will be
ble contribution to active driving safety. aware of a pulsing movement in the brake pedal
When the brake supporting systems are in opera- and some noise. However, ABS will not necessa-
tion, the brake pedal may pulse or noises may oc- rily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
cur. Keep the necessary pressure constantly on conditions. The braking distance could even be
the brake pedal. longer when braking on gravel or on fresh snow
covering an icy or slippery surface.
Traction control (TCS)
The TCS reduces the engine drive in case of Electronic brake variator (EBV)
wheel skidding and adjusts the drive to road sur- In all vehicles, upon activating the brakes, the ve-
face conditions. The TCS facilitates the starter, hicle's centre of gravity shifts forward. This gen-
acceleration, and uphill effort, even under ad- erates the risk of blocking rear wheels due to low
verse road surface conditions. traction. The electronic braking distribution limits
the brake force on the rear wheels, ensuring an
When the traction control system is active the  adequate brake force distribution between the
indicator lamp will flash on the instrument clus- front and rear axles. The electronic brake variator
ter display. is part of the ABS functions.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Brake assist (BAS)
The ESC helps reduce the risk of skidding and im- The BAS may assist in reducing the braking dis-
prove driving stability under given driving condi- tance. The brake assist system enhances braking
tions → . power when the driver suddenly hits the brake
In reverse gear, the ESC system may limit speed pedal in emergency braking situations.
to ensure vehicle stability. Do not reduce the the pressure on the pedal
When the ESC is controlling, the  indicator lamp when the BAS is actuating. Upon reducing the
will flash on the instrument cluster display. pressure on the brake pedal the BAS stops its
brake enhancing action.
In ESC, the ABS, BAS, TCS and the EDS are inte-
grated. The ESC must always be enabled. The Electronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDS)
ASR may be disabled through the radio system
should sufficient propulsion no longer be reached The EDL brakes the wheel that is skidding and
under some driving scenarios → page 129. Next, transfers the traction force to the other traction
re-enable the TCS → page 129. wheel.
The EDL turns off automatically under extraordi-
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) nary strong demand to prevent the brake disc
The ABS prevents the wheels from locking when from overheating. The EDL is automatically acti-
the brakes are applied up until the point where vated again as soon as the brake has cooled
the vehicle is nearly stationary and assists the down.
driver in steering the vehicle and keeping it under The XDS is an extension of the electronic differ-
control. This means that the vehicle is also less ential lock. The XDS does not react to the skid-
25A.5L1.POL.20

likely to spin, even when the brakes are de- ding of the wheels, but to the relief of the inside
pressed fully: front wheel when in fast curve driving. The XDS
exerts pressure on the brake of the curve inside 

Parking and manoeuvring 127

wheel, to prevent skidding. This way traction is ● The brake support system cannot prevent an
improved. This helps the vehicle to keep within accident if, for example, you are driving too
the desired lane. close to the vehicle in front or are driving too
fast for the respective driving situation.
Automatic Post-Collision Braking System
● Despite the braking support systems being
In case of an accident the Automatic Post-Colli- very effective and able to help control the
sion Braking System may assist the driver in re- vehicle in difficult driving situations, please
ducing the risk of skidding and the risk of further always remember that the driving stability of
collisions during the accident by way of and au- the vehicle depends on tyre grip.
tomatically initiated braking.
● When accelerating on a slippery surface, for
The Automatic Post -Collision Braking System example on ice and snow, press the accelera-
only works with frontal, side and rear collisions tor carefully. Even with the braking support
when the airbag control unit detects a given systems the wheels may skid. That may
threshold for its activation during the accident. cause the loss of control over the vehicle.
The braking of the vehicle occurs automatically
by way of the ESC, as long as the brake's hydraul- WARNING
ics, the ESC and the electric system are not dam- The effectiveness of the ESC can be considera-
aged and remain operational. bly reduced when other components and sys-
The following activities override the automatic tems that affect the dynamics of driving are
braking in an accident: not correctly serviced or are not functioning
properly. This also applies, but not exclusively,
– If the driver steps on the accelerator pedal. No to the brakes, tyres and other systems that
automatic braking will occur. have already been named.
– When the pressure exerted by stepping on the ● Always remember that modifications and
brake pedal exceeds the pressure on the brake changes to the vehicle may affect the correct
induced by the system. The vehicle is manually functioning of the ABS, BAS, TCS, EDS and
braked. ESC systems.

WARNING ● Alterations to the suspension or the use of

factory unauthorized wheel and tyre sets
The intelligent technology shipped with the may have a detrimental effect on the work-
braking support systems cannot go beyond the ing of the ABS, BAS, TCS, EDS and ESC reduc-
limits imposed by physics and will only operate ing their efficiency.
within the limitations of the system. Driving
● ESC efficiency is also conditioned to the use
fast on icy, slippery or wet roads can lead to a
of suitable tyres → page 233, Important in-
loss of control of the vehicle and could cause
formation on wheels and tyres.
serious injury to the driver and its passengers.
● Adapt your speed and driving style to ac- WARNING
cording to the visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety Driving without the brake servo can considera-
afforded by the ABS, BAS, EDL, TCS and ESC bly increase the braking distance and thus
braking support systems lead you into temp- cause accidents and serious injuries.
tation of putting safety at risk when driving. ● Never allow the vehicle to roll if the engine is
● Slippery and wet roads remain rather dan- switched off.
gerous, even with the ESC and all the other ● If the brake servo is not functioning or the
systems. vehicle is being towed, the brake pedal will
● Driving at high speeds on wet roads can have to be depressed more forcefully, since
cause the wheels to lose contact with the the braking distance will be increased due to
road surface and “aquaplane”. A vehicle can- the lack of braking force support.
not be braked, steered or controlled once it
Operating noises may be heard during regu-
has lost contact with the road surface.
lating procedures of the described systems. 

128 Owner's Manual

 TCS Enabling and disabling Troubleshooting
Should not sufficient propulsion be reached, you Failure warning and indicator lamps
may disable the TCS (for vehicles with ESC):  Stop driving! Damaged brake system.
– When driving on loose ground or deep snow.
 Seek out assistance from a Volkswagen
Dealership immediately → .
– During “free wheel spinning” while stuck in
Lit: ABS out of action or malfunctioning.
mud or other areas.  Contact a Volkswagen Dealership. The ve-
Then, enable the TCS function again. hicle can be braked without ABS.
Lit: ESC disabled for system-related rea-
Enabling and disabling the TCS  sons. Switch the ignition off and on again.
– According to the version of the vehicle and of As the case may be, drive on for a short
the radio, press the  button on the radio distance at about 15-20 km/h. If  remains
system → page 28. on, seek out a Volkswagen Dealership.
– Open the menu Vehicle settings on the radio sys-
tem. Guidelines for the braking support systems
– Touch the ESC system: function button. When there is a suspicion that there may be a
faulty function, read and observe the following
– Turning the TCS off: select the TCS deactivated
instructions:
option.
– Turning the TCS on: select the TCS activated op- – The ESC and TSC can only function properly
tion. when all four wheels are equipped with the
same tyre type and model. Different diameters
OR among the wheels/tyres may cause an unex-
– Depending on the vehicle and radio version, on pected reduction in engine power.
the radio display, touch the settings button  – In case of damages in the ABS system, the ESC,
OR the  button to enable and disable the TCS, and EDS will also be disabled.
function. – Operating noises may result from adjustments
– Touch the Car function button. to the described systems.
– Touch the Stability control (ESC) function button.
Adverse conditions:
– Turning the TCS off: select the TCS deactivated
The electronic stability program (ESC) may not
option.
identify very steep slopes (over 30%). This cir-
– Turning the TCS on: select the TCS activated op- cumstance may affect the regular operation of
tion. the electronic stability program (ESC) and conse-
With the TCS disabled, the yellow  warning quently the hill assist system (HHC - Hill Hold
lamp will flash on the instrument cluster display.  Control), emergency braking assistant (Front As-
sist) and parking sensor.
To restore the aforementioned systems, it is suf-
ficient that the vehicle is turned off and on again
and that the driver starts the car and drives it at a
speed greater than 25 km/h for a few seconds.

WARNING
Driving with faulty brakes may cause severe ac-
cidents and injuries.
● If the braking system warning lamp  lights
up along with the ABS control lamp , the
ABS function may be faulty. Because of this
25A.5L1.POL.20

it may be possible that the rear wheels block

relatively quickly when braking. Locking rear
wheels may cause the driver to loose control 

Parking and manoeuvring 129

 over the vehicle! If possible, reduce speed
and drive carefully at minimum speed to the
Practical equipment
nearest Volkswagen Dealership to check the Stowage compartment
braking system. Avoid sudden braking and
driving manoeuvres while driving.
● If the ABS control lamp  lights up or re-  Introduction
mains lit while driving, the ABS is not func-
tioning properly. The vehicle can only be
braked with regular brakes (without ABS). Only use stowage compartments to stow light or
The protection provided by the ABS will not small objects.
be available under this scenario. Go to a
Volkswagen Dealership as soon as possible.  WARNING
Loose objects may be flung through the vehicle
interior in the event of a sudden driving or
braking manoeuvre. This can cause serious in-
jury and can also lead to loss of control of the
vehicle.
● Do not stow any pets or any hard, heavy or
sharp objects in the vehicle's open stowage
compartments, on the dash panel, on the
shelf behind the rear seats, or in items of
clothing and bags in the vehicle interior.
● Always keep the stowage compartment cov-
er closed while driving.

WARNING
Items in the driver footwell can hinder pedal
operation. This can lead to loss of control of the
vehicle and increase the risk of serious injury.
● Ensure that all pedals can always be operat-
ed without any hindrance.
● Foot mats must always be properly secured
in the footwell.
● Additional foot mats or other floor coverings
should never be placed over the fitted foot
mat.
● Ensure that no objects can enter the driver
footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

NOTICE
● Hard objects on the shelf can chafe against the
wires of the heating element in the rear win-
dow and cause damages.
● Do not store any temperature-sensitive ob-
jects, food or medicines inside the vehicle. Hot
and cold temperatures could damage them or
render them unusable. 

130 Owner's Manual

 ● Items stored in the vehicle made from trans- Wireless charging function
parent materials, e.g. glasses, magnifying
glasses or transparent suction cups on the  Please refer to and at the start of the
windows, can concentrate the sun's rays and chapter on page 130.
thus cause damage to the vehicle.

The ventilation openings between the rear

window and the luggage compartment cov-
er must not be covered as this would prevent
stale air escaping from the vehicle. 

Stowage area in the lower part of

the centre console
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 130.
Fig. 103 Stowage compartment with pad for wire-
less charging function. The symbol on the lining pad
may appear differently in some vehicles.

Depending on the vehicle version and country,

the wireless charging function may not be availa-
ble.
Depending on the vehicle version, the charging
area → Fig. 103 1 of the wireless charging func-
tion is located in the middle of the centre con-
sole or storage compartment, in the area be-
tween the front seats.
Fig. 102 In the lower part of the centre console:
stowage area. The wireless charging function allows wireless
power transferring by short-distance electro-
On the bottom of the centre console there is an magnetic induction.
open stowage area → Fig. 102. The QI standard allows the wireless charging of
Depending on the vehicle version, the stor- smartphones to support the QI protocol.
age compartment may have a USB port.  To find out if a mobile phone device supports the
→ page 137 and wireless charging function QI standard, check the device specifications in
→ page 131..  the manufacturer's site.
Only a Qi-compatible mobile phone without a
protective cap with a dimension (width x length)
of approximately 80 mm x 140 mm (3.15 in x
5.512 in) can be placed evenly on the wireless
charging function floor mat.
The maximum charging power is 10 watts. The
power charge depends on mobile phone configu-
rations and is controlled based on battery level
and temperature.
Before charging a device, remove all foreign ob-
jects with metallic parts, such as coins, keys, and
25A.5L1.POL.20

clips, from the charging area. 

Practical equipment 131

To charge a mobile phone that supports the QI ● Always use mobile phones compatible with the
protocol, place it with the screen facing upwards Qi protocol in the charging area.
in the centre of the charging area. The charging
● Charging performance is optimal when the
process begins automatically.
mobile phone is placed on the centre of the
The factory-fitted radio system informs the be- charging area.
ginning of the charging process and, if applica- ● Thick mobile phone protective cases (greater
ble, also informs of any foreign objects with met- than 2 mm) may affect charging performance.
allic components detected in the charging area.
● Some people can hear faint clicks during
Remove these foreign objects to resume charg-
charging. That is perfectly normal and does
ing.
not indicate anything is wrong.
If a mobile phone is not placed correctly in the ● If the vehicle's interior temperature is too high
charging area or is too small, it may not be rec- (e.g. after prolonged exposure to sunlight),
ognized appropriately. In these special cases, the wait until the temperature drops before using
radio system may report a foreign object detec- the wireless charging function.
ted. In this case, simply place the mobile phone
closer to the centre of the charging area to ob- ● The mobile phone heats up more during wire-
tain better results. less charging compared to conventional cor-
ded charging. That is normal.
New technologies may not support the wireless
● Depending on the battery level and tempera-
charging function. The mobile phone manufac-
ture, some mobile phones may stop charging
turer provides more information about compati-
at around 80%. That is also normal. 
bility.

Storage compartment cover

Depending on the vehicle version and country, Front passenger side glove
the storage compartment for the wireless charg-
ing function has a cover for the mobile phone
compartment
screen.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
The cover may avoid distractions coming from chapter on page 130.
the mobile phone, such as incoming messages.
The cover must always be closed while driving
and the mobile phone screen must be completely
covered.

WARNING
● Notifications shown on the mobile phone
screen may distract the driver and increase
the risk of a serious accident.
● Do not place any objects made of metal or
containing metallic components on the
charging area. Metallic objects may become
extremely hot. This can cause skin burns and
even fire hazards, in more extreme cases.
Fig. 104 On the front passenger side: open glove
● Do not place identification cards (e.g. credit
compartment.
cards, bank cards) with magnetic strips or
chips in the charging area. In extremely rare The scope of items in the glove compartment de-
cases, the data stored in the magnetic strip pends on the vehicle version. 
or chip may become useless.

NOTICE
● Charging is only activated when while the igni-
tion is on.

132 Owner's Manual

 Key forFig. 104: WARNING
1 Internal glove compartment lighting. The centre armrest may restrict the movement
2 Vehicle wallet holder. of the driver's arms and lead to severe acci-
dents and injuries.
3 Coin holder.
● Always keep the centre armrest stowage
Opening and closing the stowage area closed while driving.
compartment
To open, pull the handle. WARNING
Never ever transport a person or a child on the
To close, press the lid fully upwards.
centre armrest.
Vehicle wallet
Depending on the vehicle version, there
The glove compartment is intended to accommo- may be a USB port in the rear part of the
date the vehicle wallet. The vehicle wallet must armrest  → page 137. 
always be kept in this stowage compartment.

WARNING
An open stowage compartment may increase Storage compartment in the roof
the risk of severe injuries in case of an accident console (glasses compartment)
or a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre.
● Always keep glove box closed while driving.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
 chapter on page 130.

Front centre armrest stowage

compartment
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 130.

Fig. 106 In the roof console: glasses compartment.

Open: press and release the → Fig. 106 button.

Close: press the lid upwards until it engages.
To ensure proper interior monitoring of the
vehicle, the stowage areas must be closed
when locking the vehicle → page 64. 
Fig. 105 In the front centre armrest: stowage com-
partment.

Depending on the vehicle version, the centre

armrest may not be available.
Open: lift the centre armrest → Fig. 105.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Close: swing the centre armrest down.

Practical equipment 133

Other stowage compartments Cup holder
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 130.  Introduction
Other possible compartments:
Bottle holders
– In the front and rear door lining.
Bottle holders are located in the open stowage
– Stowage bags on the front seats back rests.
compartments of the driver and front passenger
– Surface behind the rear seat for small clothes. doors.
– According to the vehicles version, there may
be a card holder in the lower centre console. WARNING
– Hooks for clothes on the centre door columns. Incorrect use of the cup holders can cause in-
– Bag hook in the luggage compartment jury.
→ page 181. ● Do not place any hot drinks in a cup holder.
In the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre
WARNING or accident, hot drinks in a cup holder can be
Objects that are not secured or are secured in- spilled and cause scalding.
correctly behind the rear seat backrest can ● Ensure that drink bottles or any other objects
cause serious injuries in the event of a sudden do not enter the driver footwell and obstruct
driving or braking manoeuvre or accident. the pedals while the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not stow any hard, heavy or sharp objects ● Never place heavy cups, food or any other
in pockets, purses or loose on the surface of heavy items in the cup holder. These heavy
the luggage compartment cover. objects could be flung through the vehicle
● Never carry animals on top of the luggage interior during an accident and cause serious
compartment cover. injuries.

WARNING WARNING
Hanged clothing may compromise driver visi- Closed drink bottles can explode in the vehicle
bility and, therefore, cause severe accidents in extreme heat or crack in extremely cold tem-
and injuries. peratures.
● Ensure that clothes hanged on the clothing ● Never leave closed drink bottles in an ex-
hook are not compromising driver visibility. tremely hot or extremely cold vehicle for ex-
tended periods.
● Use the vehicle clothing hook only to hang
small clothes. Never leave hard, heavy or
sharp objects in pockets.
NOTICE
Do not leave any open drinks in the cup holder
NOTICE while the vehicle is in motion. Drinks that are
spilled, for example during braking, can damage
Each bag hook supports a maximum load of 2.5
the vehicle and the vehicle electric system. 
kg. 

134 Owner's Manual

 Cup holders in the centre console Removable ashtray in the cup
holder
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 134.  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 135.

Fig. 107 In the front centre console: cup holder.

Fig. 108 Removable ashtray.
There are two cup holders in the front centre
console → Fig. 107.  To use, put the ashtray in one of the cup holders
on the front centre console → page 134.

Opening and closing the ashtray

Ashtray and cigarette lighter To open, lift the cover → Fig. 108.
To close, press the ashtray cover down.

 Introduction Emptying the ashtray

– Lift the ashtray up to remove it from the drink
holder.
WARNING – Open the ashtray and empty the cold ash into
Improper use of the ashtray and cigarette light- an appropriate container.
er could cause fires, burns and other serious in- – Once it has been emptied, place the ashtray
juries. back into the drink holder and press down. 
● Never place paper or any other items in the
ashtray that could start a fire.
● The single purpose of the ashtray is to store
Cigarette lighter
used cigarettes, as well as the substances
generated by them, such as ashes.   Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 135.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Fig. 109 On the front centre console: cigarette

lighter. 

Practical equipment 135

According to the vehicle version, the cigarette NOTICE
lighter may not be available.
To prevent damage to the electrical system, nev-
– With the ignition switched on, press the ciga- er connect electric devices to the 12-volt outlet
rette lighter knob → Fig. 109 inward. socket which generate electric power to charge
– After a few seconds, the cigarette lighter knob the battery of the vehicle, such as solar panels or
will automatically move back up. battery charging units.
– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the to- ● Only use accessories that have been approved
bacco product on the glowing spiral → . in accordance with current directives concern-
– Place the cigarette lighter back into its com- ing electromagnetic compatibility.
partment. ● To prevent damage from electric current fluc-
tuation, the electric devices must be turned off
WARNING prior to switching the ignition on or off. Given
Improper use of the cigarette lighter could the version of the vehicle, if the Start-Stop
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries. system automatically turns the engine off and
on again, the electric equipment does not
● Always use the cigarette lighter properly. need to be turned off.
Use it only to light cigarettes.
● Never connect electric devices to the 12 V
● Never leave children in the vehicle unatten- power outlet which consume more power than
ded. The cigarette lighter can only be used the indicated power. When exceeding the indi-
when the ignition is switched on. cated power, the vehicle's electrical system
The cigarette lighter compartment can also may be damaged.
be used as a 12 V socket → page 136, Sock- ● Refer to the owner's manuals of the connected
et.  devices!

Do not leave the engine running when the

vehicle is stationary.

Socket The ignition turned on plus use of electric

appliances while the engine is switched off
drains the battery.
 Introduction Unshielded devices may damage the radio
system and electronic components of the
Electrical devices may be connected to the sock- vehicle. 
et in the vehicle.
The electric devices must be in perfect condition
for use. Do not use faulty devices. 12 V Socket in the vehicle
The 12-volt socket only works while the ignition  Please refer to and at the start of the
is switched on. chapter on page 136.
WARNING
Improper use of the socket and electrical devi-
ces can cause fires and severe injuries.
● Never leave children in the vehicle unatten-
ded. The socket and the devices connected
to it can be used when the ignition is switch-
ed on.
● should the electric devices get very hot, turn
them off and disconnect them from the out-
let.
Fig. 110 In the front centre console: 12 V socket. 

136 Owner's Manual

 Maximum power rating
12 V socket 120 W
Radios
The maximum power rating of the sockets may
not be exceeded. The maximum power rating of Before using the unit for the
each device is stated on its type plate.  first time
Depending on the vehicle version, the radio may
not be available.
Control list
Before first use, following steps should be execu-
ted to safely operate the radio and make full use
of its features:
 Follow safety recommendations 
→ page 138.
 Get yourself familiarized with the general
overview of the unit.
 In System Configurations, reset the radio to its
factory settings (factory settings / reset sys-
tem → page 165 or → page 174.
 Use appropriate data storage units for media
operation. 

Other applicable documents

Apart from this manual for the use of this radio
and its components please also see the following
documents:
– Operating Manual of the mobile telephone
system.
– Operating Manual of the external multimedia
units.
– Instructions for a retrofitted accessory. 

Convenience overview
The radio may be factory equipped with the fol-
lowing components, in part, as optional equip-
ment:
– Loudspeakers, installed in different fitting lo-
cations and output levels (Watt).
– Multifunction steering wheel with its controls.
– Media units.
– Cable connections to the external multimedia
25A.5L1.POL.20

units.
– Wireless connection for external multimedia
devices. 

Radios 137
– Mobile phone interface. WARNING
– Sound system.  Connecting, inserting, or removing data storage
units while driving may distract the driver from
his/her surroundings and cause accidents.
Safety recommendations
WARNING
Prior to first use of the device, read and follow External device connection cables could hinder
the safety instructions listed below to detect and the driver's movement, depending on how they
prevent possible hazards to yourself and others: are arranged.
– Read this instruction with attention:
– Some function areas may contain links to third WARNING
party web pages. Volkswagen is not responsi- Loose or unsecured external devices may be
ble for this content and its access does not au- flung through the vehicle interior and cause in-
thorize copying, reproducing or quoting third- juries in case of sudden evasive or breaking ma-
party content. noeuvres or in the event of accidents.
– For optimal safety of personal information ● Never place or attach external devices on
stored in the radio system, it is recommended doors, windscreen, on or near areas marked
to keep the valet mode on → page 176 when with “AIRBAG” on the steering wheel, dash-
possible. board, seat backrests, or between these
– Radio stations and other means of communi- areas and vehicle occupant himself. External
cation, such as newspaper websites and third- devices may cause severe injuries in the
party apps are responsible for the content of event of accidents, especially if the airbags
information transmitted in such media. are triggered.
– Covered parking places, tunnels, tall buildings,
WARNING
mountains or additionally operated electric
equipment, such as battery chargers, may also In explosion prone places, turn mobile tele-
interfere with the radio reception. phones off!
– Metal-coated stickers or films may hinder re-
ception in vehicles with window aerials. WARNING
Unfavourable light conditions and a damaged
WARNING or dirty display may cause information and indi-
Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is cations not able to be read or be correctly read
distracted. Operating the radio may distract on the display.
drivers from the traffic. ● Indications or information on the display
● Never reset the system while driving. must never be a reason to run a safety risk.
The display is not in condition to replace the
● Always drive carefully and responsibly.
drivers attention.
● Adjust sound volume settings to allow the
driver to hear external warnings and sounds WARNING
(for example: emergency service sirens)
Radio stations may broadcast important warn-
● Excessively high volumes may compromise ings. The following conditions may compromise
hearing. This also occurs when vehicle occu- radio signal reception:
pants' hearing is submitted to high volumes,
even if briefly. ● If your current location is in a region of poor
or no reception. Such region includes tun-
nels, urban canyons, parking garages, under-
WARNING
ground passageways, mountains, and valleys.
Sudden volume variations may occur when
● If, in areas with the bandwidths of the radio
switching or connecting an audio source.
stations present interferences or are unavail-
● Reduce the master volume before connect- able. 
ing or switching audio sources.

138 Owner's Manual

 ● When the necessary vehicle components re- NOTICE
quired for radio signal reception are dam-
Introduction of objects, incorrect placing and in-
aged, inoperative or without sufficient elec-
troduction of data storage units of different
tric power.
shapes and sizes may damage the media readers
and the radio.
WARNING
● Ensure correct insertion position when insert-
Operating radios with excessive volume, espe- ing a data storage unit .
cially if over 85 decibels, may cause ear injuries.
● Insert only adequate data storage units into
● If the volume is excessively high, exterior the respective media reading units.
acoustic signals, such as police and fire de-
partment sirens and other vehicles' horns, ● Excessive pressure could break the SD card
may not be audible and may cause accidents. slot lock.

WARNING NOTICE
● Liquids may cause damage, overheat the ra- Foreign matter and liquids adhering to a data
dio unit and lead to a greater risk of fire. storage device may damage the media reading
unit and the radio.
● To reduce the risk of fire or electrical dis-
charge, do not expose the radio unit to rain ● Do not attach stickers or similar materials to
or humidity. To avoid the risk of electrocu- data storage units. Stickers may peel off and
tion, do not open the radio unit. Seek out as- damage the media reading unit.
sistance at a Volkswagen Dealership. ● Do not use CDs with printable data. Residues
and stickers may peel off and damage the me-
NOTICE dia reading unit. 
Use the appropriate power supply. The radio is
designed for use in conjunction with a 12V nega-
tive grounded battery system. Never use this ra- Instructions for use
dio with other battery systems, especially a 24V
battery system. – When using the radio, follow the specific na-
tional recommendations and legal determina-
NOTICE tions.
If the radio is out of service (no power, no sound) – To operate the radio a light touch on the but-
or in other abnormal conditions (foreign objects, ton or screen suffices.
exposed to water, smoke or unusual smell), turn – To make the best of the radio's features and
it off immediatelly and seek out assistance at a optimal operation it is important that the date
Volkswagen Dealership. and time be correctly set.
– Some of the function surfaces and modes de-
NOTICE tailed herein may not be available in country-
Mobile phones must always be turned off in loca- specific software. The absence of a radio icon
tions in which their use is prohibited. The radia- or function button on the display is not a de-
tion generated by mobile phones may cause in- vice defect.
terference with sensitive medical devices and – Depending on the country, some functions of
technical equipment, which may hinder or dam- the radio are no longer selectable on the dis-
age such devices. play as of a certain speed threshold, as re-
quired by local law.
NOTICE – In some countries, there may be restrictions
The vehicle's loudspeakers may be damaged if regarding the use of Bluetooth®1) devices and
the volume is too high or the sound is distorted. Wi-Fi connections. Additional information and
Wi-Fi connections may be obtained from local
25A.5L1.POL.20

authorities. 

1) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth ® SIG, Inc.

Radios 139
– The display of all indications and the execution Display
of the functions are only available after the
complete start up of the radio. The start up Active display areas with recorded functions are
time of the system depends on the scope of referred to as “function buttons” and operated
the radio function and can last more than usu- by brief touches or extended touches on the dis-
al especially at low and high temperatures. play. Function buttons are described herein by
– After a disconnection of the vehicle battery, the word “function button”.
turn the ignition on before switching on the
radio. Clean the display
– The radio is connected to the vehicle – the ra- To clean, turn the radio off.
dio cannot be installed in another vehicle. TO clean the display, use a smooth and clean
– In order not to impair its operation, repairs and cloth slightly damp with clean water.
modifications to the radio may only be per-
Soften resistant dirt with a humidified cloth, tak-
formed by a Volkswagen Dealership.
ing care not to damage the radio.
– Phone calls received in mobile phones inside
the vehicle may cause interference in the vehi- NOTICE
cle's loudspeakers.
Do not dry clean the display. Doing so may cause
– With the engine turned off and low battery scratches that cannot be removed.
charge, the radio is automatically turned off.
● Do not use aggressive or solvent-based clean-
– High speed, unfavourable weather and road ing products. Such cleaning products may
conditions, as well as poor network connection damage the radio and leave the display “mis-
may hinder or interrupt mobile phone calls in- ty”.
side the vehicle. 
● Exert only a light pressure when cleaning the
display. 

Power management
When, with the ignition turned off and the device
on, the battery power falls below the minimum
voltage, an acoustic signal sounds and the mes-
sage LOW BATTERY is displayed. In this case, the
unit must be switched off. 

Anti-theft coding
The unit is protected against theft and unauthor-
ized use by a security code (anti-theft coding) .
After its first being entered, the anti theft code is
saved to the memory of the vehicle (convenience
coding of the radio) If the anti-theft coding has
to be manually deactivated, e.g. when installing
the unit in another vehicle, please contact a
Volkswagen Dealership.
If the vehicle battery has been disconnected,
switch the ignition on before switching the unit
on. 

140 Owner's Manual

 Composition Touch (R 340G)
Device overview

Overview

Fig. 111 Control overview.

4 Settings button: the function is conditioned

1 Rotary/push knob :
to the respective operating condition.
– Press to turn the unit on or off.
5 USB port: to connect external data storage
– Turn to adjust the base volume of the cor-
units.
responding active source.
6 SD card slot: to insert SD cards.
2 Radio buttons: press to access an function
button. 7 Microphone: do not obstruct the microphone
and keep it always clean. 
3 Display: touchscreen.

Rotary and push knob  Turn the radio on or off automatically

According to its version, the unit is automatically
Rotary/push knobs turned off when the engine is turned off or the
The rotary/push knob  is referred to as volume ignition key is removed from the ignition lock. If
control or on/off button. the radio is manually switched on again, it will be
automatically switched off after approximately
The right-hand rotary/push knob is referred to as 30 minutes (timeout).
selector.
Volume increase ore decrease
Turning the radio manually on or off
Once on, the radio starts to operate at the last
25A.5L1.POL.20

Press the on / off button briefly . adjusted volume level, as long as the maximum
pre defined turn on volume is not surpassed. 

Composition Touch (R 340G) 141

– Turn the volume control  (right or clockwise Basic command information
to turn up and left or counter clockwise to turn
down)
Some volume adjustments can be preset. Function surface and display
controls
Mute
When in mute mode, the active audio source is
interrupted or muted The indication can be seen
on the display screen .
– Turn the volume control button  counter
clockwise until audio can no longer be heard. 

Selector button
The selector button can be turned or pushed.
When turned, lists are searched or radio station
lists or of media titles are opened. When pressed Fig. 112 Schematic representation: overview of
marked records are accessed, configurations are possible function buttons on the display.
set and functions started or interrupted. 
The device is equipped with a touchscreen
→ Fig. 112 3 .
Active display areas with recorded functions are
Radio buttons referred to as “function buttons” and operated
by brief touches or extended touches on the dis-
To operate the radio buttons, press them briefly.
play. Function buttons are described herein by
RADIO : turn on in radio mode and then change the word “function button” and the button sym-
the frequency range. bol .
MEDIA : change to media mode and from there Function buttons start specific functions or open
select the media source. other submenus. The currently selected menu is
CAR : to access the vehicle's and system's set- indicated on the title line of submenus → Fig. 112
tings. 1.

PHONE : access the telephone interface. If there is Inactive function buttons (grey) cannot be cur-
no telephone interface installed, the current au- rently selected.
dio source is muted.
Overview of possible function buttons and
APP : access the interface with App-Connect. displays
SETUP : press to show additional functions related 1 The title line indicates the currently selec-
to the current mode (radio, media, etc.).  ted menu and, eventually, other function
buttons.
2 Touch to open a different menu.
3 Move the target over the display without
removing the finger, slightly pressing or
touching the desired position in the display
to move the target to the respective posi-
tion.
4 Gently press to move the scroll bar over
the display in a single move, and scroll
through the lists → page 143, Access list
entries and search lists. 

142 Owner's Manual

  Touch to gradually close some lists one Search lists (scroll)
level above. Search by list line: Briefly touch the function but-
 Touch to gradually close submenus until ton  or  .
returning to the main menu or to undo the
Search by list page: Briefly touch the top or bot-
previous entries.
tom of the scroll bar.
 Touch to open a pop-up window contain-
ing additional settings. Quick search by list page: Touch and hold the top
 /  Some functions or displays are selected
or bottom of the scroll bar.
through a checkbox and activated  or de- Quick search in long lists: Place finger over the
activated  by a touch. scroll bar indicator and move it up or down in a
OK Touch to confirm an entry or selection. single move. Remove the finger from the screen
 Touch to close a pop-up window or an en- after reaching the desired position. 
try template.
+ / - Touch to gradually change the settings.
 Gently move the scroll bar pointer along Entry masks with display keypad
the bar with a finger move applying a light
uninterrupted pressure on the display sur-
face. 

Access list entries and search lists

Fig. 114 Representation: entry mask with display

keypad.

Entry masks with display keypads are used to en-

ter memory names or search terms in long lists,
among other functions.
The function buttons listed herein are not availa-
Fig. 113 Schematic representation: list entries, set-
tings menu.
ble in all countries or topic areas.
The following chapters detail only the functions
List entries can be accessed by directly touching not covered in this representation.
the screen or with the selector button → Fig. 113
1. The entry line with symbol entry mask (cursor) is
located on the upper left display line. All entries
If the available entries on a list do not fit the dis- are displayed in this area.
play, function buttons or a scrollbar are shown on
the right-hand side to scroll through entries Entry masks to “enter text”
→ Fig. 113 1 . Letters, characters and special symbols can be
selected in any combination to enter free texts in
Selecting and accessing list entries with the entry masks.
control button
Turn the control button to sequentially select list The currently displayed sequence of symbols is
entries through a checkbox and search the list. applied by touching the function button OK . 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Press the control button to access the selected

list entry.

Composition Touch (R 340G) 143

Entry masks to select stored entries All displays can only be shown after a complete
Only combinations of letters, characters and spe- start-up process of the radio. 
cial symbols corresponding to a stored entry can
be selected for the introduction mask.
If less than 99 entries can be selected, the num-
ber of remaining entries is shown through the Connectivity
entry line → Fig. 114 3 . Touching this function
button will display all remaining entries in a list.
If less than 5 entries can be selected, the list is App-Connect
automatically opened.
Some menus and functions are not available in
Overview of function buttons all the countries for all the vehicles.
1 123 : touch to open the entry mask for The following interfaces are available in the App-
special symbols and numbers. OR: ABC : Connect menu:
touch to switch to the letter entry mask.
– Apple CarPlay™1)
2 Touch to switch to a different keypad lan-
guage. The keypad language can be selec- – Android Auto™2)
ted through the System settings menu. To prevent the driver from distraction only spe-
3 Shows the quantity and opens the list of cial applications may be used while driving → .
entries corresponding to selectable pre-
According to the mobile device used, a connec-
sets.
tion is established through the respective inter-
Letters and numbers Touch to apply the entry
face.
line.
Letters and  Press and hold to open a pop-up Thereby it is possible that the functions and the
window with special symbols based on the contents displayed on the mobile devices are dis-
letters. Select the desired characters via played and controlled on the radio display.
touch. Some special signs can also be tran-
scribed (e.g. “AE” to “Ä”). WARNING
 Touch to switch between upper case and The use of applications while driving may dis-
lower case, as well as numbers and special tract from the surrounding traffic. Accidents
characters. and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted.
 Touch to insert a blank space. ● Always drive carefully and responsibly.
OK Touch to apply the introduction line sug-
gestion and close the entry mask. WARNING
 Touch to delete symbols on the entry line, Loose or unsecured mobile phones may be
from right to left. Press and hold to delete flung through the interior and cause injuries in
multiple symbols. case of sudden evasive or breaking manoeuvres
 Touch to close the entry mask.  or in the event of accidents.
● While the vehicle is in motion, always secure
mobile devices properly outside the airbag
deployment zones or stow them away safely.
Additional displays and display
options WARNING
Display indications may vary from those descri- Inadequately or inappropriately designed appli-
bed herein, depending on the settings. cations may cause damages to the vehicle, ac-
cidents and serious injuries. 
The time can be shown on the display status line.

1) Apple CarPlay™ is an Apple Inc. trademark.

2) Android Auto™ is a Google Inc. trademark

144 Owner's Manual

 ● Volkswagen recommends to use only appli- For more information, refer to the mobile
cations offered by Volkswagen for the spe- device's owner's manual. 
cific vehicle.
● Protect the mobile device with its applica-
tions from misuse. Apple CarPlay™
● Never alter the applications.
● Follow the owner's manual of the mobile de-
vice.

NOTICE
Mobile devices must always be turned off in loca-
tions where their use is not allowed. The radia-
tion generated by mobile devices may cause in-
terference with delicate medical and technical
equipment, which may impair or damage such
devices.

NOTICE Fig. 116 Selection of the mobile device.

Volkswagen does not take responsibility for dam-
ages caused to the vehicle due to the use of low
quality or defective applications, insufficient pro-
gramming of the applications, insufficient net-
work, for loss of data during transmission or mis-
use of mobile devices.

For more information, refer to the mobile

device's owner's manual. 

App-Connect main menu

Fig. 117 Apple CarPlay™ Menu.

Apple CarPlay™ Requirements

The following conditions are required to use
Apple CarPlay™:
 The mobile device must support Apple
CarPlay™.
 The mobile device must be connected by a
USB cable to the radio.
 The USB cable to be used must be an original
cable from the mobile phone manufacturer.
Fig. 115 App-Connect main menu.
Establish connection
When a mobile device is connected for the first
1 i : display of further information. time follow the instructions on the radio display
and on the display of the mobile device. 
Open the App-Connect settings menu
25A.5L1.POL.20

In the App-Connect main menu, touch the Config.

function button.  .

Composition Touch (R 340G) 145

– The assumptions for use of the Apple CarPlay™ Android Auto™
must be met.
– Press the APP button.
– Select your connected mobile device pressing
on the corresponding icon.

Disconnect
– While using Apple CarPlay™, touch the surface
function → Fig. 117 1 to access App-Connect in
the main menu.
– Touch the function button → Fig. 116 1 to
end the active connection.

Particularities
During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection, the Fig. 118 Selection of the mobile device.
following features are enabled:
– Bluetooth connection among mobile devices
and the radio are not possible.
– An active Bluetooth connection is automatical-
ly finalized.
– Telephone functions are only possible via
Apple CarPlay™. The radio functions described
in this manual are not available.
– The connected device cannot be used as a me-
dia device on the Media menu.

Voice command
Fig. 119 Android Auto™ Menu
Depending on the type and version of the vehicle,
the voice command feature may not be availa- Android Auto™ Requirements
ble.
The following conditions must be met to use
– On the multifunction steering wheel or on the Android Auto™:
mobile phone, press VOICE or  briefly to  The mobile device must support Android
start the device's voice command feature. Auto™.
– On the multifunction steering wheel or on the  The mobile device must be connected by a
mobile phone, press VOICE or  for a few USB cable to the radio.
seconds to start the connected device's voice
command feature.  The USB cable to be used must be an original
cable from the mobile phone manufacturer.
For more information, refer to the mobile  Depending on the mobile device used, an ad-
device's owner's manual.  equate application must be installed to use
Android Auto™ on the device.

Connect
When a mobile device is connected for the first
time follow the instructions on the radio display
and on the display of the mobile device. 

146 Owner's Manual

 – The assumptions for use of the Android Auto™ Unit operation
must be met.
– Press the APP button.
– Select your connected mobile device pressing  Introduction
on the corresponding icon.

Disconnect Follow the national rules and legal provisions

when using the radio.
– While using Android Auto™, touch the function
button , → Fig. 119 1 . Other additional electric devices connected to
– Select the Return to Volkswagen function to ac- the vehicle may interfere with the receipt of the
cess the App-Connect main menu. broadcast radio signal and cause noises in the
speakers.
Particularities
Parking lots, tunnels, tall buildings or
During an active Android Auto™ connection, the mountains may interfere with unit signal
following features are enabled: reception.
– An active Android Auto™ device may be simul- Metal-coated stickers or films may hinder
taneously connected to the radio via Blue- reception in vehicles with windscreen aer-
tooth. ials. 
– Bluetooth connection between other mobile
devices and the radio are not possible.
– Telephone functions are possible via Android
Auto™. When the Android Auto™ device is si-
Radio main menu
multaneously connected via Bluetooth to the
device, the phone function can also be used.
– Simultaneous phone calls via Android Auto™
and via the radio are not possible.
– An active Android Auto™ device cannot be
used as a media device on the Media menu.

Voice commands
Depending on the type and version of the vehicle,
the voice command feature may not be availa-
ble.
– On the multifunction steering wheel or on the
mobile phone, press VOICE or  briefly to Fig. 120 The radio main menu.
start the radio's voice command feature.
– On the multifunction steering wheel or on the
mobile phone, press VOICE or  for a few
seconds to start the connected device's voice
command feature.
For more information, refer to the mobile
device's owner's manual. 

Fig. 121 Radio operation: station list.

25A.5L1.POL.20

With the radio turned on, press the RADIO but-

ton. Radio mode turns on. 

Composition Touch (R 340G) 147

The following options are available: Radio text (RDS)
– return to the memorized radio station. Some RDS enabled stations also broadcast addi-
– Seek next station. tional text information – known as radio text.
– Memorize the tuned broadcasting stations. Radio text is displayed on the upper half of the
screen above the station buttons → Fig. 120 A .
The currently tuned in radio station is displayed
in the centre of the display. For stations with RDS The radio stations are responsible for the
the station's name can be displayed instead of its broadcast information content. 
frequency, such as RADIO 21, in case of good re-
ception.

Function buttons on the radio's main menu Station buttons

Function button: effect
A Radio frequency range indication.
FM/AM Select the desired frequency range.
Opens the list of radio stations currently

available → page 149.
Opens the adjusted frequency scale

(frequency range) → page 149.
Opens the current frequency range set-

tings menu → page 150, Radio Settings.
Change between stored or available
stations.
< / >
Arrow button settings in menu Fig. 122 The radio main menu.
→ page 150, Radio Settings.
In the main menu: RADIO, the currently selected
1 to Station buttons to store stations
frequency band stations can be stored in 15
15 → page 148.
numbered frequency tracks. These function but-
Updating the frequency range's stations tons are referred to as “Station buttons”.

list → page 149.
Function button that only becomes visi- Station button functions → Fig. 122
ble with the SCAN function is selected Touch the station button corre-
SCAN → page 150. sponding to the desired sta-
Press the control button to start the tion.
Access stations
SCAN function → Fig. 111 4 . through sta- Stored stations can only be
Cancel Cancelling a function. tion buttons touched after accessing
Disable Deactivation of a function.
through station buttons and

when available in the current
location.
Swipe the display in the station
Radio Data System RDS button area → Fig. 122, from
right to left or from left to
RDS (Radio Data System) is a radio data system Change the right.
via the additional FM services whereby it is possi- station button
group The station buttons are dis-
ble to display the station's names and radio texts. played in groups of 5 function
RDS is not supported by all devices and may not button pads ( 1 to 5 , 6 to 10 ,
be available everywhere and for all FM radio sta- and 11 to 15 ).
tions. Store stations See: storing stations
Without RDS basically no additional services are in station but- → page 149.
possible. tons 

148 Owner's Manual

 Specific radio indications, menus Function button pads and their respective
meaning on the radio → Fig. 123 and→ Fig. 124:
and symbols
Touch the function button 
→ Fig. 124 to close the list of
stations. If no action is made,
the radio station list automati-
cally closes after a while.
Update the ra- The radio station list can be
dio station list manually updated with the 
→ Fig. 124 function button.

Manually set the station frequency

Introduce the Touch the function button 
frequency → Fig. 123.
range
Fig. 123 The radio main menu. Step-by-step Turn the settings knob.
instructions to OR: touch the right or left fre-
change the fre- quency range arrow buttons.
quency
Touch one of the arrow buttons
in the upper part of the display
area → Fig. 123. The next avail-
able station is automatically
selected.
Quick scan OR: press and hold one of the
through the arrow buttons → Fig. 123 on
frequency the top of the display. After re-
range leasing, the next radio station
available will be automatically
Fig. 124 Radio operation: updatable radio station
list (AM). selected.
OR: press and hold the fre-
Function button pads and their respective quency range and slide to move
meaning on the radio → Fig. 123 and→ Fig. 124: it.
Touch the function button < or Briefly press the settings knob.
> → Fig. 123. When a station is selected
Select the sta- Depending on the arrow button Hide the fre- through the station button, the
tion using the settings, the function switches quency range manual frequency selection is
arrow buttons between stored and available also closed. If no action is
< / > stations. Arrow button settings made, the frequency range au-
in the Radio settings → page 150 tomatically closes after a while.
menu.
Store stations
Touch the function button 
Press and hold the desired sta-
Select a station → Fig. 123 to open the list of
Store the cur- tion button → Fig. 123 until an
from the radio stations.
rent station in-audible warning is heard.
station list. Search list and touch to select
to a station The currently played station
the desired station.
button will be stored in this station
button.
Storing sta- Touch the function button 
25A.5L1.POL.20

tions from the → Fig. 123 or turn the settings

station list in knob to open the list of sta-
station buttons tions. 

Composition Touch (R 340G) 149

Store stations Radio Settings
Stations already stored to sta-
tion buttons are identified in – Select the desired frequency range.
the station list by the  sym- – Touch on RADIO , to toggle frequency ranges.
bol.
– Touch  to open the desired settings.
Press and hold the display to
select the desired station. Function button: effect
Touch the desired station but- Scan: automatic SCAN. By selecting the SCAN
ton in which the station must function, all stations available in the current fre-
be stored. quency range are played for approximately 5
An audible warning is heard seconds → page 150.
and the station is stored in the Sound: sound settings → page 166.
station button. Repeat this pro- Arrow buttons: select settings for the arrow but-
cedure to store other stations tons < and > . Settings are applied to all fre-
from the station list. quency ranges (FM).
All stations stored in the Radio Memory: the arrow buttons are used to
Delete stored Settings menu can be deleted in- change all stations stored in the selected
stations dividually or all at once frequency range.
→ page 150.  Search station: the arrow buttons are used to
change all tuneable stations in the selected
frequency range.
SCAN Delete memory: deletes all or some stations stor-
ed.
 All: all stored stations are deleted. 

Media mode

 Introduction

“Media sources” are referred to as audio sources

that contain audio data in different data storage
Fig. 125 Radio mode: ongoing SCAN. units, such as external MP3 Players or audio files.
These audio files may only be played by the re-
By selecting the SCAN function, all stations avail-
spective units or audio inputs of the radio system
able are played for approximately 5 seconds.
(USB port, Bluetooth® interface, SD card or AUX-
SCAN will be displayed on the screen.
IN multimedia port).
Starting and stopping the scan function
Copyrights
Briefly press the settings knob.
Starting the Audio and video files stored in data media may
scan function OR: touch the surface function be subject to applicable national and internation-
 and select SCAN .
al copyright and data protection laws. Legal pro-
Touch the SCAN function but- visions must be followed.
ton to stop the scanning.
This product is protected by copyrights of
The automatic scan function is
Microsoft Corporation. This technology may
also interrupted whenever a
not be reproduced or marketed without prior au-
station is manually selected by
thorization from Microsoft or one of its author-
the station buttons. 
ized affiliates. 

150 Owner's Manual

 Volkswagen takes no responsibility for Media source Playing requirements
damaged or lost files.   SD and MMC cards
of up to a max. of 2 GB
(Gigabytes) with
Limitations and recommendations FAT16, FAT32 and ex-
FAT file systems.
regarding data carriers – MP3 files (.mp3) with
 SDHC cards of up to 32 to 320 kbit/s or vari-
Dirt, high temperatures and mechanical damage a max. of 64 GB with able bit rates.
may render a data carrier useless. Pay attention FAT16, FAT32 and ex- – WMA files (.wma) up
to the data carrier manufacturers instructions. FAT file systems. to 9.2 mono/stereo
 SDHC cards of up to without copy protec-
The difference in data carrier quality from differ-
a max. of 256 GB with tion.
ent manufacturers may cause playback interfer-
FAT16, FAT32 and ex- – M3U, PLS, ASX and
ences.
FAT file systems. WPL format playlists.
The configuration of a data carrier or the devices USB data storage unit – Playlists with no more
and programs used to record the data may result according to USB 1.X, than 20 kB and 1000
in some titles or data carriers being unreadable. 2.0, 3.0 specification records.
Information on the best ways to create audio and FAT16, FAT32 and – File names and paths
files and data carriers (rate of compression, ID3- exFAT file systems. of up to a max. of 256
tag etc.) can be found, for example, on the Inter- characters.
net. iPods™, iPads™ and
iPhones™ of different
Due to the size, use (number of copies and dele- generationsa) ( Only
tions), of the structure of the folders and file type with Apple Dock or
of the used data carrier the reading time may Lightning connector).
vary substantially.
External audio source – External data storage
A playlist only defines a certain playback se- playback via the USB unit in the USB 
quence. Files are not memorized on the playlists. port. → page 155.
The playlists are not played back when the files  Audio file reproduc- – External Media Player
on the data carrier are not saved where the play- tion via Bluetooth®. must support Blue-
list is looking for them (path related data).  tooth® A2DP profile
→ page 158.
External audio source – 3.5 mm jack plug for
Data base and file prerequisites playback through the audio output
AUX-IN port. → page 156.
Only 32 mm x 24 mm x 2,1 mm a) iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are trademarks of Apple Inc.
(1,26 x 0,94 x 0,083 inch) or 1,4 mm (0,055 inch)
SD cards can be used on the radio. Do not use any SD card adapter.

An SD card with navigation data cannot be

used as storage for other files, the saved
files are not recognized by the radio.
Volkswagen may not be held liable for dam-
aged or lost files in data media. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Composition Touch (R 340G) 151

 Audio data storage unit playback The playback sequence can be modified by
selecting different playback modes
sequence → page 153.

Playlists are not played automatically, but

must rather be individually selected in the
track selection menu → page 154. 

Media main menu

Fig. 126 Possible structure of a data storage unit.

In data storage units, audio files are often  or- Fig. 127 Media main menu.
ganized into data folders  and playlists  in or-
der to define a certain playback sequence.
Tracks, folders, and playlists are classified nu-
merically and alphabetically according to the
name of the data storage unit.
The figure → Fig. 126 shows a typical data stor-
age unit containing tracks, folders  and sub-
folders.
Thus, the tracks and folders of this data storage
unit are played and displayed in the following or-
der1):
1. Tracks 1 and 2 in the Root directory of Fig. 128 Radio operation: station list.
the CD
2. Tracks 3 and 4 in the first folder F1 of In the main menu: Different media sources can
the root directory (display:  01). be selected and played through MEDIA.
3. Track 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of fold- – Press the MEDIA button to open the MEDIA
er F1 (display:  02). main menu → Fig. 127.
4. Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 of
The last media source played is resumed.
subfolder F1.1 (display:  03).
5. Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 of Currently played media source is shown in the
folder F1 (display:  04). lower left function button pad → Fig. 127.
6. Tracks 8 and 9 in the second folder F2 The MEDIA main menu shows a message if no
(display:  05). media source can be selected. 

1) In the Media settings menu, the function  Mix/Repeat, including subfolder must be enabled → page 154.

152 Owner's Manual

 Media main menu function button pads The media source currently in use is displayed on
Caption for → Fig. 127 and→ Fig. 128: the screen.
Songs, files and playlists can also be ticked off If no media source can be selected, such is indi-
turning the menu button and accessed or cated on the MEDIA main menu.
opened pressing the button. If a media source previously played back is selec-
Shows the currently selected media ted again, the playback starts at the point where
source. Touch to select a different media it was last interrupted.
source → page 153.
The track information display can be disa-
SD Card : memory card → page 154.
bled in the Playlist → page 154. 
USB : external data storage unit in the
Source
USB port → page 155.
 BT Audio : Bluetooth® audio → page 156.
AUX : external audio source connected to
Change the track on the media
the AUX-IN multimedia port, depends on main menu
the vehicle's version → page 156.
The tracks of the media sources being played
 Shows the playback list → page 154. back can be successively run through with the ar-
< / Changes tracks in media mode row buttons → page 154, Track selection from
> → page 153. the track list.
Playback is interrupted. The function but- It is not possible with the arrow buttons to

ton  changes to  → page 153. switch to playback from a playlist. Playback from
Playback is resumed. The function but- a playlist needs to be manually started from the

ton  changes to  → page 153. track selection menu → page 154, Track selection
 Open the Media settings menu → page 154. from the track list.
Touch to switch between available modes.
Operation through the media main menu
 : repeat current tracks.
Action Effect
 : repeat all tracks.
Within less than 3 sec-
 All tracks in the same memory level as the
onds of the track's
current track will be repeated. In the Media
length, switches the be-
settings  menu, Mix/Repeat including subfolder
ginning of the previous
enabled, subfolders are also included Briefly touch the track.
→ page 154. function button <
once. Within more than 3 sec-
Mix function. The function button 
onds of the track's
changes to  .
length, switches to the
All tracks in the same memory level as the beginning of the current
 current track will be included. In the Media track.
settings  menu, Mix/Repeat including subfolder
To the next track. After
enabled, subfolders are also included Briefly touch the
the last track, it returns
→ page 154.  function button >
to the first track of the
once.
current data storage unit.
Press and hold the
Fast rewind.
Change media source function button < .
Press and hold the
– On the MEDIA main menu, press the radio's Fast forward.
function button > .
MEDIA button again, to go over all the availa-
Touch the function Playback is interrupted.
ble media sources.
button  once, The function button 
In the pop-up window there are currently no se- briefly. changes to  .
25A.5L1.POL.20

lectable media sources shown as inactive (grey Touch the function Playback is resumed. The
a). button  once, function button 
briefly. changes to  . 

Composition Touch (R 340G) 153

 Track selection from the track list The type and number of connections with or
without wires depend on the country and the ve-
To open the track list in the MEDIA main menu, hicle. Within a range of different models and in
press  OR turn the knob. The track about to be special models the connections may reveal dif-
played back is highlighted. ferences.

Search the track list and touch on the desired For the wired connections use only original ca-
track. When track information is available, the bles from the device or - if available - the factory
track number and name or the names of the files supplied cables for the respective vehicle. 
(MP3) are displayed instead of the Title + no. 1). The
track title list may not be supported by the
source. SD card slot
Tracks, folders and playlists can also be
marked, by turning the settings knob, and Only 32 mm x 24 mm x 2,1 mm (1.26 x 0.94 x
accessed/opened by pressing the knob.  0.083 inch) or 32 mm x 24 mm x 1.4 mm (1.26 x
0.94 x 0.055 inch) SD cards can be inserted into
the SD card slot → Fig. 111 6 .
Only supported audio files are shown
Specific media settings → page 151. Other file types are ignored.

Opening the Media settings menu Inserting an SD card

In the MEDIA main menu, touch the  function Insert the SD card carefully into the SD card slot
button. with the chamfered edge up and the inscriptions
to the left (contact surfaces downward).
Function button: effect
If the SD card cannot be inserted, check the in-
Sound: opens the Sound settings menu → page 166.
sertion position and the SD card.
 Mix/Repeat, including subfolders: subfolders are in-
cluded in the selected playback mode Ejecting the SD card
→ page 152. To prevent data loss, an inserted SD card must be
Bluetooth: opens the Bluetooth settings menu. prepared for ejection by the following procedure:
Remove: remove the data unit (USB data storage  SETUP  Safely remove.   SD card .
unit or SD card) from the system. The respective Next, press the inserted SD card. The SD card
function button is disabled after the data stor- “jumps” into ejection position and can be re-
age unit is successfully removed.  moved.

Unreadable SD card
When a memory card with unreadable data is in-
Wired or wireless connections serted, a corresponding message is shown on the
radio's display.
Volkswagen is not responsible for SD cards
 Introduction and same are not offered together with the
radio. It is necessary to have an SD card to use it
Some external devices can be connected to the on the radio.
radio with or without wires (if existing) in the ve- Do not use any SD card adapter.
hicle.
An SD card with navigation data cannot be
used as storage for other files, the saved
files are not recognized by the radio. 

1) Depending on the source.

154 Owner's Manual

 Playback of an SD card Instructions and restrictions
The number of USB ports  and compatibility
– Carefully insert the SD card into the SD card with Apple™ devices, among other Media Players,
slot with the chamfered edge up and the in- may vary depending on the equipment.
scriptions to the left of the SD card slot The typical USB voltage of 5 V is supplied
→ Fig. 111 6 . through the USB  port.
– To remove the SD card, first see the system
External hard drives with capacity for over 32 GB
settings and execute the Safely remove source ac-
must be reformatted into the FAT32 file system,
tion. Briefly touch the SD card so it “springs”
depending on the conditions. Programs and in-
out to removal position.
structions to perform such formatting process
– Press the radio MEDIA button. are available on the Internet, for example.
Playback is taken up from the last used media Considering the wide range of different data
source. To playback the SD card, press  . storage units and various iPod™, iPad™ and
When navigating the folders, use the  function iPhone™ generations, it is impossible to ensure
button and the knob. Press  to go to the high- that all functions will be available.
er level of the folders and rotate the selector
iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™
button to select the desired folder.
Depending on the country and equipment ver-
To change to the next or previous track, press sion, iPods™, iPads™ or iPhones™ may be con-
one of the function buttons. nected to the vehicle's USB port , through a
Keep one of the arrow buttons pressed for a few suitable USB cable, and used as audio sources.
seconds to move the playback forward or back-
ward. Disconnect
Connected data storage units must be prepared
During playback of the SD card, some function
for removal before being disconnected.
keys are available at the bottom of the display.
The active buttons are highlighted.  – In the MEDIA main menu, touch the  func-
tion button to open the Media settings menu.
– OR: press the SETUP radio button.
USB Connection  – Touch the Safe remove and then select  USB .
The function button is disabled after the data
The USB multimedia port is located on the front storage unit is successfully removed.
part of the device → Fig. 111 5 . – The data storage unit may be disconnected.
Audio files on an external data storage unit con-
Unreadable data storage unit
nected to the USB port  can be played back
and controlled by device. If a connected data storage unit contains unread-
able data, a corresponding message is shown on
USB data manual are referred to in this manual as the device display.
external data media, which contain playable files
(e.g. MP3 player, iPods™ and pen drives). If an external Media Player is connected si-
multaneously via Bluetooth® and the USB
Only supported audio files are shown. Other file
port  to the device, the Bluetooth® audio con-
types are ignored.
nection is automatically disconnected after
Playback begins automatically if there are stored switching to the USB port.
and readable audio files in the data storage units.
If a connected device cannot be recognized,
The additional external data storage unit controls remove all connections and reconnect the
(access track changes, track selection, and play- devices. Check whether the connection cable is
back modes) are detailed in the respective chap- working, if necessary.
ters → page 150.
25A.5L1.POL.20

In case of operating faults in connected de-

vices, restart the respective device. This
usually solves the issue. 

Composition Touch (R 340G) 155

 Do not use any memory card adapter, USB When the playback of the external audio
extension cord, or USB-Hubs (USB distribu- source is finished or is disconnected from
tors)! the multimedia AUX-IN port, the radio stays on
the AUX menu.
Refer to the external data storage unit
manufacturer's operating manual.  There may be noise interferences if the ex-
ternal audio source is used on the vehicle's
12 V power outlet.

Connecting an external audio Read and follow the external audio source
source to the multimedia AUX-IN manufacturers operating instructions. 
port
Depending on the type and version of the vehicle, Connecting external audio sources
the voice command feature may not be availa-
via Bluetooth®
ble.
The AUX-IN multimedia port only supports 3.5 Connecting an audio source via Bluetooth
mm jack plugs. The Bluetooth® audio mode can be displayed by
The external audio source connected is played the  icon in the upper row.
back through the vehicle's loudspeakers and can- In Bluetooth® audio mode audio files from a
not be controlled by the device. Bluetooth® audio source connected via Blue-
Connected external audio sources are indicated tooth® can be played back (for example a mobile
by AUX on the display. phone), using the vehicle's loudspeakers (audio
Bluetooth® playback).
Connecting an external audio source to the
AUX-IN multimedia port Requisites
– Reduce the volume on the radio. – The Bluetooth® audio source must support the
Bluetooth® A2DP profile.
– Connecting an external audio source to the
AUX-IN multimedia port. – In the Bluetooth settings menu, the
 BT Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be ena-
– Start playback on the external audio source.
bled → page 165.
– Press the radio MEDIA button to display the
available media sources selection menu Start audio playback in Bluetooth®
→ page 150. – Lower the base volume on the radio .
– Press the function button  . – Enable Bluetooth® visibility in the external
The playback volume of external audio sources Bluetooth® audio source (e.g. mobile phone).
must be adjusted to the volume of remaining au- – Press the radio MEDIA button.
dio sources. – Touch the function button → Fig. 127 and se-
lect  BT audio .
Specificities regarding the use of external
audio sources in the AUX-IN multimedia port – Touch the Search device function button to pair
an external Bluetooth® audio source for the
Action Effect first time.
Selection of another The external audio – OR: select from the list of external Bluetooth®
audio source on the source continues to audio sources.
device. play in the background.
– OR: pair through the Bluetooth Settings menu
Stop playback on the The unit stays in the → page 165.
external audio source. AUX menu.
– Follow the instructions for other procedures
Remove the plug from The unit stays in the on the radio display and the Bluetooth® audio
the AUX-IN multimedia AUX menu. source display.
port.
Playback of the Bluetooth® audio source must be
initiated manually, if necessary. 

156 Owner's Manual

 Whenever the Bluetooth® audio source playback Follow the instructions to use mobile phones in
ends, the device remains in the Bluetooth® audio vehicles without external aerial connection
mode. → page 263.
Use only with units that support Bluetooth®
Playback control
technology. Additional information about prod-
Control of the Bluetooth® audio source through ucts that support Bluetooth® technology may be
the device depends on the connected Bluetooth® obtained at Volkswagen Dealerships or via the In-
audio source. ternet.
In media readers that support the Bluetooth® Refer to the mobile phone and accessory suppli-
AVRCP profile, playback may be automatically in- er's operating manual.
itiated or interrupted from the Bluetooth® audio
source, if it is switched to Bluetooth® audio play- Call interruption and reception flaws may occur
back or other audio sources. In addition a display in certain “transmission blackout areas”.
of the track or a track change is possible through Most electronic devices are shielded from HF sig-
via the device. nals (high frequency). In some rare cases, howev-
er, electronic devices may not be shielded
Due to the wide variety of Bluetooth® audio
against the HF signals of phone controls. This
sources, some of the functions described
may result in damages.
herein may not operate properly.
To operate the multimedia mode with the WARNING
Bluetooth® device connected, read and fol- Using mobile phones while driving may distract
low the manufacturers use instructions. drivers and cause accidents.
Use only with devices that support Blue- ● Always drive carefully and responsibly.
tooth® technology. For further information ● Adjust sound volume settings to allow the
on Bluetooth® products compatibility contact a driver to hear external warnings and sounds
Volkswagen dealership or look up on the Inter- (e.g. emergency service sirens)
net.  ● In locations with partial or lack of mobile
coverage, and depending on the circumstan-
ces (tunnels, garages and underground pas-
sages) telephone call may be hindered, pre-
Phone venting the use of mobile devices (including
emergency calls).

 Introduction WARNING
If a mobile phone is not secured or not properly
The phone functions detailed below can be ac- secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though
cessed through the device when there is an ac- the interior during a sudden driving or braking
tive paired and connected mobile phone. manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. This
can cause injuries.
The mobile phone must support the Bluetooth®
● Always attach mobile phones properly and
function in order to establish a connection be-
out of airbag triggering areas while driving.
tween the mobile phone and the device.
If no mobile phone is connected to the device, WARNING
phone control will not be available.
Mobile phones can cause interference when
Instructions to use mobile phones in vehicles positioned nearby heart pacemakers.
without external aerial connection. ● Keep a minimum distance of 20 centimetres
Phone menu displays vary depending on the between the mobile phone's antenna and
functions available on the mobile phone model. the heart pacemaker, since the former may
25A.5L1.POL.20

There may be differences depending on the mod- interfere with the latter. 
el used.

Composition Touch (R 340G) 157

● Do not carry activated mobile phones in Bluetooth®
chest pockets directly over heart pacemak-
ers.  Please refer to and at the start of the
● Turn off mobile phones immediately when- chapter on page 157.
ever there is suspicion of interference with
pacemakers. Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® technology connects mobile phones
NOTICE to the vehicle's phone controls. A single pairing
High speed, unfavourable weather and road con- process is required in order to use the phone
ditions, as well as poor network connection may controls with mobile phones equipped with Blue-
hinder or interrupt mobile phone calls inside the tooth®.
vehicle.  Some Bluetooth® mobile phones are recognized
and connected immediately upon switching on
the ignition, if such phones have been previously
connected. At the same time, the mobile phone
Special precaution areas and its embedded Bluetooth® feature must be
activated, and all active Bluetooth® connections
 Please refer to and at the start of the with other devices must be disconnected.
chapter on page 157.
Bluetooth® radio communication is free of
Switch off mobile phones in areas with risk of ex- charge.
plosions. Such areas are very common, although Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
not often identified as such → in Introduction tooth ® SIG, Inc.
on page 157. Some of these areas are:
Bluetooth® Profiles
– Areas with pipes and tanks containing chemi-
cals. Whenever mobile phones are connected to the
phone controls, data will be exchanged through
– Lower decks in ships and ferries.
one of the Bluetooth® profiles.
– Areas nearby vehicles powered by liquid gas
(e.g. propane or butane). Phone use via Bluetooth® Hands-Free-Profile
(HFP):
– Areas with chemicals or other particles such as
flours, dust, or metallic dust in the atmos- – If mobile phones are connected via HFP with
phere. phone controls, wireless calls can be made via
the hands-free device. In this case, the exter-
– Any other area where the vehicle engine must nal aerial cannot be used. Instructions to use
be switched off. mobile phones in vehicles without external
aerial connection.
WARNING
Music playback via Bluetooth® Advanced Audio
Switch off mobile phones in areas with risk of
Distribution Profile (A2DP):
explosion.
– Bluetooth® profile to transfer audio signals
with stereo quality.
NOTICE
Mobile phones must always be turned off in loca- Playback control via Bluetooth® Audio Video Re-
tions in which their use is prohibited. The radia- mote Control Profile (AVRCP):
tion generated by mobile phones may cause in- – Bluetooth® profile to display track information
terference with delicate medical and technical and playback controls in mobile devices. 
equipment, which may hinder or damage such
devices. 

158 Owner's Manual

 Pair up and connect the mobile After successfully completing the pairing proc-
ess, the main menu PHONE is shown and the
phone to the radio contact list and list of calls stored in the mobile
phone are automatically loaded. Confirm on the
 Please refer to and at the start of the mobile phone, if necessary.
chapter on page 157.
The duration of the loading process varies de-
In order to operate a mobile phone via the radio pending on the amount of data stored in the mo-
unit, both devices must be paired once. bile phone. After completing the loading process,
the data of the device will be available.
Pairing must be performed while the vehicle is
stationary. Pairing and connecting mobile phones
Multiple mobile phones can be paired to the de-
Requisites
vice. However, only one mobile phone can be
– Ignition switched on. connected to one device at any given time.
– Remove the headset connection to the mobile
When turning the radio on, the unit automatically
phone if necessary.
connects to the last mobile phone connected. If
– The Bluetooth® function must be enabled and it is not possible to connect to the last mobile
visible on the phone and radio. phone used, the phone control automatically at-
– The key blocking feature must be unlocked on tempts to connect to the next mobile phone in
the mobile phone. the list of paired phones.
Follow the owner's manual of the respective mo- The maximum range of a Bluetooth® connection
bile phone. is approximately 10 metres. Active Bluetooth®
connections are interrupted if such range is ex-
During the pairing process, the mobile phone's
ceeded. The connection will be automatically re-
keypad must be used. The mobile phone must be
stored as soon as the device is in reach of the
prepared for such process.
Bluetooth® range.
Initiate mobile phone pairing Refer to a Volkswagen Dealership for more
– Press the PHONE button. information on mobile phone connections
– Touch the Search phone function button. and pairing. 

After the process is completed, all names of

Bluetooth® devices found are displayed.
Switching off phone controls
– Select the mobile phone from the list of Blue-
tooth® devices found.  Please refer to and at the start of the
Then the device and the mobile phone will be chapter on page 157.
connected. Additional mobile phone or radio en-
tries may be required to conclude their connec- – End active calls.
tion. – Switch off the ignition.
– Confirm successful pairing in the mobile – Remove the key from the ignition.
phone, if necessary. – Switch off the mobile phone.
Depends on the mobile phone: If the vehicle key remains in the ignition cylinder
– Insert the PIN code displayed on the radio after switching off the ignition, phone controls
screen into the mobile phone and confirm. will not be switched off. Phone controls are only
switched off a few minutes later (factory set-
OR: tings: approximately 15 minutes).
– Compare the PIN code shown on the radio dis- If mobile phones were connected with
play with the PIN code shown on the mobile phone controls, the mobile phone transmis-
25A.5L1.POL.20

phone. If the PIN code matches, it must be sion unit remains active after switching off
confirmed in both devices. phone controls. Switching of the mobile phone
may be required. 

Composition Touch (R 340G) 159

Phone control description PHONE main menu
 Please refer to and at the start of the  Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 157. chapter on page 157.

Some features and settings are only available

while the vehicle is stationary and are not sup-
ported by all mobile phone brands.
The range of possible settings depends on the
country, unit, and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fications.
Phone controls can recognize up to 20 devices.
Respectively, devices can be connected via the
Hands-Free-Profile (HFP) and the Advanced Au-
dio Distribution Profile (A2DP).

User profile assignment Fig. 129 The telephone main menu.

Connected mobile phones are stored in the
phone controls under a user profile.
Up to 4 user profiles can be assigned in phone
controls. If another mobile phone is paired, the
profile with longest idle time is automatically de-
leted.
Contact list, favourite numbers (speed dial but-
tons) and User profile settings menu settings are
stored in the user profile.
If a mobile phone is reconnected to the phone
controls, the respective settings and data will be
available once again.
Fig. 130 Call details.
If a mobile phone's contact list entries are
changed while connected, contact list data can Opening the Phone main menu
be manually updated via the User profile settings
Press the PHONE button.
menu → page 165. The contact list will be auto-
matically updated upon the next mobile phone Telephone main menu function buttons
connection (e.g. during the following vehicle
use). Function button: effect
Name of the paired mobile phone or se-
WARNING 1 lected user profile. Touch to connect or
Loose or unsecured mobile phones may be pair to another mobile phone.
flung through the interior and cause injuries in Favourites (speed dial buttons) to which
case of sudden evasive or breaking manoeuvres 2 contact list numbers can be assigned
or in the event of accidents. → page 164.
● While the vehicle is in motion, always secure Open a numeric keypad to enter a phone

mobile devices properly outside the airbag number → page 162.
deployment zones or stow them away safely. Open the contact list of the paired mobile

phone → page 162.
Using mobile phones in the vehicle may
cause loudspeaker noises.  Open call lists of the mobile phone paired

→ page 163.
Open the message list (SMS) of the mobile
 a)
phone paired. 

160 Owner's Manual

 Function button: effect Function buttons and displays: action and ef-
Touch the function button to enter a fect
 a)
phone number through voice command. Touch to switch off the mobile phone
 Open the Phone settings menu → page 164.  microphone during a call (the function
button  changes to  ).
 Touch to answer a call. A
Touch to switch on the mobile phone
Touch to end a call.
  microphone during a call (the function
OR: touch to reject calls received. button  changes to  ).
Touch to mute sound during a call. Touch Display of the call duration and call num-
 the function button  to unmute the B
ber or stored name.
sound.
 Touch to end a call.
a) Depends on the mobile phone.
Battery charge status of the connected

Phone control symbols and displays mobile phone.

Display: meaning Functions available during a phone call

Name of the mobile network carrier in Possible functions
A which the SIM card of the paired mobile
Touch the function button  .
phone is registered. Mute mobile
phone micro- The mobile phone microphone
B Stored name or phone number display.
phone is muted (the function button
Battery charge status of the connected  changes to  ).

mobile phone.
Touch the function button  .
Intensity of the mobile communication Unmute mobile
 phone micro- The mobile phone microphone
transmission signal currently available.
phone is unmuted (the function but-
 Displays an active Bluetooth® connection.  ton  changes to  ).
Touch the  function button
Starting phone and select  Hands-free .
During a phone call calls via mobile The hands-free function is
phone disabled and the call is direc-
 Please refer to and at the start of the ted to the mobile phone
chapter on page 157. Touch the  function button
Starting phone and select  Hands-free .
calls via the mo-
bile phone con- The hands-free function is en-
trols abled and the call is directed
to the mobile phone controls. 

Fig. 131 During a phone call.

When a connection with the dialled phone num-

ber has been established, the PHONE main menu
display switches to Phone call → Fig. 131.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Composition Touch (R 340G) 161

Enter phone number menu Possible functions
Enter the first letter of the
 Please refer to and at the start of the contact name via the keypad.
chapter on page 157. Possible entries are shown in
Select contact the contact list.
from the list
Search the contact list and
touch the desired contact to
call.
When entering country codes,
instead of entering the two
first digits (e.g. “00”), it is pos-
Enter country sible to enter the symbol “+”.
code Touch and hold the function
button 0 for approximately 2
seconds to enter the + charac-
ter. 
Fig. 132 Enter phone number menu.

Phone contacts list menu

 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 157.

Fig. 133 Enter phone number menu (select contact

from the list).

Enter phone number menu functions.

Touch the  function button to access the En-
ter phone number menu. Fig. 134 Contact Menu (contact list).
Possible functions
Touch the  Voicemail func-
tion button to establish a con-
nection.
If a voice mailbox number has
Call voice mail- not been stored, enter the
box calling number and confirm by
pressing OK .
Previously saved call numbers
can be edited in the User profile
settings menu → page 165.
Enter phone number via the
keypad. Fig. 135 Search mask. 
Enter phone
number Touch the function button 
to establish a connection.

162 Owner's Manual

 After the first pairing process, it may take a few Call list menu
minutes until the paired mobile phone's con-
tacts1) become available on the device. This proc-  Please refer to and at the start of the
ess can take up to approximately one hour, de- chapter on page 157.
pending on the volume of data to be transferred.
Confirm the transmission process on the mobile
phone, if necessary.
Contacts can also be accessed during calls.

Opening the Contacts menu

Touch the function button  to access the
Contact list (contacts) menu.

Possible functions
Search the list and touch the
desired contact to call.
Select contact OR: if multiple phone num-
bers are stored for the same Fig. 136 Call Menu (call lists).
from the list
contact, touch the contact
Whenever a phone number is stored as a contact,
and then the desired phone
the stored name will be displayed instead of the
number to call.
call list number.
Touch the contact surface 
→ Fig. 134 to open the search Opening the Calls menu
mask.
Touch the function button  to access the Calls
Enter the desired name into menu.
the search mask → Fig. 135.
Search contacts Touch the function button  → Fig. 136 1 .
through the The appropriate number of
Select the desired call list: All , Lost , Ignored or
search mask. events is shown to the right of
Answered .
the search field. Touch the
function button to switch to Dis Definition
list view. pla
Search the list and touch the y
desired contact to call. Missed : displays the numbers of missed and

Phone menu availability varies depending unanswered calls.
on the mobile phone used.  Dialled : displays phone numbers selected
 via the mobile phone and the device's tele-
phone control.
Received : displays numbers of calls taken
 via the mobile phone and the device's tele-
phone control.

Call list availability varies depending on the

mobile phone used. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

1) Depending on the unit model, only contacts stored in the phone memory are loaded.

Composition Touch (R 340G) 163

Favourites (speed dial buttons) Possible functions
Favourite entries can be de-
 Please refer to and at the start of the leted in the User profile settings
chapter on page 157. Delete favourite
menu, under the Manage favour-
ites option → page 165.
In the PHONE main menu,
briefly touch the function
Call favourite button of the respective fa-
vourite contact assigned to
call the stored phone number.

Contacts stored as favourites are not auto-

matically updated. If a contact stored as fa-
vourite in the mobile phone is changed, the func-
tion button must be reassigned. 

Fig. 137 The telephone main menu.

Phone settings
A total of 4 phone numbers from the contact list
can be stored as favourites.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 157.
All favourite numbers must be assigned manually
and then attributed to a user profile. Open the Phone settings menu
– In the PHONE main menu, touch the  func-
Favourite functions
tion button.
Possible functions
– Touch the function button in which settings
In the PHONE main menu, must be made.
touch one of the free function – Changes are automatically applied after clos-
buttons. ing a menu.
Assign favourite Select the desired contact
from the contact list. If more Function button: effect
than one phone number is Select telephone: select the Bluetooth® device
stored for the desired contact, from the list to connect.
select the desired number. Search phone: touch to connect a new Blue-
In the PHONE main menu, tooth® device.
press and hold the favourite Bluetooth: opens the Bluetooth settings menu
entry until the Contacts menu → page 165.
opens.
User profile: opens the User profile settings menu
Select the desired contact → page 165.
from the contact list. If more
Edit favourite  Mobile phone reminder: if a Bluetooth® connection
than one phone number is
stored for the desired contact, with the mobile phone is established, the mes-
select the desired number. sage “Don't forget your phone” appears after
switching off the ignition. 
To close the Contacts menu
without applying changes,
touch the function button  .

164 Owner's Manual

 Bluetooth®settings Function button: effect
Voicemail No.: enter or edit the voice mailbox
 Please refer to and at the start of the number.
chapter on page 157. Sort by: set the contact list sorting sequence (Last
name or Given name).
Open the Bluetooth settings menu
Import contacts: import the contact list of the
In the PHONE main menu, touch the  function paired phone or update imported contact lists.
button. Select a ringtone: select a ringtone from a list of
OR: press the SETUP button. ringtone presets. The ringtone is played and
Then, touch the Bluetooth function button. stored after exiting the submenu.
Touch the function button in which settings Delete other profiles: delete some or all inactive
must be made. Changes are automatically ap- user profiles. 
plied after closing a menu.

Function button: effect

 Bluetooth: touch to switch off Bluetooth®. All
current connections will be interrupted.
Settings
Visibility: switch Bluetooth® visibility on or off.
Visible: Bluetooth® visibility enabled. Menu and system settings
Invisible: Bluetooth® visibility disabled. Blue-
tooth® visibility must be switched on to According to the vehicle version or type the menu
pair external Bluetooth® devices to the ra- and system functions and setting options may
dio. vary.
Name: shows or changes the device name. This
Open the System settings menu
name is shown in other Bluetooth® devices un-
der the Bluetooth® settings. – Press the radio SETUP button → .
Paired devices: shows the paired device. Discon- – Press the function button area of the mode to
nect and connect individual Bluetooth® devices which the introduction of settings is intended.
and Bluetooth® profiles. – Changes are automatically applied upon clos-
Search devices: search active and visible Blue- ing a menu.
tooth® devices in range of the device. The maxi- Function button: effect
mum range is approximately 10 metres.
Sound: adjust sound and volume settings
 BT Audio (A2DP/AVRCP): if an external audio → page 166.
source is to be connected to the device via
Bluetooth®, this function must be enabled. Display: display settings.

 Turn display off (in 10 s): if the function is en-
abled and the device remains idle, the dis-
play is automatically shut down after 10
User profile settings seconds. The display is switched back on by
touching the display or pressing a button.
 Please refer to and at the start of the Brightness level: select the display brightness
chapter on page 157. level.
 Touchscreen sound: confirmation sound
Function button: effect when touching a function button enabled.
Manage favourites: edit favourites → page 164.  Display time in Standby mode: the current
 All: all favourites are deleted. time is shown on the display while in
Favourite: touch to delete the stored num- Standby mode.
ber. Date/time: to enter date/time settings
25A.5L1.POL.20

Free function button: touch to store a con- Time: manual current time setting. 
tact list number as favourite.

Composition Touch (R 340G) 165

 Function button: effect Function button: effect
Time format: to define the preferred time dis- Speed-dependent volume control: set volume ad-
play format (12 or 24 hours). justments based on the vehicle's speed.
 Daylight saving time: sets the daylight saving The audio volume is increased automatical-
time automatically. ly as the speed increases.
Date: to set the current date. Entertainment dimmer: set warning volumes.
Date format: to define the preferred date dis- AUX volume: set the playback volume of au-
play format (dd-mm-yyyy, yy-mm-dd or dio sources connected to the AUX-IN multi-
mm-dd-yy). media port (Low, Medium or High). Also see
→ page 166, Adjust playback volume of ex-
Additional keypad languagesa): select additional key-
ternal audio sources.
pad languages.
Bluetooth Audioa): establish the playback vol-
Units: define the units display in the vehicle.
ume of audio sources connected via Blue-
Bluetootha): Bluetooth® settings → page 165. tooth® (Low, Medium or High). Also see
Safe removal: remove the desired data storage → page 166, Adjust playback volume of ex-
unit safely from the system. The function but- ternal audio sources.
ton is disabled after the data storage unit is suc- Balance - Fader: set sound equalization.
cessfully removed.
The grid shows sound equalization inside the
Default settings: the return to default settings is vehicle. To edit sound equalization, touch the
disabled as selected in the Entries and settings desired position in the vehicle interior display or
applied. use the arrow buttons to sequentially change
System data: display of system data (unit number, settings. To centre sound equalization in the ve-
hardware/software versions.) hicle interior display, touch the function button
Update software: update the software version. between the arrows.
Copyright: copyright information. Bass - mid - treble: set sound characteristics (bass -
a)
mid - treble).
Depending on the unit and the country.
 Touchscreen sound: confirmation sound when
WARNING touching a function button enabled.
a) Depending on the country and the device.
Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is
distracted.
Operation mode of the volume increase as a
● Never proceed with settings while driving. function of speed
To make the best of the radio's features and The speed-dependant volume increase automati-
optimal operation it is important that the cally adjusts the volume based on the vehicle's
date and time be correctly set.  speed.
The volume increase is set in levels from 1 to 7.
If a low value is set, the volume is slightly adjus-
Sound and volume settings ted at higher speeds, if the set value is high, the
volume increases sharply. At level 0 the volume
According to the vehicle version or type the increase as a function of the vehicle's speed is
sound and volume function and setting options disabled.
may vary.
Adjust playback volume of external audio
Press the SETUP button and then select Sound . sources
Function button: effect Whenever the playback volume of an external
Volume: volume settings. audio source must be raised, first lower the de-
fault volume of the device.
Max. start volume.: set the maximum switch-
on volume. If the connected audio source has very low vol-
ume, increase the output volume in the external
audio source. If this procedure is not sufficient,
set the on volume to Medium or High. 

166 Owner's Manual

 If the external audio source connected has dis-
torted or very high volume, lower the output vol-
VW Play
ume in the external audio source. If this proce-
dure is not sufficient, set the on volume to Medi-
um or Low.
Welcome to VW Play
Get ready for an unforgettable radio experience!
WARNING
The setup wizard will guide you through a few
Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is
simple steps to set up your radio. You will set up
distracted.
a user profile, date and time, and connect your
● Never proceed with settings while driving.  radio to Bluetooth® and the Wi-Fi network. Fol-
low the instructions and select Need help? if you
have any doubts.

WARNING
Initial settings require attention and time and
must only be performed while the vehicle is
parked.

If there is no Wi-Fi connection available,

some of the radio features cannot be con-
figured during the initial setup. 

Device overview

Fig. 138 Control overview.

The radio is supplied in different versions of the 1 Display: touchscreen.

device which are distinguished from each other
by its group of functionalities, inscriptions and 2 Home screen shortcut: back to home screen.
button functions as well as by the lay out of the 3 Phone: press to open the phone interface.
25A.5L1.POL.20

controls. 4 Media: press to open the radio and media in-

terface. 

VW Play 167
 5 Power: press to enable the mute feature. 10 Quick access screens: → page 168.
Hold for 3 seconds to enable the stand-by 11 Clock and status icons: press to change user
feature. profile information. If connected, status of
6 App store: press to open the application in- the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi connection, phone
terface. battery status, and mobile network signal in-
7 Volume: press the adjust the volume. formation. 
8 Settings: press to open the settings.
9 Virtual switches: controls for assist systems,
boot lid opening and air conditioning, if
available.

Quick access screens Unit operation

To facilitate home screen browsing, the user can
access menus through shortcuts. There are three
shortcut combinations available:
To configure the quick access screen, hold the
quick access screen for three seconds and select
the best combination.
Home screen shortcuts can access some func-
tions that require Bluetooth® connection, Wi-Fi
connection and specific apps. 

Fig. 139 Main menu: radio.

Open the main menu

Radio Press the media button  and select  Radio .
Press the arrow .
 Introduction Tune into stations
Select a frequency range FM/AM .
Follow the national rules and legal provisions To choose a station, press the arrow buttons
when using the radio. < / > to browse through available stations. Or
Other additional electric devices connected to press  and select the desired station in the
the vehicle may interfere with the receipt of the frequency range.
broadcast radio signal and cause noises in the The user can also enter the number of the de-
speakers. sired station, press  , enter the station number
Parking lots, tunnels, tall buildings or and press GO .
mountains may interfere with unit signal
Store stations
reception.
The currently tuned in radio station is displayed
Metal-coated stickers or films may hinder in the centre of the display.
reception in vehicles with windscreen aer-
To store a station, turn into the station and press
ials.  + . The stored station will appear in a position on
the bottom of the display. Briefly press the but-
ton to access the station.
Up to 6 stations can be stored for each user pro-
file. 

168 Owner's Manual

 Replace stored radio stations Media File Playing requirements
To replace stored radio stations, tune into the source sys-
station and briefly press the position to store the tem
new station. – Audio files MP2 (.mp2),
APE (.ape), OGG (.ogg),
Scan OGA (.oga), OPUS (.opus),
To scan stations in the Media menu, press MP3 (.mp3), WMA
Radio settings and press Search stations . (.wma), WAV (.wav), FLAC
Or press a media button  and then Update . FAT16, (.flac), and AAC (.aac).
FAT32, – Video files WMV
Data storage
Delete stored stations NTFS, (.wmv), MKV (.mkv), MOV
unit speci-
To delete stored stations, press the Settings but- exFAT, (.mov), AVI (.avi) and MP4
fied as per
ton  , in the Media menu, select Radio settings Ext3 (.mp4).
USB 2.0
and press Delete presets .  and – At most 2.000 ele-
Ext4 ments per folder level.
– Max. 20,000 audio and
video files per data stor-
age unit.
Media Max. size of a FAT32 data
system file: 4GB.
 Audio file repro- – External Media Player
 Introduction duction via Blue- must support Bluetooth®
tooth®a). A2DP profile.
“Media sources” are referred to as audio sources External audio – External data storage
that contain audio data in different data storage source playback via unit in the USB .
units, such as external MP3 Players or audio files. the USB port.
These audio files can only be played by the re- a) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth ® SIG, Inc.
spective units or through the respective radio
system's audio input ports/interfaces (USB port Volkswagen may not be held liable for dam-
or Bluetooth® interface). aged or lost files in data media. 

Copyrights
Audio and video files stored in data media may
be subject to applicable national and internation-
Air conditioning control
al copyright and data protection laws. Legal pro-
visions must be followed.
Volkswagen takes no responsibility for
damaged or lost files. 

File and database requirements

Supported listed file formats are simply referred
to as “audio and video files”.
Fig. 140 Air conditioning in multimedia.

Control the air conditioning via the VW Play

screen
Press the  button on the climatronic, or the
25A.5L1.POL.20

 button on the VW Play screen.

Air conditioning functions → page 93. 

VW Play 169
Media operation Connect

Bluetooth®

Fig. 141 Main menu: Media.

Open the main menu

Press the media button  and select the desired Fig. 142 Connect via Bluetooh.
media source. Press the arrow .
The following media sources are available:
–  USB : external data storage unit in the USB
port.
–  Phone : Bluetooth® audio.

Basic functions
– To browse through media tracks, press the < /
> buttons.
– To stop playing media, press  .
– To resume playing, press  . Fig. 143 Phone function.
– Media can be sorted by artist, album, songs, Connection via Bluetooth®
genres and video files.
– To connect the Bluetooth®, press the settings
Random mode  button  and touch Connect .
Random audio playback. – Press  Devices and then select "Add device".
– The radio unit will automatically search for de-
Repeat mode vices available (turn on Bluetooth® visibility in
– To repeat all tracks, select  . on your device). For more information, refer to
– To repeat only the current track, select  . the audio device's instruction manual.
– To establish a connection, select the name of
NOTICE the device to connect. Compare the code
The screen is blocked for video playback and shown on the radio display and the code
games while driving. shown on the mobile phone. If the code

matches, confirm the code to connect.
– Depending on the radio version, 2 devices can
be connected simultaneously. To define the
function on the device, select the phone but-
ton  to use phone functions and select the
media button  to use media functions
→ Fig. 142. 

170 Owner's Manual

 Bluetooth® audio function Wi-Fi
To enable Bluetooth® audio mode, the audio but-
ton  must be active after connecting. In this
mode, audio files from audio sources connected
via Bluetooth® (e.g. mobile phone) will be played
on the vehicle's loudspeakers.
After connecting to a Bluetooth® audio source,
follow the functions in the Media menu 
→ page 170.

Phone function 
Phone menu displays depend on the functions
available on the used mobile phone model. There
Fig. 144 Connect Wi-Fi.
may be differences.
To enable Bluetooth® phone mode, the phone Connect to Wi-Fi network
button  must be active after connecting. In this – To connect Wi-Fi, press the settings button 
mode, the user can access phone contacts, make and touch Connect .
and receive calls using the vehicle's loudspeak- – Slide the selector to enable the Wi-Fi connec-
ers. tion; the radio will automatically scan all avail-
Receiving phone calls: able networks.
– Press  to receive a phone call. – Select the name of the desired Wi-Fi network.
In case of a secure Wi-Fi network, enter the
Making phone calls:
password and press .
– In the phone function , enter the number to
– After connecting, the icon  will appear on
call and press .
the top left corner.
– Or open the contact list by pressing the con-
tacts button . Select the contact to call and Forget network
press . Once the radio connects to a Wi-Fi network, it
– To search through the contact list, press the will automatically connect to the same network
contacts button  and enter the desired name whenever it is available.
on the top bar Search contacts.
To avoid automatic connection, touch
During a phone call: Forget network in the connected network, in order
– Press  to mute the microphone during a to end the connection. 
phone call. Press  again to unmute the mi-
crophone.
– Press  to mute the loudspeakers
– Press  to place an active call on hold. The App store
user can make or answer other calls with a call
on hold.
– Press  to resume the call on hold.
 Introduction
– Press  to open the keypad.
– To end a call on hold, press the hang up button The App store may not be available in all coun-
. tries.
The app store is the right tool to search and
Up to 1,000 contacts can be synchronized
download the perfect applications for your daily
via Bluetooth® connection. 
routine.
Some applications are factory-installed.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Before using applications, read the respective use

terms and privacy policies. 

VW Play 171
App store NOTICE
Videos and other functions that may distract the
driver are blocked while the vehicle is in motion. 

Apple CarPlay™

Apple CarPlay™ Menu

Fig. 145 App store.

To download applications on the App store, the

user must be connected to a Wi-Fi network and
logged with the Volkswagen ID.
To sign up for a Volkswagen ID, access the VWID
login page or the My Volkswagen application and
fill out all registration information required.
To log in, press the App-store  menu or drag the
screen to the left twice to open the quick access Fig. 146 Apple CarPlay™ Menu.
screen, press Start session or read the code with
the phone camera. Establish connection
After logging in, the information is loaded on the To use Apple CarPlay™ the mobile device must
home page. support Apple CarPlay™.
Depending on the mobile phone used, it is possi-
Download applications
ble to connect to the radio with a USB cable or
Search for the application you want to download. with a wireless connection via Wi-Fi.
Select the application and press Download .
When a mobile device is connected for the first
The download will begin and the status will be time follow the instructions on the radio display
shown on the top corner of the page. Press and on the display of the mobile device.
Cancel before the download is completed to can-
cel. Confirm the use of Apple CarPlay™ on the mobile
device and the radio display.
After the download ends, press Open to open the
application and its features. Installed applications End connection
are available on the left-hand side of the screen. – For USB cable connections: remove USB cable
Basic functions – For Bluetooth® or wireless connections: follow
the instructions shown on the mobile phone.
– Press My Apps to access installed apps.
– Reconnecting to the Wi-Fi network also ends
– Press Settings to access App-store settings. In
the Apple CarPlay™ connection → page 171.
this section, the user can check the App-store
software version and the use terms and condi- Specificities
tions.
During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection, the
– To update installed apps, press Update to check following features are enabled: 
for available updates.
– To delete installed apps, select the Settings 
menu, select the app to delete in the Apps item
and press Uninstall.

172 Owner's Manual

 – If connected with a USB cable, Bluetooth con- Android Auto™
nections between mobile devices and the radio
are not possible.
– Phone functions are possible through Apple Android Auto™ Menu
CarPlay™ and through the radio's phone func-
tion.
– If connected via wireless Apple CarPlay™, Wi-
Fi connection is unavailable.
– Apple CarPlay™ functions may be limited while
driving.
– An active Apple CarPlay™ device cannot be
used as a media device on the Media menu.
– Navigation routes are not shown on the instru-
ment cluster display.

NOTICE Fig. 147 Android Auto™ Menu

Apple CarPlay™ is a software platform from Ap- Connect
ple that allows you to access certain applications
To use the Android Auto™ the mobile phone
and features on your mobile phone through your
needs to support Android Auto™ and be connec-
car's Infotainment System touchscreen or mobile
ted to the radio with a USB cable or with a wire-
phone's voice assistants. Once connected, Apple
less connection through Wi-Fi.
CarPlay™ mirrors a simplified version of the mo-
bile phone interface optimized for driving. All the Depending on the mobile phone used, an ade-
generated image and displayed functionalities quate application must be installed to use
are controlled by the mobile phone itself in this Android Auto™ on the device.
situation. Therefore, any situation that influences When a mobile device is connected for the first
the performance of the mobile phone will direct- time follow the instructions on the radio display
ly affect the performance on the Infotainment and on the display of the mobile device.
screen, causing the impression that the Infotain-
ment is faulty, when in fact the functions con- Press the radio button  to access Android
trolled by the vehicle are operating normally. Auto™ functions.
To access radio controls, press the home screen
For more information, refer to the mobile
shortcut  .
device's owner's manual. 
End connection
– Remove USB cable or turn off Wi-Fi connec-
tion.
– To return to the home screen, press  .

Specificities
During an active Android Auto™ connection, the
following features are enabled:
– An active Android Auto™ device may be simul-
taneously connected to the radio via Blue-
tooth.
– Bluetooth connections between mobile devi-
ces and the radio are not possible.
– Telephone functions are possible via Android
25A.5L1.POL.20

Auto™. When the Android Auto™ device is si-

multaneously connected via Bluetooth to the
device, the phone function can also be used. 

VW Play 173
– Simultaneous phone calls via Android Auto™ Open the Settings menu
and via the radio are not possible. – Press  .
– An active Android Auto™ device cannot be – Select the function for the area for which the
used as a media device on the Media menu. settings are to be set. Changes are automati-
– Navigation routes are not shown on the instru- cally applied after closing a menu.
ment cluster display.
Function button: effect
NOTICE System :system settings.
Android Auto™ is a software platform from Goo- Bluetooth : Bluetooth® settings.
gle that allows you to access certain applications Visibility : make the Bluetooth® device
and features on your mobile phone through your visible or hidden.
car's Infotainment System touchscreen or mobile Bluetooth name : show or change the de-
phone's voice assistants. Once connected, An- vice name.
droid Auto™ mirrors a simplified version of the Device manager : shows paired devices.
mobile phone interface optimized for driving. All
Disconnect and connect individual Blue-
the generated image and displayed functionali-
tooth® devices and Bluetooth® profiles.
ties are controlled by the mobile phone itself in
Phone : phone settings.
this situation. Therefore, any situation that influ-
ences the performance of the mobile phone will Bluetooth : Bluetooth® settings.
directly affect the performance on the Infotain- Ringtone : ringtone settings.
ment screen, causing the impression that the In- Audio : volume and tone settings.
fotainment is faulty, when in fact the functions Sort contacts : sort contacts by first and
controlled by the vehicle are operating
last name.
For more information, refer to the mobile Phone reminder : if a mobile phone is
device's owner's manual.  connected via Bluetooth®, the message
“Don't forget your phone” is shown after
switching off the ignition.
Audio : volume settings.

Settings Maximum call volume : to set the maximum

initial volume.
Speed-dependent volume : set volume ad-
 Introduction justments based on the vehicle's speed.
Navigation warning : sets the volume of the
navigation system's directions.
The range of possible settings depends on the
Entertainment dimmer (parking) : set the au-
country, unit, and the vehicle's version. 
dio playback volume while the parking
aid sender is activated.
Ringtone volume : set the ringtone vol-
System settings ume.
Media sound : establish media volume.
Phone sound : set phone volume.
BT audio volume : set the Bluetooth® audio
volume.
Tone : tone settings.
Equalizer : sound equalization settings.
Balance and Fader : sound distribution set-
tings. The grid shows the current point
of balance of the sound inside the vehi-
cle. To change sound distribution, touch
Fig. 148 Settings menu. the desired position in the vehicle 

174 Owner's Manual

 Function button: effect Function button: effect
interior display or use the arrow buttons Reset system : reset all or specific settings to
to sequentially change settings. To cen- factory-settings.
tre sound distribution in the vehicle in- Copyright : copyright information.
terior display, touch the function sur-
Car : vehicle function settings.
face between the arrows.
Stability control (ESC) : activate and deactivate
Touchscreen sound  : enable or disable
stability control.
confirmation sound when touching a
function button enabled. Light settings : configure the functions of the

Display : display settings.

lights.
Date and time : date and time settings.
Turn display off (in 10 s)  : if the function is
enabled and the device remains idle, the Mirrors and wipers : make settings for mirrors
display is automatically shut down after and wipers.
10 seconds. The display turns back on Dashboard : carry out configurations of the
by touching the screen. functions of the dashboard.
Brightness : to display brightness set- Service settings : access information about the
tings. inspection service.
Touchscreen sound : enable confirmation Tires : setting the tire indicators.
sound when touching a button on the Assistance systems : activate and deactivate
screen. the assistance systems.
Skins : depending on the vehicle version Opening and closing : configure the door open-
and mode, radio colour combinations ing and closing functions.
can be changed. In this case, open the Units : define measurement units.
App store and download new skins.
Parking and manoeuvring : configure the parking
Automatic Valet mode  : when the door is
functions.
opened and whenever the key is far
Vehicle valet status : enable and disable valet
from the vehicle, Valet mode is auto-
matically enabled → page 176. mode.
Factory setting : reset vehicle functions to fac-
Safe removal : remove the desired USB data
storage unit safely from the system. The re- tory settings.
spective function button is disabled after Media : to make media adjustments.
the data storage unit is successfully re- Audio : volume settings.
moved. Bluetooth : Bluetooth® settings.
WI-FI : Wi-Fi network settings. Radio settings : radio station settings.
enable and disable the Wi-Fi network. Scan stations : scan stations available in
Manage stored networks : settings of stored the current frequency range.
Wi-Fi connections. Arrow buttons : adjust arrow buttons 
Generate security key : generate a new and  to switch to the next station in
Apple CarPlay™ wireless connection key. the frequency range or the next stored
Find hotspot : search new network con- station.
nections. Delete presets : delete all stored stations.
Units : define measurement units. Safe removal : remove the desired USB data
Language selection : select the desired lan- storage unit safely from the system. The re-
guage. spective function button is disabled after
Date and time : date and time settings. the data storage unit is successfully re-
moved.
System data : display of system data (unit
Apps : app settings.
number, hardware/software versions).
Sort by : sort apps alphabetically or by instal-
25A.5L1.POL.20

Welcome video : watch the welcome video

again. lation date.
App management : manage installed apps.
Apps can also be deleted in this section. 

VW Play 175
Function button: effect Valet mode
WI-FI : Wi-Fi network settings.
Notifications : vehicle status data.

Settings menu shortcuts 

There are shortcuts for some settings on the
main page of the Settings menu 
– Screen OFF: place screen in stand-by.
– Audio: open audio settings.
– Connect: connection settings.
– Profile: edit profile settings → page 177.
– Lights: edit vehicle light settings. Fig. 149 Automatic valet mode activation.
– Valet mode: enable valet mode → page 176.
– Brightness: screen brightness settings.

Reset system
To reset the system, press Settings  and in the
System menu, press Reset system.
It is possible to reset all settings or each setting
individually.

Search
When in doubt, use the search bar in the Settings
Fig. 150 Valet mode lock screen.
menu.
The search will return the most relevant topics The valet mode locks the radio and can be activa-
related to the keywords entered. ted automatically or manually.
Activate valet mode through the Settings menu:
WARNING press Screen and select Automatic valet mode .
Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is When activated, the radio will be locked 10 sec-
distracted. onds after opening the driver door with the en-
● Never proceed with settings while driving. gine on → Fig. 149. In keyless vehicles, the radio
is locked immediately as the key moves away
WARNING from the vehicle with the engine on. Enable this
feature for greater convenience and security.
Never reset the system while driving.
If you forget the PIN code, all factory settings
To make the best of the radio's features and and data must be reset. To reset, press Reset all da-
optimal operation it is important that the ta and settings on the display.
date and time be correctly set. 
PIN code configuration
To configure the PIN code, open the Settings menu
and select Valet Mode. Edit the PIN code on the Set-
tings menu and then access the Profile and select
Edit PIN code.
The PIN code must contain 4 digits. 

176 Owner's Manual

 Vehicle valet status Edit PIN code
During the period when the car’s Valet Mode is Open the Settings menu, press Profile, select
enabled, the Valet Status function will provide a Edit PIN code and enter the 4 digit code. 
report of the events that took place with the ve-
hicle.
On the Settings menu, open the Car menu and se-
lect  Vehicle valet status to enable this feature.
While Valet Mode is enabled, the Valet status
function will be available on the radio screen, al-
lowing the driver to monitor the following infor-
mation → Fig. 150:
– Maximum speed reached.
– Distance travelled.
– Vehicle doors open, except driver door.
– If the rear lid was opened.
– If the bonnet was opened.
When Valet Mode is disabled, this information is
deleted. 

User profile
Depending on the radio version, up to 03 user
profiles can be configured. The user profile stores
memorized radio stations, driving mode (if avail-
able in the vehicle), language and applications
installed via the VW Play Apps store.

Add new user profile

Press the avatar picture on the top right corner
of the screen or open the Settings menu and select
Profile. Select Create new profile and enter the de-
sired name and avatar.

Edit avatar image and name

Press the avatar picture on the top right corner
of the screen or open the Settings menu and select
Profile. Next, select Edit name and avatar .

Change user profile

The vehicle must be stopped to change the user
profile.
Press the avatar picture on the top right corner
of the screen or open the Settings menu, select
Profile and select the desired profile. If a PIN code
is configured, the PIN code must be entered to
change the profile.
25A.5L1.POL.20

VW Play 177
Transporting ● Objects should be stowed in the vehicle inte-
rior in such a way that they can never enter
the airbag deployment zones while the vehi-
Stowing items of luggage cle is in motion.
● Always keep stowage compartments closed
Heavy objects must always be stowed securely in while driving.
the luggage compartment and you must ensure ● Stowed objects must never cause passengers
that the rear seat backrests are securely engaged to assume an incorrect sitting position.
in the upright position. Always use suitable se-
● Any seat blocked by stowed objects must not
curing straps with the fastening rings to secure
be used by any passengers.
heavy objects. Never overload the vehicle. Both
the payload and the distribution of the load in
the vehicle affect driving response and braking WARNING
distance → . The vehicle handling and braking effect may al-
ter significantly if large or heavy objects are be-
Stow all items of luggage in the vehicle ing transported.
securely ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
– Always distribute any loads in the vehicle as visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
evenly as possible. tions.
– Place heavy objects as far forward in the lug- ● Accelerate carefully and gently.
gage compartment as possible. Position the ● Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeu-
rear seat backrests securely in the upright po- vres.
sition.
● Brake earlier than in normal driving.
– Secure luggage in the luggage compartment
to the fastening rings with suitable straps.
NOTICE
– Adjust tyre pressure according to the vehicle
Hard objects on the shelf can chafe against the
load. Refer to the tyre pressure sticker
wires of the heating element in the rear window
→ page 236.
and cause damages.
– In vehicles with tyre pressure control system,
set the new load conditions when necessary Observe any information concerning towing
→ page 231. loading → page 184, Towing a trailer. 

WARNING
Objects that are not secured, or are secured in-
correctly, can cause serious injuries in the event Luggage compartment
of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or
accident. This applies particularly if objects are
struck by the airbag when activated and then  Introduction
flung through the vehicle interior. Please apply
the following rules to reduce the risk of acci-
dents: Heavy objects must always be stowed securely in
● Always stow all objects in the vehicle secure- the luggage compartment and you must ensure
ly. Always stow luggage and heavy objects in that the rear seat backrests are securely engaged
the luggage compartment. in the upright position. Always use suitable se-
curing straps. Never overload the vehicle. Both
● Always use suitable straps to prevent lug-
the payload and the distribution of the load in
gage from entering the deployment zones of
the vehicle affect driving response and braking
the side airbag or the front airbag in the
distance → . 
event of a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre or an accident.

178 Owner's Manual

 WARNING Luggage compartment cover
When the vehicle is not in use, always lock the
doors and boot lid to reduce the risk of severe  Please refer to and at the start of the
or fatal injuries. chapter on page 179.
● Never leave children unattended in the vehi-
cle, especially when the boot lid is open.
Children could climb into the luggage com-
partment and shut the boot lid. In these sit-
uations, children would not be able to leave
the luggage compartment by themselves.
This could lead to severe or fatal injuries.
● Never let children play in or around the vehi-
cle.
● Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNING
Objects that are not secured, or are secured in-
correctly, can cause serious injuries in the event Fig. 151 In the luggage compartment: remove and
of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or install the luggage compartment cover.
accident. This applies particularly if objects are
struck by the airbag when activated and then When the rear lid is opened and closed, the cover
flung through the vehicle interior. Please apply is automatically raised or lowered when the re-
the following rules to reduce the risk of acci- tention cords are attached.
dents: The luggage compartment cover can be used to
● Do not stow any hard, heavy or sharp objects stow light garments. Ensure rear visibility is not
loose in any of the vehicle's open stowage impaired
areas, on the boot lid or on the dashboard.
● Remove any hard, heavy or sharp objects Removing the luggage compartment cover
from items of clothing and bags inside the – Unfasten the retaining cords from the rear lid
vehicle and stow them securely. support → Fig. 151 (upper arrows).
– Remove the luggage compartment cover from
WARNING behind out of the side supports → Fig. 151
Transporting heavy objects changes the vehi- (lower arrows).
cle's handling and increases the braking dis-
Install the luggage compartment cover
tance. Heavy loads that are not properly stow-
ed or secured in the vehicle can lead to a loss of – Push the luggage compartment cover forward,
vehicle control and can cause serious injuries. engaging the side supports → Fig. 151 (lower
arrows).
● Transporting heavy objects changes the ve-
hicle's handling and the centre of gravity. – Fit the retaining cords on the rear lid
→ Fig. 151 (upper arrows).
● Always secure heavy objects as far back into
the luggage compartment as possible.
WARNING
NOTICE Loose objects or that are not correctly secured,
as well as animals on top of the luggage com-
Hard objects could chafe against the wires of the partment cover can cause serious injuries in the
heating element in the rear window and cause event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre
damage. or accident.
The ventilation openings between the rear ● Do not stow any hard, heavy or sharp objects
25A.5L1.POL.20

window and the luggage compartment cov- in pockets, purses or loose on the surface of
er must not be covered as this would prevent the luggage compartment cover. 
stale air escaping from the vehicle. 

Transporting 179
● Never carry animals on top of the luggage
compartment cover.
● Never drive with the luggage compartment
cover raised. Double down or remove the
cover prior driving.

NOTICE
To prevent damages to the luggage compart-
ment cover:
● Always make sure the luggage compartment
cover is firmly secured to the side supports.
● Only load the luggage compartment upward
so that the luggage compartment cover is not
pressed against the luggage when the rear lid
is closed. 

Variable luggage compartment

floor
Fig. 153 In the luggage compartment: adjust the
 Please refer to and at the start of the luggage compartment floor height.
chapter on page 179.
Depending on the vehicle version, the variable
luggage compartment floor may not be availa-
ble.

Open and close the luggage compartment

variable floor
To open, lift by the handle → Fig. 152 in the di-
rection indicated by the arrow and fold the lug-
gage compartment floor fully upwards.
To close, fold the luggage compartment floor
downwards.

Fig. 152 In the luggage compartment: raise the Adjusting the variable luggage compartment
luggage compartment floor. floor
– Lift the luggage compartment floor cover and
pull it back removing it from the luggage com-
partment side guides → Fig. 153 .
– Insert the luggage compartment floor into the
side guides of the desired height and pull for-
ward up to the striker.

Unfold the luggage compartment downwards

– Lift the luggage compartment floor and push
down underneath the guide → Fig. 153  (ar-
rows).
– Place the luggage compartment floor over the
floor lining.
– Fold the rear seat back rests forward if neces-
sary → page 76. 

180 Owner's Manual

 NOTICE held under tension. The luggage net hooks can
cause injuries if the luggage net is installed or
When closing, always slowly move the luggage
removed incorrectly.
compartment floor downwards. Otherwise, the
luggage compartment floor or lining could be ● Always hold the luggage net hooks tightly to
damaged.  prevent them from falling out of the ring
during installation or removal.
● Protect your eyes and face to avoid injuries
from any hooks that may spring out during
Luggage net installation or removal.
● Always attach the luggage net hooks in the
 Please refer to and at the start of the
order described. If one of the hooks snaps
chapter on page 179.
back, the risk of injury increases.

NOTICE
The luggage net must be used to store small and
light objects of up to 5 kg. 

Bag hooks
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 179.

Fig. 154 On the luggage compartment: luggage

net.

According to the vehicle version, the luggage net

may not be available.
The luggage net stops light items of luggage
from sliding around the luggage compartment.

Fitting the net in the luggage compartment

Fig. 155 On the luggage compartment: bag hooks.
Hook the luggage net hooks → Fig. 154 into the
fastening rings available in the luggage compart- Bag hooks may be available in the upper left and
ment. right-hand sides of the luggage compartment
→ Fig. 155.
Removing the luggage net
A fitted luggage net is held under tension. → . WARNING
– Remove the luggage net hooks from the fas- Never use the bag hooks for securing purposes.
tening rings. The bag hook could break off during a sudden
– Stow the luggage net in the luggage compart- braking manoeuvre or accident.
ment
NOTICE
WARNING Each bag hook supports a maximum load of 2.5
The elastic luggage net must be stretched kg. 
when it is secured to the fastening rings in the
25A.5L1.POL.20

luggage compartment. A fitted luggage net is

Transporting 181
Roof carrier Fastening roof carrier base
supports
 Introduction  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 182.
The vehicle's roof was designed to optimize aer-
odynamics. Conventional roof carrier systems
may no longer be fastened in rain gutters.
Once rain gutters are modelled into the roof to
facilitate water drainage, only roof carriers au-
thorized by Volkswagen may be used.

WARNING
When transporting heavy or large objects in the
roof carrier, vehicle driving conditions are al-
tered due to the shift of the gravity centre and
increased wind resistance surface.
● Always secure loads properly using suitable
and undamaged securing straps or tension Fig. 156 Fastening points in roof carrier base sup-
belts. ports (both sides).
● Heavy, large, long or flat loads negatively af-
fect the vehicle's aerodynamics, centre of Roof carriers are the base for a complete load
gravity and driving behaviour. transportation system. For safety reasons, exclu-
sive additional supports are required when trans-
● Avoid abrupt and sudden braking and driving
porting luggage, bicycles, surf boards, skiing
manoeuvres.
equipment, and boats. Additional accessories can
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit be acquired at Volkswagen Dealerships.
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions. The roof carrier base supports must always be
properly fastened. Always follow the instructions
Remove the roof rack when it is not being in the respective owner's manual.
used, preventing unnecessary fuel con-
sumption due to greater aerodynamic resistance.  Fastening roof carrier base supports
The holes or markings of fastening points in base
supports are clearly visible upon opening the ve-
hicles front and rear doors, located next to the
roof pillars → Fig. 156 (magnifying glass). The
rear fastening holes or markings are located be-
low the roof pillars → Fig. 156 (right-hand side
magnifying glass).
Holes and markings can only be seen with open
doors.
Only fasten base supports to the markings illus-
trated in the figure → .

WARNING
Improperly fastening base supports and roof
rack, as well as its incorrect use, may cause the
entire system to detach from the roof, resulting
in injuries and accidents. 

182 Owner's Manual

 ● Always follow the instructions provided in Maximum roof weight permitted
the owner's manual. The maximum roof weight permitted is 45 kg.
● Only use roof carriers when base supports The roof load encompasses the weight of the
are properly fastened and the roof carrier roof carrier and the load to be transported over
presents proper use conditions. the roof → .
● Only fasten base supports to the markings il- Always mind the weight of the roof carrier and
lustrated in the figure → Fig. 156. load to be transported. Never exceed the maxi-
● Assemble roof carrier base supports correct- mum roof load permitted.
ly. When using roof carriers with lower load capaci-
● Check bolts and fastening points before driv- ties, the maximum roof load permitted may not
ing and re-tighten them after short drives. In be used. In this case, the roof carrier may only be
case of long hauls, check the bolt and fasten- loaded until the weight limit indicated in its in-
ing spots upon each stop. stallation instructions.
● Always assemble special roof carriers for bi- Distributing load
cycles, skiing equipment, surf boards, etc.
correctly. Distribute the load evenly and ensure proper pro-
tection → .
● Do not modify or repair roof carriers and
base supports. Controlling fastening points
After the base supports and roof carrier have
NOTICE been fastened, bolt and fastening points must be
Always observe roof carrier manufacturer's in- checked after short hauls and in regular intervals
stallation instructions. during long hauls.
● Keep roof carrier manufacturer's installation
and use instructions along with the vehicle WARNING
wallet. Accidents and severe injuries can occur if the
maximum permitted roof weight is exceeded.
NOTICE ● Never exceed the maximum roof weight per-
Damages caused by improper roof carrier fasten- mitted, maximum axle weight permitted and
ing are not covered by the warranty. the total vehicle weight permitted.
● The vehicle level is altered after assembling a ● Never exceed the roof carrier load capacity,
roof carrier and stowing loads. Compare the even if under the maximum roof load capaci-
vehicle level with available passage heights, ty.
for example, in road bridges and garage doors. ● Fasten heavy objects as far ahead as possible
and uniformly distribute the load.
Read and follow installation instructions
provided along with the roof carrier, always
WARNING
keeping such instructions in the vehicle.
Loose or incorrectly fastened loads may fall
It is paramount to know applicable laws re- from the roof carrier and cause accidents and
garding the sizes of volumes transported injuries.
over vehicle roofs.  ● Always secure loads properly using suitable
and undamaged securing straps or tension
belts.
Loading the roof carrier ● Properly fasten loads.

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter At times, unused roof carriers are left as-
on page 182. sembled on the roof. Due to the greater
aerodynamic resistance, the vehicle will unneces-
25A.5L1.POL.20

Loads may only be safely fastened when the roof sarily consume more fuel. Therefore, remove roof
carrier system is properly assembled → . carriers when they are not being used. 

Transporting 183
 The load transported on the roof must be Vehicles with Start-Stop system
properly fastened. Transporting loads on Before towing a trailer, the Start-Stop system
the roof changes the vehicle's behaviour.  must be manually disabled and remain disabled
at all times while towing a trailer → page 108.

DANGER
Usage guidelines
It is dangerous to transport people in a trailer
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter and it may also be illegal.
on page 182.
WARNING
When to remove the roof carrier: Improper use of the towing bracket can cause
– When it is no longer necessary. injury and accidents.
– When the vehicle passes through an auto- ● Only use the towing bracket if it is fitted
wash system. properly and is not damaged.
– When the vehicle level exceeds the maximum ● Do not perform any modifications or repairs
passage height in a garage, for example. to the towing bracket.

NOTICE WARNING
● Remove the roof carrier before submitting the Towing a trailer and transporting heavy or bul-
vehicle into an auto-wash system. ky items can change the way the vehicle's han-
● The vehicle level is altered after assembling a dling and cause accidents.
roof carrier and stowing loads. Compare the ● Therefore, observing the instructions below
vehicle level with available passage heights, is essential to ensure the safety of the driver,
for example, in road bridges and garage doors. passengers, and other road users.
● The roof aerial and boot lid cannot be affected – Always secure loads properly using suita-
by the roof carrier system or loads secured to ble and undamaged securing straps.
the roof. – Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
● Ensure that the boot lid does not come into visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
contact with roof carrier loads upon opening.  tions.
– Trailers with a high centre of gravity are
more likely to tip over than trailers with a
low centre of gravity.
Towing a trailer – Avoid abrupt and sudden braking and driv-
ing manoeuvres.
– Take special care when overtaking.
 Introduction – Reduce your speed immediately if the
trailer shows even the slightest sign of
snaking.
Observe any country-specific regulations when – When towing a trailer do not drive faster
towing a trailer and using a towing bracket. than 80 km/h (50 mph). This also applies
Your car is intended mainly for transporting pas- to countries where higher speeds are per-
sengers and luggage. However, it can also be mitted Always obey speed limits. In some
used to tow a trailer or caravan, provided that it areas speed limits for vehicles towing
is fitted with the appropriate technical equip- trailers are lower than for vehicles without
ment. This additional maximum trailer weight trailers.
will affect the durability, fuel consumption and – Never try to “stop” a trailer from snaking
performance of the vehicle and, in certain cir- by increasing your speed. 
cumstances, can shorten the service intervals.
Driving with a trailer not only places an extra
load on the vehicle, but also requires increased
concentration on the part of the driver.

184 Owner's Manual

 WARNING Never connect the trailer lights directly to the
electrical system of your vehicle. If you are un-
With a retrofitted towing bracket, the Start- certain whether the trailer has been connected
Stop system must always be manually turned correctly, please contact a qualified workshop.
off when towing a trailer. Otherwise, this may Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen
cause damages to the brake system and result Dealership for this purpose.
in severe accidents and injuries.
Exterior mirrors
In new vehicles, do not tow a trailer during
the first 1,000 km → page 184. you are unable to see the traffic behind the trail-

er in the vehicle's standard exterior mirrors, addi-
tional exterior mirrors should be fitted in accord-
ance with any country-specific regulations. Be-
Technical requirements fore setting off, adjust the mirrors so that you
have a sufficient view of the rear.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 184. WARNING
If the towing bracket is unsuitable or incorrect-
Only use a towing bracket which is approved for ly fitted, the trailer can become detached from
the gross weight of the trailer you wish to tow. the vehicle and cause severe injuries.
The towing bracket must be suitable for your ve-
hicle and trailer and must be securely bolted to NOTICE
the vehicle's chassis. Always check and follow
the data provided by the towing bracket manu- ● The vehicle electronics may be damaged if the
facturer. trailer lights are not connected properly.
● The vehicle electronics may be damaged if the
Towing brackets fitted to the rear bumper trailer uses too much electricity.
Never fit a towing bracket to the rear bumper or ● Never connect the trailer's electrical system
to its fastening. A towing bracket must not pre- directly to the electrical connections of the tail
vent the rear bumper from functioning correctly. lights or to other sources of electricity. Use
Do not carry out any alterations to the exhaust or only suitable connectors to supply power to
brake systems. Check regularly to see if the tow- the trailer.
ing bracket is fitted securely.
Volkswagen recommends additional serv-
Engine cooling system ices between the normal inspection inter-
There is an increased load on the engine and the vals if the vehicle is used frequently for towing a
cooling system when towing a trailer. The cool- trailer. 
ing system must contain sufficient coolant and
be able to cope with the extra load added by the
trailer.
Engaging and connecting the trailer
Trailer brake
 Please refer to and at the start of the
If the trailer is equipped with its own brake sys-
chapter on page 184.
tem, observe any legal requirements. The trailer's
brake system must never be connected to the ve-
Emergency breakaway cable
hicle brake system.
Always fasten the emergency breakaway cable
Emergency breakaway cable properly in the towing vehicle. In this case, leave
Always use the emergency breakaway cable be- some slack for the breakaway cable to allow
tween your vehicle and the trailer → page 185. curves. However, the breakaway cable must not
drag on the ground while driving. 
Rear trailer lights
25A.5L1.POL.20

The rear lights on the trailer must meet legal re-

quirements → page 185.

Transporting 185
Rear trailer lights In the interest of road safety, Volkswagen recom-
Ensure that the rear trailer lights are functioning mends that you always transport the maximum
properly and are in compliance with legal re- drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the
quirements. road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
The drawbar load increases the weight on the
WARNING rear axle and reduces the maximum load level as
Unsuitable or incorrectly connected electrical a result.
conductors may power the trailer, cause oper-
ating faults in the vehicle's electronics and Gross combination weight
cause severe injuries. The gross combination weight is comprised of
● All activities regarding the electrical system actual loaded vehicle and loaded trailer weights.
can only be conducted by a Volkswagen
Loading the trailer
Dealership or qualified workshop.
The weight of the load should be distributed
● Never connect the trailer's electrical system
evenly. The maximum permitted drawbar load
directly to the electrical connections of the
should be utilised. Do not place the load only at
tail lights or to other sources of electricity.
the front or the rear of the trailer:

NOTICE – Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy ob-

jects are either over or as near to the axle as
A trailer parked over the support wheel or over
possible.
the trailer supports must not be connected to the
vehicle. For example, the vehicle is lifted or low- – Secure all loads on the trailer properly.
ered due to load changes or tyre damages. In this
case, major forces act over the trailer bracket and Tyre pressure
over the trailer, which may damage the vehicle Follow the trailer manufacturer's recommenda-
and the trailer. tions concerning the tyre pressure for the trailer
tyres.
If the engine is not running and electrical
When towing a trailer, inflate the wheels on the
equipment is switched on in the trailer via
towing vehicle with the maximum permitted tyre
the trailer socket, the vehicle battery will dis-
pressure → page 233.
charge. 
WARNING
Accidents and serious injuries can occur if you
Loading the trailer exceed the vehicle's maximum permitted gross
axle weight rating, drawbar load, gross vehicle
 Please refer to and at the start of the weight rating or gross combination weight rat-
chapter on page 184. ing.
● Never exceed the specified values.
Maximum trailer weight and drawbar load
● Never let the actual weights at the front and
The maximum trailer weight is the weight that
rear axles exceed the gross axle weight rat-
the vehicle can pull . The drawbar load is the
ings. Never exceed the permissible gross ve-
weight that the towing bracket exerts vertically
hicle weight for the vehicle with weight at
on the ball coupling.
the front and rear of the vehicle.
The figures for maximum trailer weight and draw
bar weights that are given on the data plate of WARNING
the towing bracket are for certification purposes
Moving loads can severely impair the vehicle's
only. The correct values for your specific model,
stability and driving safety, which can cause ac-
which may be lower than these figures, are provi-
cidents and severe injuries.
ded in the vehicle registration documents. All da-
ta in the official vehicle documents take prece- ● Always load trailers correctly.
dence over this data. ● Always secure loads properly using suitable
and undamaged securing straps. 

186 Owner's Manual

 Towing a trailer WARNING
Incorrect trailer towing can cause loss of vehi-
 Please refer to and at the start of the cle control and severe personal injuries.
chapter on page 184.
● Towing a trailer and transporting heavy or
bulky items can change the way the vehicle's
Headlight adjustment
handling and increase the braking distance.
Towing a trailer can raise the front end of the ve-
hicle enough for the dipped beam to blind other ● Always drive carefully and defensively. Brake
road users. The headlights must be adjusted in a earlier than in normal driving.
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
Things to note when driving with a trailer tions. Reduce your speed, especially when
– If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the going downhill.
brakes gently at first, and then firmly. This will ● Accelerate carefully and gently. Avoid abrupt
prevent the jerking that can be caused by the and sudden braking and driving manoeuvres.
trailer wheels locking. ● Take special care when overtaking. Reduce
– The gross combination weight causes the your speed immediately if the trailer shows
braking distance to increase. even the slightest sign of snaking.
– Prior taking on strong downhill slopes, select a ● Never try to “stop” a trailer from snaking by
lower gear (manual gearbox or Tiptronic mode increasing your speed.
of the automatic gearbox) to make use of the ● In some areas speed limits for vehicles tow-
engine as a brake. The brake system could oth- ing trailers are lower than for vehicles with-
erwise overheat and fail. out trailers. 
– The vehicle's centre of gravity and the vehi-
cle's handling will change because of the max-
imum trailer weight and the increased com-
bined towing weight of the vehicle and trailer.
– The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with
an unladen towing vehicle is very unfavoura-
ble. When driving in this situation, drive partic-
ularly carefully and slowly.

Pulling off on hills when towing a trailer

Depending on the steepness of the slope and the
total weight of the trailer and vehicle, a parked
vehicle towing a trailer could roll back a short
distance when moving off on a hill.
When towing a trailer, pull off on hills as follows:
– Press and hold the brake pedal.
– Pull the handbrake.
– Vehicles with manual gearbox: press the clutch
pedal fully down.
– Engage the 1st gear → page 110 or the D/S se-
lector lever position → page 111.
– Release the brake pedal.
– Pull away slowly. With manual gearbox, gently
release the clutch pedal.
25A.5L1.POL.20

– Only let go of the handbrake lever when the

engine has sufficient power to move off.

Transporting 187
Retrofitting a towing bracket Retrofitting a towing bracket
– Observe applicable laws in the country in
 Please refer to and at the start of the which the vehicle will run.
chapter on page 184. – It might be necessary to disassemble and reas-
semble the rear bumper. Additionally, it is also
necessary to tighten the towing bracket
screws with a torque meter and connect a
socket to the vehicle's electrical system. For
such, special tools and expertise are required.
– The figure indicates securing points that must
be observed when installing towing brackets.

WARNING
Unsuitable or incorrectly connected electrical
conductors may cause operating faults in all of
the vehicle's electronic components, which
may cause severe accidents and injuries.
● Never connect the trailer's electrical system
directly to the electrical connections of the
tail lights or to other improper sources of
electricity. Use only suitable connectors for
trailer connection.
● Retrofitting of a towing device must be car-
ried out by an authorized Volkswagen dealer-
ship.

WARNING
If the towing bracket is unsuitable or incorrect-
ly fitted, the trailer can become detached from
the vehicle. This could lead to severe accidents
and fatal injuries.

NOTICE
Towing a trailer represents a greater stress for
the vehicle. Before deciding to retrofit, contact a
Volkswagen Dealership to know if it is necessary
Fig. 157 Attachment points for retrofitting a tow- to perform any modifications in the cooling sys-
ing bracket. tem or if thermal shielding plates must be instal-
led. 
Figure → Fig. 157 illustrates as an example the
fastening point to install a towing bracket on the
Polo model.
Towing bracket retrofitting must be executed in
accordance with the instructions provided by the
bracket's manufacturer, always considering the
attachment points indicated in → Fig. 157 A .
The towing bracket securing points can be seen
from the lower part of the vehicle. The towing
bracket must be secured to such points.

188 Owner's Manual

 Fuel WARNING
For safety reasons, Volkswagen does not rec-
ommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the
Fuel handling safety vehicle. Fuel can spill out of the full or empty
guidelines canister and catch fire, especially in the event
of an accident. This could cause explosions, fire
and injuries.
WARNING
● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to
Filling the tank incorrectly and improper han- transport a spare fuel canister, please note
dling of fuel can cause explosions, fire and seri- the following:
ous burns and injuries.
– When refilling, never place the canister in
● Always ensure that the tank cap is closed or on top of the vehicle (e.g. in the lug-
properly to prevent the evaporation and gage compartment). There may be an
spillage of fuel. electrostatic charge during refilling caus-
● Fuel is highly explosive and inflammable and ing the fuel fumes to ignite.
can cause serious burns and other injuries. – Always place the spare fuel canister on the
● Fuel can spill out if the engine is not switch- ground.
ed off or the filler nozzle is not fully inserted – When filling a spare fuel canister, place
into the fuel filler neck when filling the tank. the filler nozzle as far as possible into the
This may cause fires, explosions and serious filler opening.
burns and injuries. – If the spare fuel canister is made of metal,
● When filling the tank with fuel, the engine the filler nozzle must have constant con-
and the ignition must be switched off for tact with the canister in order to avoid
safety reasons. static charging.
● When filling the tank, always switch off your – Please follow all legislation concerning the
mobile telephone and two-way radio or any use, stowage and transportation of spare
other radio equipment. Electromagnetic ra- fuel canisters.
diation can generate sparks which can in turn
start a fire. NOTICE
● When filling the tank, never get into the ve- ● Remove spilt fuel from the vehicle paint as
hicle. If in exceptional cases you have to en- quickly as possible in order to avoid damage to
ter the vehicle, close the door and touch a the wheel housing, tyres and vehicle paint.
metal object before touching the filler nozzle ● Do not run the tank empty. Irregular filling pe-
again. This will remove any spark-generating riods can cause backfiring and allow unburnt
electrostatic charges from you. Sparks can fuel to enter the exhaust system. This could
cause a fire when filling the tank. damage the catalytic converter. 
● Never fill the tank or fill up a spare canister
near open flames, sparks or glowing items
(e.g. cigarettes).
● Electrostatic discharge and electromagnetic Fuelling and fuel types
radiation must be avoided when filling the
tank.
● Follow all applicable safety information pro-  Introduction
vided by the filling station when filling the
tank.
The fuel cap is located at the rear right-hand side
● Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the lug-
of the vehicle.
gage compartment.
The factory- fitted sticker on the inside of the
25A.5L1.POL.20

tank flap indicates the required fuel type for the

vehicle. 

Fuel 189
 WARNING Petrol additives
The quality of petrol influences the running prop-
Incorrect handling of fuel may cause explo-
erties, performance and service life of the en-
sions, fire and severe burns and injuries.
gine. Therefore, fuel up with quality fuel and,
● Fuel is highly explosive and inflammable. when necessary, use the adequate additives.
● Never handle fuel near open flames, sparks The use of unsuitable petrol additives can cause
or glowing items (e.g. lighters). considerable damage to the engine and catalytic
● Observe any valid safety information and converter. Metallic petrol additives should be
legislation concerning the handling of fuels. avoided at all times.

NOTICE NOTICE
● If the TOTALFLEX vehicle is immobilized by If, in an emergency, you have to use a different
“lack of fuel”, the vehicle must be refilled with from specified petrol, drive at medium engine
the last type of fuel used - petrol or ethanol. speeds and avoid high engine loading. Avoid high
● If it is necessary to fill the tank with a different engine speeds and heavy engine loads. Failure to
type of fuel, the following may occur: do so can result in engine damage! Fill the tank
– Considerable decrease in engine perform- with the recommended petrol as soon as possi-
ance. ble.
● The vehicle must run for approximately 5 kilo- Just one tank full of leaded fuel, or fuel
metres to recognize the new fuel type, in order containing other metallic additives (such as
to prevent any of the scenarios above. manganese), can seriously impair the efficiency
and cause damages to the catalytic converter. 
NOTICE
For vehicles with TSI engines: if there is an op-
tion to refuel the vehicle exclusively with Etha- TOTALFLEX engine
nol-type fuel, it is recommended that every
10,000 km the vehicle be refueled with at least  Please refer to and at the start of the
one full tank of gasoline. This recommendation is chapter on page 190.
mandatory to observe, and aims to prevent the
accumulation of contaminating matter arising Petrol
from the characteristics of Ethanol. This possible
Vehicles must be driven using unleaded petrol
accumulation of contaminating matter in the fuel
free from any metallic additives (such as manga-
supply system can result in loss of engine per-
nese), with RON 95/E24 (blue) ethanol percent-
formance or even difficulties in starting the vehi-
age.
cle.

When the airbags are triggered during an Petrol additives

accident, the fuel supply is interrupted The quality of petrol influences the running prop-
→ page 45, In case of airbag triggering - Crash erties, performance and service life of the en-
detection function.  gine. Therefore, fuel up with quality fuel and,
when necessary, use the adequate additives.
The use of unsuitable petrol additives can cause
considerable damage to the engine and catalytic
Petrol engine
converter. Metallic petrol additives should be
 Please refer to and at the start of the avoided at all times.
chapter on page 190.
Ethanol
Vehicles with a petrol engine must be driven us- The vehicle must be fuelled exclusively with hy-
ing unleaded petrol free from any metallic addi- drated ethanol, in accordance with applicable
tives (such as manganese), in accordance with country laws. 
applicable country laws.

190 Owner's Manual

 NOTICE Opening the tank flap
– Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key or
● The use of unsuitable petrol additives can
press the central locking button  in the driv-
cause considerable damage to the engine and
er door to unlock the vehicle from the inside
catalytic converter.
→ page 63.
● If, in an emergency, you have to use fuel dif-
– On the aft part of the tank flap, press and open
ferent than specified, drive at medium engine
the flap outward.
speeds and avoid high engine loading. Avoid
high engine speeds and heavy engine loads. – Remove the tank cap rotating it counter clock-
Failure to do so can result in engine damage! wise and stow it into the holder on the tank
Fill the tank with the recommended petrol as flap → Fig. 158.
soon as possible.
Filling the tank
● Just one tank full of leaded fuel, or fuel con-
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is shown
taining other metallic additives (such as man-
on a sticker on the inside of the tank flap
ganese), can seriously impair the efficiency
→ page 189.
and cause considerable damages to the cata-
lytic converter.  – The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off for the first time → .
– Do not continue filling the tank after it
switches off! The expansion space in the fuel
Fuelling
tank will otherwise fill up and the fuel could
spill out. This could also happen when the fuel
 Please refer to and at the start of the
warms up and expands.
chapter on page 190.
Closing the tank cap
– Turn the tank cap clockwise into the fuel filler
neck until you hear it engage.
– Close the tank flap. The tank flap must be flush
with the vehicle bodywork.

WARNING
Do not continue filling the tank once the filler
nozzle stops automatically. The fuel tank can-
not be overfilled. This can cause fuel to splash
out and overflow. This could cause explosions,
fires and severe injuries.

● After the fuel filler nozzle is automatically

Fig. 158 Open tank flap with tank cap attached to switched off for the first time, the tank will
the holder. have reached its capacity. Do not force fuel
filling, since fuel may overflow.
Switch off the engine, ignition and the mobile
telephones before filling the tank and leave them ● When filling, fuel may be spilt on the ground,
switched off during the process. polluting the environment. Always fill the at
authorized filling stations with proper fluid
Vehicles with TOTALFLEX engine were designed collection and disposal systems. 
to use both petrol and ethanol in any amount.
Check the fuel tank capacity in → page 273.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Fuel 191
Engine control unit and Electronic engine power control
exhaust gas emission control (EPC)
system  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 192.

 Introduction The electronic engine power control (EPC) is a

system designed to determine the throttle valve
position based on the torque required by the
The relevant components for the exhaust emis-
driver through the electronic pedal (e-gas sys-
sion system reduce the emission of harmful ele-
tem); the indicator lamp  lights up in the event
ments:
of system malfunctions.
– Engine Electronic Power Control (EPC)
→ page 192 Under normal operating conditions, when the
– Catalytic converter → page 192 driver activates the accelerator pedal, the system
transforms such request into a need for speed
– Lambda probe → page 193 and power.
– Activated charcoal filter - supply system
By controlling engine components (sensors and
→ page 193
actuators), the best performance possible is cal-
Information regarding warning and indicator culated, based on the driver's request. 
lamps is available in the Troubleshooting section
at the end of the chapter → page 193.

WARNING Catalytic converter

Combustion engine combustion gases contain  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
carbon monoxide which can provoke fainting on page 192.
and lead to death.
● Never start or run the engine in unventilated The catalytic converter is used for exhaust gas
or closed spaces. post-treatment and helps mitigate the emission
● Never leave the engine running if you leave of pollutants into the atmosphere. Observe the
the vehicle unattended. following points to ensure that the exhaust sys-
tem and catalytic converter in the engine func-
WARNING tion properly for extended periods of time:
The exhaust system components become very – Fill the tank only with unleaded petrol free
hot. This may cause fires. from other metallic additives (such as manga-
● Park the vehicle so that no part of the ex- nese)
haust system can come into contact with any – Never allow the fuel tank to run completely
inflammable material underneath the vehi- dry.
cle, e.g. dry grass. – Never overfill engine oil → page 218.
● Never apply underseal or anti-corrosion – Never push and/or pull the vehicle to start the
coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con- engine (“push starting”), but rather use the
verter, diesel particulate filter or the heat jump starting system → page 209.
shields on the exhaust system. 
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of
power when the vehicle is moving, reduce speed
immediately. The vehicle should be inspected at
the nearest Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
workshop. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter
the exhaust system and escape into the atmos-
phere. The catalytic converter can also be dam-
aged by overheating! 

192 Owner's Manual

 NOTICE Troubleshooting
Just one tank full of leaded fuel, or fuel contain-
ing other metallic additives (such as manganese),  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
can seriously impair the efficiency and cause on page 192.
damages to the catalytic converter.
If the engine operates irregularly or in case of en-
Even when the exhaust purification system gine jolts while driving, this could be related to
is working perfectly, there may be a smell insufficient fuel or low-quality fuel (e.g. water
of sulphur from the exhaust in some conditions. mixed in the fuel). In these cases, immediately
This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel slow down and seek assistance at a Volkswagen
being used. Often, it is simply a case of using a Dealership or qualified workshop nearby, driving
different fuel brand.  at low revs and speed. If these symptoms occur
immediately after filling the tank, switch the en-
gine off immediately – as well as to avoid secon-
dary damages – and seek assistance from a
Lambda probe Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter Indicator lamps
on page 192.
The combustion gases emission control system
(OBD) is not available in countries which legisla-
The purpose of the lambda probe is to monitor
tion does not cover this system. In these cases
exhaust gases through a sensor hit by led or oth-
the indicator lamp  will only light up when the
er metallic additives (e.g. manganese) contained
ignition is turned on and when starting the en-
in the fuel, and gradually reduced. The lambda
gine.
probe completely loses its efficiency after 10,000
km. The resulting lack of monitoring could cause Engine management system fault (Elec-
engine malfunctions, such as:  tronic Power Control). On: the engine must
immediately be checked at a Volkswagen
– changes in driving conditions;
Dealership.
– hot engine starting problems; Faulty emissions in the exhaust system
– increased fuel consumption.   (OBD). On: slow down. Carefully drive to
the nearest Volkswagen Dealership. The
engine must be checked.
Flashing: faulty catalytic converter. Reduce
Activated charcoal filter - supply  your speed. Carefully drive to the nearest
system Volkswagen Dealership. The engine must
be checked.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 192. When switching the ignition on, certain warning
and indicator lamps flash to check functions.
The supply system has an activated charcoal sys- Such lamps go out after a few seconds.
tem that accumulates hydrocarbons (steam) gen-
erated in the fuel tank (evaporative emission WARNING
control), preventing such hydrocarbons from be- Failure to observe the warning lamps and text
ing released into the atmosphere. While the en- messages could lead to your vehicle breaking
gine is running, these accumulated hydrocarbons down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
are used in the normal engine combustion proc- juries.
ess. ● Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
The activated charcoal filter prevents fuel sages that appear.
tank gas hydrocarbons from being released ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and
25A.5L1.POL.20

into the atmosphere.  when safe to do so. 

Fuel 193
 NOTICE If and when
Failure to observe the illuminated indicator
lamps and its descriptions and meanings could Vehicle toolkit
lead to vehicle damages.

If the indicator lamps  or  are lit up,  Introduction

fuel consumption may be higher and engine
performance reduced. 
Observe any country-specific legislation when
securing your vehicle in the event of a break-
down.
Fuel quality
WARNING
Considering the impracticality of supervising all
In the event of a sudden driving or braking ma-
filling stations, Volkswagen recommends filling
noeuvre or accident, a loose vehicle toolkit and
the tank in stations included in the Distributor
spare wheel could be flung though the vehicle
Network, which have clear programs, in order to
and cause severe injuries.
ensure product quality.
● Always ensure that the vehicle toolkit or
Volkswagen Dealerships are prepared to handle spare wheel are secured in the luggage com-
engine sediments. partment.
Fuel injection system
WARNING
The vehicle is equipped with a fuel injection sys-
tem that, under normal circumstances, waives Unsuitable or damaged tools in the vehicle
the need for any periodical cleaning process, ei- toolkit can lead to accidents and injuries.
ther with fuel additives or disassembling the in- ● Never work with unsuitable or damaged
jection valves to clean ultrasound systems. tools from the vehicle toolkit. 
Cleaning is required whenever damages or im-
proper engine function occur due to use of low-
quality fuel. In this case, Volkswagen recom- Vehicle toolkit stowage and access
mends visiting a Volkswagen, Dealership, which
has suitable additives and equipment.  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 194.
NOTICE
Damages caused on the engine due to the use of
improper or insufficient fuel are not covered by
the warranty. 

Fig. 159 On the luggage compartment, under the

floor lining: spare wheel and vehicle toolkit. 

194 Owner's Manual

 Contents of the vehicle tool kit
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 194.

Fig. 160 On the luggage compartment: vehicle

toolkit securing strap and vehicle toolkit. Fig. 161 Contents of the vehicle toolkit.

The vehicle toolkit and spare wheel are located in The content of the vehicle toolkit depends on the
the luggage compartment, under the floor cover- vehicle equipment level. The following describes
ing → Fig. 159. the maximum scope.
To access the vehicle toolkit, the spare wheel
Contents of the vehicle toolkit. → Fig. 161
must be removed.
1 Jack. Before reinserting the jack back into
Accommodation of the vehicle toolkit the toolkit, close the jack with the box span-
– If the case, lift and secure the variable luggage ner until reaching the stop, in order to pre-
compartment floor → page 180. vent noises while driving.
– Lift the floor lining of the luggage compart- 2 Lug wrench. Also used as a jack lever to lift
ment → Fig. 159. the vehicle → page 244.
– Remove the lining completely to remove the 3 Puller hook to remove the wheel bolt caps
spare wheel and access the vehicle toolkit. (when existing).

Release the vehicle toolkit securing strap Turn the jack back to its original position af-
ter use so it may be securely stored. 
To release the securing strap → Fig. 160 A , pull
the buckle in the direction of the arrow 1 .

Securing the vehicle toolkit

– Fit the vehicle toolkit in its housing.
– Pass the strap through the buckle in the direc-
tion of the arrow 2 and firmly pull the belt to
secure the vehicle toolkit.
Always ensure that the spare wheel and ve-
hicle toolkit are properly secured in the lug-
gage compartment. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

If and when 195

Window wiper blades Cleaning and replacing window
wiper blades
Service position

Fig. 163 Replacing windscreen wiper blades.

Fig. 162 Window wipers in service position.

In the service position, the windscreen wiper

arms can be lifted from the windscreen . Proceed
as follows to place the windscreen wipers in
service position → Fig. 162:

Activate the service position

– The bonnet must be closed → page 215. Fig. 164 Replacing the rear window wiper blades.
– Switch the ignition on and off.
The factory-fitted window wiper blades are coat-
– Press the window wiper lever briefly down- ed with graphite. The graphite coating ensures
wards. that the windscreen wiper blade slides quietly
over the windscreen. A damaged graphite coat-
Suspending the windscreen wiper arms off
ing will among others, raise the noise level dur-
the windscreen.
ing the window wiping.
– Place the windscreen wiper arms into service
position before suspending them → . Check the condition of the window wiper blades
on a regular basis. Replace the window wiper
– To suspend the windscreen wiper arms, hold
blades whenever they are dirty or are not per-
them only by the wiper blade attachment area.
forming properly → .
Place the windscreen wiper arms back on the Damaged window wiper blades must be replaced
windscreen again prior driving! Press the wind- immediately. Window wiper blades can be
screen wipers lever briefly down with the ignition bought at Volkswagen Dealerships or qualified
turned on, to return the windscreen wiper arms workshops.
back into the starting position.
Cleaning the windscreen wiper blades
NOTICE Observe on the windscreen wipers: place the
● To avoid damages to the bonnet and window window wiper arms into service position before
wiper arms, lift the windscreen wiper arms on- lifting them off the windscreen → . 
ly when in service position.
● Always ensure that the wiper arms are lowered
onto the windscreen prior driving. 

196 Owner's Manual

 – To suspend the windscreen wiper arms, hold Exterior lighting
them only by the wiper blade attachment area.
– Carefully clean the windscreen wiper blades
with a damp sponge → .  Introduction
– Fold the windscreen wiper arms carefully back
onto the windscreen.
Before repairing the product, check which tech-
Replacing windscreen wiper blades nology is used, incandescent lamp or LED. As rule
of thumb, light bulbs can be replaced by yourself.
– Place the windscreen wiper arms into service
When, according to the vehicle version, the exte-
position before suspending them → page 196.
rior lighting is of LED technology, the replace-
– To suspend the windscreen wiper arms, hold ment of the LED light unit or of the individual
them only by the wiper blade attachment area. LEDs by yourself is not possible. The burning out
– Press and hold the release tab → Fig. 163 1 of individual LEDs may be an indication of possi-
and pull off the windscreen wiper blade in the ble burn outs of other LEDs. In such case, the
direction of the arrow. lights must be checked, and if necessary, re-
– Insert the new wiper blade of the same length placed by a specialized workshop.
and design into the wiper arms until it is prop- Changing the vehicle bulbs requires considerable
erly fitted. technical skill. If you do not feel confident with
– Fold the windscreen wiper arms carefully back the procedure, Volkswagen recommends that
onto the windscreen. you have the bulbs changed by a Volkswagen
Dealership or that you seek other expert assis-
Replacing the rear window wiper blades tance. Contact a qualified workshop if other vehi-
– Lift and fold the rear window wiper arm. cle parts around the lights need to be removed.
– Press and hold the release button → Fig. 164 A box containing spare light bulbs for lights that
A pressed. are required to ensure that the vehicle is road-
– Remove the rear window wiper blade in the di- worthy should be stored in the vehicle at all
rection of the arrow B . times. Spare bulbs are available from Volkswagen
Dealerships.
– Insert a new rear window wiper blade of the
same length and design into the rear window Driving with burned out exterior lighting devices
wiper arms until it is properly fitted. may be illegal.
– Fold the rear window wiper arm carefully back
Additional bulb specifications
onto the rear window.
Some bulbs in headlights or tail lights might have
WARNING factory specifications that are different than
standard bulbs. The designation is inscribed on
Worn or dirty window wiper blades reduce visi- the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base.
bility and increase the risk of accidents and se-
vere injuries. LED technology in the vehicle
● Replace window wiper blades whenever they The components that use LED (Light Emitting Di-
are damaged or worn, and no longer appro- ode) have long service life and do not have to be
priately perform their function. changed frequently.
Volkswagen recommends that the replacement
NOTICE
of components that use LED be done at a
● Damaged or dirty window wiper blades may Volkswagen dealership.
scratch the window.
Vehicle components that use LEDs are listed be-
● Detergents containing solvents, hard sponges low:
and other sharp objects can damage the
graphite coating during cleaning. – Headlights (may not be available depending
on the vehicle version).
25A.5L1.POL.20

● Do not use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint

thinner or similar products to clean the win- – Side turn indicator lamp: located in the exteri-
dows. or mirrors (depending on the version of the ve-

hicle this may not be available) 

If and when 197

– Brake light bulb: located externally on the boot NOTICE
lid, above the rear window.
Volkswagen recommends special attention to
– Daytime Driving Light: Located in the head-
some plastic parts with clamps, which might
light (depending on the vehicle version it may
break when removing or fitting bulbs.
not be available).
– Tail lights (may not be available depending on Depending on the vehicle version, there
the vehicle version). may be two lighting reflectors in the rear
bumper that are not equipped with bulbs. How-
WARNING ever, if these elements break and need to be re-
Despite being illegal, driving with burnt bulbs placed, visit a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
may cause accidents. Burnt bulbs must be re- workshop.
placed as soon as possible. On cold and humid days the headlight len-
● Insufficient lighting of roads, such as streets, ses may become temporarily fogged be-
avenues and squares, results in low visibility cause of the difference of temperature between
and increases the risk of accidents, since the outside and the inside.
other road users might be unable to see ve- ● With the headlight turned on, the outgoing
hicles running with burnt bulbs. light surface defogs in a short time, eventually
leaving some residues at the borders.
WARNING ● The tail lights and the turn signals may also be
Changing the bulb incorrectly can cause acci- affected.
dents and serious injuries. ● The fogging phenomenon does not interfere
● Before initiating any work in the engine with the life cycle of the lighting system of the
compartment, always read and observe the vehicle. 
warnings → page 213, Safety guidelines for
work in the engine compartment. The engine
compartment of any motor vehicle is a dan-
gerous area and may cause severe injuries. Information on changing bulbs
● Only change the defective bulb once it has  Please refer to and at the start of the
had time to cool down completely. chapter on page 198.
● Never change a bulb unless you are familiar
with the procedure. If you are uncertain of Checklist
what to do, the work should be carried out
Always carry out the following actions for chang-
by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
ing a bulb in the given order→ :
workshop.
1. Park the vehicle on a flat and solid surface at
● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
a safe distance from the flow of traffic.
unprotected fingers. When the light is
switched on, heat will cause fingerprints to 2. Apply the handbrake → page 121.
evaporate on the bulb which will causes the 3. Turn the light switch to position 0
reflector to “dim”. → page 79.
● There are sharp-edged parts in the headlight 4. Shift the turn signal lever to the neutral posi-
housing in the engine compartment and on tion → page 79.
the tail light cluster housing. Protect your 5. Automatic gearbox: move the selector lever
hands when changing a bulb. to position P → page 111.
6. Stop the engine and remove the key from the
NOTICE
ignition cylinder → page 104.
Damage to the electrical system can be caused if
7. Manual gearbox: select the gear → page 110.
the rubber covers of the headlight housing are
not properly mounted – especially due to water 8. Switch off the orientation lighting
entering the system. → page 79.
9. Let the defective bulb cool down.
10. Check to see if a fuse has blown → page 204. 

198 Owner's Manual

 Checklist (Continued)
Removing and installing the
11. Change the faulty bulb as instructed→ ; use headlights
a flashlight if necessary. Always use identical
bulbs with the same designation. The desig-  Please refer to and at the start of the
nation is inscribed on the bulb, either on the chapter on page 198.
glass part or on the base.
12. Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
unprotected fingers. The heat of the bulb
would cause the fingerprint to evaporate and
condense on the reflector, compromising the
brightness of the headlight.
13. After changing the bulb, check to make sure
that the bulb is working properly. If the bulb
is not working properly, the bulb may not
have been inserted properly or may have
failed again, or the connector may have been
inserted incorrectly.
Fig. 165 In the engine compartment: fastening
14. Each time you change a bulb in the front of bolts of the headlights
the vehicle, the headlight settings should be
checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or The headlight must be removed to replace a
qualified workshop. bulb.
In the engine compartment, the headlights are
WARNING covered by other vehicle parts. Volkswagen rec-
Ignoring any of the points on this important ommends changing bulbs at a Volkswagen Deal-
safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju- ership in case of doubt.
ries.
Removing the headlight
● Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre- – Turn the lights and the ignition off.
cautions. – Open the bonnet  → page 215.
– Remove the fastening bolts → Fig. 165 1 with
NOTICE a torx wrench.
Always take care when removing or fitting lights – Move the headlight forward, in the direction
to prevent damage to the paintwork or to other indicated by the arrow → Fig. 165 until the two
vehicle parts. retainers on the underside disengage and ena-
ble the removal of the headlight.
Burnt bulbs must not be disposed of as
– Disconnect the supply connector, to complete-
common trash, since they contain residues
ly remove the headlight→ .
that are potentially harmful to the environment.
In order to help preserve the environment, Installing the headlight
Volkswagen recommends returning burnt – Carefully reinsert the headlight until the two
bulbs to a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified retainers on the underside engage and the up-
workshop, in order for them to be properly dis- per stopper → Fig. 165 2 touches the head-
posed of based on specific legal requirements re- light support 3 .
garding handling, storage and disposal.  – Reconnect the supply connector.
– Reinstall the fastening bolts 1 in the head-
light housing.
– Press the headlight against the centre upper
striker 2 and tighten the bolts 1 with the
25A.5L1.POL.20

torx screwdriver.
– Close the engine compartment and check the
alignment of the headlight. 

If and when 199

 NOTICE
● Ensure a correct positioning of the power sup-
ply connector to the headlight housing to pre-
vent damages to the electric system caused by
water penetration.
● Always take care when removing or fitting
lights to prevent damage to the paintwork or
to other vehicle parts.

The illustrations show the right-hand head-

light. The left-hand headlight is a mirror im-
age of the one shown. 

Changing headlight bulbs (variant

1)
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 198.

Fig. 167 In the engine compartment: high and low

beam turn signal cover.

Depending on the vehicle version, changing the

incandescent headlight bulbs may vary.
The headlight must be removed to replace a bulb
→ page 199.
In the engine compartment, the headlights are
covered by other vehicle parts. Volkswagen rec-
ommends changing bulbs at a Volkswagen Deal-
ership in case of doubt.

The actions should only be carried out in the

specified order.
1 Observe and follow the instructions on the
checklist → page 198.
2 Open the bonnet  → page 215.
3 Removing the headlight → page 199.
4 Dipped beam and Main beam, unplug the
lamp power connector  1 at the rear of
Fig. 166 In the engine compartment: headlight. 1 the lighthouse.
Daytime running light and position light and 2 Di- Daytime running light and Position light, un-
rection indicator. plug the lamp power connector  2 at the
rear of the lighthouse.
Turn signal, unplug the lamp power connec-
tor  3 at the rear of the lighthouse. 

200 Owner's Manual

 5 Dipped beam and Main beam, remove the 11 Dipped beam and main beam, ensure the
rubber cover  1 . bulb is correctly secured in the set.
Daytime running light and Position light, Daytime running light and Position light,
turn the socket in the direction of the arrow make sure that the socket is correctly fixed in
 1 and remove socket. the assembly.
Turn signal, turn the socket in the direction Turn signal, make sure that the socket is cor-
of the arrow  2 and remove socket. rectly fixed in the assembly.
6 Dipped beam and Main beam, press the 12 Dipped beam and Main beam, place the rub-
spring downwards in the direction of the ar- ber cover, paying attention to its perfect fit.
row  1 and move to the side in the direc- 13 Installing the headlight → page 199.
tion of the arrow  2 and unhook it from
14 Dipped beam and main beam, connect the
the support.
lamp power supply connector, pressing it on
7 Dipped beam and main beam, remove the till the stopper.
defective bulb from its holder.
Daytime running light and Position light, fit
Daytime running light and Position light, the power connector into the lamp socket,
turn the burnt out bulb counterclockwise as pressing it as far as the stop.
far as the stop  and remove the bulb from
Turn signal, insert the power connector into
the socket.
the lamp socket, pressing it as far as the
Turn signal, turn the burnt out bulb counter- stop.
clockwise as far as the stop  and remove
15 Close the bonnet → page 215.
the bulb from the socket.
16 Dipped beam and main beam, after installing
8 Dipped beam and Main beam, replace the
the new bulb, adjust the beam.
burnt-out halogen lamp with a new halogen
lamp of the same model. The illustrations show the right-hand head-
Daytime running light and Position light, re- light from the rear. The left-hand headlight
place the burnt-out incandescent bulb with a is a mirror image of the one shown. 
new incandescent bulb of the same model.
Turn signal,replace the burnt-out incandes-
cent bulb with a new incandescent bulb of
the same model.
9 Dipped beam and Main beam, position the
new lamp in the housing, observing the cor-
rect positioning.
Daytime running light and Position light, fit
the new bulb in the socket, observing the
correct positioning, turn the bulb clockwise
as far as the stop.
Turn signal, fit the new bulb in the socket,
observing the correct positioning, turn the
bulb clockwise as far as the stop.
10 Dipped beam and Main beam, press the lock-
ing spring and fit it into the holder to fix the
lamp.
Daytime running light and Position light, fit
the bulb socket into the headlight and turn
clockwise as far as the stop.
Turn signal, fit the bulb holder into the head-
25A.5L1.POL.20

light and turn clockwise until the stop.

If and when 201

Changing bulbs in the rear
bodywork lights
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 198.

Fig. 169 Tail light: remove the bulbs

The actions should only be carried out in the

specified order.
1 Observe and follow the instructions on the
checklist → page 198.
Fig. 168 A In the luggage compartment remove 2 Open the boot lid → page 69.
the cover and remove the wingbolt 1 (magnifying
3 To open the light cover, rotate the retainer
glass) B Rear light: remove the bulb holder.
→ Fig. 168 A (arrow).
4 Open the cover sideways together with the
retainer.
5 Release the butterfly bolt 1 (magnifying
glass) and remove it while holding the tail
light at the same time.
6 Carefully pull the tail light out to remove it
from the bodywork → .
7 Disengage the power connector by pressing
the latch and pull it in the direction of the ar-
row to completely remove the flashlight.
8 Place the rear light in a smooth and even sur-
face.
9 To unlock the bulb holder, press each locking
pawl → Fig. 169 B in the direction indicated
by the arrows.
10 Carefully remove the bulb holder. 

202 Owner's Manual

 11 To remove burnt-out light bulbs: → Fig. 169 Changing bulbs in the number plate
1 press the bulb against the housing and
turn counterclockwise. 2 pull the bulb light
against the housing.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
12 Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb chapter on page 198.
of the same type.
13 Insert new bulbs into the respective bulb
housing: → Fig. 169 A press the bulb and
turn clockwise until reaching the stop. B
press the bulb towards the housing as far as
the stop.
14 Ensure that the bulbs are properly secured in
the bulb holder.
15 Insert the rear light bulb support. The locking
pawls → Fig. 169 must audibly engage.
16 Fit the bulb connector.
17 Carefully fit the rear light in the bodywork
housing.
18 Hold the tail light in the installation position
Fig. 170 On the rear bumper: number plate light.
with one hand and install the butterfly bolt
with the other hand → Fig. 168 1 .
19 Reposition the cover of the lamp in its posi-
tion and rotate the lock to close.
20 Close the boot lid → page 69.

NOTICE
● Always take care when removing or fitting rear
lights into the bodywork, in order to prevent
damage to the paintwork or to other vehicle
parts.
● Volkswagen recommends special attention to
some plastic parts with clamps, which might
break when removing or fitting bulbs. 
Fig. 171 Number plate light: remove the bulb sock-
et.

A screwdriver may be used to remove the num-

ber plate light → .

The actions should only be carried out in the

specified order.
1 Observe and follow the instructions on the
checklist → page 198.
2 Using a screwdriver, press the lock
→ Fig. 170 (arrow) to remove the assembly.
3 Rotate the socket counter-clockwise
→ Fig. 171 A and remove the socket along
with the bulb B .
25A.5L1.POL.20

4 Pull the defective bulb from the socket to re-

move it. 

If and when 203

5 Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb Fuses
of the same type.
6 Carefully insert the new bulb into the socket.
7 Position the bulb support on the number  Introduction
plate light and press in the contrary direction
of the one indicated by the arrow A up to
the stopper. Several electrical consumers could share a single
fuse. Conversely, a single consumer could have
8 Ensure that the socket is properly secured. more than one fuse.
9 Position the number plate light set carefully
Therefore, fuses should only be replaced when
into the opening in the bumper. Attention to
the cause of a fault has been rectified. If a newly
the correct installation direction of the num-
inserted fuse blows after a short time, the elec-
ber plate light.
trical system must be checked by a Volkswagen
10 Press the number plate light in the bumper Dealership.
until it is audibly secured in place.
11 Ensure that the number plate light set is WARNING
properly secured. Before initiating any work in the engine com-
partment, always read and observe the warning
NOTICE notes → page 213. The engine compartment of
Always take care when removing or fitting the any motor vehicle is a dangerous area and may
number plate bulb in the rear bumper, in order to cause severe injuries.
prevent damage to the paintwork or to other ve-
hicle parts.  WARNING
High voltages in the electrical system can cause
electric shocks, severe burns and death!
Troubleshooting ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-
tion system.
 Please refer to and at the start of the ● Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical
chapter on page 198. system.

Depending on the vehicle version, the illumina- WARNING

tion indicator lamp may not be available. Using unsuitable or repaired fuses and bridging
an electrical circuit without fuses can cause
Lighting
fires and severe injuries.
● Never fit fuses that have a higher fuse pro-
Central indicator lamp  tection limit. Fuses must always be replaced
 OR  plus additional text messaged Driv-
ing
with a new fuse which has the same amp
rating (same colour and imprint) and size.
illumination partially or totally out of or-
der. ● Never repair a fuse.
● Never use a metal strip, paper clip or similar
Check the vehicle lights and replace the respec- items to replace a fuse.
tive bulb when burned out → page 197. Case all
bulbs are in order or if there is a damage seek
NOTICE
your Volkswagen Dealership. 
● In order to avoid damage to the electrical sys-
tem in the vehicle, the ignition, the lights and
all electrical consumers must be switched off
and the vehicle key removed from the ignition
cylinder before changing a fuse.
● You can damage another position in the elec-
trical system by using a fuse with a higher amp
rating. 

204 Owner's Manual

 ● Fuse boxes must be protected from dirt and Fuse box in the dashboard
moisture when opened. Dirt and moisture in
the fuse boxes can damage the electrical sys-  Please refer to and at the start of the
tem. chapter on page 204.
A single consumer may have more than one
fuse.
Several consumers may share a single fuse.


Fuses in the dash panel

 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 204.

Fig. 173 On the dash panel: fuses arrangement.

Fig. 172 On the driver's side of the dashboard: fuse
box cover. Some fuses may be specific to certain versions.
Locations with respective functions for equip-
Fuses must always be replaced with a new fuse ment that may be available in your vehicle are
which has the same amp rating (same colour and provided below:
imprint) and size.
F1 Free
Opening the fuse box in the dash panel F2 USB sockets
– Hold the fuse box cover → Fig. 172 and pull F3 Free
forward. F4 Lights switch (BCM Entry)
– To install, put the cover on the fuse box of the F5 Free
dash panel and press until it audibly engages. F6 Central locking
F7 Electric operation of the right front win-
NOTICE dow (Polo Track)
● Remove the covers for the fuse boxes carefully F8 Interior ventilation (Climatronic)
and install them again properly so as to avoid
F9 Electric left front window (Polo Track)
damage to the vehicle.
F10 Free
● Fuse boxes must be protected from dirt and
F11 Free
moisture when opened. Dirt and moisture in
the fuse boxes can damage the electrical sys- F12 Free 
25A.5L1.POL.20

tem. 

If and when 205

F13 Diagnostic socket/ rain and brightness sen- F40 Light switch (BCM Standard) / Reverse gear
sor/ turn signals lever and window wiping light switch / Diagnostic socket / Interior
lever (BCM Standard)/ light switch (BCM mirror / Rear view camera / Headlight
Standard) range control
F14 Wiper lever / Wiper system / Window F41 Free
washing system F42 Clutch sensor/ Relay 1 of pull-away assist
F15 Instrument cluster system/ Relay 2 of pull-away assist sys-
F16 Vehicle exterior lighting - part 1 (BCM tem/ Air conditioner pressure switch
Standard) F43 Rear window wiper
or Turn signals and brake lights - part 1 (BCM F44 Airbag system
Standard) F45 Free
F17 Electric window regulators - front right/ F46 Free
Electric window regulators - rear right/ F47 License plate lighting
Electric right hand side exterior mirror/ Ex-
F48 Keyless Access control unit / Right front
terior mirror tilt down
position light (Polo Track)
F18 Windscreen wiper
F49 Left dipped beam (BCM Entry)
F19 Radio
F50 Right dipped beam (BCM Entry)
F20 Rear window heating
F51 Left front position light (Polo Track)
F21 Ignition lock/ starter motor solenoid (igni-
F52 Left headlamp assembly with LED technol-
tion lock start)
ogy / Right side rear position light (Polo
F22 Daytime running lights (BCM Entry) Track)
F23 Rear view camera system F53 Automatic gearbox selector lever / Ignition
F24 USB Charging Socket / USB Mobile Data / key removal lock (only for vehicles with au-
Cordless Phone Charger tomatic gearbox and no Keyless Access)
F25 Multifunction steering wheel F54 Right headlamp assembly with LED tech-
F26 Diagnostic interface for data bus nology Rear position light left side (Polo
F27 Main beam right side (BCM Entry) / main Track)
beam left side (BCM Entry) F55 12 V socket
F28 Ultrasound sensor (alarm) F56 Interior ventilation
F29 Free F57 Free
F30 Free F58 Windscreen and rear window washers
F31 Climatronic control unit F59 Free
or Air conditioner control unit F60 Free
F32 Ignition lock F61 Free 
F33 Electric window regulators - front left/
Electric window regulators - rear left/
Electric left hand side electric exterior mir-
ror
F34 Headlight flasher (BCM Entry)
F35 Vehicle exterior lighting - part 2 (BCM
Standard)
or Turn signals and brake lights - part 2 (BCM
Standard)
F36 Horn
F37 Free
F38 Electronic control unit / Interior lighting
(BCM Entry)
or Electronic control unit / Interior lighting
(BCM Standard)
F39 Parking sensor / Radar control unit

206 Owner's Manual

 Fuses in the engine compartment Fuse box in the engine
compartment
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 204.  Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 204.

Fig. 174 In the engine compartment: fuse box cov-

er 1 with plastic claw 2 .

Opening the fuse box in the engine

compartment
– Open the bonnet  → page 215.
– Press the retainers in the direction of the ar-
row → Fig. 174 1 to release the fuse box cov-
er.
– Remove the cover from the top.
– To install, place the cover on the fuse box and
press down until the cover audibly locks on Fig. 175 In the engine compartment: fuse arrange-
both sides. ment.

On the inside of the engine compartment fuse Some fuses may be specific to certain versions.
box cover there may be a pair of plastic tweezers
Locations with respective functions for equip-
→ Fig. 174 2 to extract the fuses.
ment that may be available in your vehicle are
provided below:
NOTICE
● Remove the covers for the fuse boxes carefully F1 Engine control unit
and install them again properly so as to avoid F2 Fuel metering valve (TSI engine) / Water
damage to the vehicle. pump (TSI engine)
● Fuse boxes must be protected from dirt and F3 Lambda probe before catalytic converter /
moisture when opened. Dirt and moisture in lambda probe after catalytic converter
the fuse boxes can damage the electrical sys- F4 Fuel pump
tem.  F5 Radiator fan – electronics (TSI engine) / Oil
pressure control valve (TSI engine) / Varia-
ble control shaft - intake / Variable control
shaft - exhaust (TSI engine) / Activated
charcoal filter valve / Ethanol sensor (TSI
engine)
25A.5L1.POL.20

F6 Heated start relay / Heated start control

unit/ Ignition coils
F7 Vacuum pump 

If and when 207

F8 Fuel pump relay/ Fuel injectors Fuses in the engine compartment must only be
F9 Brake pedal sensor replaced by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen
F10 Electronic control unit recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for
this purpose.
F11 Free
F12 Air conditioning compressor Locations with respective functions and amp rat-
F13 Free ing for equipment that may be available in your
vehicle are provided below:
F14 Injection system main relay / Engine con-
trol unit/ ESC control unit 1 350 A, alternator.
F15 Automatic gearbox control unit 2 80 A, free.
F16 Free 3 150 A, engine compartment fuse box pow-
F17 Pull-away assist er supply.
F18 Start assist(starter) 4 80 A,power supply 2 of the dash panel fuse
F19 Free box.
F20 ESC control unit 5 125 A,power supply 1 of the dash panel
fuse box.
F21 ESC control unit
6 80 A, power steering. 
F22 Free
F23 Free
F24 Free
F25 Radiator fan - 1nd speed Changing a blown fuse
F26 Radiator fan (TSI engine)
 Please refer to and at the start of the
F27 Radiator fan - 2nd speed chapter on page 204.
F28 Free 

Fuse box in the engine

compartment on the battery
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 204.

Fig. 177 Blown fuse:  flat fuse,  blocking fuse. 

Fig. 176 In the engine compartment on top of the

battery: fuse arrangement.

Fuses are located in the engine compartment,

above the vehicle battery → in Introduction on
page 204.

208 Owner's Manual

 Detecting a blown fuse
– Shine a flashlight onto the fuse. This will help
you to spot the blown fuse more easily.
– A blown blade fuse (ATO®, MINI®) is detected
from above or from the side through its trans-
parent body by the melted metal strip
→ Fig. 177 .
– A blown cartridge fuse (JCASE®) is detected
from above by the melted metal strip visible
through the transparent housing → Fig. 177 .

Changing a fuse
– If applicable, take the plastic tweezers
Fig. 178 Removing or installing the fuse with the → Fig. 178 1 out of the fuse box cover.
plastic claw: : flat fuse,  blocking fuse. – According to the fuse type, apply the proper
claw of the plastic tweezers → Fig. 178  1
Fuse versions
or → Fig. 178  1 to the fuse sides.
– Flat standard blade fuse (ATO®).
– Pull out the blown fuse.
– Small flat blade fuse (MINI®).
– If the fuse has blown, replace it with a new
– Cartridge fuse (JCASE®). fuse of the same amp rating (same colour and
same imprint) and same size → .
Fuse colour coding
– After having replaced the fuse place the plastic
Fuses (ATO - MINI) claw pliers, if existing, back onto the cover.
Colour Nominal current in amperes – Install the fuse box cover.
black 1 A
light brown 5 A NOTICE
brown 7.5 A You can damage another position in the electrical
red 10 A system by using a fuse with a higher amp rating. 
blue 15 A
yellow 20 A
white or clear 25 A
green 30 A Jump starting
orange 40 A

Fuses (JCASE)  Introduction

Colour Nominal current in amperes
blue 20 A If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
white or clear 25 A charged 12 V vehicle battery, it is possible to use
pink 30 A another 12V battery from another vehicle to
green 40 A jump start the engine.
red 50 A The discharged vehicle battery must be properly
yellow 60 A connected to the vehicle's electrical system.
The jump leads must have sufficient length to
Preparations
ensure proper distance between the vehicles.
– Switch off the ignition, the lights, and all elec-
trical consumers. WARNING
– Open the respective fuse box → page 205.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Using the jump leads incorrectly or completing

the jump start procedure incorrectly can cause
the battery to explode, which can lead to 

If and when 209

severe injuries. Please note the following points Jump starting point (grounding
in order to reduce the risk of the battery ex-
point)
ploding:
● All work on the vehicle battery and the elec-  Please refer to and at the start of the
trical system can cause serious chemical chapter on page 209.
burns, fire and electric shocks. Always read
the warnings and safety information before
carrying out any kind of work on the vehicle
battery → page 226, Vehicle battery.
● The assistance providing vehicle's battery
must be of the same voltage as the dis-
charged vehicle battery (12-volt) and be ap-
proximately of the same capacity (see im-
print on battery).
● Never charge a frozen or defrosted vehicle
battery. A discharged vehicle battery can
even freeze at temperatures of around 0° C
(+32° F).
● The battery should be replaced if it has fro-
zen or defrosted. Fig. 179 On the engine compartment: jump starting
● A highly explosive mixture of gases is given point (grounding point).
off when jump starting the vehicle battery.
Always keep fire, sparks, naked flames and lit The jump starting point is available for vehicle
cigarettes away from the vehicle battery. with Start-Stop System.
Never use a mobile telephone when the There is a jump starting point in the engine com-
jump leads are being connected or discon- partment – located on the interior wheel housing
nected. on the engine side, to connect the black
● Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated → Fig. 179 jump lead.
space as the battery emits a highly explosive The jump starting point is not designed to jump
mixture of gases when the vehicle is being start other vehicles.
jump started.
Only jump start the vehicle (grounding point)
● Position the jump leads so that they never through this point. 
come into contact with any moving parts in
the engine compartment.
● Never confuse the negative and positive ter-
minals or connect the jump leads incorrectly.
● Observe the jump lead manufacturer's in-
structions.

NOTICE
Please note the following in order to avoid con-
siderable damage to the vehicle electrical sys-
tem:
● short circuit can be caused if the jump leads
are connected incorrectly.
● The vehicles must not touch each other, other-
wise electricity could flow as soon as the posi-
tive terminals are connected. 

210 Owner's Manual

 How to start the engine using jump – Connect one end of the red jump lead to the
positive terminal (+) of the vehicle with the
leads discharged battery → Fig. 180 A → .
 Please refer to and at the start of the – Connect the other end of the red jumper lead
chapter on page 209. to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting
battery B .
– Connect one end of the black jumper lead to
the negative terminal of the assistance supply-
ing battery B .
– Connect the other end of the black jump lead
X to the vehicle with the discharged battery
at the jump starting point (grounding point) or
to a metal part firmly bolted to the cylinder
block – but not near the battery A → .
– Position the leads in such a way that they can-
not come into contact with any moving parts
in the engine compartment.

Starting the engine

Fig. 180 Jump lead attachment diagram: dis- – Start the engine of the vehicle which is provid-
charged vehicle battery A and battery in the vehicle ing assistance and let it run at idle.
providing assistance B . – Start the engine of the car with the discharged
vehicle battery and wait two to three minutes
Key for→ Fig. 180: until the engine is “running smoothly”.
A Vehicle with discharged vehicle battery
Removing the jump leads
which is getting jump starting assistance.
– Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch
B Vehicle with the current supplying battery off the dipped beam headlights if they are
assisting jump starting. switched on.
X Proper grounding point: jump starting point – Turn the air conditioner and the rear window
(grounding point) or a solid metal part firmly defroster heating of the vehicle with the flat
bolted to the cylinder block. battery on to reduce voltage peaks when dis-
The discharged vehicle battery must be properly connecting the jumper leads.
connected to the vehicle's electrical system. – Disconnect the jumper cable with the now
started engine running exactly in the connec-
The vehicles must not touch each other. Other-
tion reverse sequence 4 – 3 – 2 – 1.
wise electricity could flow as soon as the positive
terminals are connected. – Close the positive battery terminal cover.
Make sure the battery clamps have good metal- WARNING
to-metal contact with the battery terminals.
Jump starting the vehicle incorrectly can cause
If the engine does not start immediately, switch the battery to explode, which can lead to seri-
off the starter after about 10 seconds and try ous injuries. Please note the following points in
again after about one minute. order to reduce the risk of the battery explod-
ing:
Attaching the jump leads
● All work on the vehicle battery and the elec-
Connect the jumper cable strictly following the
trical system can cause serious chemical
sequence 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 → Fig. 180.
burns, fire and electric shocks. Always read
– Switch off the ignition in both vehicles the warnings and safety information before
25A.5L1.POL.20

→ page 104. carrying out any kind of work on the vehicle

– Open the positive terminal cover. battery → page 226, Vehicle battery. 

If and when 211

● Make sure there is no one inside the vehicle Towing
when connecting battery jump leads. In case
of electrical failure, airbags may be acciden- Whenever it is necessary to tow your vehicle, use
tally engaged and cause severe or even fatal a specialized towing service, using tow trucks or
injuries to vehicle occupants. platforms.
● Always wear suitable eye protection and When using tow trucks, the vehicle must be se-
never lean over the vehicle battery. curely fastened by the front wheels. Ensure that
● Attach the connector cables in the correct no gears are selected and the handbrake lever is
order – the positive cable first, followed by not applied.
the negative.
● Never connect the negative cable to parts of NOTICE
the fuel system or to the brake hose/pipe. Always comply with applicable traffic laws re-
● Non-insulated parts of the battery clamps garding towing. 
must not be allowed to touch. Additionally,
the jump lead attached to the positive vehi-
cle battery terminal must not touch metal
parts of the vehicle.
● Check the window on the vehicle battery us-
ing a flashlight if necessary If the display is
light yellow or colourless, do not jump start
the vehicle. Seek expert assistance.
● Avoid electrostatic discharge in the vicinity
of the vehicle battery. The gas emitted from
the vehicle battery could be ignited by
sparks.
● Never use jump starting to start the engine if
the vehicle battery is damaged, frozen or has
defrosted.

NOTICE
Incorrectly attached jump leads could result in
substantial damages to the vehicle's electrical
system. 

Tow starting and towing

 Introduction

For technical reasons, vehicles must not be tow

started. Use jump leads to start the engine in-
stead → page 209.
For technical reasons, vehicles with a discharged
battery must not be tow started. Jump start the
engine instead → page 209. 

212 Owner's Manual

 Checking and refuelling what to do, the work should be carried out
by a Volkswagen Dealership. Serious injuries
In the engine compartment can result from work that has not been car-
ried out properly.
● Never open the cover if you see steam or
Safety guidelines for work in the coolant escaping from the engine compart-
engine compartment ment. Hot steam or coolant can cause severe
burns. Always wait until you can no longer
Always park the vehicle on a levelled and stable notice steam or coolant coming from the en-
surface before carrying out any work in the en- gine compartment.
gine compartment. ● Always let the engine cool down before
The engine compartment of a motor vehicle is a opening the engine compartment cover.
hazardous area. Never carry out any work on the ● Hot parts of the engine or exhaust system
engine or in the engine compartment if you are may burn the skin.
not familiar with the necessary procedures and ● Before opening the engine compartment
the general safety requirements, as well as with- cover once it has cooled down:
out the unsuitable tools, fluids and resources – Apply the handbrake and move the selec-
available → . If necessary, such work must be tor lever to position P or the manual gear
carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership. Serious lever to the neutral position.
injuries can be caused if work is carried out incor-
– Turn the ignition off and remove the vehi-
rectly.
cle key from the ignition lock.
WARNING – Always keep children away from the en-
gine compartment and never leave the ve-
Unintentional vehicle movements during serv- hicle unattended.
ice work can cause serious injury.
● The engine cooling system is under pressure
● Never work underneath a vehicle if it is not when the engine is hot. Never open the cap
secured against rolling away. If you are of the coolant expansion tank when the en-
working underneath the vehicle while the gine is hot. Coolant may spray out and cause
wheels are on the ground, the vehicle must severe burns and injuries.
be on a level, the wheels must be blocked
– After cooling, turn the cap slowly and very
and the vehicle key must be removed from
carefully anticlockwise while exerting
the ignition cylinder.
some downwards pressure on the cap.
● If you have to work underneath the vehicle, – Always protect the face, hands and arms
use suitable stands to provide extra support. from hot coolant or steam with a large,
The vehicle jack is not sufficient for this task thick cloth.
and can fail, which can lead to serious inju-
ries. ● When refilling, do not spill any service fluids
on engine components or on the exhaust
● The Start-Stop system must be manually dis- system. Spilt service fluids may start fires.
abled.
WARNING
WARNING
The high voltage in the electrical system can
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle cause electric shocks, burns, serious injuries
is a dangerous area and may cause severe inju- and death!
ries!
● Never short circuit the electric system. The
● The utmost care and attention must be paid vehicle battery could explode.
when carrying out any work and you must
follow the general safety rules. Never take ● Please note the following guidelines to help
any risks. reduce the risk of an electric shock and seri-
ous injuries while the engine is running or
25A.5L1.POL.20

● Never do any work on the engine or in the being started:

engine compartment unless you know exact-
– Never touch the electrical wiring of the ig-
ly how to carry it out. If you are uncertain of
nition system. 

Checking and refuelling 213

 – Never touch electrical wiring. ● Never spill fluids onto the engine. They could
ignite on hot engine components and cause
WARNING injuries.
There are rotating components in the engine ● Please note the following when carrying out
compartment that can cause serious injury. any work on the fuel system or the electrical
system:
● Never touch the radiator area or fan directly.
Touching the rotary blades may result in se- – Always disconnect the vehicle battery. En-
vere injuries. The fan is temperature-control- sure that the vehicle is unlocked before
led and can start automatically, even if the the battery is disconnected. Otherwise,
engine has been switched off and the vehicle the alarm system will be activated.
key has been removed from the ignition cyl- – Never work in the direct proximity of heat-
inder. ing systems, water heaters or any other
● If any work has to be performed when the open flames.
engine is started or with the engine running,
there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety NOTICE
risk from the rotating parts, such as the Poly- When refilling or changing operating fluids
V or drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., please ensure that the fluids are in the correct
and from the high-voltage ignition system. container. Incorrect operating fluids can cause
Always be extremely cautious. serious functional problems and engine dam-
– Always ensure that no body parts, jewel- ages!
lery, ties, loose items of clothing or long
hair can be caught up in rotating engine Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-
components. Before starting work, remove ronment. Regularly check the ground un-
any jewellery and ties, tie up long hair and derneath your vehicle. If there are spots of oil or
pull clothes in tightly to avoid them get- other fluids on the ground, the vehicle must be
ting caught in the engine compartment. inspected by a Volkswagen Dealership. 
– Always depress the accelerator carefully
and never thoughtlessly. The vehicle can
move even while the handbrake is applied. Preparing the vehicle for working in
● Always make sure you have not left any ob- the engine compartment
jects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in
the engine compartment. Any forgotten Checklist
items can cause malfunctions, engine dam-
The following steps should always be carried out
age and fires.
in the specified order before working in the en-
gine compartment→ :
WARNING
 Park the vehicle on a levelled and stable sur-
Additional insulations such as covering the en- face.
gine compartment, may damage the running of
the engine, cause fire and severe injuries.
 Depress and hold the brake pedal until the
engine has stopped.
● Never cover the engine with covers or other
isolations.
 Apply the handbrake → page 121.
 Position the gear shift lever in the neutral
WARNING position → page 110 or move the selector
lever to position P → page 111.
Operating fluids and some materials in the en-
gine compartment are highly flammable and  Stop the engine and remove the key from the
may cause fires and severe injuries! ignition lock.
● Never smoke around the engine compart-  Allow the engine to cool down sufficiently.
ment.  Children and other people should be kept
● Never work near naked flames or sparks. well away from the engine compartment.
 Ensure that the vehicle cannot roll away un-
expectedly. 

214 Owner's Manual

 WARNING
Ignoring any of the points on this important
safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
ries.
● Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
cautions. 

Opening and closing the engine

compartment cover

Fig. 182  Bonnet stay.  Bonnet secured with the

bonnet stay.

Opening the engine compartment cover

– Ensure that the windscreen wiper arms are
positioned on the windscreen before opening
the bonnet → .
– Open the driver door and pull the release lever
in the direction indicated by the arrow
→ Fig. 181  1 . The bonnet is released from
its lock by a spring mechanism → .
Fig. 181  Bonnet release lever on the driver side
– To fully open the bonnet raise it slightly and at
footwell.  Bonnet release lever on the inner side of
the bonnet.
the same time press the release lever on the
inner side of the bonnet in the direction indi-
cated by the arrow → Fig. 181  2 .
– Take the bonnet stay out of the holder as indi-
cated by the arrow → Fig. 182  and insert it
into the opening in the bonnet → Fig. 182 .

Closing the engine compartment cover

– Lift the bonnet slightly → .
– Take the bonnet stay out of the opening in the
bonnet → Fig. 182  and place it back into its
resting position holder on the lock carrier
→ Fig. 182 .
– Release the bonnet at approximately 20 cm
25A.5L1.POL.20

from the lock – do not press down!

If the bonnet is not closed, open it again and
close it properly. 

Checking and refuelling 215

The engine compartment cover sits flush with Display indication
the body parts around it when it is closed proper-
ly.

WARNING
When the open bonnet supported by the bon-
net stay, do not push or apply additional force
to close the bonnet, since this could cause bon-
net damages and severe injuries.

WARNING
If the engine compartment cover is not closed
properly, it can open suddenly while you are
driving and completely obscure your view of
the road. This could lead to accidents and se-
vere injuries. Fig. 183 On the instrument cluster display: incor-
● After closing the engine compartment cover, rectly closed or open bonnet (schematic representa-
always check that it is properly secured. The tion).
engine compartment cover must be flush
with the surrounding body panels. According to the version of the vehicle the repre-
sentation of the bonnet on the display may not
● If you notice that the bonnet is not closed
be available.
properly while the vehicle is in motion, stop
the vehicle as soon as possible and close the A symbolic representation → Fig. 183 on the in-
bonnet. strument cluster display indicates that the bon-
● Open or close the engine compartment cover net is open or is not correctly closed.
only when you are sure that nobody is in its  Stop driving! if necessary lift and close the
path. bonnet again.
The representation is also visible with the igni-
NOTICE tion turned off and is deleted a few minutes after
The bonnet should only be opened when the the vehicle is locked with closed doors.
wiper arms are flush to the windows in order to
avoid damage to the bonnet and window wiper WARNING
arms.  Not heeding the warning indications may cause
stoppages of the vehicle in the traffic, acci-
dents and severe injuries.
● Never ignore lit warning lamps.
● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and safe
to do so.

According to the instrument cluster model,

the display of the icons may vary. 

Service fluids and

consumables
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. toothed
belts, tyres, coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
vehicle batteries, are being constantly perfec-
tioned. For this reason, service fluids and con-
sumables should be replaced at a Volkswagen 

216 Owner's Manual

 Dealership or qualified workshop. Volkswagen Washer fluid
Dealerships are always updated about innova-
tions.

WARNING
Unsuitable service fluids and consumables, and
the incorrect use of these fluids and consuma-
bles, can cause accidents, serious injuries, burns
or poisoning.
● Service fluids must be kept in their original
sealed container.
● Never store service fluids in empty food con-
tainers, bottles or any other non-original
containers as people finding these containers
could drink them.
● Keep children away from all service fluids Fig. 184 On the engine compartment: window
and consumables. washer fluid reservoir cap.
● Always read and follow the information and
The window washer fluid level should be checked
warnings on the service fluid packaging.
regularly and topped up as necessary.
● When using products that give off harmful
fumes, always work outdoors or in a well – Open the bonnet  → page 213.
ventilated area. – The washer fluid reservoir is identified by
● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail the  symbol on its cap → Fig. 184.
varnish remover or other volatile fluids to – Check whether there is enough window wash-
wash, clean or care for your vehicle. These er fluid in the reservoir.
substances are poisonous and highly flam- – To top up, mix clean water with a washer fluid
mable. They could cause fires and explo- recommended by Volkswagen → . Observe
sions! the dilution instructions on the packaging.
– At low temperatures, add a special antifreeze
NOTICE agent so that the fluid cannot freeze → .
● Only use suitable service fluids for refilling.
Check the window washer water reservoir ca-
Never use the service fluids not recommended.
pacity in → page 273.
Failure to observe this warning can result in
serious faults and engine damages!
WARNING
● Optional equipment and other accessories in
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect Never mix antifreeze or other unsuitable addi-
of the coolant. The engine may overheat at tives into the window washer fluid. An oily film
high ambient temperatures and high engine may otherwise be left on the screen, compro-
loads! mising visibility.
● Use clean water with a washer fluid recom-
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi- mended by Volkswagen.
ronment. Regularly check the ground un- ● Suitable antifreeze agents may be added to
derneath your vehicle. If there are spots of oil or the window washer fluid, if necessary.
other fluids on the ground, the vehicle must be
inspected by a Volkswagen Dealership. 
NOTICE
● Never mix other cleaning agents with the
cleaning agents recommended by Volkswagen.
This may cause the components to coagulate
25A.5L1.POL.20

and, as a result, clog the window wiper noz-

zles. 

Checking and refuelling 217

● Never mix up service fluids when refilling! Fail- Engine oil specification
ure to observe this warning can result in seri-
ous faults and engine damages!   Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 218.

VW 508 88 is the standard engine oil in your

Engine oil Volkswagen. This standard must be described on
the oil packaging. Engine oils approved by
Volkswagen are available at Volkswagen Dealer-
 Introduction ships.
When refuelling, engine oils approved by
Volkswagen according to the VW 508 88 stand-
WARNING ard can be mixed with each other.
Incorrect handling of engine oil can cause se- If, in an emergency, no approved VW 508 88
vere burns and injuries. standard engine oil is available, you may tempo-
● Always wear eye protection when handling rarily use an engine oil that meets the following
engine oil. requirements: ACEA A3/B4 specification with the
following viscosity grades: SAE 0W 30, SAE 0W
● Engine oil is toxic and must be stored out of
40, SAE 5W 30, SAE 5W 40, SAE 10W 30 or SAE
the reach of children.
10W 40. However, we recommend seeking a
● Engine oil must be kept in the closed original Volkswagen Dealership as soon as possible for
container. This also applies to used oil before the oil change with factory approved engine oil.
proper disposal.
Engine oil specifications are available in the
● Never use empty food containers, bottles or product package.
other containers to store engine oil, since
other people may then drink the engine oil. Engine oils are constantly being developed and
improved. Volkswagen Dealerships are always
● Regular contact with engine oil can damage
updated about innovations. That is why
the skin. Skin that has been in contact with
Volkswagen recommends having engine oil
engine oil should be washed thoroughly with
changes performed at a Volkswagen Dealership.
water and soap.
● Engine oil becomes extremely hot when the NOTICE
engine is running and may scald skin severe-
● Use only expressly Volkswagen approved en-
ly. Always allow the engine to cool down.
gine oil specifications. Using other engine oils
Leaking or spilt engine oil can pollute the may cause damages to the engine!
environment. In order to prevent such ● Do not mix additional lubricating additives to
event, replace the engine oil preferably at a the engine oil. Damages caused by such addi-
Volkswagen Dealership, which is equipped with tives are not covered by the warranty.
special tools and qualification to properly dispose ● Damages to the engine caused by using oil
of used engine oil. that does not meet the VW 508 88 standard
● If engine oil or other fluid stains are found on are excluded from the warranty. 
the floor, underneath the vehicle, Volkswagen
recommends inspecting the vehicle, preferably
at a Volkswagen Dealership. 

218 Owner's Manual

 Changing the engine oil ● Never dispose of old oil in locations such as
gardens, woods, sewerage systems, on streets
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter and roads, or in rivers and waterways.
on page 218. ● In order to completely drain used oil, use an
appropriate and sufficient recipient to collect
The engine oil must be changed regularly as de- all of the engine oil; refer to → page 273, Ca-
scribed in → page 249. Ensure that such frequen- pacities. 
cy is followed, especially when the vehicle is used
in adverse conditions, which requires greater
frequency of such services.
Engine oil consumption
The engine oil and filter must be changed by
qualified workshops due to the fact that such  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
procedure requires special tools and expertise. on page 218.
This also ensures proper disposal of used oil.
Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Engine oil consumption may vary from engine to
Dealership for this purpose. engine. Due to the design of internal combustion
More information on service intervals can be engines, in order to adequately lubricate compo-
found at → page 249. nents, part of the engine oil is consumed during
normal engine operation. Therefore, engine oil
WARNING consumption may vary throughout the engine's
service life. In addition, depending on driving be-
If, in exceptional cases, you have to carry out an haviors and vehicle use conditions, oil consump-
oil change yourself, please note the following: tion may reach up to 0.5 l in 1,000 km. Engine oil
● Always wear eye protection. level must therefore be checked at regular inter-
● Always allow the engine to cool down com- vals – preferably when refuelling and before long
pletely to avoid burns. journeys.
● Keep your arms horizontal when removing When the engine is working hard, the oil level
the oil drain plug with your fingers to help must be kept within the → Fig. 185 A area – for
prevent oil from running down your arm. instance during long motorway cruising in sum-
● Use a suitable container when draining the mer or climbing mountain passes. 
used oil. It must be at least large enough to
hold the entire quantity of engine oil re-
quired for refilling.
● Never store engine oil in empty food con-
tainers, bottles or any other non-original
containers as people finding these containers
may not know that they contain engine oil.
● Engine oil is toxic and must be stored out of
the reach of children.

NOTICE
Do not mix additional lubricating additives to the
engine oil. Damages caused by such additives are
not covered by the warranty.

Volkswagen recommends replacing the oil

and filter preferably at a Volkswagen Deal-
ership, which is equipped with special tools and
qualification to properly dispose of used engine
25A.5L1.POL.20

oil.

Checking and refuelling 219

Checking the engine oil level and 4. Identify the engine oil filler cap and oil dip-
stick. The engine oil filler opening bears the
refilling engine oil  symbol on the cap → Fig. 186 and the oil
dipstick has a coloured handle. If you cannot
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter find the cap and dipstick please contact a
on page 218. Volkswagen Dealership or qualified work-
shop.
5. Pull the dipstick out of the guide tube and
wipe it off with a clean cloth → .
6. Insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube
again as far as it will go. If the oil dipstick has
a marking, it must be adjusted to the corre-
sponding groove on the upper edge of the
guide tube upon insertion.
7. Pull the dipstick out again and read the en-
gine oil level on the dipstick → Fig. 185 as
follows:
A : do not refill oil → . Proceed to step 16.
B : proper oil level. Refill with oil (approxi-
Fig. 185 Oil dipstick with markings. mately 0.5 l). Proceed to step 8 or 16.
C : recommended oil must be refilled until
level reaches region B . Proceed to step 8.
8. After reading the oil level, push the oil dip-
stick back into the guide tube as far as it will
go.
9. Unscrew the engine oil filler opening cap
→ Fig. 186.
10. Only refill with engine oils approved by
Volkswagen gradually, in small quantities (up
to 0.5 l).
11. To avoid overfilling, wait for approximately
one minute after each pour to allow the en-
gine oil to flow into the oil sump up to the
Fig. 186 On the engine compartment: engine oil marking on the engine oil dipstick.
opening lid. 12. Read the engine oil level from the dipstick
again before refilling with a further small
Key for→ Fig. 185: quantity of engine oil. Never overfill engine
oil → .
A No filling up required.
13. After the refilling procedure, the engine oil
B Engine oil level in order.
level must be at least in the centre of area
C Engine oil level too low - fill engine oil up. → Fig. 185 B , but never above area A → .
Checklist 14. If excess oil is accidentally refilled and the
engine oil level is above the → Fig. 185 A
Carry out the steps in the specified order→ :
mark, do not start the engine. Go to a
1. With the engine at operating temperature, Volkswagen Dealership or qualified work-
park the vehicle on a level surface to ensure shop.
that the engine oil reading is correct.
15. After refilling, screw the engine oil filler cap
2. Switch off the engine and wait a few minutes back on correctly. 
for the engine oil to flow back into the sump.
3. Open the bonnet  → page 213.

220 Owner's Manual

 Checklist (Continued)
Troubleshooting
16. Correctly insert the oil dipstick into the guide
tube again as far as it will go.  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
17. Close the bonnet correctly  → page 213. on page 218.

Check the engine oil level in → page 273. Warning lamps and text messages may light up
and be displayed on the instrument cluster dis-
WARNING play. In addition, acoustic signals may be soun-
Engine oil can ignite if it comes into contact ded.
with hot engine components. This may cause
fires, serious burns and injuries. Engine oil
● If engine oil is spilt on cold engine parts it
can heat up and ignite when the engine is
Central warning lamp 
running.
● Always ensure that the engine oil filler cap is
and  On: engine oil pressure too low. 
Stop driving! Switch off the engine. Check
securely tightened after refilling, and that the engine oil and refill if necessary
the dipstick is properly inserted back into the → page 220. If the warning light remains lit
guide tube. This will prevent the engine oil and the oil level is suitable, do not drive on
from draining out on to hot engine compo- or keep the engine running. The engine
nents when the engine is running. could otherwise be damaged. Get immedi-
ate assistance from a Volkswagen dealer-
NOTICE ship or specialized company.
● Do not start the engine when the engine oil Fill up with engine oil. Engine oil level too
level is above the range→ Fig. 185 A . Go to a and  low. Switch off the engine. Check en-
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. gine oil level → page 220.
The catalytic converter and the engine could
otherwise be damaged!
● When refilling or changing operating fluids
Central warning lamp 
Check oil level. Engine oil level too low.
please ensure that the fluids are in the correct and  Switch off the engine. Check engine oil
container. Incorrect operating fluids can cause
level → page 220.
serious functional problems and engine dam-
On: Engine oil level very low. Switch off
ages. and  the engine. Check engine oil level
→ page 220.
NOTICE
Flashing: engine oil system damaged.
Use only cloths that don't shred to clean the oil and  Get immediate assistance from a
dipstick, since such shredding could damage the Volkswagen dealership or specialized com-
engine. pany.
The engine oil level must never exceed the
→ Fig. 185 A region, otherwise, the oil may
WARNING
be aspirated by the crankcase ventilation and dis- Failure to observe the warning lamps and text
charged into the atmosphere by the exhaust sys- messages could lead to your vehicle breaking
tem. Additionally, oil may be combusted inside down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
the catalytic converter, damaging it. juries.
● Never ignore warning lamps or text messag-
Leaking or spilt engine oil can pollute the
es.
environment. In order to prevent such
event, Volkswagen recommends replacing the ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and
engine oil preferably at a Volkswagen Dealership, when safe to do so. 
which is equipped with special tools and qualifi-
25A.5L1.POL.20

cation to properly dispose of used engine oil. 

Checking and refuelling 221

 The oil pressure warning lamp  is not in- Volkswagen recommends changing or refill-
dicative of the engine oil level. The engine ing the engine coolant and its additives at a
oil level must be controlled in regular intervals, Volkswagen Dealership, which has proper fluid
preferably whenever the tank is filled.  disposal procedures. Never dispose of used fluids
in locations such as gardens, woods, sewerage
systems, on streets and roads, or in rivers and
waterways. 
Engine coolant
Engine coolant specifications
 Introduction
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 222.
Never carry out any work on the engine coolant
system if you are not familiar with the requisite The engine cooling system is factory supplied
procedures, or if you do not have access to the with a mixture of distilled water and 40% G
correct tools, operating equipment and fluids 12evo (TL-VW 774 L) engine coolant additive.
→ ! In this case, all activities must be carried
out by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recom- This mixture provides the necessary antifreeze of
mends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this up to -25° C (-13° F) and protects the alloy parts
purpose. of the cooling system against corrosion. The mix-
ture also prevents scaling and raises the boiling
Serious injuries can be caused if work is carried point of the coolant.
out incorrectly.
In order to protect the coolant system, the pro-
WARNING portion of coolant additive must always be at
least 40%, even if antifreeze is not required in
Engine coolant is toxic!
warm weather and warm climates.
● Engine coolant must only be kept in sealed
original containers in a safe place. If greater antifreeze is required in very cold cli-
mates, the proportion of antifreeze additive can
● Never store engine coolant in empty food be increased. However, the percentage of cool-
containers, bottles or any other non-original ant additive must not exceed 60%, as this would
containers as people finding these containers reduce the antifreeze and the cooling effect.
may then drink the engine coolant.
When topping up the coolant, a mixture of distil-
● The engine coolant must be stored out of the
led water and at least 40% coolant additive must
reach of children.
be used for engines G 12 plus-plus or G 12evo
● Please note that the amount of correct cool- (both lilac colour) in order to obtain the optimum
ant additive used must be sufficient for the corrosion protection → .
lowest ambient temperature that you expect
the vehicle to be exposed to. The G 12evo coolant acquired in the Brazilian
market is ready for use, with proper distilled wa-
● Coolant can freeze at extremely cold outside
ter and coolant ratios.
temperatures, causing the vehicle to break
down. In this case, the internal vehicle heat- Mixing G 12evo with the engine coolants G 13
ing will also no longer function, which may (TL-VW 774 J), G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G), G
lower the body temperature of vehicle occu- 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F) or G 12 (red colour) signif-
pants with inadequate winter clothing. icantly compromises ant-corrosion properties
● Prolonged exposure to cold and loss of body and must be avoided.
heat are hazardous factors to human health. G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F) or G 12 (red) significant-
ly compromises anti-corrosion protection and
Under no circumstance may old engine must be avoided 
coolant be reused. Observe specific disposal
regulations for this product.

222 Owner's Manual

 Refer to Volkswagen Dealerships for more infor- Checking coolant level and refilling
mation on coolants approved by Volkswagen.
That is why Volkswagen recommends having coolant
engine oil changes done by a Volkswagen dealer-
ship.  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 222.
WARNING
Insufficient antifreeze in the coolant system
can cause the engine to break down.
● Ensure that the correct engine coolant addi-
tive ratio is used based on the ambient tem-
perature to which the vehicle is exposed.

NOTICE
Never mix genuine coolant additives with other
coolants that have not been approved by
Volkswagen. Mixing with non-approved coolants Fig. 187 On the engine compartment: marking on
could cause serious damage to the engine and the coolant expansion tank.
cooling system.
● Brown liquid in the coolant expansion tank in-
dicates that the engine coolant has been con-
taminated. he coolant must be changed as
soon as possible if this is the case. Failure to
observe this warning can result in serious
faults and engine damages!

Under no circumstance may old engine

coolant be reused. Observe specific disposal
regulations for this product.
Volkswagen recommends changing or refill- Fig. 188 On the engine compartment: engine cool-
ing the engine coolant and its additives at a ant expansion tank cover.
Volkswagen Dealership, which has proper fluid
disposal procedures. Never dispose of used fluids The warning lamp for the engine coolant will
in locations such as gardens, woods, sewerage light up if the engine coolant level is too low.
systems, on streets and roads, or in rivers and
waterways.  Preparations
– Park the vehicle in a flat and steady surface.
– Allow the engine to cool down → .
– Open the bonnet  → page 213.
– The coolant expansion tank has the  symbol
on its cap → Fig. 188.

Checking the engine coolant level

– Check the coolant level at the side marking of
the expansion tank when the engine is cold
→ Fig. 187.
– Refill the engine coolant if the liquid level is
below the minimum marking (“min”). When
25A.5L1.POL.20

the engine is warm, the coolant level may be

slightly above the top end of the marked area. 

Checking and refuelling 223

Refilling engine coolant – Always protect the face, hands and arms
– Always protect your hands and arms from hot from hot coolant or steam with a large,
coolant or steam by placing a suitable cloth on thick cloth.
the cap of the coolant expansion tank. ● When refilling, do not spill any service fluids
– Carefully unscrew the cap → anticlockwise. on engine components or on the exhaust
– Refill only new coolant according to system. Spilt service fluids may start fires. In
Volkswagen specifications (→ page 222) → . certain circumstances, the ethylene glycol in
the engine can catch fire.
– The coolant level must be between the marks
on the expansion tank → Fig. 187. Do not ex-
ceed the upper level marker when filling up
NOTICE
→ ! ● Do not exceed the upper level marker when
– Firmly screw-in the cap clockwise. filling up with engine coolant → Fig. 187. Oth-
erwise the excess coolant will be pressed out
– If in an emergency you do not have access to of the cooling system when the engine is hot
the coolant of the required specification, do and could cause damage.
not use any other coolant additive! Instead,
top off with distilled → only. Then add the ● If a large amount of coolant has been lost, do
correct proportion of coolant additive not refill the coolant until the engine has com-
→ page 222 to re-established as soon as possi- pletely cooled. Substantial coolant loss is an
ble.the correct mix. indication of leaks in the engine cooling sys-
tem. The engine cooling system must be
WARNING checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or quali-
fied workshop. Failure to do so can result in
Hot steam or engine coolant can cause severe engine damage!
burns.
● When refilling operating fluids, please ensure
● Never open the bonnet if steam or engine that the correct container is filled. The use of
coolant can be seen or heard coming out of incorrect operating fluids could result in seri-
the engine compartment. Always wait until ous malfunctions and engine damage! 
no escaping steam or coolant can be seen or
heard.
● Always let the engine cool down completely
before carefully opening the bonnet. Hot Brake fluid
parts may cause burns when touched.
● Before opening the engine compartment
cover once it has cooled down:
– Apply the handbrake and move the selec-
tor lever to position P or the manual gear
lever to the neutral position.
– Turn the ignition off and remove the vehi-
cle key from the ignition lock.
– Always keep children away from the en-
gine compartment and never leave the ve-
hicle unattended.
● The engine cooling system is under pressure
when the engine is hot. Never open the cap
of the coolant expansion tank when the en-
Fig. 189 On the engine compartment: brake fluid
gine is hot. Coolant may spray out and cause
reservoir cap.
severe burns and injuries.
– Turn the cap slowly and very carefully an- Brake fluid will gradually absorb water from the
ticlockwise while exerting some down- surrounding air. The brake system will be dam-
wards pressure on the cap. aged if there is too much water in the brake fluid.
The boiling point of the brake fluid is also consid-
erably reduced by the water content. Heavy use 

224 Owner's Manual

 of the brakes may cause a vapour lock in the ● The brake system and brake fluid level must
brake system if the water content is too high. Va- be checked regularly.
pour locks reduce levels of braking power, con-
● Renew the brake fluid regularly.
siderably increase braking distance and can even
cause the brake system to fail completely. Your ● Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour
own safety and that of other road users depends lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for
on having a brake system that functions properly too long. Vapour locks reduce levels of brak-
at all times → . ing power, considerably increase braking dis-
tance and can even cause the brake system
Brake fluid specification to fail completely.
Volkswagen has developed a brake fluid opti- ● Please ensure that the correct brake fluid is
mised for the brake system in the vehicle. To en- used. Only use brake fluid compliant with the
sure optimal operation of the brake system, DOT 4 standard. Any other brake fluid or a
Volkswagen recommends the use of DOT 4 low-quality one can affect the functioning of
standard brake fluid → Fig. 189. Additionally, we the brakes and reduce their effectiveness. Do
recommend using original Volkswagen brake flu- not use the brake fluid if the DOT 4 standard
id. is not indicated in the fluid package.
Before using a particular brake fluid, check that ● The refilled brake fluid must be new.
the specifications printed on the container corre-
spond to the vehicle requirements. WARNING
Suitable brake fluids may be acquired at a Brake fluid is toxic.
Volkswagen Dealership. ● In order to reduce the risk of poisoning, nev-
er use bottles or other containers to store
Brake fluid level brake fluid. These containers could encour-
age other people to drink out of them, even
 Brake fluid level is too low.  Stop driv- if they are labelled otherwise.
ing! Check brake fluid level.
● Brake fluid must always be stored in its origi-
The brake fluid level must always be between the nal sealed container and kept out of the
MIN and MAX marking on the brake fluid contain- reach of children.
er or above the MIN marking → .
The brake fluid level cannot be checked accurate- NOTICE
ly in all models, since engine components con- Spilt or leaked brake fluid may damage the vehi-
ceal the brake fluid container. When the brake cle paintwork, plastic parts, and tyres. Immedi-
fluid level cannot be accurately read, please seek ately clean spilt or leaked brake fluid over the ve-
a Volkswagen dealership or expert technical as- hicle's paintwork or other vehicle parts.
sistance. ● Never mix different types of brake fluids.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the ve- ● Clean the cover before removing it and placing
hicle is being used as the brake pads wear and it back in the reservoir.
the brakes are automatically adjusted.
Brake fluid can pollute the environment.
Changing brake fluid Collect and dispose of used fluids properly.
The brake fluid must be changed by a qualified
Replacing brake fluids requires special pro-
workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a
cedures, equipment and knowledge, in ad-
Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Only
dition to specific environmental standards.
brake fluid that conforms with the required spec-
Therefore, disposing the brake fluid and its re-
ification should be refilled.
spective package as common trash is prohibited.
Applicable laws establish specific disposal proce-
WARNING
dures for these cases. For your safety and con-
Brake failure or reduced braking effect can be venience, Volkswagen recommends replacing the
25A.5L1.POL.20

caused by the brake fluid level being too low or brake fluid at Volkswagen Dealerships. 
by brake fluid that is too old or unsuitable.

Checking and refuelling 225

Warm starting system (E- – Considerable decrease in engine perform-
ance.
FLEX) ● The vehicle must run for approximately 5 kilo-
metres to recognize the new fuel type, in order
Information on the warm starting to prevent any of the scenarios above.
system When filling, fuel may be spilt on the
ground, polluting the environment. Always
According to the vehicle version, the warm start fill the at authorized filling stations with proper
system may not be available. fluid collection and disposal systems. 
The warm starting system will switch on auto-
matically whenever the coolant temperature is
too low and the fuel tank has a high percentage
of ethanol. Vehicle battery
The indicator lamp  will be lit in the instrument
cluster upon switching on the ignition. Wait until
the indicator lamp on the instrument cluster is  Introduction
switched off before starting the engine.
If the engine starting attempt occurs before the The vehicle battery is a component of the electri-
indicator lamp  is switched off on the instru- cal system in the vehicle.
ment cluster, the lamp will flash, indicating the
Never carry out any work on the electrical system
need to interrupt the starting process
if you are not familiar with the necessary proce-
→ page 105.
dures and the general safety requirements and
In case of warm starting system temperatures only unsuitable tools are available → ! In this
below 0º C, under severe engine operating condi- case, all activities must be carried out by a quali-
tions (e.g. weak vehicle battery, low fuel quality, fied workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a
unperformed engine service, exhaust system Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Serious
emissions indicator lamp (OBD) lit → page 192, injuries can be caused if work is carried out incor-
etc), more than one starting attempt may be re- rectly.
quired.
Vehicle battery installation location
In order to prevent starting issues with cold en-
gine, after refilling the vehicle's fuel (replacing The vehicle battery is located in the engine com-
the current fuel in the vehicle), the vehicle must partment.
run approximately 5 kilometres in order to recog-
nize the new fuel or mixture → page 189. Meaning of warnings on the vehicle battery
Always wear eye protection!
In case of failure in any warm starting system 
component, the indicator lamp  will light up Electrolyte is very corrosive and caustic.
and remain lit after the engine is started. In this  Always wear protective gloves and eye
case, there may be difficulties in starting the cold protection!
engine, and we recommend submitting the sys-
Fires, sparks, smoke, and naked lights are
tem to due inspection by a Volkswagen Dealer-  prohibited!
ship or qualified workshop.
A highly explosive mixture of gases is given
NOTICE
 off when the vehicle battery is charging!
Always keep children away from acid and
● If the TOTALFLEX vehicle is immobilized by  the vehicle battery! 
“lack of fuel”, the vehicle must be refilled with
the last type of fuel used - petrol or ethanol.
● If it is necessary to fill the tank with a different
type of fuel, the following may occur:
– Cold starting difficulties.

226 Owner's Manual

 WARNING ● If the vehicle is parked for extended periods,
ensure the vehicle is not parked in open spaces
Works on the vehicle battery and the electrical
in order to protect the vehicle battery from
system can cause severe chemical burns, fire
“freezing” and being damaged.
and electric shocks. Always read the following
warnings and safety information before Never install damaged or improperly sealed
carrying out any kind of work: batteries. Dispose of batteries according to
● Switch off the ignition and all electrical con- environment protection standards → page 228,
sumers before carrying out any work on the Charging, replacing, disconnecting and connect-
vehicle battery and also disconnect the neg- ing the vehicle battery.
ative cable from the vehicle battery.
After starting the engine with a fully dis-
● Children should always be kept away from charged or replaced battery, system set-
electrolyte and the vehicle battery. tings (such as time, date, convenience settings
● Always wear eye protection. and programs) may have been deprogrammed or
● Electrolyte is very aggressive. It can burn the deleted. Check and adjust settings after the vehi-
skin and can cause blindness. When working cle battery is sufficiently charged. 
with the battery, ensure that your hands,
arms and face in particular are protected
from acid spillages.
Checking the electrolyte level of
● Never open a vehicle battery.
the vehicle battery
● Do not smoke and never work near naked
flames or sparks.  Please refer to and at the start of the
● When handling cables and electrical equip- chapter on page 227.
ment, avoid generating sparks and electro-
static charge.
● Never short circuit the battery poles.
● Never use a damaged vehicle battery. It can
explode. A damaged vehicle battery must be
replaced as soon as possible.
● A damaged or frozen vehicle battery must be
replaced immediately. A discharged vehicle
battery can even freeze at temperatures of
around 0° C (+32° F).
● Ensure there is no one inside the vehicle
while replacing the battery. In case of elec-
trical failure, airbags may be accidentally en-
gaged and cause severe or even fatal injuries
Fig. 190 On the engine compartment: example of
to vehicle occupants.
display position on the upper side of the vehicle bat-
tery.
NOTICE
● Never disconnect the vehicle battery with the The electrolyte level of high-mileage batteries, in
ignition switched on or the engine running, hot countries and of older vehicle batteries
and never connect it to another battery; other- should be checked regularly. The vehicle battery
wise the electrical system and electronic com- is otherwise maintenance-free.
ponents may be damaged.
Preparations
● Do not allow direct sunlight onto the vehicle
battery for extended periods, since the UV rays – Preparation for working in the engine com-
could damage the battery housing. partment→ page 213
25A.5L1.POL.20

– Open the bonnet  → page 215. 

Checking and refuelling 227

Checking the electrolyte level Charging, replacing, disconnecting
To access the round visor it is necessary to re-
and connecting the vehicle battery
move the fuse box support from the battery.
Volkswagen recommends having the battery  Please refer to and at the start of the
checked at a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified chapter on page 227.
workshop.
– Ensure that sufficient light is available in order
to see the colours clearly. Never use naked
flames or glowing items as a light source.
– The round display → Fig. 190 on the top side of
the vehicle battery changes its colour accord-
ing to the electrolyte level.
– Tap lightly on the display to eliminate air bub-
bles that may affect the colour.
Light yellow or without colour The electrolyte
level of the battery is too low. The vehicle
battery should be checked and replaced by
a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified work-
shop.
Fig. 191 Batteries contain toxic substances and
Black The electrolyte level of the battery is in or- must be recycled. Therefore, batteries may not be
der. disposed in common trash; they must be returned to
Eventual different colours are destined to battery the reseller after replacement.
diagnosis at a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
Charging the battery
workshop.
The vehicle battery should be charged by a quali-
WARNING fied workshop, as the technology used in factory-
fitted batteries requires voltage-limited charging
Handling the vehicle battery may cause chemi-
→ . Volkswagen recommends using a
cal burns, explosions or severe electrical
Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose.
shocks.
● Always wear protective gloves and eye pro- Replacing the battery
tection. The battery has been developed to suit the con-
● Electrolyte is very aggressive. It can burn the ditions of its location and has special safety fea-
skin and can cause blindness. When working tures. If a vehicle battery has to be replaced, dis-
with the battery, ensure that your hands, cuss the electric compatibility, appropriate load
arms and face in particular are protected capacity (A/h) for the vehicle, size and necessary
from acid spillages. servicing, output and safety requirements for the
● Never tip the vehicle battery. Electrolyte new vehicle battery with a Volkswagen Dealer-
might leak from the vents and cause chemi- ship before purchasing. Volkswagen recommends
cal burns. changing the vehicle battery in a Volkswagen
Dealership.
● Never open a vehicle battery.
● In case of spilled electrolyte on the skin or Disconnecting the battery
eyes, wash the affected area immediately Please note the following points if the vehicle
with cold water for a few minutes. Then seek battery has to be disconnected from the electri-
medical assistance. cal system in the vehicle: 
● In case of electrolyte ingestion, seek medical
assistance immediately. 

228 Owner's Manual

 – Switch off the ignition and all electrical con- – Slow-gear rotation is increased in order for the
sumers. alternator to provide more current.
– The vehicle must be unlocked before discon- – If necessary, some power consumers are limi-
necting the battery as the alarm will otherwise ted or deactivated completely, in case of
be triggered. emergency.
– First disconnect the negative cable and then – During engine start-up, the 12 V and lighter
the positive cable → . voltage supply may be temporarily interrupted.
If the vehicle is stationary for a long period of The electric management system does not al-
time, disconnect the negative battery cable. Oth- ways prevent the battery from being discharged.
erwise, the battery could be discharged by the This may occur if the ignition remains switched
current consumers in the vehicle, preventing the on while the engine is turned off for extended
engine from starting. periods, of if the indicator light remains on for
extended periods, while the vehicle is parked.
Connecting the battery
– Switch off all electrical consumers and the ig- What can cause the vehicle battery to
nition before reconnecting the vehicle battery. discharge?
– First connect the positive cable and then the – Long periods at a standstill in which the en-
negative cable → . gine is not running, especially if the ignition is
switched on.
In case of issues during start-up in low gears,
– Use of electrical consumers when the engine is
switch the ignition on for 30 seconds and then
switched off.
switch it off. Then, switch the engine on.
Various indicator lamps may light up after the ve- WARNING
hicle battery has been connected and the ignition Incorrect attachment of the battery and the use
is switched on. Such lamps go out after a few of incorrect vehicle batteries can cause short
seconds. If the indicator lamps remain lit up, the circuits, fire and serious injuries.
vehicle should be checked by a Volkswagen Deal-
ership. ● Always use maintenance-free and leak proof
batteries which have the same properties,
If the vehicle battery was disconnected for long specifications and dimensions as the factory-
periods, the system may not able to calculate or fitted vehicle battery.
correctly display the time when the next service
● Ensure there is no one inside the vehicle
is due → page 14. Observe the maximum permis-
while replacing the battery. In case of elec-
sible service intervals in the → page 249.
trical failure, airbags may be accidentally en-
Vehicles with Keyless Access: if, after connecting gaged and cause severe or even fatal injuries
the battery the ignition cannot be turned on, un- to vehicle occupants.
lock and lock the vehicle from outside. Then try
to turn the ignition on again. Case the ignition WARNING
can still not be turned on, contact a Volkswagen
A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off
dealership.
when the vehicle battery is charging!
Automatic consumer deactivation ● Vehicle batteries should only be charged in
Through a smart electric management system, in well-ventilated spaces.
case of high battery demand, different measures ● Never charge a frozen or defrosted vehicle
are adopted to prevent the battery from being battery. A discharged vehicle battery can
discharged: even freeze at temperatures of around 0° C
(+32° F).
● A vehicle battery must be replaced if it has
been frozen.
● Incorrectly connected cables can cause a
25A.5L1.POL.20

short circuit. First connect the positive cable

and then the negative cable. 

Checking and refuelling 229

 NOTICE For vehicles with Start-Stop system, the Start-
Stop system cannot start the engine → page 108.
● Only recode the radio if the battery is recon-
nected and the radio is switched on before the
ignition. Please refer to a qualified Volkswagen
Central warning lamp 
Dealership to recode the radio system. Low battery.
and 
● Never disconnect or connect the vehicle bat-
tery with the ignition switched on or the en- The vehicle battery is charged by the alternator
gine running, and never connect it to another while driving however the charge level is not suf-
battery; otherwise the electrical system and ficient
electronic components may be damaged. – Charge the battery by driving around for a lon-
● Never connect equipment which generates ger period of time.
electricity, such as solar panels or battery For vehicles with Start-Stop system, the Start-
charging units for charging the vehicle battery, Stop system cannot start the engine → page 108.
to the 12-volt socket or to the cigarette light-
Replace the battery.
er. This can damage the vehicle electrical sys-
tem.

The vehicle battery is not in good condition.
Batteries may contain toxic substances such – Go to a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
as sulphuric acid and lead. This product can- workshop.
not be disposed / discarded along with common
trash. There are specific legal requirements re- For vehicles with Start-Stop system, the Start-
garding the disposal / discarding of used batter- Stop system cannot start the engine → page 108.
ies. For your safety and convenience, Volkswagen When switching the ignition on, certain warning
recommends replacing vehicle batteries at a and indicator lamps flash to check functions.
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Such lamps go out after a few seconds.
The acid solution and lead contained in the
battery could contaminate the ground and WARNING
waters if disposed of incorrectly. Consumption of Failure to observe the warning lamps and text
lead-contaminated waters may cause high blood messages could lead to your vehicle breaking
pressure, several gastrointestinal disorders and down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
anaemia (weakness and drowsiness).  juries.
● Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
sages that appear.
Troubleshooting ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and
when safe to do so.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 227. NOTICE
Failure to observe the illuminated indicator
Vehicle battery lamps could lead to vehicle damages. 

Central warning lamp 

Fault in the alternator. The vehicle battery is not
and  be charged by the alternator.
The vehicle battery will not be charged by the al-
ternator while the vehicle is in motion.
– Switch off unnecessary electrical consumers.
– Go to a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
workshop.
– Have the electric system checked.

230 Owner's Manual

 Wheels and tyres Do not rely only on the tyre monitoring sys-
tem. Regularly check the tyres to ensure
that their pressures are correct and to see
Tyre monitoring system whether there are signs of damage, such as
holes, cuts, cracks or bubbles. Remove foreign
bodies from the tread of the tyre before they
 Introduction penetrate the tyre interior. 

The tyre monitoring system warns the

driver when tyre pressure is too low.
Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
Depending on the vehicle version, the tyre moni- on page 231.
toring system may not be available.
Operation instructions
WARNING The tyre pressure loss indicator compares, assis-
The intelligent technology shipped with the ted by the ABS sensors, the speed and, conse-
tyre monitoring systems cannot go beyond the quently the rolling circumference of each tyre,
limits imposed by physics and will only operate among other things.
within the limitations of the system. Inade-
The rolling circumference of the tyre can
quate use of the wheels and tyres may cause a
change:
sudden loss of tyre pressure, displacement of
the treads of the tyres and even their blowing – When the tyre pressure has been changed.
up. – When the tyre pressure is very low.
● Check tyre pressures regularly and always – When the tyre has structural damages.
keep to the specified tyre pressure value – When the vehicle is loaded on only one side.
→ page 236. When the tyre pressure is very
– Whether an emergency wheel is mounted.
low, the tyre can become so hot that the tyre
tread may come loose and the tyre blow up. – Whether one wheel per axle has been
changed.
● Check and correct the tyre pressures always
according to the prescribed values on the The tyre pressure loss indicator  can be delayed
sticker → page 236. or display nothing under given conditions such
● Check the tyre pressures regularly on cold as, for example, when the driving style is very
tyres. If necessary, calibrate the tyres moun- sporty, on snow covered roads or on unpaved
ted on the vehicle when they are cold ac- roads,
cording to the indicated values on the sticker
→ page 236.
Setting the tyre pressure loss indicator
After a tyre pressure change or after changing
● Check the tyres regularly, looking for wear
one or more wheels, the tyre pressure loss indi-
and tear signs.
cator must be reset again. This is also valid after
● Never exceed the top speed and load capaci- exchanging the wheels, for example the front
ty permitted for the fitted tyres. wheels with the rear wheels.
A too low tyre pressure increases fuel con- To reset the system the saved values must first
sumption and tyre wear. be reset.
When driving for the first time with new – Switch on the ignition.
tyres at high speed, they may expand some- – According to the version of the vehicle and of
what and so a single tyre pressure warning may the radio, press the  button on the radio
be issued. system → page 28.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Old tyres should only be replaced by tyres – Open the menu Vehicle settings on the radio sys-
that have been approved by Volkswagen for tem.
the vehicle type. – Touch the Tyres function button. 

Wheels and tyres 231

– Touch the SET function button. Tyre pressure loss indicator
– If the 4 tyre pressures correspond to the pre- troubleshooting
scribed values, touch the Confirm function but-
ton to save the tyre pressures.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
OR on page 231.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Depending on the vehicle and radio versions,
 on
on the radio display touch the settings button The pressure of one or more tyres went down or
.
the tyre suffered a structural damage.
–  Stop driving!
– Touch the Car function button.
– Check all the tyre pressures and adjust
– Touch the Tyres function button.
→ page 236.
– Touch the Configure function button.
– Replace the damaged tyres.
– If the 4 tyre pressures correspond to the pre-
– Resetting the tyre pressure loss indicator again
scribed values, touch the Confirm function but-
→ page 231.
ton to save the tyre pressures.
– Seek assistance from a Volkswagen Dealership
After a longer driving period and at different if necessary.
speeds, the system resets the new values auton-
omously and monitors them.  flashes for about one minute and then
The tyre pressure loss indicator must be reprog- remains permanently lit
rammed again under the following circumstan- System damaged.
ces: –  Stop driving!
– When the tyre pressures have been adjusted. – Turn the ignition off and on again.
– When one or more wheels have been ex- – Resetting the tyre pressure loss indicator again
changed. → page 231.
– When the wheel positions have been changed, – Seek assistance from a Volkswagen Dealership
for example, the front wheels to the rear if necessary.
→ page 234.

The tyre pressure loss indicator does not WARNING

work when the ESC or the ABS are damaged Different tyre pressures or very low tyre pres-
→ page 127. sures may result in collapsing tyres, loss of con-
trol over the vehicle, accidents, severe injuries
After a low tyre pressure warning turn the
and loss of life.
ignition off and on again. Only then can the
tyre pressure loss indicator be programmed ● If the indicator lamp  lights up, stop imme-
again.  diately and check all tyres → page 236.
● Different tyre pressures or very low tyre
pressures may increase tyre wear, deterio-
rate stability and increase braking distance.
● Different tyre pressures or very low tyre
pressures may result in a sudden collapse of
the tyre, causing the tyre to blow up and the
loss of control over the vehicle.
● The driver is responsible for the correct pres-
sure in all the tyres of the vehicle. The rec-
ommended tyre pressure is always available
on a sticker → page 236.
● The tyre monitoring system can only fulfil its
mission when all tyres have the correct pres-
sure when cold. 

232 Owner's Manual

 ● Using incorrect tyre pressure values may lamp displays the malfunction, but goes off,
cause accidents and damages to the tyres. however, when the road conditions or driving
All tyres must always have their tyre pres- style change. 
sure adjusted to the carried load condition
→ page 236.
● Prior each trip, always calibrate the tyres to
the correct tyre pressure → page 236. Important information on
● When travelling with very low tyre pressure, wheels and tyres
the tyres necessarily undergo more deforma-
tions. This way the tyres may get so hot that
the tread may come loose, the tyres may  Introduction
blow up and loss of control over the vehicle
may occur.
● High speeds and overload may heat a tyre in Tyres are the most used and most underestima-
such a way that the tyre may blow-up and ted parts of a vehicle. Tyres are very important as
lead to loss of control over the vehicle. the narrow tyre surfaces are the only contact be-
tween the vehicle and the road.
● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high,
the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi- The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre
cle will not handle well. pressure, driving style, handling, and fitting.
● If the tyre is not “punctured” and is not nec- Volkswagen recommends that work on tyres and
essary to change the wheel immediately, wheels is carried out by a qualified workshop.
drive at low speed to the nearest They are familiar with the procedure and have
Volkswagen dealership, to check and correct the necessary special tools and spare parts as
the tyre pressures → page 236. well as the facilities for proper disposal of old
tyres. Volkswagen recommends using a
WARNING Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose.
Failure to take notice and heed activated warn-
ing lamps and text messages could cause the WARNING
vehicle to stop in middle of traffic, severe acci- Worn or damaged tyres cannot provide full lev-
dents and injuries. els of vehicle control and braking power.
● Never ignore the warning lamps and the text ● Incorrect handling of wheels and tyres can
messages. reduce vehicle safety and cause accidents
● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and and severe injuries.
when safe to do so. ● All 4 wheels must be fitted with radial tyres
of the same type, size (rolling circumference)
NOTICE and the same tread pattern.
Failure to observe the illuminated indicator ● New tyres will have to be run in, as they will
lamps could lead to vehicle damages. initially have reduced grip and braking effect.
Drive particularly carefully for the first 600
With the ignition turned on, if a low tyre km in order to prevent accidents and severe
pressure is detected, the indicator lamp injuries.
lights up . In addition, an acoustic warning ● At high and continuous speed, tyres with low
sounds and a text message may be exhibited. pressure are excessively heated, which could
When a damage to the system is detected cause the treads from detaching or even ex-
with the ignition turned on, the yellow  ploding. Always maintain the recommended
indicator lamp flashes for a while and then stays tyre pressure.
permanently lit. In addition a text message may ● Never drive with worn tyres or tyres that are
be exhibited. damaged (cuts, cracks or blisters). Driving
25A.5L1.POL.20

with tyres in this condition can result in 

A long drive over unpaved roads or a spor-
tive driving style may temporarily disable
the tyre pressure loss indicator. The indicator

Wheels and tyres 233

 blown tyres, accidents and severe injuries. Rotating wheels
Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced A regular rotation of the wheels as shown in the
immediately. illustration → Fig. 192 is recommended to ensure
● Never exceed the top speed and load permit- a uniform level of wear for the tyres. All the tyres
ted for the fitted tyres. will then last for about the same time.
● The effectiveness of the driver assist systems Volkswagen recommends to check the need to
and brake assist systems depends on the tyre rotate the tyres at every servicing of the vehicle,
grip. and when there is such need, that alignment and
● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve- balancing be performed.
hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the Volkswagen recommends having the wheels ro-
car immediately and check the wheels and tated by a Volkswagen Dealership.
tyres for damage.
● Do not use wheels or tyres if you do not Avoiding damages to the tyres
know their previous history. Used wheels and – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar ob-
tyres could be damaged, even if the damage stacle, drive slowly and at a right angle if pos-
is not visible. sible.
● Old tyres – even if never used – may loose – Inspect the tyres regularly for damage such as
pressure or burst, especially at high speeds, cuts, cracks or blisters.
and thus cause accidents and severe injuries. – Remove foreign objects that are in the outer
Avoid using tyres that are more than six tyre tread and have not penetrated the inner
years old. If you have no alternative, drive tyre → page 238.
slowly and with extra care at all times.  – Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced im-
mediately → page 238.
– Regularly check the tyres for hidden damage
Handling wheels and tyres → page 238.
– Never exceed the top speed and load permit-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter ted for the fitted tyres → page 240.
on page 233. – Protect the wheels, including the spare wheel,
from contact with corrosive substances, in-
cluding oils, lubricants, fuel and brake fluid
→ .
– Replace missing valve caps immediately.

Tyres older than 6 years

Tyres age through physical and chemical pro-
cesses which can impair their function.
Volkswagen recommends replacing tyres older
than 6 years with new tyres. This also applies to
tyres, including the spare wheel, which appear to
still be in good condition and on which the tread
depth has not yet reached the minimum value
provided by law → .
Fig. 192 Diagram showing how to swap wheels.
The age of each tyre can be determined from the
Tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the manufacturing date → page 240.
vehicle's design. Tyres and wheels approved by
Volkswagen are specifically matched to the char- Storing tyres
acteristics of the vehicle and make a major con- Mark tyres before you remove them to ensure
tribution to good road holding and safe handling. you will be able to mount them correctly when
replacing (left, right, front, rear). When removed, 

234 Owner's Manual

 the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool, More information on the Tyre Pressure Monitor-
dry and preferably dark place. Do not vertically ing System → page 231.
store tyres mounted on the wheels.
Tyres without wheels should be protected WARNING
against dirt and stored in proper covers standing Corrosive liquids and other substances can
on the tread. cause visible and invisible damage to the tyres,
which can cause the tyre to burst.
New tyres ● Always keep chemicals, oils, lubricants, fuel,
– Drive particularly carefully for the first 600 km brake fluid and other corrosive substances
with new tyres, as the tyres have to be run in. away from the tyres.
Tyres that have not been run in have reduced
grip → and braking effect → . WARNING
– All 4 wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of New tyres will have to be run in, as they will in-
the same type, size (rolling circumference) and itially have reduced grip and braking effect.
the same tread pattern.
● Drive particularly carefully for the first 600
– The tread depth of new tyres may differ from km in order to prevent accidents and severe
manufacturing and profile modelling charac- injuries.
teristics according to the type and make of
tyre and the tread pattern.
WARNING
Replacing tyres Wheels must have the proper necessary free-
– Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and dom of operation. If the wheels do not have the
not individually (e.g. both front tyres or both necessary freedom of operation, the tyre could
rear tyres together) → . rub on parts of the running gear, the vehicle
body and the brake system. This can lead to a
– Old tyres should only be replaced by new tyres
fault in the brake system and to tread separa-
that have been approved by Volkswagen for
tion and thus to a tyre bursting.
the vehicle type. Ensure that the tyres used are
correct in respect of size, diameter, load-carry- ● The actual tyre size must not exceed the tyre
ing capacity and maximum speed. dimensions of manufacturers approved by
Volkswagen and must not rub on any vehicle
– Never use tyres with an effective size that is
body parts.
larger than Volkswagen-approved tyres. Larger
tyres could rub against the body or other parts
of the vehicle.
NOTICE
Avoid strong shocks and, if possible drive around
Reprogram the tire control indicator the obstacles The tyres may get deformed, espe-
After each change of a wheel or several wheels, cially by holes in the road and bumping into the
the tyre pressure loss indicator must be reset sidewalk guides. That may cause damages to the
again. This is also valid when rotating front ver- tyres and wheel rims.
sus rear wheels → page 231.
Old tyres must be disposed of with specific
Vehicles with tyre Pressure Monitoring technical knowledge and equipment, based
System on specific standards. Therefore, we recommend
visiting a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
When replacing the factory installed wheels, en-
workshop for such purpose.
sure that the new wheels are equipped with sen-
sors compatible with the tyre pressure monitor- Tyre disposal requires equipment and
ing system → page 231. To have the new wheels knowledge of applicable environment pro-
recognized by the system, the vehicle must be tection standards. Tyres cannot be disposed /
driven for some time at speeds above 25 km/h. discarded along with common trash. Applicable
At the time of replacement and change of the laws establish specific disposal procedures for
25A.5L1.POL.20

sensors, Volkswagen always recommends the in- these cases. For your safety and convenience,
stallation of a new set of valves or caps Volkswagen recommends replacing tyres at a
Volkswagen Dealership. 

Wheels and tyres 235

 Despite identical size details, the actual size – Manufacture date
of the various tyre makes may vary from – Country of origin
these specified dimensions, or the tyre contours
– Manufacturing number
may vary considerably.
– Raw material
Volkswagen-approved tyres are guaranteed – Part code
to have the dimensions that are suitable for
the vehicle. The salesperson will have to provide
WARNING
a certificate from the tyre manufacturer for other
tyre makes to prove that the tyre is also suitable The use of improper or damaged wheels can
for the vehicle. This certificate must be stored in impair vehicle safety and cause accidents and
a safe place within the vehicle.  severe injuries.
● Only use wheels which have been approved
for the vehicle.
● Check the wheels regularly for damage and
Wheels
replace as necessary. 
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 233.
Tyre pressure
The design of the wheel bolts is matched to the
wheels. If different wheels are fitted, the correct  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
wheel bolts with the right length and properly on page 233.
shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures
that the wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system works properly → page 244.
For technical reasons, it is not generally possible
to use the wheels from other vehicles. This can
also apply to wheels of the same vehicle type.
Tyres and wheels approved by Volkswagen are
specifically matched to the characteristics of the
vehicle and make a major contribution to good
road holding and safe handling.

Wheel bolts
Fig. 193 Sticker with the tyre pressures.
Wheel bolts must always be tightened with the
correct tightening torque → page 244.

Wheels with bolted-on trims

Wheels may have removable trims which are at-
tached to the wheel with self-locking bolts.
Damaged trims may only be repaired by a quali-
fied workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a
Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose.

Wheel identification
Due to legal requirements in some countries, the Fig. 194 On the inner side of the fuel tank flap: tyre
information on new wheels may contain some pressure label.
specific wheel features. The following wheel data
may be available, depending on the country:
Indications on the tyre pressure sticker
– Seal of conformity → Fig. 193:
– Rim size A Tyre pressures for the front axle tyres.
– Manufacturer or brand name B Tyre pressures for the rear axle tyres. 

236 Owner's Manual

 1 Guideline: regularly check the pressure on ● Fast speeds or overloading of the vehicle can
the cold tyres. cause overheating, sudden tyre damage in-
2 Tyre pressure under partial load. cluding tyre bursts and ripping of the tread
3 Tyre pressure under full load. surface and thus to a loss of control of the
vehicle.
4 Emergency wheel tyre pressure.
● Check tyre pressures regularly, at least twice
The sticker only indicates the correct tyre pres- a month, and before every long journey.
sures for approved tyres and is located on the in- ● All tyres must have the correct tyre pressure
side of the tank flap → Fig. 194. to suit the vehicle load.
According to the version of the vehicle the ap- ● Never reduce excess pressure when the tyres
pearance of the sticker may vary. Additional tyre are warm.
sizes may be contained → page 240.
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the NOTICE
tyres will wear prematurely and the vehicle will ● When attaching the tyre pressure gauge, make
not handle well → . Proper tyre pressure is par- sure that it does not touch the valve shaft.
ticularly important at high speeds. Incorrect tyre Otherwise, this could damage the tyre valve.
pressure causes premature wear and can cause ● Missing valve caps, or valve caps which are not
tyres to burst. suitable or not screwed on properly, may dam-
age the tyre valve. Always use valve caps that
Checking tyre pressure
comply with the factory-fitted valve cap speci-
The tyre pressure should only be checked if the fications. Always screw on valve caps fully.
tyres have not been driven for more than just a
few kilometres at low speed in the last 3 three Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
hours. sumption. 
– Check tyre pressures regularly, at least every
15 days, and, additionally, prior any longer trip.
– Check the tyre pressures only on cold tyres. Tread depth and wear indicators
The indicated tyre pressures are valid only for
cold tyres. Tyre pressure is always higher in  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
warm tyres than it is in cold tyres. Therefore on page 233.
never release the air of hot tyres to adjust their
pressure.
– Always adjust the tyre pressures to the vehicle
load condition → Fig. 193 3 .
– After adjusting the tyre pressures, make sure
to put the valve caps back on and to follow the
instructions regards the tyre pressure monitor-
ing system → page 231.
– Calibrate the tyres always to the pressures in-
dicated on the sticker. Never exceed the maxi-
mum allowable pressure of the tyres as indica-
ted on the tyre sidewalls. Fig. 195 Tyre profile: wear indicators.

WARNING Tread depth

A tyre pressure that is too high or too low may In most countries, the minimum tread depth re-
cause the tyre to suddenly lose pressure or quired by law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread
burst while the vehicle is in motion. This could grooves next to the tread wear indicators). Ob-
lead to severe accidents and fatal injuries. serve any country-specific legal requirements. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

● Low tyre pressure may cause the tyres to

heat to such an extent that the tread peels
off and the tyre bursts.

Wheels and tyres 237

Difficult driving situations demand the deepest – Reduce your speed immediately if you suspect
possible tread depth for the tyres and the same that a wheel is damaged!
tread depth for the tyres on the front and rear – Check the tyres and wheels for damages.
axles → .
– If the tyre is damaged, do not drive on. Seek
The tread depth of new tyres can vary according expert assistance.
to type and manufacturer due to construction – If there is no visible damage, drive slowly and
and tread design. cautiously to the closest Volkswagen Dealer-
Observe the specific legal prescriptions of the ship or a qualified workshop in order to have
country on the minimum tyre tread depth of win- the vehicle checked.
ter tyres and regular tyres → page 242.
Foreign bodies in the tyre
Tyre wear indicators – Leave the foreign body in the tyre if it has en-
Tread wear indicators show if a tyre is worn tered the inner tyre. However, foreign bodies
down. The tyre must be replaced at the latest that are stuck between the tyre tread blocks
when the tread depth is just before the tread can be removed.
wear indicator. – Replaced the damaged wheel if necessary.
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm Seek expert assistance if necessary.
high tread wear indicators running across the Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen
tread → Fig. 195. These wear indicators are posi- Dealership for this purpose.
tioned at set intervals around the tyre. Markings – Control and correct the pressure.
on the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters
“TWI” or other symbols indicate the positions of Tyre wear
the tread wear indicators. Tyre wear is affected by several factors, such as:

WARNING – Driving style.

– Unbalanced wheels.
Worn tyres threaten the safety of vehicle occu-
pants and may cause loss of vehicle control and – Running gear setting.
severe injuries. Driving style – Fast cornering, heavy acceleration
● Tyres must be replaced at the latest when and hard braking all increase tyre wear. The run-
the tread is worn down to the tread wear in- ning gear should be checked by a Volkswagen
dicators. Dealership or qualified workshop if the tyres
● Worn tyres have considerably less tread, par- show excessive wear despite a normal driving
ticularly on wet roads, which can cause the style.
vehicle to “glide” along the road surface Unbalanced wheels – The wheels on new vehi-
(aquaplaning). cles are balanced. However, various factors en-
● Worn tyres reduce the possibility of control- countered in normal driving can cause them to
ling the vehicle well in normal and difficult become unbalanced, which results in steering vi-
driving situations and increase braking dis- bration. Unbalanced wheels will affect levels of
tance and the risk of sliding.  wear on the steering system and the suspension.
In this case the wheels should be balanced again.
New wheels must be balanced out prior mount-
ing on the vehicle.
Tyre damage
Running gear setting – incorrect wheel alignment
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety
on page 233. of the vehicle. The wheel alignment should be
checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
Damage to tyres and wheels is often not readily workshop if tyres show excessive wear. 
visible. Unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls
to one side, one of the tyres might be damaged
→ .

238 Owner's Manual

 WARNING – Reinsert the floor covering onto the top edge
of the luggage compartment.
Unusual vibrations or if the car pulls to one side
– If the case, close the variable luggage com-
while driving, one of the tyres might be dam-
partment floor → page 180.
aged.
– Close the boot lid.
● Reduce speed immediately and park the ve-
hicle while complying with traffic laws. Case the temporary spare wheel is different
● Check the tyres and wheels for damages. from the installed wheels
● Never drive on if the wheels or tyres are If the spare wheel is different from the normal
damaged. Seek expert assistance instead.  vehicle tyre version, for example, the former may
be used only in case of emergency, temporarily
and with due precautions → . Also see
→ page 245.
Spare wheel
Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter Observe the driving notes:
on page 233.
– Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph)!
– Avoid full acceleration, sudden braking and
fast driving through bends in the road!
– Tyre pressure must be checked as soon as pos-
sible after fitting the spare wheel → page 237.
The temporary spare wheel tyre pressure must
be checked together with the tyre pressures of
the regular wheels at least every 15 days
→ page 236.

WARNING
Incorrect use of the spare wheel or temporary
spare wheel can lead to a loss of control of the
vehicle, to collisions or other accidents and
Fig. 196 On the luggage compartment: spare wheel cause serious injuries.
fastening handwheel.
● Never use a spare wheel or temporary spare
Removing the spare wheel wheel if it is damaged or worn down to the
– Open the boot lid → page 69. tread wear indicators.

– If the case, lift and secure the variable luggage ● On some vehicles, the emergency spare
compartment floor → page 180. wheel may be of a different size from the
other wheels and tyres→ page 245, Tempo-
– Lift the floor lining and remove it from the lug- rary spare wheel of different size from the
gage compartment. regular wheels. Different sized emergency
– Unscrew the handwheel in the middle of the spare wheels are identified by an adhesive
spare wheel → Fig. 196 anticlockwise fully and label and by the “80 km/h” inscription. This
remove the spare wheel. marking indicates the maximum rolling
speed of the tyre.
Storing the removed wheel
● Never exceed 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid full
– If necessary, place the vehicle toolkit back in acceleration, sudden braking and making
the container in the luggage compartment. turns at high speeds!
– Place the removed wheel into the spare wheel ● Replace the spare wheel with a regular
well with the rim with the central hole in the wheel as soon as possible. The spare wheel is
25A.5L1.POL.20

rim positioned exactly above the stud. only intended for use in short periods of
– Turn the handwheel clockwise on the stud un- time. 
til the wheel is secured firmly.

Wheels and tyres 239

● The temporary spare wheel must always be ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, the
secured firmly with the wheel bolts supplied tyre pressure must be checked as soon as
by the factory. possible → page 236, Tyre pressure.
● Never overuse a spare wheel.
If possible, firmly fasten the spare wheel or
replaced wheel in the luggage compart-
ment. 

Tyre markings and types

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 233.

Fig. 197 International tyre lettering (example).

→ Fig. 197 Tyre lettering (example). Definition

1 Product name Individual tyre lettering from the manufacturer.
DOT The tyre complies with the legal requirements of the De-
2 partment of Transportation, responsible for tyre safety
standards.
JHCO CHWS 2213 Tyre identification number ( a) – in some cases only on the
inner side of the wheel) and manufacturing date:
Tyre manufacturing origin identification code
3 JHCO
and manufacturer information regarding tyre
CHWS
size and features.
2213 Manufacture date 22nd week of 2013.
Information for the end user concerning comparative values for specified basic tyres (standardised
test procedure)→ page 265: 

240 Owner's Manual

 → Fig. 197 Tyre lettering (example). Definition
TREADWEAR 280 Relative life expectancy for the tyre, based on a standard
test. Tyres with a treadwear of 280 tyres wear out 2.8 times
slower than regular tyres with a treadwear of 100. Tyre per-
4 formance varies depending on use conditions and may sig-
nificantly vary from standard values due to driving behavior,
maintenance, different road characteristics and weather
conditions.
TRACTION AA Wet braking response of the tyre (AA, A, B or C). This rating
is measured in certified test tracks, under controlled condi-
tions. Tyres marked with C have low traction power. The
5
traction rating assigned to the tyre is based on levelled
track tests and does not include acceleration, lateral curves,
aquaplaning, or traction under maximum load.
TEMPERATURE A Temperature stability of the tyre at higher test speeds (A, B
or C). Tyres marked with A and B exceed legal requirements.
The temperature test is based on tyres with the proper
6
pressure and excludes excess pressure. Excessive speeds,
improper or excess tyre pressure may heat or damage the
tyres, either separately or in combination.
7 88 H Load → page 242 and speed index → page 242.
Rolling direction and ar- Identification of the tyre's rolling direction → page 242.
8 row
OR: Outside Identification of the tyre's outer wall → page 242.
MAX INFLATION 350 KPA US maximum air pressure limitation.
9
(51 psi / 3,51 bar)
M+S or M/S or  Denotes winter tyres (mud and snow tyres). Spiked tyres are
10
identified with an E after the S.
TWI Indicates the position of the Tread Wear Indicator
11
→ page 237.
12 Brand name, logo Manufacturer.
13 Made in Germany Manufacturing country.
Specific identification for China (China Compulsory Certifi-
14
 cation).
15  023 Specific identification for Brazil.
E4 e4 0200477-b Certification of conformity with international requirements
with the number of the country that issued the approval.
16 Tyres approved as per ECE regulations are marked with E,
and tyres approved as per EG regulations are marked with e.
This is followed by the multi-digit approval number.
17 RADIAL TUBELESS Tubeless radial tyre.
P 195 / 65 R 15 XL Size designation:
P Identification for passenger vehicle.
195 Tyre width from wall to wall in mm.
18 65 Height/width ratio in %.
R Tyre construction: radial.
25A.5L1.POL.20

15 Wheel diameter in inches.

XL Heavy-duty tyres (“Reinforced”). 

Wheels and tyres 241

 → Fig. 197 Tyre lettering (example). Definition
MAXIMUM LOAD 615 KG US maximum load rating per wheel.
19
(1235 LBS)
SIDEWALL 1 PLY RAYON Indications on the components of the inner structure of the
tyre:
1 Rayon layer (artificial silk).
20 TREAD 4 PLIES Tread component indications:
1 RAYON + 2 STEEL + In this example, there are 4 layers under the tread: 1 layer
1 NYLON of Rayon (synthetic silk), 2 layers of steel strap and 1 layer
of nylon.
a) TIN is the tyre serial number.

Tyres with directional tread pattern 95 690 kg

Tyres with directional tread pattern have been 97 730 kg
developed to roll in a single direction. An arrow 99 775 kg
on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of ro- 100 800 kg
tation on tyres with directional tread . The direc-
tion of rotation must be followed. This is the only Speed index
guarantee for optimum grip and helps to avoid The speed index indicates the maximum permit-
aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear. ted speed that may be driven when particular
If, however, the tyre is fitted in the opposite di- wheels are fitted.
rection to the tread pattern, you must take more P max. 150 km/h
care when driving as the tyre is now no longer
Q max. 160 km/h
being used according to its designation. This is
particularly important on wet roads. Tyres must R max. 170 km/h
be replaced as quickly as possible or be fitted S max. 180 km/h
with the tread in the correct direction. T max. 190 km/h
U max. 200 km/h
Tyre load capacity
H max. 210 km/h
The load capacity index indicates how many kilo-
V max. 240 km/h
grams can be loaded onto an individual tyre (tyre
load). W max. 270 km/h
Y max. 300 km/h
80 450 kg
85 515 kg Some tyre manufacturers use the code “ZR” for
tyres with a highest permitted speed of over 240
90 600 kg
km/h (149 mph). 
91 615 kg
93 650 kg

Winter tyres the vehicle, particularly if winter conditions are

expected on the roads Winter tyres will also im-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter prove the braking response of the vehicle and
on page 233. will help to reduce braking distances in winter
weather. At temperatures below +7 °C (+45° F)
In winter road conditions winter tyres will con- Volkswagen recommends that winter tyres be
siderably improve the car's handling. The design fitted to the vehicle. 
of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.
Volkswagen urgently recommends the use of
winter tyres or all-year tyres on all 4 wheels of

242 Owner's Manual

 lose a large degree of their effectiveness when Hub caps
the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm. Win-
ter tyres also largely lose their effectiveness
through ageing – regardless of the remaining Wheel cover
tread depth.

The following applies when using winter

tyres:
– Observe any country-specific legal require-
ments.
– Use winter tyres on all 4 wheels at the same
time.
– Only use in winter road conditions.
– Only use the sizes of winter tyre that have
been approved for the vehicle.
– Winter tyres must have the same type, size
(rolling circumference) and the same tread
pattern.
– Observe the maximum speed permitted by the Fig. 198 Remove the wheel cover.
speed index → .
Remove the wheel cover
Speed limit – Take the lug wrench from the vehicle toolkit
Winter tyres have a speed limitation depending → page 194.
on the speed index → page 242. – Remove the wheel bolts. The bolt opposite to
the valve → Fig. 198 A serves as a guide in
If you use V-rated winter tyres, the speed limits
the fitting sequence. Therefore, remove bolt
and tyre pressure depend on the motorization.
A last and be careful not to let the wheel cov-
You must ask your Volkswagen Dealership about
er fall off when removing the remaining bolts.
the highest permitted speed and required tyre
pressure. Install the wheel cover
Fit bolt A first; position the wheel cover and fit
WARNING
the remaining bolts.
Improved driving conditions due to the use of
winter tyres during winter weather does not WARNING
mean safety risks must not be prevented.
Using unsuitable hubcaps and fitting the hub-
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit caps incorrectly can cause accidents and severe
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- injuries.
tions.
● Hub caps which are not fitted properly could
● Never exceed the maximum speed and load become loose while the vehicle is in motion
limits for fitted winter tyres. and endanger other road users.
Reassemble summer tyres only after the ● Do not use damaged hub caps.
winter season is over. At temperatures ● Always ensure that the flow of air to cool the
above +7° C (+45° F) vehicle handling is better brakes is not restricted or reduced. This also
with summer tyres fitted. They are quieter, do applies when retrofitting wheel trims. If the
not wear so quickly and reduce fuel consump- flow of air is not sufficient, the braking dis-
tion. tance could increase significantly.
On vehicles with tyre pressure loss indica-
tor, the system needs to be reset after each
NOTICE
25A.5L1.POL.20

wheel change → page 231. Remove hub caps carefully and fit them again
properly so as to avoid damage to the vehicle. 
Volkswagen Dealerships can provide details
on permissible winter tyre sizes. 

Wheels and tyres 243

 NOTICE WARNING
The wheel cover is secured to the wheel and can- Changing a wheel can be dangerous, especially
not be removed without first removing the wheel when carried out at the side of a road. Please
bolts.  note the following points in order to reduce the
risk of serious injuries:
● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe
location. Park the vehicle at a safe distance
Wheel bolt cap from moving traffic in order to carry out the
wheel change.
● All passengers, especially children, must be
at a safe distance and away from your area
of work during the wheel change.
● Switch on the hazard warning lights and set
up the warning triangle to warn other road
users.
● Make sure that the ground is flat and firm. If
necessary use a large, strong board or similar
support for the vehicle jack.
● Only change the wheel yourself if you feel
confident carrying out the procedure. Seek
expert assistance if this is not the case.
Fig. 199 Removing the wheel bolt caps. ● Always use suitable and undamaged tools to
change the wheel.
According to the version of the vehicle, wheel
● Always switch off the engine, firmly apply
bolt caps may not be available.
the handbrake and, with an automatic gear-
The caps protect the wheel bolts and must be box move the selector lever to position P or
fully fitted back after changing the wheel. engage a gear on a manual gearbox to re-
duce the risk of the vehicle moving.
Removing and fitting the protection caps
● The wheel bolt tightening torque should be
– Removing: take the puller hook from the vehi- checked with a torque wrench immediately
cle toolkit → page 194. after changing a wheel.
– Insert the puller hook into the opening of the ● On vehicles with tyre pressure loss indicator,
bolt protection cap → Fig. 199 and pull off in the system needs to be reset after each
the direction indicated by the arrow. wheel change → page 231. 
– Installing: insert the cover cap until the stop-
per on the wheel bolts. 

Preparations for changing a wheel

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
Changing a wheel on page 244.

Checklist
 Introduction
The following actions must always be carried out
in the given order in preparation for changing the
Only change the wheel yourself when the car is wheel→ :
parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the 1. In case of flat tyres, park the vehicle at a saf-
necessary actions and safety procedures and you est distance possible from the traffic flow, in
have access to all the correct tools! Seek expert a steady and even terrain.
assistance if this is not the case.
2. Apply the handbrake → page 121. 

244 Owner's Manual

 Checklist (Continued) pressure values on the inside of the fuel tank
3. Automatic gearbox: move the selector lever cover. On vehicles with tyre pressure loss indica-
to position P → page 111. tor, the system needs to be reset after each
wheel change → page 231.
4. Stop the engine and remove the key from the
ignition lock → page 104. The different sized wheel must return as soon as
possible to its initial condition, after the reinstal-
5. Manual gearbox: select the gear → page 110.
lation of the regular wheel an tyre, repaired or
6. Have all occupants get out of the vehicle and replaced. Additionally, consider the maximum
placed in a safe spot away from the traffic. load capacity, specified in the tyre sidewall.
7. Place a wedge on the opposite wheel, using To reduce the chances of damages to the tyres
a rock or similar object. and wheelrims of your vehicle:
8. While towing trailers: unhitch the trailer
from the vehicle and park it properly. – Avoid driving on roads with holes, depressions
or bumps. The impacts suffered when running
9. While the luggage compartment is loaded: over obstacles such as these can damage your
remove baggage items. vehicle's tyres and wheel rims. If it is necessary
10. Remove the spare wheel and the vehicle to drive under such conditions, it is absolutely
toolkit from the luggage compartment. necessary to check the vehicle's tyres and
11. Remove the hub cap → page 243 and loosen wheel rims afterwards, or seek the assistance
the wheel screws. from a nearby Volkswagen dealership or speci-
alized outfit.
WARNING – Perceiving any damage to the tyre it is neces-
Ignoring any of the points on this important sary to replace it as soon as possible as there is
safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju- a risk of the tyre blowing up and loss of con-
ries. trol over the vehicle.
● Always follow the instructions on the check- WARNING
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
cautions. Incorrect use of the temporary spare wheel of

different wheel rim dimensions for an extended
period of time, or by permanent replacement of
the 15, 16, 17 and 18-inch wheel rims, may re-
Temporary spare wheel of different sult in vehicle control loss, collisions or other
size from the regular wheels accidents with risk of severe injuries.
● Never drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter while using the different sized temporary
on page 244. spare wheel rim. Avoid sudden brakes or ac-
celeration, as well as steep curves.
On vehicles equipped with 15, 16, 17 and 18-inch ● Never use more than one different sized
wheel rims, the temporary spare wheel has a wheel rim at the same time. 
wheel rim of different dimensions from the regu-
lar wheel rims.
Apart from a different sized wheel rim, the vehi-
cles equipped with light alloy wheels may have a
temporary spare wheel of steel.
The temporary spare wheel must be used tempo-
rarily, replacing a 15-inch wheel, only for as long
as necessary before having the regular wheel or
tyre repaired → .
During this period, mind the following precau-
25A.5L1.POL.20

tions: after installing a temporary spare wheel of

different dimensions, the tyre pressure must be
checked and adjusted, if necessary. Check proper

Wheels and tyres 245

Wheel bolts If the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to
turn, they must be replaced and the wheel hub
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter threads cleaned before the tightening torque is
on page 244. checked.
Never grease or lubricate the wheel bolts or the
threads of the wheel hub. This could cause them
to loosen while the vehicle is in motion, even if
the required torque setting is used.
The tightening torque should be checked with a
torque wrench immediately after changing a
wheel.

WARNING
Incorrectly tightened wheel bolts can loosen
while the vehicle is in motion and cause acci-
dents, serious injury, and loss of control of the
vehicle.
● Only use wheel bolts corresponding to the
Fig. 200 Changing the wheel: loosen wheel bolts. respective wheel.
Only the spanner delivered with the vehicle ● Never use different wheel bolts.
should be used to loosen the wheel bolts. ● The wheel bolts and threads of the wheel
Only loosen the wheel bolts by approximately hubs must be clean, free from oil and grease,
one turn before raising the vehicle with the vehi- and turn easily.
cle jack. ● Always use the box spanner placed in the ve-
hicle at the factory to loosen and tighten the
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to
wheel bolts.
loosen it by pushing down the end of the spanner
carefully with your foot. Hold on to the car for ● Only loosen the wheel bolts by approximate-
support and take care not to slip. ly one turn before raising the vehicle with
the vehicle jack.
Loosening the wheel bolts ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is
– Fit the box spanner over the wheel bolt as far too low, the wheel bolts and wheels can
as it will go → Fig. 200. loosen while the vehicle is in motion. The
– Hold the end of the box spanner and turn the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged if
wheel bolt approximately one turn anticlock- the tightening torque is too high. 
wise → .

Important information about the wheel bolts

The wheel bolts were specifically designed for
the factory-fitted wheels. If different wheels are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right
length and properly shaped bolt heads must be
used. This ensures that the wheels are fitted se-
curely and that the brake system works properly.

Tightening torque for the wheel bolts

Prescribed tightening torque for light alloy wheel
rims and steel wheel rims:
– 120 Nm

246 Owner's Manual

 Checklist
Lifting the vehicle with the jack
To ensure your own safety and the safety of your
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter passengers, observe the following points in the
on page 244. order given→ :
1. Find a flat and firm surface suitable for lifting
the vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off, engage a gear
→ page 110, when manual gearbox or, move
the selector lever to position P → page 111,
when automatic gearbox, and apply the
handbrake → page 121.
3. Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle.
4. Place a wedge on the opposite wheel, using
a rock or similar object.
5. While towing trailers: unhitch the trailer
Fig. 201 Jacking points
from the vehicle and park it properly.
6. Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel that is
being changed → page 246.
7. Find the jacking point under the vehicle
→ Fig. 201 closest to the wheel that is being
changed.
8. Insert the tip of the wrench in the jack and
hold the wrench by the hexagonal end.
9. Raise the vehicle jack until it just fits under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
10. Ensure that the entire surface of the foot of
the jack is resting securely on the ground and
that the foot of the vehicle jack is positioned
precisely below the jacking point → Fig. 202
 and .
11. Position the vehicle jack. At the same time,
continue to crank the claw up until it is in po-
sition around the vertical rib underneath the
Fig. 202 Jacking points and vehicle jack at the rear vehicle → Fig. 202 .
left-hand side of the vehicle.
12. Crank the vehicle jack further until the wheel
The jack may be applied only at the jacking is just clear of the ground.
points shown (markings on the body) → Fig. 201.
Always use the jacking point closest to the wheel WARNING
you are working on → . Incorrect use of the vehicle jack can cause the
vehicle to slip, which can lead to severe injuries.
Please apply the following rules to reduce the
risk of accidents:
● Only use jacks which have been approved by
Volkswagen for the vehicle. Other vehicle
jacks could slip out of position – this includes
vehicle jacks supplied with other Volkswagen
models. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Wheels and tyres 247

● The ground must be flat and firm. Tilted or Changing the wheel
unstable surfaces can cause the vehicle to
slide. If necessary use a large, strong board  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
or similar support for the vehicle jack. on page 244.
● On a hard, slippery surface (such as tiles) use
a rubber mat or similar to prevent the vehicle
jack from slipping.
● Fit the vehicle jack only at the points descri-
bed. The vehicle jack claw must grip the ver-
tical rib under the sill securely → Fig. 202 
and .
● When towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer
from the traction vehicle before changing
the wheel.
● Never place any part of your body (e.g. arm
or leg) underneath the vehicle if the latter is
only supported by the vehicle jack.
● Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle.
Fig. 203 Wheel replacement: wheel bolt removal
● If you have to work underneath the vehicle, sequence.
use suitable stands to provide extra support.
● Never lift the vehicle while the engine is run- Removing the wheel
ning or if the vehicle is parked over a slope – Read the checklist → page 244.
surface. – Loosen the wheel bolts → page 246.
● Never start the engine when the vehicle is – Lift the vehicle → page 247.
raised on a vehicle jack. Engine vibrations
can cause the vehicle to fall off the vehicle – Completely remove the loose wheel bolts A
jack. using the wheel wrench and place them on a
clean surface.
WARNING – On vehicles with wheel covers, the bolt oppo-
site to the valve → Fig. 203 A serves as a ref-
Ignoring any of the points on this important erence in the installation sequence. Therefore,
safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju- remove bolt A last and be careful not to let
ries. the wheel cover fall off when removing the re-
● Always follow the instructions on the check- maining bolts.
list and comply with applicable safety pre- – Remove the wheel.
cautions. 
Install spare wheel
If applicable, take note of the running direction
of the tyre → page 231.
– Insert the spare wheel.
– On vehicles with wheel covers, fit bolt
→ Fig. 203 A first; position the wheel cover
and install the remaining bolts.
– Position the wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly with the wheel wrench.
– Lower the vehicle with the jack.
– Use the box spanner to tighten all the wheel
bolts securely → . Do not tighten the bolts in
clockwise or anticlockwise sequence. Tighten
them in diagonal sequence. 

248 Owner's Manual

 WARNING Maintenance
An incorrect torque or incorrectly handled
wheel bolts can lead to a loss of control of the Service
vehicle, cause accidents and serious injuries.
● Always keep all wheel bolts and threads in
the wheel hubs clean and free from oil and
Maintenance services and digital
grease. Wheel bolts must be easy to turn and maintenance and warranty
be tightened to the specified torque.
The vehicle data label on the back cover of this
Wheel bolts must be clean and able to turn instruction manual confirms the initial release or
freely. Never lubricate wheel bolts. delivery date, the delivery inspection and thus
the start of the warranty coverage for your vehi-
When changing wheels, if you notice that cle.
the bolts are corroded or worn, they must
be replaced before checking the tightening tor- For some markets the digital Maintenance and
que.  warranty is not available. In this case your
Volkswagen Dealership will be able to inform
you about its service and documentation.
Digital electronic registration of maintenance
After changing a wheel services performed
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter Service vouchers will be stored in the central sys-
on page 244. tem memory by the Volkswagen Dealership or
specialized company. Through this transparent
– Clean the tools as necessary and place them service history documentation, performed vehi-
back in the luggage compartment → page 194. cle maintenance work can be accessed at any
– Stow the spare wheel or the removed wheel time. Volkswagen recommends requesting, after
securely in the luggage compartment. each service performed, a printed proof of serv-
ice containing data on maintenance work stored
– The tightening torque of the wheel bolts in the system.
should be checked immediately with a torque
wrench With each new service, the previous proof of
service is replaced by an updated printout.
– The damaged wheel should be replaced as
soon as possible. Service
Digital Maintenance and warranty records the
WARNING
following information from your Volkswagen
After changing the wheel, always ensure that Dealership or specialist company:
the vehicle toolkit and spare wheel are properly
secured in the luggage compartment. – When a given service was performed.
– Whether a repair recommendation was given,
On vehicles with tyre pressure loss indica- as for example, whether the brake pads will
tor, the system needs to be reset after each have to be replaced soon.
wheel change → page 231. 
– Which components or fluids have been re-
newed.
– When your next service call will be due.

WARNING
Insufficient or not performed maintenance and
failure to observe the service intervals may
cause vehicle stops, traffic accidents, and seri-
25A.5L1.POL.20

ous injuries. 

Maintenance 249
● Have the maintenance work performed by an
authorized Volkswagen Dealership or quali-
fied workshop.

NOTICE
Volkswagen may not be held liable for damage to
the vehicle due to insufficient service or missing
parts.

Regular vehicle maintenance services not

only serve the purpose to maintain the val-
ue of the vehicle, but also contribute to opera-
tional and traffic safety. Servicing work should
therefore always be carried out in accordance
with the Volkswagen maintenance guidelines. 

250 Owner's Manual

 First service – predominant operation towing trailers or
transporting cargoes;
The servicing interval may be different according – vehicle operation to provide taxi services,
to the country. school transportation, deliveries, special serv-
ices (patrolling, escorting, ambulance, fire
Petrol engines trucks, military use) and/or similar applica-
Service based on time or mileage tions.
Oil Change Service These conditions particularly affect the follow-
ing parts:
The service is carried out in accordance with the
next servicing indicator, and according to which- – toothed belt;
ever occurs first: – dust and pollen filter
– after 1 year or every 10,000 km; – air filter,
– after 1 year or every 15,000 km. – engine oil.

TOTALFLEX Engine Your Volkswagen Dealership will inform you of

any eventual need to perform intermediary serv-
Service based on time or mileage
ices based on your vehicle driving conditions.
The service is carried out in accordance with the
The costs of Volkswagen services may vary ac-
next servicing indicator, and according to which-
cording to the vehicle model and equipment ver-
ever occurs first:
sion, as well as additional services and inspec-
– after 1 year or every 10,000 km.  tions eventually required. Your Volkswagen Deal-
ership will inform you of all costs (labour and ma-
terial) regarding Volkswagen maintenance serv-
ices. 
Information on the terms of use
The indicated service intervals are established
based on normal driving conditions. Service scopes
In case of adverse driving conditions, some in-
termediary services are required between each of Depending on the vehicle model/version, some of
the service intervals indicated. the scope items may not be available and/or be
applicable to the vehicle.
Adverse driving conditions include the following
cases: The service scopes include all the necessary
maintenance items to keep your vehicle in safe
– fuel with high sulphur content; condition for driving and the traffic (depending
– frequent driving at low engine speeds with in- on the conditions of use and the equipment of
tense traffic, with extended periods operating the vehicle such as for example, engine,transmis-
at idling speed ("stop-and-go"; urban traffic), sion or fluids). The maintenance service work is
split between inspection items and maintenance
– in short trajectories (below 8 km per day) or
items. You can consult your Volkswagen Dealer-
with the engine running below ideal tempera-
ship for a detailed overview of the necessary ac-
tures;
tivities .
– in urban routes with frequent stops;
– high ambient temperature associated to con- Inspection items
stant use of the air conditioning system Electric system
– frequent traffic in unpaved or dusty roads and – Battery: check
highways.;
– Horn: check
– predominant driving under environments with
– Lighting (interior and exterior): check
high levels of suspended particles (mining, ce-
25A.5L1.POL.20

ment, steelworks, marble, and saline factories, – Service interval display: reset 
etc.),

Maintenance 251
Engine / Gearbox There may be changes to the service scope for
– Poly V-belt: check technical reasons (continuous components devel-
opment). Volkswagen Dealerships are always up-
– Engine and engine compartment components
dated about innovations. 
(upper and lower parts): check
– Cooling system: check
– Exhaust system: check
– Power transmission and final drive system: Vehicle conservation
check
Running gear
– Coil springs and elastic stops: check
Guidelines for the conservation of
– Protective joint hoods: check
the vehicle
– Electric power steering: check Regular and expert care helps to maintain the
– Swivel joints/track rods: check value of the vehicle. Proper maintenance may al-
– Brake fluid level: check so be one of the requirements for the approval of
warranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint
– Brake pads/discs: check defects.
– Tyres: check
Suitable care products are available from
– Tyre pressure of all tyres: check Volkswagen Dealerships.
– Shock absorbers and brake system: check
Body WARNING
– Body: check for damages and corrosion Car care products can be toxic and hazardous.
Unsuitable care products and incorrect applica-
– Window wiper blades: check
tion of care products can cause accidents, se-
– Windscreen: check vere injuries, burns or poisoning.
– Underside of the vehicle: check ● Care products must be kept in its original
– Window wiping and washing system: check sealed container.
– Test drive: perform ● Read the manufacturer's instructions.
● Never store car care products in empty food
Maintenance items containers, bottles or any other non-original
In addition to the inspection items (depending on containers as people finding these containers
the use and the vehicle's equipment, such as en- may not know that they contain care prod-
gine, power transmission or fluids), other mainte- ucts.
nance items may have to be performed on your ● Keep children away from care products.
vehicle. These items must be looked after based
on the time and/or mileage. ● The products may generate harmful fumes
during use. Such products should therefore
– Additives: change/fill up only be used outside or in well-ventilated
– Toothed belt/toothed belt tensioning roller: spaces.
check/ replace ● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail
– Poly V-belt: replace varnish remover or other volatile fluids to
– Air cleaner: replace wash, clean or care for your vehicle. These
substances are toxic and highly flammable.
– Fuel filter: replace (only TOTALFLEX vehicles)
– Brake fluid: replace WARNING
– Dust and pollen filter: replace Incorrect care and cleaning of vehicle parts can
– Engine: replace filter/oil impair the safety features of the vehicle and
– Spark plugs: replace thus cause serious injuries.
● Vehicle parts must be cleaned according to
the manufacturer's instructions. 

252 Owner's Manual

 ● Only use approved or recommended cleaning High pressure washing machine
products. Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-
turer when cleaning your vehicle using a high-
NOTICE pressure cleaner. This applies in particular to the
Cleaning agents that contain solvents attack the pressure and spraying distance → .
material and can cause damage. Washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner
may cause water to enter the vehicle. Avoid using
NOTICE high-pressure cleaners at distances lower than
30 cm from the vehicle's surface. Using a high-
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust from
pressure cleaner of over 8,000 kPa (80 bar) could
a dry vehicle surface. Additionally, never use dry
damage or remove paintwork or adhesives.
cloths or sponges in order to prevent risking the
vehicle paint or windows. Dirt, mud and dust Maintain sufficient distance to soft materials
must be softened with water before they are re- such as rubber hoses, insulation, and the park
moved. distance control sensors. Parking distance con-
trol sensors are located in the rear bumper → .
Environmentally-friendly care products
should be used. Never use concentrated jet nozzles or dirt blast-
ers → .
Leftover car care products should not be
disposed of with common waste. Read the Washing the car by hand
manufacturer's instructions.  When washing by hand, first soften the dirt with
plenty of water and rinse off as well as possible.
Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a
Washing of the vehicle glove or a brush, using only light pressure. Start
with the roof and work from the top to the bot-
The longer substances such as insects, bird drop- tom. Use a shampoo for very persistent dirt only.
pings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial de- The sponge or glove should be wrung out thor-
posits, tar, soot or road salt and other corrosive oughly at regular intervals.
materials remain on the vehicle, the more dam-
age they do to the paintwork. High temperatures Clean the wheels, sill panels etc. last. Use a dif-
and strong sunlight further intensify the corro- ferent sponge for this purpose.
sive effect. The underside of the vehicle must al-
Vehicle paintwork conservation
so be cleaned thoroughly on a regular basis.
Waxing protects the paintwork. As soon as water
Car washes no longer forms visible drops on the clean paint-
Please observe the signs on the automatic car work it is time to protect it again with a good car
wash. Before using an automatic car wash, take wax.
the usual precautions, such as closing all win- Even when a wax solution is used regularly in the
dows and folding in the exterior mirrors, in order car wash, Volkswagen recommends protecting
to avoid vehicle damages. Inform the car wash the paint with a coat of hard wax at least twice a
operator if there are special parts on your vehicle year.
such as spoilers, radio aerials → .
Polish the vehicle's paintwork
The paint is so hard-wearing that the car can
normally be washed without problems in an au- Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its
tomatic car wash. However, the effect on the shine, and the gloss cannot be brought back by
paint depends to a large extent on the design of applying wax.
the car wash. Volkswagen recommends the use The car must be waxed after polishing if the pol-
of car washes without brushes. ish used does not contain wax compounds to seal
To remove any wax residues from the windows the paint. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

and to prevent windscreen wipers from rubbing,

please follow the below guidelines → page 255,
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors.

Maintenance 253
 WARNING ● Vehicle washing under cold weather: if the ve-
hicle is rinsed with a hose, do not direct the
Parts of the vehicle with sharp edges may
water into the lock cylinders or the gaps round
cause injuries.
the doors, boot, or bonnet. The locks and seals
● Protect your hands and arms from cuts on could freeze.
sharp parts, for example when cleaning the
underbody or the inside of the wheel hous- NOTICE
ings.
Before using an automatic washing system, the
following points must mandatorily be checked to
WARNING
prevent damages to the vehicle:
After the car has been washed, the braking ef-
● Make sure that the gap between the guide rails
fect could set in later than normal and extend
in the car wash is sufficient to prevent dam-
the braking distance as the brake discs and
ages in wheels and tyres!
brake pads will be wet, or iced up in winter.
● Check that the car wash is tall and wide
● “Dry the brakes and eliminate ice” through
enough for your vehicle.
careful braking manoeuvres. Proceed with-
out putting other drivers at risk or failing to ● Fold in the exterior mirrors.
abide by legal requirements. ● In order to prevent damage to the paintwork
on the engine compartment cover, fold the
WARNING windscreen wipers back onto the windscreen
after drying the wiper blades. Do not let them
Incorrect use of a high-pressure cleaner can
drop!
cause visible and invisible long-term damage to
tyres and other materials. This could lead to ac- ● Lock the boot lid to avoid unexpected opening
cidents and severe injuries. in the automatic car wash.
● Maintain sufficient distance between the
nozzle and the tyres. NOTICE
● Never clean the tyres with concentrated jet ● In order to avoid damage, painted parts with a
nozzles (“dirt blasters”). Even at large spray- matt finish, plastic parts, headlight lenses and
ing distances and short cleaning times, visi- the tail lights should not be treated with polish
ble and invisible damage can occur to the or hard wax.
tyres. ● Do not polish the paint if the vehicle is in a
sandy or dusty environment or if it is dirty.
NOTICE
The vehicle should only be washed in spe-
● Water temperature should not be higher than cially provided wash bays. This prevents
+60 °C. toxic, oil, grease and fuel laden waste water from
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight in entering the sewage system. In some regions,
order to avoid damage to the vehicle paint- washing vehicles anywhere else may be prohibi-
work. ted. 
● The parking distance control sensors in the
bumpers must be clean and free of ice to guar-
antee correct function. When cleaning with
pressure hoses and steam cleaners, the sen-
sors should only be sprayed briefly, always
maintaining a distance of over 30 cm.
● Never clean with hard sponges, rough kitchen
sponges or similar products as these can dam-
age the surface.
● Do not clean windows that are iced over or
covered in snow with a high-pressure cleaner.
● Never clean the headlights with a dry cloth or
sponge. Soapy water is the preferred choice.

254 Owner's Manual

 Cleaning and conserving the Remove the snow
Use a small brush to remove snow from the win-
exterior of the vehicle
dows and exterior mirrors.

Remove the ice

The best method for removing ice is to use a de-
icer spray. If you use an ice scraper, do not move
it to and from, but push it in one direction only.
Moving the ice scraper backwards can cause dirt
to scratch the window.

Clean chrome and aluminium parts

– Use a damp, clean, lint-free and soft cloth to
clean the surfaces.
Fig. 204 Between the engine compartment and the – For heavy soiling use a special solvent-free
windscreen: plenum chamber (schematic represen- cleaning product.
tation).
– Polish the chrome and aluminium trim parts
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors using a soft and dry cloth.
Moisten the windows and exterior mirrors with Cleaning steel wheels
standard alcohol-based glass cleaner.
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust
Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois caught in the wheel. Steel wheels should there-
leather or a lint-free cloth. Chamois leathers fore be cleaned regularly with a separate sponge.
which have been used on painted surfaces have
grease residues and are therefore not suitable for Any damage to the paint on steel wheels should
use on glass surfaces. be touched up before the metal starts to rust.

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to Caring for and cleaning alloy wheels
clean off rubber, oil, grease and silicone deposits Wash grit and brake dust from alloy wheels ap-
→ . proximately every 2 weeks. Then use an acid-free
detergent to clean the wheels. Volkswagen rec-
Remove wax residues ommends applying a hard wax compound to the
Car washes and care products could leave wax wheels approximately every 3 months.
deposits on the glass surfaces. Wax residue can
only be removed using a special cleaning product If the brake dust is not removed regularly, the al-
or cleaning cloths. Wax residues can affect the loy wheel could be damaged.
window wiper system's performance, in addition Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy
to causing irregular movement or excessive wheels. Car polish or other abrasive agents
noises. Volkswagen recommends using a glass should not be used on the wheels.
cleaning cloth to remove wax deposits from the
If the protective coating is damaged (e.g. by
windows and exterior mirrors each time the vehi-
stone impact) the damaged area should be re-
cle is washed.
paired immediately.
A window cleaner specifically for removing wax
will stop the blades rubbing if added to the win- Conserve the rubber seals
dow washer water. Dilute the cleaner as instruc- The rubber seals on the doors, windows etc. will
ted. Grease removing cleaners will not remove seal better, remain flexible and last longer if they
wax deposits → . are treated at regular intervals with a suitable
Special cleaners, glass cleaners and glass clean- care product.
ing cloths are available from Volkswagen Dealer- Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the
ships. rubber seals before applying the product. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Maintenance 255
Defrost the door lock cylinders Sensors, rear view camera lens
Volkswagen recommends the use of genuine Clean the area in front of the sensors or camera
Volkswagen spray with lubricating and anti-cor- with a soft cloth and a cleaning product free of
rosive properties to de-ice the lock cylinders. solvents. Observe the installation locations
→ page 8.
Protection of the underside of the vehicle
The underside of the vehicle is coated to protect WARNING
it from corrosion and damage. The protective Dirty or misted windows reduce visibility and
coating on the underside of the vehicle could be increase the risk of accidents and severe inju-
damaged when driving. Volkswagen recommends ries.
therefore that the protective coating on the un-
● Only drive when you have a clear view
derside of the vehicle and on the running gear
through all windows.
should be checked regularly and repaired if nec-
essary. ● Ice, snow and mist must be removed from
the inside and outside of all windows.
Hollow cavities
All hollow spaces exposed to corrosion are facto- WARNING
ry-fitted with long-lasting protective coating. All work in the engine compartment carries the
Such coating does not require maintenance. If, risk of injury, scalding, accidents and fire!
due to extremely high temperatures, a small ● Before carrying out any work make sure that
amount of wax is melted, it may be removed us- you are familiar with the requisite proce-
ing a plastic spatula and benzene. dures and general safety regulations
→ page 213, Safety guidelines for work in the
Clean the engine compartment engine compartment.
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is ● Volkswagen recommends having the work
a hazardous area → page 213. carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership.
The engine compartment must be cleaned by a
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. An CAUTION
incorrect cleaning procedure could possibly re- Underseal and anti-corrosion coatings may ig-
move corrosion protection and damage electrical nite on the hot exhaust system or on other hot
components, among others. Additionally, water engine parts.
could enter the vehicle interior directly via the
● Never apply underseal or anti-corrosion
plenum chamber → .
coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
If the engine compartment is very dirty, we rec- verter, heat shields or other vehicle compo-
ommend that you always go to a qualified work- nents that become hot.
shop to have it cleaned following correct proce-
dures. Volkswagen recommends using a NOTICE
Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose.
● Properly cleaning the windows enhances the
Plenum chamber window wiper system's performance and pres-
– The plenum chamber is located in the engine ervation.
compartment between the windscreen and the ● Never combine the recommended cleaning
engine and has a perforated cover → Fig. 204. agents with other products in the window
Air from outside is drawn in from the plenum washer fluid reservoir. This may cause the
chamber and is passed into the vehicle interior components to coagulate and, as a result, clog
via the heating and fresh air or the air condi- the window wiper nozzles.
tioning system.
● Never use warm or hot water to remove snow
– Leaves and other loose items must be re- and ice from windows and mirrors. This may
moved from the cover of the plenum chamber cause the glass to crack!
at regular intervals using a vacuum cleaner or
● Never use ice scrapers on mirror lens, other-
by hand.
wise the chromed-coated surface will be
scratched. 

256 Owner's Manual

 ● The heating elements for the rear window Cleaning and conserving the
heater are located on the inside of the rear
interior of the vehicle
window. Never apply stickers over the heating
elements and never clean the inside of the rear Modern fabrics, such as dark denim, are often not
window with corrosive or acidic detergents or colourfast. Light-coloured upholstery (soft mate-
any other chemicals. rials or leather) is particularly sensitive to stain-
ing caused by these fabrics, even if you are care-
NOTICE ful. This is not caused by a fault in the upholstery,
To ensure that the chrome and aluminium parts but by the non-colourfast nature of the gar-
are not damaged: ments.
● Do not clean or polish in direct sunlight. Leaving stains, dirt and other deposits on the
● Do not clean or polish in sandy or dusty envi- surface of vehicle components and cloth seat
ronments. covers for a long time can make it difficult to
● Do not use any abrasive care products (e.g. clean and treat them. Stains, dirt and deposits
cream cleaners). may become impossible to remove, particularly if
left for a long time.
● Never clean with hard sponges, rough kitchen
sponges or similar products. Seat covers
● Do not polish dirty surfaces. Please note the following for handling and con-
● Do not use solvent-based cleaning products. servation of the seat covers:
● Do not use any hard wax. – Before getting into the vehicle, close all Velcro
fasteners that could touch the cloth seat cov-
NOTICE ers and fabric trims. Open Velcro fasteners can
The wheel covers may also have an additional cause damage to cloth seat covers and fabric
varnish finish and should not be treated using trims.
chrome based preservatives or aluminium polish. – Avoid the direct contact of sharp-edged items
Regular paint care and standard cleaning prod- and accessories to the upholstery and fabric
ucts must be used instead. trims in order to prevent damage. Accessories
include zips, studs, rhinestones on clothing or
NOTICE belts.
Lock de-icers which contain substances which – Dust and grit in the pores and seams should be
dissolve grease may cause the door lock cylinder removed regularly so that no permanent dam-
to rust. age is caused to the surface of the seats by
scratching.
NOTICE – Always check whether garments are colourfast
to prevent damage to the upholstery. This is
Water that has entered the plenum chamber via
especially important for light-coloured uphols-
a manual process (e.g. from a high-pressure
tery.
cleaner) can cause considerable damage to the
vehicle. Cleaning paddings, fabric and NT - Non
microfiber fabric
Before removing wax with benzene, comply
with applicable safety and environment – Please read and follow the instructions, notes
standards regarding such product. and warnings on the package before using
cleaning products.
Considering that when washing the engine, – Upholstery, fabric trims, NT - non-microfiber
toxic waste water containing oil, grease and fabric trims, and carpeting must be regularly
fuel may enter the sewerage system, the conta- cleaned with a vacuum cleaner (brush tip).
minated water needs to be purified by an oil sep-
arator. Therefore, the engine compartment – Do not use high-pressure cleaners, steam
25A.5L1.POL.20

should only be washed in extreme cases and in cleaners or coolant spray. 

appropriate locations. 

Maintenance 257
– We recommend that you use a soft sponge or Natural leather is a sensitive material.
commercially available lint-free microfiber
– Use a leather cream with sunlight protection
cloth for cleaning jobs → .
and impregnation properties on a regular basis
– Clean NT - non-microfiber fabric surfaces with and always after cleaning. The cream nourish-
a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth or a es the leather, keeps it breathable and supple
commercially available lint-free microfiber and replaces lost moisture. It also protects the
cloth → . surface.
General surface soiling of the upholstery and fab- – Leather should be cleaned every two to three
ric trim can be cleaned with standard foam months to remove fresh stains.
cleaners. – Treat the leather with a special leather care
If the upholstery and fabric trims are generally product every six months → .
heavily soiled, consult a Volkswagen Dealership – Always apply cleaning and care products ex-
for information on suitable cleaning methods be- tremely sparingly and always use a dry cotton
fore attempting any cleaning procedure. Take the or woollen cloth that is lint free. Do not apply
vehicle to a specialist cleaning company, if nec- cleaning and care products directly to the
essary. leather.
– Remove fresh stains such as ink, ball-point pen
Padding, fabric and NT - Non microfiber fabric
ink, lipstick, shoe cream etc. as quickly as pos-
stain treatment
sible.
When cleaning stains, it may be necessary to
clean the entire surface and not just the stain it- – Look after the pigment. Use a special coloured
self. This particularly applies if the surface shows leather cream to refresh the colour where nec-
general signs of wear. The cleaned area could essary.
otherwise be lighter than the surrounding area. If – Wipe off excess with a soft cloth.
in doubt, consult a specialist cleaning company.
Cleaning natural leather covers
Water-based stains (e.g. coffee, fruit juice or Volkswagen recommends that you use a damp
soda). cotton or wool cloth for general cleaning purpo-
First, clean the stain as quick as possible ses.
with a dry and absorbent cloth, to prevent
the liquid from penetrating the upholstery. Do not let the water soak through the leather or
For more difficult stains, moisten the soak into the seams.
sponge with an atomizer and clean the Please observe the following notes before clean-
stain with circular motions. Clean with a ing the leather upholstery → page 257, Cleaning
dry and absorbent cloth. paddings, fabric and NT - Non microfiber fabric.
Stubborn stains, e.g. chocolate, make-up. Only
Stubborn stains – Spread the smooth soap solu-
use detergents that have been approved by
tion1) with a twisted cloth. Absorb by
Volkswagen. If necessary, take the vehicle
pressing lightly with a dry cloth.
to a specialist cleaning company.
Water-based stains, such as coffee, tee, juice,
Oily stains, e.g. oil, lipstick. Only use detergents
blood, etc.
that have been approved by Volkswagen. If
Remove the stains while they are still
necessary, take the vehicle to a specialist
moist with an absorbent cloth. Use a
cleaning company.
cleaning product appropriate for already
Conservation and treatment of natural leather dried stains → . 
covers
Please contact a Volkswagen Dealership or quali-
fied workshop if you have any questions on
cleaning and caring for the leather equipment in
your vehicle.

1) Smooth soap solution: two teaspoons of neutral soap in one litre of water.

258 Owner's Manual

 Fat based stains, such as oil, lipstick, etc. Re- Seat belts must never be removed for cleaning
move the stains while they are still moist purposes.
with an absorbent cloth. Use a cleaning
– Remove dirt with a soft brush → .
product appropriate for stains that have
not yet penetrated the surface → . – Carefully pull the dirty seat belt right out and
Special stains, such as biro, felt tip pen, nail Dry leave it out.
varnish, emulsion paint, shoe polish, etc. – Clean the seat belt with a mild1) soap solution.
with a dry and absorbent cloth. Clean with – Allow the seat belt fabric to dry completely.
a special stain remover for leather. – Do not allow the seat belt to roll up until it has
dried completely.
Cleaning vinyl covers
Please observe the following notes before clean- WARNING
ing vinyl covers → page 257, Cleaning paddings,
fabric and NT - Non microfiber fabric. Incorrect care and cleaning of vehicle parts can
impair the safety features of the vehicle and
Only use water and neutral soap to clean vinyl thus cause serious injuries.
covers.
● Vehicle parts must be cleaned according to
Cleaning stowage compartments and drink the manufacturer's instructions.
holders ● Only use approved or recommended cleaning
Some stowage compartments and cup holders products.
have a removable rubber insert in the base.
WARNING
– Moisten a clean, lint-free cloth with water and
clean the parts. Cleaning agents that contain solvents cause the
surface of the airbag modules to become po-
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, rous. In case of an accident that triggers the
use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning airbag, loose plastic parts can cause serious in-
product. jury.
Cleaning the ashtray ● Never clean the dash panel or the airbag cov-
– Remove and empty the ashtray. ers with cleansers that contain solvents.
– Wipe the ashtray with a cloth.
WARNING
To clean the snuffer, use a toothpick or similar Check the condition of all seat belts regularly.
object to pick out the ashes. Damaged belt bands or any other seat belt
parts must be removed and replaced immedi-
Conserving and cleaning plastic parts,
ately by a Volkswagen Dealership. Damaged
wooden decorative elements and the dash
seat belts are extremely dangerous and can
panel
cause severe or fatal injuries.
– Moisten a clean, lint-free cloth with water and
● Never use chemical cleaning agents on the
clean the parts.
seat belts or their components. Additionally,
– Treat plastic parts (inside and outside the vehi- seat belts may not come into contact with
cle) and the dashboard with a special solvent- corrosive fluids, solvents or sharp objects.
free plastic cleaning and care product ap- This can considerably weaken the bands.
proved by Volkswagen → .
● After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com-
– Treat wooden trims with a mild soap solu- pletely before rolling them up. Otherwise the
tion1). automatic belt retractors could become
damaged and thus impair their function.
Cleaning the seatbelts
● Never let any foreign bodies or liquids enter
The automatic belt will not be able to roll back
the seat belt buckle slot. This could prevent
properly if there is dirt on the belt and thus pre-
the belt buckle and seat belt from working
25A.5L1.POL.20

vent the seat belt from working properly.

properly. 

1) Smooth soap solution: two teaspoons of neutral soap in one litre of water.

Maintenance 259
● Never attempt to repair, modify or remove NOTICE
the seat belts yourself.
● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,
● Damaged seat belts must be replaced imme- spot removers or similar products on leather.
diately with new seat belts approved by
● A stain cannot be removed if it has been left
Volkswagen for your vehicle type. Seat belts
on the leather for a long time and has penetra-
subjected to stress and stretched during an
ted the surface.
accident must be replaced by a Volkswagen
Dealership. Replacement may be necessary ● Spilt liquids should be cleaned immediately us-
even if there is no apparent damage. The belt ing an absorbent cloth as the leather surface
anchorage should also be checked. and seams absorb liquids quickly.
● Protect the leather from excessive sun expo-
NOTICE sure to prevent fading.
● Cleaning agents that contain solvents attack
the material and can cause irreparable dam- NOTICE
ages. Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot
● Stains, dirt, and other deposits with corrosive removers or similar products on vinyl. These may
components and solvents may cause irrepara- cause the material to become hard and brittle
ble damages to the material, even in case of prematurely.
short exposure periods.
● Stains, dirt and other deposits must be re- NOTICE
moved as quickly as possible and not allowed Some car fresheners have substances in its
to dry in. chemical formula that may damage the structure,
● To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be surface and paintwork of the vehicle's internal
removed by a specialist cleaning company. linings.

Suitable care products are available from a

NOTICE Volkswagen Dealership.
● Do not use steam cleaners as the steam push-
es the soiling into the fabric and sets it. Volkswagen recommends cleaning stained
upholstery in a qualified workshop.
● High-pressure cleaners and coolant sprays can
damage the upholstery. Slight colour changes of the natural leather
covers due to use are normal. 
NOTICE
● Soft-bristle brushes should be used on carpets
and mats only! Other surfaces could be dam-
aged by brushes. Accessories, modifications,
● When washing paste or fine detergent solu- repairs and part replacement
tions are applied with a damp cloth or sponge,
visible edges may appear on the upholstery
once it has dried. These edges are usually diffi- Accessories and spare parts
cult or even impossible to remove.
Volkswagen recommends that you seek advice
NOTICE from a Volkswagen Dealership before purchasing
● The NT - non-microfiber fabric cannot be accessories, spare parts or service fluids. For ex-
drenched in any circumstances. ample, if the vehicle is to be retrofitted with ac-
cessories or if parts have to be renewed.
● Do not use leather care products, solvents,
Volkswagen Dealerships can recommend acces-
wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or sim-
sories, parts and service fluids which are suitable
ilar products on NT - non-microfiber fabric.
for your requirements.
● Do not use brushes if cleaning with liquids.
This could damage the surface of the material. Volkswagen strongly recommends that you only
use approved Volkswagen Accessories and
Volkswagen Genuine Parts. These parts and 

260 Owner's Manual

 accessories have been specially tested by ● Only use wheel/tyre combinations which
Volkswagen for suitability, reliability and safety. have been approved by Volkswagen for your
Volkswagen Dealerships are also qualified to per- vehicle type. 
form proper installation procedures.
Despite constant monitoring of the market,
products not approved by Volkswagen cannot be
evaluated by Volkswagen in terms of their credi-
Repairs and technical modifications
bility, safety and suitability for use in the vehicle.
Repairs and modifications must always be car-
Volkswagen can therefore assume no responsi-
ried out according to Volkswagen specifications
bility for these parts, even if they have been ap-
→ !
proved by an official testing agency or are cov-
ered by an official approval certificate. Unauthorised modifications to the electronic
components or software in the vehicle may cause
WARNING faults As the electronic components are linked
Incorrectly performed repairs or modifications together in networks, these faults may indirectly
to your vehicle can impair the effectiveness of affect the working of other systems. This can se-
the airbags, cause operating failures, accidents riously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of
and fatal injuries. components, and also compromise the vehicle's
operating function.
● Never secure or mount objects such as cup
holders, telephone holders and GPS (global Volkswagen Dealerships cannot be held liable for
positioning system) on or next to the airbag any damage caused by technical modifications
covers or within the deployment zone of the and/or work performed incorrectly.
airbag. The authorised Volkswagen repairer cannot be
● Items which are either on or next to the air- held liable for any damage caused by technical
bag module covers or are in the deployment modifications and repairs performed incorrectly.
zone of the airbags can cause severe or even Such damages are also not covered by the
fatal injuries should the airbags be activated. Volkswagen warranty.
Volkswagen recommends that all repairs and
WARNING technical modifications be performed by an au-
Unsuitable spare parts and accessories as well thorised Volkswagen Dealership with Volkswagen
as incorrectly carried out work, modifications Genuine Parts.
and repairs can lead to damage to the vehicle,
accidents and serious injuries. WARNING
● Volkswagen strongly recommends that you Incorrect repairs and modifications can cause
only use approved Volkswagen accessories functional problems and damage to the vehicle
and Volkswagen genuine parts. These parts and impair the effectiveness of the driver assist
and accessories have been specially tested systems. This could lead to accidents and se-
by Volkswagen for suitability, reliability and vere injuries.
safety. ● Repairs and modifications to your vehicle
● Repairs and modifications to your vehicle should only be carried out by a Volkswagen
should only be carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership. 
Dealership. Volkswagen Dealerships have the
necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, repair
information and qualified personnel.
● Never fit parts to your vehicle that are in any
Repairs and limitations in the
way different from the factory-fitted parts. airbag system
● Never secure or mount objects such as cup
Repairs and modifications must always be car-
holders, telephone holders and GPS (global
ried out according to Volkswagen specifications
25A.5L1.POL.20

positioning system) on or next to the airbag

→ ! 
covers or within the deployment zone of the
airbag.

Maintenance 261
Modifications and repairs to the front bumper, WARNING
the doors, the front seats, the roof or the body-
work should be carried out by a Volkswagen Modifications to the vehicle's suspension, in-
Dealership. System components and airbag sys- cluding the use of unsuitable tyre/wheel com-
tem sensors can be located on these vehicle binations not approved by Volkswagen may
components. cause the airbag system to work differently and
increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries in
If you work on the airbag system or remove and the event of an accident.
install parts of the system when performing oth-
● Never install any components in the suspen-
er repair work, parts of the airbag system may be
sion system that do not have the same char-
damaged. The consequence may be that, in the
acteristics as the original factory-fitted com-
event of an accident, the airbag inflates incor-
ponents.
rectly or does not inflate at all.
● Never use tyre/wheel combinations that
Regulations must be observed to ensure that the have not been approved by Volkswagen.
effectiveness of the airbags is not reduced and
that removed parts do not cause any injuries or Airbag system parts must never be reused
environmental pollution. Volkswagen Dealerships in case of vehicle or component scrapping.
are familiar with such requirements. All applicable environment disposal standards
Any modifications to the vehicle's suspension must be followed, in addition to other safety
could prevent the airbag system from working standards in effect. Volkswagen Dealerships are
properly during a collision. For example, using familiar with such requirements. 
tyre/ wheel combinations which have not been
approved by Volkswagen, lowering the vehicle,
making modifications to the suspension rate in- Retrofitting two-way radios
cluding work on the springs, struts and shock ab-
sorbers can affect the reaction of airbag sensors You will need an external aerial to use a two-way
sending information to the electronic control radio in the vehicle.
unit. Some alterations to the suspension springs
can, for instance, cause changes to the suspen- Any retrofit installation of electrical or electronic
sion and consequently affect the reaction of the equipment in the vehicle will affect its vehicle
sensors. This can lead to the airbag system being type approval. Under certain circumstances, this
triggered in collision scenarios where it normally can negate the type approval for the vehicle.
would not be triggered had no modifications Volkswagen has approved the vehicle for use
been made to the suspension. Other modifica- with two-way radios providing the following
tions can affect the reaction measured by the conditions are observed:
sensors, preventing the airbag system from being
triggered when it should have been. – Correct installation of external aerial.
– Maximum transmitting power of 10 watts.
WARNING
An external aerial is needed to give the equip-
Incorrect repairs and modifications can cause ment its optimal range.
functional problems and damage to the vehicle
Should a two way radio need to be installed with
and impair the effectiveness of the airbag sys-
a transmission power of more than 10 W, contact
tem. This could lead to accidents and severe in-
a specialized company. A qualified workshop is
juries.
familiar with the technical options for retrofit-
● Repairs and modifications to your vehicle ting. Volkswagen recommends using a
should only be carried out by a Volkswagen Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose.
Dealership.
Please observe legislation as well as the instruc-
● Airbag modules cannot be repaired. They
tions and information given in the operating
must be replaced.
manuals for radio equipment. 
● Never use recycled airbag components or
components that have been taken from end-
of-life vehicles in your vehicle.

262 Owner's Manual

 WARNING Volkswagen recommends adding the reprogram-
ming coverage to the digital warranty and main-
If radio equipment is not secured or not proper- tenance at a Volkswagen Dealership.
ly secured in the vehicle, it could be flung
though the interior during a sudden driving or Information about possible reprogramming can
braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an acci- be obtained from Volkswagen Dealerships.
dent. This can cause injuries.
Reading the vehicle fault memory
● While the vehicle is in motion, always secure
A diagnosis interface for reading the fault memo-
two-way radios properly outside the airbag
ries is located in the vehicle interior → . Elec-
deployment zones or stow them away safely.
tronic control unit status and operating data is
stored in the fault memory. Additional informa-
CAUTION tion on stored data can be obtained from your
If two-way radios that are not connected to an Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop.
external aerial are used, electromagnetic radia-
The diagnostics connection is located on the
tion in the vehicle could exceed limit values and
driver's side footwell, near the fuse box.
thus be a health hazard for drivers and other
vehicle occupants. This also applies to external The fault memory should only be read and reset
aerials which have not been correctly installed. by a Volkswagen Dealership.
● Two-way radios should only be used in the After correcting faults, the respective data is de-
vehicle if an external aerial is properly con- leted from the fault memory. Other memory con-
nected.  tents are successfully updated.

WARNING
Improper use of the diagnostics connection
Information stored in control units
may lead to operating faults, in addition to se-
Your vehicle is factory fitted with electronic con- vere accidents and injuries.
trol units which are responsible for engine and ● Never read the faulty memory through the
transmission management. The control units also diagnostics connection yourself.
monitor the function of the exhaust system and ● The diagnostics connection must only be
the airbags. read by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
These electronic control units continuously eval- workshop. 
uate data relevant to the vehicle while the vehi-
cle is being driven. Only this data will be stored if
there are any faults recorded or any deviations
from the specified values. This is generally dis-
Using a mobile telephone in the
played by the indicator lamps on the instrument vehicle without a connection to the
cluster. external aerial
Special units are required to read and evaluate
During a telephone call and when in standby
data stored in the control units.
mode, mobile telephones transmit and receive
Under no circumstances do such control units re- radio waves, also known as high-frequency ener-
cord conversations held inside the vehicle. gy. Current scientific literature warns us that ra-
dio waves can be harmful to human beings if
Reprogramming control units they exceed certain limits. Government agencies
All data for the control of components is initially and international committees have introduced
stored in the control units. Some convenience threshold values and guidelines to ensure that
functions, such as lane change flash, single door electromagnetic radiation produced by mobile
unlocking and displays, can be reprogrammed telephones does not pose a hazard to health.
using special workshop equipment. If the con- However, there is no proven scientific evidence
venience functions are reprogrammed, the de-
25A.5L1.POL.20

that demonstrates that cordless telephones are

scriptions in your vehicle wallet will no longer absolutely safe. 
correspond with the original functions.

Maintenance 263
For this reason, some experts are calling for a WARNING
precautionary use of mobile telephones through
the application of measures which reduce the If a mobile phone is not secured or not properly
level of personal exposure to electromagnetic ra- secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though
diation. the interior during a sudden driving or braking
manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. This
If a mobile telephone which is not connected to can cause injuries.
the vehicle's external aerial is used inside the ve-
● Mobile telephones, other devices and tele-
hicle, the level of electromagnetic radiation could
phone accessories such as telephone holders,
be higher than when the mobile telephone is
notepads and GPS (global positioning sys-
connected to an integrated aerial or any other
tem) must always be secured properly out-
external aerial.
side of the airbag deployment zones or be
If the vehicle is fitted with a suitable hands-free stowed in a safe place whilst the vehicle is in
unit which enables the use of innumerable addi- motion.
tional functions of Bluetooth® compatible mobile
telephones, this will comply with legal require- WARNING
ments in many countries which permit the use of
If mobile telephones or two-way radios that are
a mobile telephone in a vehicle only if a hands-
not connected to an external aerial are used,
free unit is used.
electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could
Mobile telephones must be located in a suitable exceed limit values and thus be a health hazard
telephone holder or be stored securely in the ve- for drivers and other vehicle occupants. This al-
hicle. If a telephone holder is used it must be se- so applies to external aerials which have not
curely attached to the base plate. This is the only been correctly installed.
way to ensure that the mobile telephone is se- ● Maintain a minimum distance of 20 centime-
curely attached to the dashboard and always tres between the mobile phone's antenna
within reach of the driver. and the heart pacemaker, since the former
If the mobile telephone is connected to a tele- may interfere with the latter.
phone aerial integrated in the vehicle or to an ex- ● Do not carry a mobile telephone in your
ternal telephone aerial, the electromagnetic radi- breast pocket above a pacemaker.
ation generated by the telephone that could af-
● The mobile telephone must be switched off
fect the human body is reduced. Moreover, it im-
immediately if there is a suspicion of inter-
proves the quality of the signal.
ference with a pacemaker or other medical
If a mobile telephone is used in the vehicle interi- devices. 
or without this hands-free system, it is not safely
secured in the vehicle and also not connected to
the vehicle's external telephone aerial. Further-
more, the mobile telephone is not being charged
in the telephone holder. It is also likely that the
telephone connection will be disrupted and the
signal strength will be poor.
A mobile telephone should only be used in the
vehicle if it is connected to a hands-free unit.
Volkswagen recommends the use of an external
aerial when using a mobile telephone in the vehi-
cle.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth ® SIG, Inc.

264 Owner's Manual

 Consumer information After conducting due body repair services, your
Volkswagen Dealership will confirm due warranty
coverage for corrosion perforations in the re-
Volkswagen warranty paired area. 

Volkswagen Dealership Warranty

General information
Volkswagen Dealerships provide a warranty
against manufacturing defects for the vehicles Volkswagen offers one of the largest and most
sold by them. efficient Dealership Network to assist your vehi-
Volkswagen Dealerships provide a warranty cle.
against manufacturing defects for new vehicles. Volkswagen Dealerships are equipped with cut-
Please refer to your purchase agreement for ting-edge equipment and tools designed espe-
more information on warranty terms and condi- cially for your vehicle, in addition to highly-quali-
tions. fied technical personnel and a wide range of ve-
hicle parts.
For additional information, please contact your
Volkswagen Dealership. All Volkswagen Dealerships abide by high-end
standards recommended by the Factory. These
The warranty does not cover natural wearing, include Service instructions, which ensure all re-
damages caused by abusive vehicle use, improper pair activities are carried out based on optimal
maintenance, or unauthorized modifications. quality standards and in a timely fashion, guaran-
If your vehicle is not operating properly, please teeing appropriate and safe vehicle conditions.
contact the nearest Volkswagen Dealership.  Volkswagen Dealerships are clearly prepared to
assist your vehicle. Make sure you don't miss out
on all of these amenities. 
Body warranty
Volkswagen Dealerships grant vehicles they sell
a warranty against puncture corrosion on the Additional service offers
body.
In addition to the warranty terms for new
Volkswagen vehicles, Volkswagen Dealerships al- Mandatory inspection services
so grant on the vehicles they sell – according to
the purchase contract– a warranty against perfo- Depending on local laws, the vehicle must be
rating body corrosion over a period of time limi- submitted to periodic mandatory inspections.
ted to 6 years. In several countries, vehicles must be periodically
In case such defects are eventually identified, submitted to inspections conducted by compe-
they will be fully repaired by any Volkswagen tent authorities, duly evidencing its effective and
Dealership free of charge. safe traffic operation and/or exhaust system con-
ditions.
The warranty is voided in the following cases:
Volkswagen Dealerships are aware of all manda-
– defects result from external influences or lack tory inspections and duly qualified to perform
of proper vehicle maintenance; or such verification services, along with an inspec-
– any body defects are not repaired in a timely tion service. This will save you time and money.
fashion, as per the Factory's instructions; or They will indicate aspects that require special at-
– corrosion perforations result from noncompli- tention in order to prevent your vehicle from be-
ance with the manufacturer's instructions re- ing submitted to new inspections due to faults. 
garding body repairs.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Consumer information 265

Volkswagen® Genuine Parts In addition, Volkswagen Dealerships offer all ap-
propriate products to maintain and care for your
Volkswagen® Genuine Parts are particularly de- vehicle. 
signed for your vehicle and approved by
Volkswagen, especially regarding safety meas-
ures. These parts accurately comply with Factory Information stickers and
specifications regarding type, measurements,
and materials. Volkswagen® Genuine Parts are plates
the most suitable for your vehicle. Therefore, we
recommend always using Volkswagen® Genuine Safety certificates, stickers and plates containing
Parts. Volkswagen does not guarantee the relia- important information on operating the vehicle
bility, safety, and suitability of non-original parts. are factory-fitted in the engine compartment and
on certain parts such as the tank flap, front pas-
The most essential Volkswagen® Genuine Parts senger sun visor, the driver door pillar or in the
are virtually always available in stock. If any spe- luggage compartment floor.
cific part is not available in stock, it can usually
be ordered and received in brief periods of time. – Never remove or damage the safety certifi-
cates, stickers and plates. They must remain
Volkswagen Dealerships offer a warranty for
legible at all times.
Volkswagen® Genuine Parts after assembly or
purchase. Always keep your Volkswagen Dealer- – If vehicle parts bearing safety certificates,
ship invoice for warranty purposes. stickers or plates are removed from the vehi-
cle, replacement safety certificates, stickers or
For additional information, please contact your plates with the same information must be ap-
Volkswagen Dealership. plied properly to the new parts by Volkswagen
Warranty claims regarding these parts can be Dealership or qualified workshop.
filed at any Volkswagen Dealership. 
Safety certificate
A safety certificate on the door pillar of the driver
door provides the information that all necessary
Original Volkswagen accessories safety standards and specifications of the trans-
port safety authorities of the individual country
We recommend using original Volkswagen ac- have been met at the time of production. The
cessories and other accessories approved by month and year of production and the chassis
Volkswagen. number may also be listed.
Please follow the recommendations below when
equipping your vehicle with accessories: High voltage warning stickers
There is a sticker near the engine compartment
Only use original Volkswagen accessories or oth-
cover lock that provides a warning of the high
er accessories duly approved by Volkswagen,
voltage in the electrical system of the vehicle.
whose reliability, safety, and suitability have
been duly tested for the specific vehicle model.
WARNING
Volkswagen does not guarantee the reliability,
safety, and suitability of non-original parts. Handling the vehicle incorrectly increases the
risk of accident and injuries.
Volkswagen Dealerships offer a warranty for
original accessories after assembly or purchase. ● Legal provisions must be followed.
Always keep your Volkswagen Dealership invoice ● Consult the Owner's Manual.
for warranty purposes.
For additional information, please contact your NOTICE
Volkswagen Dealership. Handling the vehicle incorrectly may cause dam-
ages to the vehicle.
In addition to providing accurate and updated in-
formation, the Volkswagen Accessories Service ● Legal provisions must be followed.
also offers optional equipment assembly services ● Perform maintenance services as prescribed. 
by qualified personnel.

266 Owner's Manual

 Aerial and radio feed Headphones
A radio feed aerial is installed on the roof of vehi- When using mobile phones or other devices, con-
cles with factory-fitted radio units. sult the respective owner's manual, applicable
laws and standards regarding the use of head-
Interference of AM radio reception could phones. For example, driving while using head-
occur if electric devices are used in the vi- phones is prohibited in Brazil.
cinity of the roof aerial (e.g. mobile phones). 
WARNING
When using headphones while driving, exterior
Installing the radio acoustic signals, such as police and fire depart-
ment sirens and other vehicles' horns, may not
Follow the recommendations below when retro- be audible and may cause accidents. 
fitting a radio or replacing a factory-fitted radio:
– In some versions, existing vehicle connections
were designed for original Volkswagen radios, Declarations of conformity
as of the model year of 2005.
– Radio devices with different connections will
have to use adapting cables, which are availa-
ble at Volkswagen Dealerships.
– Radios not covered in the Volkswagen Original
Accessories Programme may require additional
adaptors if the signal feed is weak.
– Radios should be installed at a Volkswagen
Dealership, whose personnel is qualified and
trained on technical specifications of vehicles
and if there are original radios and assembly
parts required from the Volkswagen Accesso-
ries Programme, as well as the fact that all ac-
tivities are conducted based on factory guide-
lines.
– The maximum power of original factory-fitted
speakers is 20 W (RMS).
– Volkswagen recommends also using speakers,
assembly sets, aerials and interference sup-
pression kits of the Volkswagen Accessories
Programme. These parts were designed espe-
cially for each vehicle type.

WARNING
Never cut the connection wire, leaving it ex- Fig. 205 Some approval identifications.
posed. This may cause fires.
Approval identifications → Fig. 205:
NOTICE 1 Argentina.
● Different radio connections may destroy or af- 2 Brazil.
fect important electrical components. Eventual 3 Russia and countries that authorize and allow
interferences, such as the speed signal, may radio transmission systems as per EAC guide-
cause faults in the engine, ABS system, etc. lines.
25A.5L1.POL.20

● Simply connecting the speed signal to a radio 4 South Africa. 

with automatic volume adjustment from dif-
ferent manufacturers may cause such faults. 

Consumer information 267

5 Europe and countries that authorize and al- Jamaica
low radio transmission systems as per Euro- The VW Play radio is approved by the SMA (Spec-
pean guidelines. trum Management Authority).
6 Paraguay.
Mexico
7 Zambia.
The VW Play radio is approved by the NOM (Nor-
8 Mexico.
ma Oficial Mexicana) under identification number
The individual manufacturer declares herewith IFT ID: RCPVIVW20-0478.
that the following products comply with essen-
tial requirements of each country, among other Paraguay
relevant provisions and laws at the time of vehi- The VW Play radio is approved by CONATEL
cle manufacturing: (Comisión Nacional de Telecomunicaciones) un-
der identification number NR:2020-02-I-0111.
Radiofrequency equipment
– Electronic immobilizer. Zambia
– Vehicle key with remote control. The VW Play radio is approved by ZICTA (Autori-
– Keyless Access locking and starting system. dade de Tecnologia da Informação e Comunica-
ção da Zâmbia) under identification number
– Radios with Bluetooth connection. ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2020/10/51.
FCC (Federal Communications Commission) This equipment is not entitled to protection
The following equipment is approved by the FCC against prejudicial interference and do not
under the identification number: cause interference in duly authorized systems. 
VW Play radio
– NT8-VWMIBREGIO

South Africa
The VW Play radio is approved by ICASA (Inde-
pendent Communications Authority of South Af-
rica) under identification number TA-2020/7390.

Argentina
The following equipment is approved by EN-
ACOM (Entidade Nacional de Comunicações) un-
der the identification number:
VW Play radio
– C-24447

Brazil
Devices activated by radiofrequency comply with
all applicable approval and use standards, and
their use in vehicles was authorized by the Brazil-
ian National Telecommunications Agency (ANA-
TEL).
Such approval must be used to obtain use licen-
ses in other countries.

Ghana
The VW Play radio is approved by the NCA under
identification number 7E5-7M-X0B-RDR.

268 Owner's Manual

 Technical data Gross combination weight
The listed admissible traction ratings are only ap-
plicable for altitudes of up to 1,000 m above sea
Guidelines on the technical level. The maximum weight of the car and trailer
must be reduced by approximately 10% for every
data further 1,000 m in altitude.

To check which engine a vehicle is equipped WARNING

with, refer to the vehicle data sticker and vehicle
Ignoring or exceeding specific values and limits
license documents.
regarding weights, payloads, vehicle dimen-
All data in the official vehicle documents take sions, and speed limit could result in severe ac-
precedence over this data. All data in this manual cidents and injuries.
are valid for the basic model. The figures may be
different if additional equipment is fitted, for dif- WARNING
ferent models, for special vehicles and for other
Exceeding the permitted gross weight and axle
countries.
weights may damage the vehicle and cause se-
Engine vere accidents and injuries.
On the vehicle data sticker or in the vehicle docu- ● Actual axle loads must never exceed permit-
ments it can be seen with which engine the vehi- ted axle loads.
cle is equipped. ● The payload and distribution of the load in
the vehicle affect driving response and brak-
Range ing distance. Adjust your speed accordingly.
The values quoted here may differ if additional ● Observing maximum weight and axle load
equipment is fitted, for different models or for limits is essential to ensure the safety of the
special vehicles. driver, passengers and other road users.
The values for the kerb weight in the following
table apply for the road-ready vehicle with serv- WARNING
ice fluids, including fuel tank carrying 90% of to- Accidents and severe injuries can occur if the
tal capacity and tools and spare tyre, if applicable maximum trailer weight is exceeded.
→ . The indicated gear order weight is in-
● Never exceed the specified maximum trailer
creased due to optional equipment and addition-
weight.
al accessories installed, which proportionally re-
duces the maximum permitted load.
NOTICE
The load includes the following weights:
The payload should be distributed as evenly as
– Passengers. possible in the vehicle. When transporting heavy
– All luggage. objects in the luggage compartment, they should
be placed either in front of or over the rear axle
– Trailer towing support load.
in order to minimise the effect on the vehicle's
Performance handling. 
Performance figures relate to the basic model.
Data may vary according to the local fuel used,
optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load, Information on fuel
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle
route and driving habits. These figures were consumption
measured without equipment which may influ-
ence performance, such as mud flaps. The figures quoted for fuel consumption and
emissions do not refer to any one individual vehi-
cle. Their purpose is to enable comparisons to be 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Technical data 269

made between various vehicle types. Fuel con- Vehicle identification data
sumption does not depend exclusively on the ef-
ficiency of the vehicle, but also on the way it is
driven and other non-technical factors.

Measuring fuel consumption

The vehicle consumption and emissions values
were determined according to directive UE
70/220/EEC in the currently valid version and ap-
ply for the given vehicle kerb weight. The figures
do not refer to any one individual vehicle. Two
measuring cycles are carried out on a rolling road
test bed to calculate fuel consumption. The test
criteria are as follows:
Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an en-
gine cold start. Thereafter city driving at
Fig. 206 In front of the rear passenger seat, on the
speeds between 0 and 50 km/h (0 and 31
right-hand side of the floor: vehicle identification
mph) is simulated. number (running gear number).
Extra-urban cycle In the extra-urban cycle the
car undergoes frequent acceleration and
braking in all gears, as in normal everyday
driving. In this case the driving speed rang-
es from 0 to 120 km/h (0 to 75 mph).
Combined cycle The combined consumption is
calculated with a weighting of around 37%
for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra-
urban cycle.
Kerb weight may vary according to the re-
spective version. This may slightly increase
fuel consumption figures.
In practical terms, fuel consumption figures
may differ from those measured based on Fig. 207 In the lower area of the front right door
the UE 70/220/EEC guidelines.  pillar: vehicle partial identification number label A
and manufacturing year plate B .

Vehicle identification number (VIN - chassis

number)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) engraving
is located in front of the passenger seat, on the
right-hand side of the floor → Fig. 206.

Partial vehicle identification number (VIS –

partial chassis number)
The plates (VIS) are located on the lower area of
the front right door pillar → Fig. 207 A and in
the engine compartment on the driver side, in
the suspension strut. These plates are destroyed
when removed.
Additionally, the VIS number is also available in
the windscreen, rear window, and side windows. 

270 Owner's Manual

 Engine identification number Information on the air
The engine identification number is located on
the engine block. Open the bonnet to access the conditioner
manufacturer identification sticker 
→ page 215.
In some regions, the engine identification num-
ber is included in the official vehicle document.

Manufacturer identification sticker

The manufacturer identification sticker is located
in the front cross strut in the engine compart-
ment. Open the bonnet to access the manufac-
turer identification sticker  → page 215.

Manufacturing year identification plate

The manufacturing year identification plate is lo-
cated on the lower area of the front right door
pillar → Fig. 207 B . This plate is destroyed when
removed.

NOTICE
In case it is necessary to replace stickers or re- Fig. 208 : information on the air conditioner –
engrave vehicle components, contact a local 1.0-L engine. : information on the air conditioner –
Volkswagen Dealership. 1.0-L TSI engine, 1.4-L TSI engine, and 1.6-L engine.

NOTICE Key for→ Fig. 208:

The plastic layer applied over the vehicle identifi- 1 Air conditioner lubrication oil specification.
cation number (chassis number) engraving is an 2 Air conditioner coolant specification.
anti-corrosive protection that prevents transfer- 3 Air conditioner load level
ring the number into a paper sheet. Therefore, it
must not be removed under any circumstances - Symbol and description:
risk of voiding warranty against perforation due Warning: air conditioning maintenance can
to corrosion!  only be carried out by qualified personnel.
Engine coolant type.

Lubricant type.

Check workshop information (only availa-
 ble for Volkswagen Dealerships).

WARNING
To ensure safe and risk-free operation, air con-
ditioning system maintenance procedures may
only be carried out by qualified personnel. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Technical data 271

Dimensions

Fig. 209 Dimensions.

Table indications apply for the basic model with Indicated values may vary due to wheel and tyre
basic equipment. sizes, optional equipment, different model ver-
sions, or different accessory installations.

Key for→ Fig. 209: Polo Polo Track Polo GTS

A Vehicle width (including exterior mirrors) 1,964 mm 1,976 mm
B Vehicle width (not including exterior mirrors) 1,751 mm
Front tracka) 1,524 mm 1,508 mm
C
Rear tracka) 1,506 mm 1,490 mm
D Vehicle level (ground to roof)a) 1,471 mm 1,481 mm
E Vehicle length 4,074 mm 4,079 mm 4,074 mm
F Clearance between axles 2,566 mm
Height of the free gap between the vehicle
G 153 mm 166 mm 175 mm
and the grounda)
H Height with the bonnet opena) 1,781 mm 1,782 mm 1,791 mm
I Height with the tailgate open a) 2,014 mm 2,015 mm 2,026 mm
– Minimum vehicle rotation diameter approximately 10.6 m
a) Data may vary according to wheel and tyre sizes.

NOTICE ● Carefully drive through terrain entrances,

ramps, kerbs, and other objects. Lowered vehi-
● Drive carefully in parking lots with long kerbs
cle parts, such as the bumper, spoiler and
or fixed posts. Objects higher than the ground
chassis, engine or exhaust parts may be dam-
level may damage the bumper and other vehi-
aged in these situations. 
cle parts when parking.

272 Owner's Manual

 Capacities
Petrol engines
1.0 Petrol TSI 1.4 Petrol TSI 1,6 Petrol 81 kW
Window washer fluid reservoir
3.1 litres
(→ page 217)
Fuel tank approximately 52 litres,
(→ page 191) of which approximately 7.5 litres reservea)
Engine oil capacity
3.3 litres 4.0 litres 4.5 litres
(→ page 220)
a) The reserve will be activated when the total tank level is reduced to approximately 7.5 litres of fuel.

TOTALFLEX Engines
1.0 TOTALFLEX 1.4 TOTALFLEX
1.0 TOTALFLEX 1.0 TOTALFLEX
57/62 kW (Polo 110/110 kW -
57/62 kW 80/85 kW - TSI
Track) TSI
Window washer fluid reservoir
2.0 litres 3.1 litres
(→ page 217)
Fuel tank approximately 52 litres,
(→ page 191) of which approximately 7.5 litres reservea)
Engine oil capacity
3.3 litres 4.0 litres
(→ page 220)
a) The reserve will be activated when the total tank level is reduced to approximately 7.5 litres of fuel. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Technical data 273

Petrol engines

1.0 petrol engine 74 kW - TSI

Power 74 kW (101 hp) at 5,000 rpm

Maximum torque 170 Nm (17.3 kgfm) at 1.750 rpm
EC DHSE
Cylinders, 3 cylinders,
Displacement 999 cm3
Compression ratio 10,5:1
Spark plugs 04E.905.602.Aa)
Super i.o. 95
Normal i.o. 91b)
Unleaded petrol free from other metallic additives
(such as manganese) Valid only for Argentina
Grade 2 or
Superior min. 91 ON
Gearbox type 6-speed Automatic (AQ 160)
Maximum speedc) 183 km/h
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hc) 7.9 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hc) 11.5 s
Kerb weightd) 1,147 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1,570 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle 860 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 760 kg
Roof load permitted 45 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Gross combination weight (CMTe)) 1,970 kg
Valid only for Argentina
Fuel consumptionf) - Combined 6.7l/ 100 km
Euro 5 and Euro 4 legislation
Valid only for Argentina
154 g/km
CO2 emissions
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) With slight reduction in performance and increase in fuel consumption, with graded increase in engine noise until detonation regula-
tion intervention.
c) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
d) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
e) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
f) For reasons of vehicle registration and taxation, the fuel consumption of some engines may differ from the following indications in
other countries. 

274 Owner's Manual

 1.4 petrol engine 110 kW - TSI

Power 110 kW (150 hp) at 5,000 rpm

Maximum torque 250 Nm (25.5 kgfm) at 1,500 - 3,800 rpm
EC DSJA
Cylinders, 4 cylinders,
Displacement 1,395 cm3
Compression ratio 10:1
Spark plugs 04E.905.602.Aa)
Super i.o. 95
Normal i.o. 91b)
Unleaded petrol free from other metallic additives
(such as manganese) Valid only for Argentina
Grade 2 or
Superior min. 91 ON
Gearbox type 6-speed Automatic (AQ 250)
Maximum speedc) 204 km/h
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hc) 5.8 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hc) 8.5 s
Kerb weightd) 1,220 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1,640 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle 920 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 770 kg
Roof load permitted 45 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Gross combination weight (CMTe)) 2,040 kg
Valid only for Argentina
Fuel consumptionf) - Combined 6.4 l/ 100 km
Euro 5 and Euro 4 legislation
Valid only for Argentina
146 g/km
CO2 emissions
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) With slight reduction in performance and increase in fuel consumption, with graded increase in engine noise until detonation regula-
tion intervention.
c) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
d) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
e) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
f) For reasons of vehicle registration and taxation, the fuel consumption of some engines may differ from the following indications in
other countries. 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Technical data 275

 1,6 81 kW petrol engine

Polo PoloTrack
Power 81 KW (110 hp) at 5,750 rpm
Maximum torque 155 Nm (15.8 kgfm) at 4.000 rpm
EC CWSA
Cylinders, 4 cylinders,
Displacement 1,598 cm3
Compression ratio 10,5:1
Spark plugs 04C.905.606.A or 04C.905.616 a)
Super i.o. 95
Normal i.o. 91b)
Unleaded petrol free from other metallic addi-
tives (such as manganese) Valid only for Argentina
Grade 2 or
Superior min. 91 ON
Gearbox type 5-gear manual gearbox (MQ 200)
Maximum speedc) 192 km/h
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hc) 6.3 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hc) 9.7 s
Kerb weightd) 1,096 kg 1,080 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1,510 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle 810 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 760 kg
Roof load permitted 45 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Gross combination weight (CMTe)) 1,910 kg
Valid only for Argentina
Fuel consumptionf) - Combined 6.9 l/100 km 6.7 l/100 km
Euro 5 and Euro 4 legislation
Valid only for Argentina
161 g/km 154 g/km
CO2 emissions
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) With slight reduction in performance and increase in fuel consumption, with graded increase in engine noise until detonation regula-
tion intervention.
c) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
d) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
e) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
f) For reasons of vehicle registration and taxation, the fuel consumption of some engines may differ from the following indications in
other countries. 

276 Owner's Manual

 TOTALFLEX engines

1.0 57/62 kW TOTALFLEX engine

Polo Polo Track

Petrol 57 kW (77 hp) at 6,450 rpm
Power
Ethanol 62 kW (84 hp) at 6,450 rpm
Petrol 94 Nm (9.6 kgfm) at 4.000 rpm
Maximum torque
Ethanol 101 Nm (10.3 kgfm) at 3.000 rpm
EC CSEB
Cylinders, 3 cylinders,
Displacement 999 cm3
Compression ratio 11,5:1
Spark plugs 04C.905.607a)
Gearbox type 5-gear manual gearbox (MQ 200)
Petrol 170 km/h 166 km/h
Maximum speedb)
Ethanol 173 km/h 169 km/h
Petrol 9.3 s 9.3 s
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hb)
Ethanol 9.2 s 9.1 s
Petrol 13.8 s 13.8 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hb)
Ethanol 13.5 s 13.4 s
Kerb weightc) 1,069 kg 1,051 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1,465 kg 1,449 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle 780 kg 750 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 740 kg 735 kg
Roof load permitted 45 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 200 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8% 200 kg
Gross combination weight (CMTd)) 1,665 kg 1,649 kg
Idling speede) 950 +/- 50 rpm
CO emission at idlee) < 0.2% (max)
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
c) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
d) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
e) This vehicle complies with the Environment preservation program for motor vehicles (PROCONVE). 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Technical data 277

 1,0 80/85 kW - TSI TOTALFLEX engine

Petrol 80 kW (109 hp) at 5,000 rpm

Power
Ethanol 85 kW (116 hp) at 5,000 rpm
Petrol 165 Nm (16.8 kgfm) at 1,750 - 4,250 rpm
Maximum torque
Ethanol 165 Nm (16.8 kgfm) at 1,750 - 4,500 rpm
EC DHSD
Cylinders, 3 cylinders,
Displacement 999 cm3
Compression ratio 10,5:1
Spark plugs 04E.905.602.Fa)
5-speed manual (MQ 200)
or
Gearbox type 6-speed automatic (AQ 160)
Manual Automatic
Petrol 190 km/h 189 km/h
Maximum speedb)
Ethanol 195 km/h 192 km/h
Petrol 7.6 s
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hb) 6.7 s
Ethanol 7.1 s
Petrol 11.1 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hb) 10.1 s
Ethanol 10.5 s
Kerb weightc) 1,111 kg 1,154 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1,510 kg 1,570 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the 860 kg
810 kg
front axle
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear
760 kg
axle
Roof load permitted 45 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to
400 kg
8%
Gross combination weight (CMTd)) 1,910 kg 1,970 kg
Idling speede) 920 +/- 50 rpm 980 +/- 50 rpm
CO emission at idlee) < 0.2% (max)
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
c) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
d) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
e) This vehicle complies with the Environment preservation program for motor vehicles (PROCONVE). 

278 Owner's Manual

 Engine 1.4 TOTALFLEX 110/110 kW - TSI

110 kW (150 hp) and 5,000 and

Petrol
5,250 rpm
Power
110 kW (150 hp) and 4,500 and
Ethanol
5,000 rpm
250 Nm (25.5 kgfm) at 1,500 -
Petrol
3,800 rpm
Maximum torque
250 Nm (25.5 kgfm) at 1,500 -
Ethanol
4,000 rpm
EC DSJA
Cylinders, 4 cylinders,
Displacement 1,395 cm3
Compression ratio 10:1
Spark plugs 04E.905.602.Aa)
Gearbox type 6-speed Automatic (AQ 160)
Petrol 204 km/h
Maximum speedb)
Ethanol 206 km/h
Petrol 5.8 s
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hb)
Ethanol 5.7 s
Petrol 8.4 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hb)
Ethanol 8.3 s
Kerb weightc) 1.222 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1.640 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle 920 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 770 kg
Roof load permitted 45 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Gross combination weight (CMTd)) 2,040 kg
Idling speede) 750 +/- 50 rpm
CO emission at idlee) < 0.2% (max)
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
c) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
d) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
e) This vehicle complies with the Environment preservation program for motor vehicles (PROCONVE). 
25A.5L1.POL.20

Technical data 279

Abbreviations
Abbreviation Definition
A Amp; electrical current measurement unit.
A/h Ampere-hour.
A2DP Audio transmission technology via Bluetooth® common in many manufacturers (Advanced
Audio Distribution Profile).
ABS Anti-lock brake system.
AM Amplitude modulation (medium wave, MW).
AQ 160 6-speed automatic gearbox.
AQ 250 6-speed automatic gearbox TSI engine.
AUX Auxiliary audio input.
AVRCP Audio source remote control technology via Bluetooth® common in many manufacturers
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
bar Pressure unit.
BAS Brake assist
BCM Body Control Module.
CDM Engine code.
cm³ Cubic centimetres. Unit of displacement.
CO2 Carbon dioxide.
dB Decibel, unit adopted to measure sound.
DIN German Institute for Standardisation.
DRM Digital Rights Management
DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency.
E-FLEX Warm starting system.
EBV Electronic brake variator.
ECE Economic Commission for Europe-Regelung.
EDS Electronic differential lock.
EON Enhanced Other Network.
EPC Engine management system (Electronic Power Control).
ESC Electronic stability control.
ESS Emergency brake lights (Emergency Stop Signal).
FM Frequency modulation (ultra short wave, UKW)
GALA Adjustment of the volume in relation to the vehicle's speed.
GRA Cruise control system.
GSM Global System for Mobil Communications.
HFP Hands-Free-Profile.
hp Horsepower, engine power.
IMEI Serial number for the exclusive identification of the GSM (International Mobile Station
Equipment Identity) end devices.
kg Kilogram, mass unit of the International System of Units. 

280 Abbreviations
 Abbreviation Definition
kPa Kilopascal, standard pressure and tension unit of the International System of Units.
kW Kilowatt, engine power.
l Litre, capacity unit of the metric system.
LED Light Emitting Diode.
m Metre, length measurement unit of the International System of Units.
mm Millimetre, length unit equal to one thousandth of a metre.
MP3 Audio file compression format.
MQ 200 5-speed manual transmission.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
o C Celsius Degrees; temperature measurement unit.
PIN Personal identification number.
psi Pounds per Square Inch, tyre pressure information.
RDS Radio Data System for additional services (Radio Data System - RDS).
rpm Engine revolutions per minute.
s Seconds, basic time measurement unit of the International System of Units.
SIM Subscriber Identity Module.
SMS Short Message Service
TCS Traction control system.
TFT Thin-film transistor display technology.
TSI® Turbo charged with direct fuel injection.
TWI Trade Wear Indicator.
UMTS Mobile network standard (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System).
USB Universal Serial Bus
V Volts, electrical difference of potential measurement unit.
VBR Variable bit rate.
VIN Chassis number (Vehicle Identification Number).
VIS Partial vehicle identification number with the last 8 digits of the running gear (Vehicle Indi-
cator Section).
W Watts, mechanical or electrical, thermal flow and energy flow of radiation measurement
unit.
WMA Audio file compression format.
XDS Extension of the electronic differential lock.
25A.5L1.POL.20

Abbreviations 281
Index
Numbers and Symbols Air conditioner
turn off 94
1,0 80/85 kW - TSI TOTALFLEX engine 278 water underneath the vehicle 97
1,6 81kW petrol engine 276 water vapour underneath the vehicle 97
1.0 55/62 kW TOTALFLEX engine 277 window heating 94
1.4 petrol engine 110 kW - TSI 274, 275, 279 Air conditioning 92, 93
air distribution 94
A air recirculation mode
blower
96
94
ABS controls 93
see Brake assist systems 127 cooling mode 94
Accessories 260 operating failure 96
Access the service deadline 26 operating instructions 96
Acoustic alarms temperature setting 94
light 79 tips 96
Acoustic warning Air recirculation mode 96
unfastened seat belt 35 air-conditioning 94
Activated charcoal filter 193 operation 96
Active Info Display 16, 17 switch off 96
information profiles 16, 17 Alarm system 68
Additional service offers 265 interior monitoring system 68
Adjust risk of false alarm 69
front seat 75 Alertness detection system
Adjusting malfunction 25
correct sitting position 33 Alterations 261, 266
Headrest 77 AM 147
steering wheel 73 Ambient lighting 85
Aerial 267 Analogue instrument cluster 15
Air-conditioner Android Auto™
AUTO (automatic mode) 94 connect 146, 173
Air-conditioning disconnect 147
air recirculation mode 94 end connection 173
Airbag main menu 146
crash detection function 45 menu 173
Airbag system 42 particularities 147
dash panel cleaning 257 specificities 173
description 44 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 127
differences among front passenger front air- Anti-theft alarm system 68
bag systems 43 description 68
front airbag 46 Antifreeze 222
function 44 Anti theft coding 140
indicator light 43 App-Connect 144
limitations 261 main menu 145
repairs 261 Apple CarPlay™
side airbags 48 disconnect 146
switching off the passenger front airbag 47 end connection 172
switching off with the key activated switch 47 establish connection 145, 172
using child seats 47 menu 145, 172
vehicle conservation 257 particularities 146
wooden ornamental elements 257 specificities 172
Airbag System App store 171
in case of airbag triggering 45 basic functions 172
download 172

282 Index
 Areas with risk of explosion Bluetooth
phone 158 audio function 170
Ashtray 135 connect 170
removable 135 phone function 170
Assemblies and insertions 261 profiles 158
Assist systems settings 165
anti-lock brake system (ABS) 127 Bluetooth Audio
Automatic Post-Collision Braking System 128 see External audio sources 156
brake assist (BAS) 127 Body warranty 265
driving mode selection 117 Bonnet
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 127 display indication 216
electronic stability control (ESC) 129 warning lamp 216
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 127 Boot lid 69
park distance control 122 check boot lid 69
rear view camera system 125 emergency opening or closing 71
Start-Stop system 108 opening 70
Traction control system (TCS) 129 unlocking 70
traction control (TCS) 127 Brake
Tyre monitoring systems 231 brake support system 127
Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator 231 emergency brake indicator 58
uphill assist systems 115 handbrake 121
Assumptions Brake assist (BAS) 127
rear view camera system 125 Brake fluid 224
Automatic belt retractor 41 specification 225
Automatic consumer deactivation 229 Brake light bulb 202
Automatic driving light control 80 Brake pad
Automatic gearbox 111 run-in 100
blockage of the ignition key 107 Brake pad run-in
driving 113 also see brakes 100
ignition lock 104 Brakes
Kick-down function 113 brake fluid 224, 225
Pulling away uphill 113 brake pad run-in 100
shifting gear 111 brake pads 100
stopping on uphill slopes 113 brake servo 101
Automatic Post-Collision Braking System 128 changing brake fluid 225
Automatic washing system 253 fault 103
AUX-IN Brake servo 101, 127
see External audio sources 156 Brake support system 127
AUX-IN multimedia port Brake support systems 127
see External audio sources 156 ABS 127
BAS 127
B EDS 127
ESC 127
Balance 166
TCS 127
BAS XDS 127
see Brake assist systems 127
Brake system 127
Battery check brakes 103
check vehicle battery 226 troubleshooting 103
replacing the battery in the vehicle key 61
Bulb failure
Battery electrolyte 228 see Exterior lighting 197
Belt height adjuster 41 Bulb replacement
Belt tensioner removing and installing the headlights 199
disposal 42 Buttons 141, 142
25A.5L1.POL.20

service and disposal 42

Index 283
C lifting the vehicle with the jack
preparations for changing a wheel
247
244
Call lists 163 preparations for travel 31
Call voice mailbox 162 safe driving 31
Capacities seat belts 38
engine oil 221, 273 travels abroad 31
fuel tank 191, 273 Checks when fueling 31
washer fluid reservoir 273 Check the engine oil 220
windscreen washer reservoir 217 Childproof lock 57
Caring for the vehicle Child seat
cleaning the window wiper blades 196 airbag sticker 51
replacing window wiper blades 196 securing systems 50
window aerial 267 securing with the seat belt 56
Car phone 262 securing with Top Tether 55
Carrier switching off front passenger front airbag 47
see Roof carrier 182 weight classes 50
Catalytic converter 192 Child seats 49
operating failure 194 child seat types 49
Central locking 63 standard 50
central locking button 65 transporting children in the vehicle 51
description 64 Cigarette lighter 135
Keyless Access 62 Cleaning
locking or unlocking from inside 65 see Vehicle conservation 252
single door unlocking 64 Clean the display 140
Central locking system Clock 15, 25
anti-theft alarm system 68
Clock setting
Centre arm rest 78 digital clock 15
Changing a wheel 244 Close
lifting the vehicle 247 doors 63
preparation actions 244 tank flap 191
wheel bolts 246 windows 71
Changing bulbs Clothing hook 134
checklist 198
Coming Home function 83
in the bodywork 202
in the headlights 200 Connection
number plate light 203 USB 155
preparation actions 198 without wires 154
rear lights 202 with wires 154
Changing gears Conservation
gear change indication 98 see Vehicle conservation 252
manual gearbox 110 Conservation of aluminium parts 255
selecting gears (manual gearbox) 110 Conservation of the chrome parts 255
Changing the wheel Consumables 216
after changing a wheel 249 Consumer information 265
changing the wheel 248 Control
Chassis number 270 RADIO 147
Checkboxes 142 Control light
Checking and refuelling 213 fuel level 18
Checklist fuelling 18
before working in the engine compartment 214 Control list
changing bulbs 198 before using the unit for the first time 137
checks when fuelling 31 rear view camera system 125
check the engine oil level 220 Controls 141
fill engine oil 220 additional displays 144
in an emergency 58 basic control information 141
in case of faults 58 checkboxes 142
display keypad 143

284 Index
 enter 143 Defrosting
entry mask 143 windows 94
function surfaces 142 Device overview 141, 167
Phone 157 Diagnostics connector 263
PHONE 160 Differential lock
scroll 143 see Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 127
scroll bar 143
Digital clock 25
search lists 143
digital instrument cluster
touchscreen 142
see Active Info Display 17
Control units 263
Digital instrument cluster
reprogramming 263
see Active Info Display 16
Convenience closing
Dimensions 272
electric windows 71
Dipped beam bulb 200
Convenience functions
reprogramming 263 Display 16, 17, 20, 21, 140, 141
clean 140
Convenience opening
controls 142
electric windows 71
instrument cluster 20, 21
Convenience overview 137
Display indicators
Coolant
cruise control system (GRA) 118
check engine coolant 222
doors, bonnet and boot lid open 20, 21
Copyright time 25
information 166
Display keypad 143
Copyrights 150, 169
Disposal
Crash detection function belt tensioner 42
airbag 45
Doors 63
Cruise control system 118 childproof lock 57
Cruise control system (GRA) emergency closing or opening 66
display indicators 118 Driver alert system 24
operation 119 function 24
crystal waxing the paintwork 253 operation 24
Cup holder 134 turn off 24
front centre console 135 turn on 24
Cup holders Driver door
beverage bottles 134 overview 9
Driving
D data records 263
driving economically 98
Dashboard
driving through water on roads 102
airbag system 42
fuel gauge 18
Dash panel fuel level too low 18
airbag system 257 parking on downhill inclines 120
cleaning 257 parking on uphill inclines 120
Dash panel insert preparations for travel 31
indicators 27 pulling away uphill 113
menu structure 27 stopping on uphill slopes 113
operation by way of the multifunction steer- through salt water 103
ing wheel 28 travels abroad 31
Dash panel insert operation 27 with automatic gearbox 113
operation by way of the windshield wiper lev- with environmental awareness 98
er 27 Driving economically 98
Data recording 263 Driving guidelines 97
Data recording while driving 263 Driving instructions
Date setting 165
25A.5L1.POL.20

temporary spare wheel 239

daytime driving light 80 Driving in the winter
Daytime running light 79 mirror 88
Declarations of conformity 267 winter tyres 242

Index 285
Driving mode selection 117 Engine
default behaviours of driving modes and ve- irregular engine operation 193
hicle systems 117 noises 106
Driving safety 31 running-in 103
Driving saving fuel 98 Engine and ignition 104
Driving through salt water in roads 103 automatic ignition turn off 105
Driving through water on roads 102 emergency shut down 108
emergency start function 107
Driving with environmental awareness 98
ignition cylinder 104
During a phone call 161
immobilizer 107
Dust filter 96 non-authorised vehicle key 104
starting the engine with Keyless Access 104
E start the engine 105
E-FLEX 226 stopping the engine 106
unauthorized vehicle key 107
EBV
see Braking support systems 127 Engine compartment 213
cleaning 255
Economical driving style 98
engine coolant 222
EDL engine oil 218
see Brake support systems 127 plenum chamber 255
Electrical consumer 136, 186 preparation activities 214
Electric consumers 136 vehicle battery 226
Electricity-consuming equipment 59 Engine compartment cover
Electric windows 71 closing 215
buttons 71 opening 215
close 71 Engine control unit 192
convenience closing 71 Engine coolant 222
convenience opening 71 check engine coolant level 223
open 71 refilling 223
operational failure 72 refilling opening 223
roll-back function 72 specifications 222
Electronic brake variator (EBV) 127 temperature indicator 19
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 127 warning light 19
Electronic engine power control - EPC 192 engine data 279
Electronic immobilizer 107 Engine data 274, 275, 276, 277, 278
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 127 Engine identification number
Electronic Stability Control(ESC) 129 establish 271
Emergency brake indicator 58 Engine management
Emergency brake lights 58 indicator lamp 107
Emergency breakaway cable 185 troubleshooting 107
Emergency closing Engine oil 218
front passenger door 67 changing 219
rear doors 67 check the engine oil 220
Emergency closing or opening complete 220
driver door 66 consumption 219
emergency unlocking the selector lever 114 engine oil filler 220
oil dipstick 220
Emergency opening or closing
specification 218
boot lid 71
Engine speed 18
Emergency shut down 108
Entry mask
Emergency start function 107
see Controls 143
Emergency unlocking the selector lever 114
Environmental impact note
Engaging the gear fuel 191
automatic gearbox 111
EPC - Electronic engine power control 192

286 Index
 ESC fuel
enable and disable 129 Ethanol 190
see Braking Support Systems 129 Fuel 189
ESS - Emergency Stop Signal 58 environmental impact note 191
Ethanol 190 information on fuel consumption 269
fuel gauge 18 petrol 190
Exhaust gas emission control system 192 problems 193
Exterior Fuel consumption
door handles 7 driving economically 98
Exterior lighting 197 how to measure? 269
information 269
Exterior mirrors 90
what increases consumption? 194
fold 90
memory for reverse gear 90 Fuel gauge 18
operation failure 91 control light 18
towing a trailer 185 petrol or ethanol 18
Exterior temperature indicator 20, 21 Fuel handling safety guidelines 189
External aerial 262 Fuelling
checks when fuelling 31
External audio source
control light 18
adjust playback volume 166
ethanol 191
External audio sources
fuel gauge 18
AUX-IN multimedia port 156
petrol 191
Bluetooth audio 156
with ethanol 191
USB connection 155
with petrol 191
External data carrier
fuelling and fuel types 189
USB connection 155
Fuel quality 194
External jump starting
Function buttons
check Jump starting 209
MEDIA main menu 152
external mirrors
PHONE main menu 160
vehicle conservation 255
RADIO main menu 147
Function surfaces 142
F controls 142
Fader 166 Fuses 204
Fault memory 263 changing 208, 209
Faults colour coding 209
protect the vehicle 58 dash panel 205
Favourites (speed dial buttons) 164 detecting a blown fuse 209
engine compartment 207
Fire extinguisher 59
fuse box in the dashboard 205
First service 251 fuse box in the engine compartment 207
Fixation with i-Size 53 fuse box in the engine compartment on the
Fixation with ISOFIX battery 208
child chair 53 preparations for changing 209
Fixation with LATCH 53 versions 209
FM 147
Frequency range G
AM 147
Gear change indicator 98
change 142, 147
FM 147 General information 265
select 142, 147 Glasses compartment 133
Front airbag Glove compartment
check airbag system 46 light 86
Front passenger airbag see Glove compartment 132
25A.5L1.POL.20

check airbag system 42 GRA 118

Front passenger side glove compartment light 86 Grounding point 210
Front seat 74 Guidelines for the conservation of the vehicle 252

Index 287
Guidelines on the technical data 269 shifting gear 114
Start-Stop system 108
H turn signals
tyre monitoring system
85
232
Handbrake 121 Indicator lamps
Head light lever 79 overview 13
Headlights Indicator light
international trips 85 airbag system 43
washers 87 Indicators of the display
Headphones 267 Warning and information texts 23
Headrest 77 Indicators on the dash panel insert display 27
Head restraints 77 Information on fuel consumption 269
Heating 92, 93 Information on the air conditioner 271
Heating and air conditioning 92 Information on the warm starting system 226
High pressure washing machine 253 Information profiles 16, 17
Hollow cavities 255 Information stored in control units 263
Hooks to hang bags on 181 Initial settings 165
Horn 10 Installing the radio 267
Hour setting 25 Instructions for use 139
Hub cap Instrument cluster 10, 14
wheel bolt cap 244 display 15, 16, 17, 20, 21
Hub caps 243 indicator lamps 13
instruments 15, 17
I Instruments 16
service interval display 26
Identification number 270
symbols 13
Identification sticker 270 warning lamps 13
Ignition 104 Instruments 15, 16, 17
check engine and ignition 104
Interior light 85
non-authorised vehicle key 104
Interior lighting 85
Ignition lock
Interior mirror 89
blockage 107
lock 104 Interior monitoring system 68
removing the key from the ignition 107 Intermittent convenience signals 79
Ignition turned off International trips
post-operation (Timeout) 141 headlights 85
Immobiliser Interval recommendation 24
malfunction 108 function 24
In an emergency 58 operation 24
checklist 58 turn off 24
faults 58 turn on 24
making you and your vehicle safe 58 iPad 155
warning lamps 58 iPhone 155
In case of emergency iPod 155
warning triangle 59 ISOFIX 53
Indicator and warning lamp
manual gearbox 110 J
Indicator lamp
Jump starting 209
ABS 129
grounding point 210
braking support systems 129
jump starting point (grounding point) 210
central locking 64
engine management 107
ESC 129 K
malfunctioning bulb 85 Key
on the driver door 64 see vehicle key 60
seat belt 35

288 Index
 Key activated switch Locking button
switching off the passenger front airbag 47 automatic gearbox 111
Keyless Access 62 Locking the front passenger door and rear doors
starter button 104 in case of emergency 67
Unlock or lock with Keyless Access 62 LOW BATTERY 140
Keyless Access Locking and starting system Luggage compartment 178
see Keyless Access 62 cover 179
Keyless locking and starting system Keyless Ac- luggage compartment light 85
cess 62 luggage net 181
Keypad Variable luggage compartment floor 180
see Controls 143 Luggage compartment cover 179
Kick-down function 113 Luggage compartment floor 180
Luggage net 181
L Luggage compartment 181
Lambda probe 193
Lamp M
Coming Home 83 Main beam bulb 200
interior lights 85 Main beam on/off 81
Leaving Home 83 Main indicator 17
reading lights 85 Main menu
LATCH Android Auto™ 146
child chair 53 App-Connect 145
Leaving Home function 83 MEDIA 152
Lifting the vehicle PHONE 160
checklist 247 RADIO 147
jack 247 Maintenance 249
with the jack 247 malfunction
Light park distance control 122
acoustic alarms 79 Malfunction
daytime running light 79 alertness detection system 25
functions 80 immobiliser 108
headlight lever 79 tyre monitoring system 232
instruments and switches lighting 85 Mandatory inspection services 265
light's switch 79
Manoeuvre braking 123
side light 79, 80
Manual gearbox 110
switch off 79
indicator and warning lamp 110
switch on 79
see also Changing gear 110
turn signal lever 79
see also Shift gears 110
lighting
trouble shooting 110
Turn signals 79
Mats 97
Lighting
Mechanical windows
daytime driving light 80
close 71
Driving light 79
open 71
troubleshooting 85
Media 169
Lights 79
copyrights 169
AUTO 80
file and database requirements 169
Load capacity index 241
media controls 169
Loading media operation 170
driving with the rear lid open 102 settings 174
luggage compartment 178
MEDIA
roof carrier 183
audio data structure 152
stowing items of luggage 178
audio file CD 151
25A.5L1.POL.20

towing 186
AUX-IN multimedia port 156
Locking bitrate 151
with Keyless Access 62 Bluetooth audio 156

Index 289
 change media source
Change track
153
153
O
copyrights 150 Octane number 190
displays 152 Odometer 16
external data carrier to USB 155 Oil
forward and back 153 check engine oil 218
function buttons 152, 153 Oil dipstick 220
iPod, iPad, iPhone 155 Old tyres 234
limitations 151 Open
main menu 152 doors 63
media mode 150 tank flap 191
media source selection menu 153 windows 71
Mix function 153 Opening
MP3 files 151 boot lid 70
playback mode 153
Open radio stations list 142
playback sequence 152
playlists 151 Operating failure
prerequisites 151 air conditioning 96
Repeat function 153 catalytic converter 194
SD card 154 radio feed 267
select data storage unit 153 rain sensor 88
select track 154 Operation
settings 154 park distance control 123
WMA files 151 turn on and off 141
Menu Operational failure
Apple CarPlay™ 145 electric windows 72
Mileage recorder 15, 17 Operation failure
Mirror electric exterior mirrors 91
areas with no visibility 88 Original Volkswagen accessories 266
blind spot 88 Other applicable documents 137
Mirrors 88, 89 Overall guidelines 31
exterior 90 Overseas
folding 91 extended permanence 103
interior mirror 89 vehicle sales 103
right-hand exterior mirror operation 90 Overview 141
Mix function 153 centre console 11
Mobile phone driver door 9
use without external aerial 263 driver's side 10
Modifications 261 front passenger side 12
Multi Collision Brake front view 6
see Automatic Post-Collision Braking Sys- indicator lamps 13
tem 128 instruments 15, 16, 17
menu structure 27
Multifunction display 22
rear view 8
Multifunction steering wheel 10, 28 roof headliner 12
Multimedia playback side view 7
SD card 155 turn signal and main beam lever 79
Multimedia port 155 warning lamps 13
Overview of the vehicle
N front view 6
rear view 8
New engine 103
side view 7
Noises
brake assist system 128, 129
engine 106 P
tyres 243 Park distance control 122
NT - non microfiber fabric 257 operation 123
Number of seats 32

290 Index
 Park Distance Control Physical principles of a frontal collision 36
representation on the display 124 Plates 266
trouble shooting 124 Playback
Parking 120 AUX-IN 156
Parking and manoeuvring 120 external data carrier (USB) 155
Parking distance control MEDIA 152
using high pressure washing machine 253 memory card 152
Park Pilot track 154
see Park distance control 122 Playing
Particularities RADIO 147
Android Auto™ 147 Plenum chamber 255
Apple CarPlay™ 146 Polishing 253
remove the key from the vehicle 107 Pollen filter 96
water vapour underneath the vehicle 97 Pollutant filter 96
Part replacement 260 Pop-up window 142
Passenger compartment 10 Post-operation (timeout) 141
Passenger front airbag Power management 140
switching off with the key activated switch 47 Power monitor 30
Pedals 34, 97 Pre-tuning buttons 149
Petrol 190 Preparation actions
additives 190 changing a wheel 244
fuel 190 changing bulbs 198
fuel gauge 18 vehicle battery 227
types 190
Preparation activities
Petrol engine 274 check the engine oil 220
Phone complete engine oil 220
phone controls 157 prior each travel 31
PHONE working in the engine compartment 214
A2DP 158 Preparation procedures
areas with risk of explosions 158 check engine coolant level 223
Bluetooth profiles 158 refilling the engine coolant 223
Bluetooth settings 165 Preparations for travel 31
call lists 163
Prerequisites
call voice mailbox 162
for CDs 151
contacts 162
for files and data storage units 151
contacts list 162
for SD cards 151
during a phone call 161
for USB data storage units 151
enter phone number 162
Press & Drive
favourites (speed dial buttons) 164
see Keyless Access 62
function buttons 160
HPF 158
main menu 160 Q
mobile phone pairing 159 Quick access screens 168
operation description 158
pairing the mobile phone up 159
phone controls 160 R
select 162 Radio 168, 267
settings 164 control 28
special precaution areas 158 display 28
switching off phone controls 159 open radio stations list 142
symbols and displays 161 radio operation 168
user profile settings 165 settings 174
Phone function vehicle settings 29
25A.5L1.POL.20

during phone calls 171 RADIO

making phone calls 171 changing frequency ranges 147
receiving phone calls 171 displayed radio station names 148

Index 291
 displays and symbols 149 Removing wax residues 255
function buttons 147, 149 Renew bulbs
main menu 147 see Exterior lighting 197
pre-tuning buttons 149 Repairs 260, 261
radio data system RDS 148 airbag system 261
radio text (RDS) 148 plates 266
SCAN 150 stickers 266
settings 150 Repeat 153
station buttons 148
Repeat function 153
Radio buttons 142
Replacement key
Radio controls and display 28 see vehicle key 60
Radio feed Representation on the display
aerial 267 Park Distance Control 124
operating failure 267
Reprogramming control units 263
Radios 137
Retrofitting
Radio stations car phone 262
pre-tuning 149 two-way radio 262
Radio text (RDS) Rev counter 17
see RDS 148
Right-hand exterior mirror operation 90
Rain sensor 87
Right-hand turn signal bulb 200
operating failure 88
Rims
RDS 148
cleaning 255
radio text 148
Roll-back function
regional RDS 148
electric windows 72
station names 148
Roof carrier 182
Reading light 85
fastening base supports 182
Rear lid
Usage guidelines 184
driving with the rear lid open 102
Rotary knobs 141
Rear lights
Rubber seals 255
changing bulbs 202
Run-in
Rear seat 76
tyres 235
Rear seat backrest
Running-in
fold backwards 76
engine 103
fold forward 76
first kilometres 103
Rear seats 75
Rear View
see Rear view camera system 125 S
Rear view camera system 125 Safety equipment 45
assumptions 126 Safety recommendations 138
control list 125 SCAN
Enabling and disabling 125 radio 150
operational guidelines 126 RADIO 150
parking 126 Screen
Representation on the display 125 settings 174
settings 126 Scroll 143
Rear window defrost function 95 Scroll bar 143
Rear window wiper blade SD card
cleaning 196 compatibility and technical data 151
replacing 196 eject or insert 154
Reduction of exhaust gases prepare to remove 154
problems 193 prerequisites 151
Removable ashtray 135 supported SD files 151
Removing and installing the headlights 199 unreadable 154
Removing ice 255 SD card slot 154
Removing snow 255 Search lists 143

292 Index
 Seat 76 system 165
Seat belt user profile 165, 177
automatic belt retractor 41 valet mode 176
seat belt status indicator 35 volumes 166
warning lamp 35 Shifting gear
Seat belt roll-back function 41 automatic gearbox 111
Seat belt routing 39 emergency unlocking the selector lever 114
Seat belts 34 shifting gears (automatic gearbox) 111
belt height adjuster 41 with the Tiptronic 112
belt routing 39 Shifting gears
checklist 38 warning and indicator lamps 114
cleaning 257 Shift paddle
fastening 39 Tiptronic 112
not fastened 37 Side airbags
roll-back function 41 see Airbag system 48
seat belt tensioner 41 Side light 79, 80
twisted seat belts 38 Side light bulb 200, 202
unfastening 39 Single door unlocking 64
using 38
Sitting
Seat belts protect 37 adjusting the headrest 77
Seat belt tensioner 41 adjusting the steering wheel position 73
Seat covers 257 correct sitting position 33
cleaning NT - non microfiber fabric 257 Installing the headrest 77
cleaning the fabric cover 257 number of seats 32
cleaning the padding 257 rear seat backrest 76
conserving and cleaning the natural leather 257 Removing the headrest 77
seat cover handling 257 Sitting position
vinyl 257 incorrect position 33
Seat functions 78 Sliding headliner 92
Seats 32, 74 Socket 136
front seat 75 12 Volts 136
Selection of driving mode Softkeys
characteristics of driving modes 117 see Function surfaces 142
Selection of the driving mode Sounds
manoeuvre 117 warning lamps and indicator lamps 13
operation 117 Sound settings 166
Selector button 142 Spare fuel canister 189
Selector lever lock Spare parts 260
automatic gearbox 111
Spare wheel 239
Select (phone number) 162 remove 239
Service 249 Special precaution areas 158
Service fluids 216 Specificities
Service interval display 26 AUX playback 156
Service menu 25 displays 144
Service position engine jolting 193
Windscreen wipers 196 folding mirrors 91
Service scopes 251 irregular engine operation 193
Set parking 121, 272
hour 25 radio feed 267
Settings 165 remove the vehicle key 104
Bluetooth 165 towing a trailer 187
factory settings 165 Speed alarm 23
25A.5L1.POL.20

media 154 Speed index 242

PHONE 164 Sport function 30
radio 150 Start-Stop system 108
indicator lamp 108

Index 293
Start-Stop System 108 System
Start button ABS 127
emergency shut down 108 anti-lock brake system (ABS) 127
emergency start function 107 settings 174
Starter button 104 Systems
Starting the engine with jump leads automatic driving light control 80
how to 211 BAS 127
jump leads 211 brake assist (BAS) 127
Station cruise control system 118
SCAN 150 EBV 127
scanning for stations 150 EDL 127
electronic brake variator(EBV) 127
Station buttons 148
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 127
Station names
GRA 118
see RDS 148
TCS 127
Steering traction control (TCS) 127
indicator lamp 116 Uphill assist system 115
warning light 116 XDS 127
Steering assistance 116
Steering wheel 73
adjusting 73
T
unilateral traction 238 Tachometer (Rev counter) 18
vibration 238 Tank flap
Stickers 266 check tank flap 191
Stopped in traffic ethanol 191
protect the vehicle 58 petrol 191
Storage compartment TCS
glasses compartment 133 enable and disable 129
roof console 133 see brake assist systems 127
Stowage area see Braking Support Systems 129
front centre console 131 Technical data 269
front passenger side 132 1,0 80/85 kW - TSI TOTALFLEX engine 278
glove compartment 132 1,6 81kW petrol engine 276
Glove compartment light 86 1.0 55/62 kW TOTALFLEX engine 277
in the lower part of the centre console 131 1.4 petrol engine 110 kW - TSI 274, 275
vehicle wallet 132 capacities 191, 217, 221, 273
Stowage compartment 130 dimensions 272
front centre armrest 133 engine oil specification 218
identification sticker 270
Stowage compartments
petrol engine 274
other stowage compartments 134
roof load 183
Stowing items of luggage 178 TOTALFLEX engines 277
Sun visor 92 type plate 270
Support load tyre pressure 236
loading the trailer 186 Vehicle data sticker 270
Support systems Technical Data
cruise control system 118 1.4 petrol engine 110 kW - TSI 279
driver alert system 24 Technical modifications 261
electronic brake variator (EBV) 127 plates 266
GRA 118 stickers 266
interval recommendation 24 Temperature display
Symbol entry mask 143 engine coolant 19
Symbols Temperature indicator
see Indicator lamps 13 exterior temperature 20, 21
see Warning lamps 13 Temporary spare wheel
Synchronize vehicle key 61 driving instructions 239

294 Index
 Temporary spare wheel of different size from towing 184
the regular wheels 245 towing a trailer 187
Text entry Transporting children in the vehicle 49, 51
see Controls 143 Travel data 22
Thawing the door lock cylinder 255 Travel data indicator 22
Thawing the locks 255 Travels abroad
Things to note checklist 31
towing 212 Tread depth 237
tow starting 212 Tread depth and wear indicators 237
Tightening torque Treadwear 241
wheel bolts 246 Troubleshooting 67, 71
Timeout 141 12 V vehicle battery warning lamp 230
Time setting 165 airbag deployment 68
TIN 240 airbags system 44
Tiptronic 112 alternator warning lamp 230
Toolkit Auto Lock 67
check vehicle toolkit 194 braking support systems 129
TOTALFLEX engines 277 check engine oil level 221
cruise control system (GRA) 119
Towing 184, 212
driving mode selection 118
a trailer 187
dual clutch gearbox 114
connecting 185
emergency breakaway cable 185 Trouble shooting
engaging 185 engine management 107
exterior mirrors 185 Troubleshooting
headlight adjustment 187 engine oil level sensor 221
loading 186 engine oil pressure 221
rear lights 185, 186 faulty bulb 204
retrofitting a towing bracket 188 front passenger front airbag disabled 44
support load 186 front passenger front airbag enabled 44
technical requirements 185 ignition lock 107
things to note 212 immobiliser 107
towing a trailer 187 indicator lamp of the driver door 67
trailer load 186 Keyless Access 63, 67
Towing a trailer Trouble shooting
check towing 184 manual gearbox 110
Towing bracket Park Distance Control 124
retrofitting 188 Troubleshooting
Tow starting 212 re-establishing the one touch closing and
things to note 212 opening operation of the windows 72
Start-Stop system 109
Tow starting and towing
start button 107
towing 212
steering 116
Track list 154
turn signals 67
Traction 241
Turn off
Traction control system (TCS) 129 radio 141
Traction control (TCS) 127 Turn on 141
Trailer load Turn signal and main beam lever 79
loading the trailer 186
Turn signal light bulb 202
Transporting 178
Turn signals on/off 79
driving instructions 101
Two-way radio 262
driving with the rear lid open 102
Hooks to hang bags on 181 Type plate 270
loading the trailer 186 Tyre control indicator
25A.5L1.POL.20

luggage net 181 change the tyres 235

roof carrier 182, 183 Tyre damage 238
stowing items of luggage 178 Tyre load capacity 242

Index 295
Tyre monitoring system 231 connecting 228
indicator lamp 232 discharged 59
malfunction 232 discharging 229
Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator 231 disconnecting 228
Tyre pressure 236 installation location 226
checking 237 meaning of warnings on the vehicle battery 226
Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator 231 preparation actions 227
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System replacing 228
change the tyres 235 starting the engine with jump leads 211
symbol definition 226
Tyres
check wheels and tyres 231 Vehicle battery (12 V)
see wheels and tyres 233 grounding point for jump starting 210
Tyres with directional tread pattern 242 Vehicle conservation 252
aluminium parts 255
Tyre wear 238
automatic washing system 253
Tyre wear indicators 238
chrome parts 255
cleaning the seat belts 257
U cleaning the wheels 255
UNIT 147 dash panel 257
unit operation 147 engine compartment 255
Unit code exterior 252
see Anti-theft coding 140 external mirrors 255
fabric covers 257
Unlock
high pressure washing machine 253
with Keyless Access 62
hollow cavities 255
Uphill assist system 115 interior 257
USB manual wash 253
connecting an external data carrier 155 natural leather 257
iPad controls 155 NT - non microfiber fabric 257
iPhone controls 155 paddings 257
iPod controls 155 paintwork of the vehicle 253
supported USB data storage units 151 plastic components 257
USB connection 155 rubber seals 255
disconnect the connection 155 seat cover handling 257
unreadable 155 thawing the door lock cylinder 255
USB port 131 vehicle underbody protection 255
USB Port 133 washing the vehicle 253
User profile windows 255
settings 165 windscreen wipers service position 196
VW Play 177 wooden ornamental elements 257
Vehicle data sticker 270
V Vehicle delivery 251
Vehicle identification data 270
Valet mode
Vehicle identification number 270
VW Play 176
Vehicle jack 244
Valve caps 237
Vehicle key 60
Variable luggage compartment floor 180
replacement key 60
Vehicle
replacing the battery 61
locking or unlocking from inside 65
see vehicle key 60
protection in case of faults 58
troubleshooting 62
stopping on downhill inclines 120
unauthorized 107
stopping on uphill inclines 120
Vehicle maintenance
unlocking or locking with Keyless Access 62
airbag module (dash panel) 257
Vehicle battery 226
cleaning the stowage compartment 257
automatic consumer deactivation 229
vinyl 257
battery electrolyte 228
charging 228
check electrolyte level 227

296 Index
 Vehicle modifications 260 Washing 252
plates 266 manual 253
stickers 266 with high pressure washing machine 253
Vehicle sale 4 Washing the vehicle 253
Vehicle sales folding mirrors 91
in other countries / continents 103 What happens to passengers who have not fas-
Vehicle settings tened their seat belts 37
radio 29 Wheel
Vehicle toolkit 194 shift paddle (Tiptronic) 112
Vehicle tool kit Wheel bolts 244, 246
contents 195 cap 244
Vehicle toolkit tightening torque 246
stowage 194 Wheel hub caps
toolkit access 194 wheel cover 243
Vehicle underbody protection 255 Wheels 236
Vehicle wallet compartment 132 bolted-on trims 236
Ventilation 93 identification 236
Ventilation and heating system Wheels and tyres 231, 233
controls 93 avoiding damages 234
temperature setting 94 changing a wheel 244
check wheels and tyres 234
Voice command
foreign bodies in the tyre 238
Android Auto™ 147
identification 240
Apple CarPlay™ 146
markings 240
Volkswagen Dealership Warranty 265
new tyres 235
Volkswagen® Genuine Parts 266 old tyres 234
Volume replacing tyres 235
AUX-IN 166 run-in 235
Bluetooth audio 166 serial number 240
define external audio sources 166 spare wheel 239
maximum volume when turning the device speed index 241, 242
on 166 storing the removed wheel 239
traffic report 166 storing tyres 234
Volume control 141 technical data 240
VW Play 167 Temporary spare wheel of different size from
welcome 167 the regular wheels 245
tread depth 237
W tyre damage
tyre identification number (TIN)
238
240
Warm starting 226 tyre load capacity 242
Warm starting system tyre pressure 236
information on the warm starting system 226 tyres with directional tread pattern 242
Warning lamp tyre types 240
bonnet 216 tyre wear 238
brake system 129 tyre wear indicators 238
braking support systems 129 unbalanced wheels 238
seat belt 35 valve caps 237
shifting gear 114 wheel alignment fault 238
Warning lamps wheel balancing 238
overview 13 wheel rotation 234
Warning light wheels 236
engine coolant 19 winter tyres 242
Warning lights 58 Wi-Fi
connect 171
25A.5L1.POL.20

Warning triangle 59
Washer fluid forget network 171
check 217 Window activation 71
replenish 217

Index 297
Windows
defrosting 94
see Window activation 71
Window washers 86
Window wiper blades 196
cleaning 196
replacing 196
Window wipers 86
automatic headlight washing system 87
functions 87
heatable windscreen washer nozzles 87
rain sensor 87
Window wipers / rear window
windscreen / rear window wiper lever 86
Windscreen / rearwindow washers
windscreen / rear window washers lever 86
Windscreen wiper blades
cleaning 196
replacing 196
Windscreen wipers
lifting the wiper arms 196
service position 196
swing the wiper arms outward 196
Windscreen wipers and washers
trouble shooting 88
Winter driving
fuel consumption 100
Winter tyres 242
speed limit 243
Wireless charging function 131
Wrench icon 26

X
XDS
see Brake support systems 127

298 Index
Vehicle data sticker

Fig. 1

1 Vehicle identification number Delivery date:

2 Model, engine power, transmission
3 Engine code letters, transmission code letters, Volkswagen Brazil works continuously to develop No part of this manual may be entirely or partially
paint code, internal equipment and improve all its vehicles. Please understand that reprinted, reproduced or translated without the
we must therefore reserve the right to alter any part written permission of Volkswagen do Brasil.
4 Optional equipment, PR numbers of the vehicle and its equipment or technical specifi-
Volkswagen Dealership stamp All rights under the copyright laws are expressly re-
cations at any time. The data provided concerning
served by Volkswagen do Brasil. Subject to alteration
scope of delivery, appearance, performance, dimen-
and amendment.
sions, weights, fuel consumption, standards and ve-
hicle functions are all correct at the time of going to Printed in Brazil.
print. Some of the equipment described might not © 2023 Volkswagen do Brasil
yet be available in a particular vehicle (information
can be provided by your local Volkswagen Dealer- Manual printed in paper bleached without the
ship), and some equipment may not be available in use of chlorine.
certain countries. No legal commitment may be in-
ferred from the information, illustrations or descrip-
tions in this manual.
Vehicle data sticker

Fig. 1

1 Vehicle identification number Delivery date:

2 Model, engine power, transmission
3 Engine code letters, transmission code letters, Volkswagen Brazil works continuously to develop No part of this manual may be entirely or partially
paint code, internal equipment and improve all its vehicles. Please understand that reprinted, reproduced or translated without the
we must therefore reserve the right to alter any part written permission of Volkswagen do Brasil.
4 Optional equipment, PR numbers of the vehicle and its equipment or technical specifi-
Volkswagen Dealership stamp All rights under the copyright laws are expressly re-
cations at any time. The data provided concerning
served by Volkswagen do Brasil. Subject to alteration
scope of delivery, appearance, performance, dimen-
and amendment.
sions, weights, fuel consumption, standards and ve-
hicle functions are all correct at the time of going to Printed in Brazil.
print. Some of the equipment described might not © 2023 Volkswagen do Brasil
yet be available in a particular vehicle (information
can be provided by your local Volkswagen Dealer- Manual printed in paper bleached without the
ship), and some equipment may not be available in use of chlorine.
certain countries. No legal commitment may be in-
ferred from the information, illustrations or descrip-
tions in this manual.